Home

Ultramark 4 Ultrasound System

1. EM Chassis o 7 _ Fan Module Figure 3 2 Power Supply Adjustment 01 503 02 01 0 4 03 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Table 3 1 DC Output Volts DC 5 25 Volts Adj Tolerance 1 0 05V Power Supply Output Specifications DC Current amps DC 46 8 Amps Adjustments Ripple Peak Peak 100 MV P P 15 Volts Motor Controller 2 0 3V 1 6 Amps 100 MV P P 15 Volts Motor Controller 2 0 3V 1 6 Amps 100 MV P P 24 Volts 2 0 48V 3 2 Amps 50 MV 6 Volts Adj 1 0 06V 1 1 Amps 50 MV P P 415 Volts Analog Adj 1 2 Amps 50 MV P P 15 Volts Analog Adj 1 0 15V 3 2 50 80 Volts S1 70 Volts S2 3 2 1V 2 8 Amps 50 MV P P 80 Volts S1 70 Volts S2 1 0 06V 3 2 1V 0 14 Amps 100 MV P P 170 Volts 3 5 1V 0 15 Amps 100 MV P P 10 Volts 10 1 0V 2 0 Amps 500 MV P P 1 Use a 1 1 probe to check Peak Peak Ripple or inaccurate too high results occur 3 4 Motor Controller Figure 3 3 7500 0348 XX 1 Set system power to OFF 2 Connect DVM micro
2. o wr JP6 JP7 Jii JP8 JP9 ot JPII JP2 o swi YELO sw oo JH o d U26 U20 swe swe TM MODE COMBO PCB 12 TM MODE COMBO PCB A12 7500 0411 08 and below 7500 0411 09 and up UM4 05 64 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 A13 TM Mode Auxiliary PCB HFC PCBs 7500 0374 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 0374 01 02 UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only 7500 0374 XX es 1 Requires TM Mode PCB 2 PROMs required 3 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions following these tables PROMs INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL PROM COMPATIBILITY Dash Part No No 0374 01 8000 0139 8000 0270 1 8000 0270 is a TM Combo software kit and must be used if substituting a TM Mode TM Aux pair for the TM Combo One PROM is then installed on the TM Aux PCB and the other on the TM Mode PCB 2 U14 is located on TM Mode PCB 7500 0322 XX NOTE 4201 0225 02 is a TM Mode PCB PROM Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 65 5 Configuration k len U26 I6 fol SWI ar 01 ESO5 A23
3. 5 Bl 2019 p U36 0100 2018 U35 JR26 m 5117 5034 5 JR27 2016 U33 E 1 Two jumpers may be installed to replace switch 973 51 They may or may not be labelled on the O gt JR7 092 TIE blank 02 03 04 09 60 61 63 65 66 U50 E n JR20 us 05 06 07 08 10 62 64 048 IRI JR24 J JR4 JR5 JR25 MEE oc JR2 JR220 ie JRIB LI os zm JRI40 l JPI J JRI3 JRIO n JRI6 N JRI2 01 505 26 02 SYSTEM CONTROLLER A15 7500 0312 XX UM4 05 70 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 PROMs System Controller INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL 1 PROM COMPATIBILITY Part Dash Ref P N Dash No No 12X 16X 17X 23X 25X Des 4201 No PV OB 0312 65 6220 0049 U16 17 0268 9 U18 0270 U19 0271 033 34 0272 3 U35 0274 U36 0275 8000 0125 U16 0301 12 06 soft U19 0304 ware U33 0305 U36 0308 8000 0125 U16 0301 12 07 amp up U19 0304 software U33 0305 U36 0308 U16 0301 U19 0304 U33 0305 U36 0308 U16 0301 U19 0304 U33 0305 U36 0308 U16 0309 U19 0312 U33 0313 U36 0316 8000 0356 U16 0528 U19 0531 U33 0532 U36 0535 8000 0125 U16 0301 U19 0304 U33 0305 U36 0308 U16 0301 U19 0304 U33 0305 U36 0308 8000
4. U4e U33 048 58 Reference Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Figure l JUMPER BLOCK S LO OdR1ee FO OH 7500 0348 09 06 05 04 PCB 01 509 01 01 0 4 09 11 9 9 Reference Le I O ETAIL A 01 509 02 01 Figure IA 7500 0348 10 08 0 4 09 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 7500 0362 XX BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following page describes how to down convert this PCB from 04 03 02 or 01 to a Non Sync version The 08 is an oscilator fix to the 07 The 07 is an oscillator fix to the 06 The 06 is an oscillator fix to the 05 The 05 is a relayout of the 04 with changes to support the 76mm CVLA The 04 is the same as the 03 below except that superior Annular Array FETS have been incorporated for a reliability improvement The 03 supports HFLA and is compatible only with 16X or subsequent SW be
5. DETAIL A Table 8 2 Figure 8 3 Ultramark 4AFF 4A OB and 1 of 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 32 m v Vf TM LL lt 8 3 Coble Port of Tilt and Swivel 3 ples Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 3 MONIT R 01 508 06 02 Figure 8 3 Ultramark 4AFF 4A OB and 2 of 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 33 Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 4 avy A SY 7 7 N Scy V N Table 8 4 REAR VIEW Table 8 4 Figure 8 4 UM 4 Electronics Module 1 of 3 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 34 Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 4 S2 ONLY SI ONLY 51 57 49
6. T NOTE There no PROMs required for the Scan Converter Output Address Generator PCB k fol fol JPI il 01 ESO5 A19 01 SCAN CONVERTER OAG A11 7500 0314 XX Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No 3 Function Normal Position 7500 0314 Normal operation Shorted Test Open Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 59 5 Configuration A12 TM Mode HFC PCBs 7500 0322 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE CONPATIBILITY 8x to 0322 02 07 08 UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV JP2 aa JP3 lel only 7500 0322 XX 0322 02 04 SWI S 06 JP5 JP8 07 08 JP6 JP7 1 Requires TM mode Auxiliary PCB 2 Functional equivalents 3 05 was rolled to 07 4 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instruc tions I6 fol PROMs NOTE Refer to TM Aux PCB for TM Mode PCB PROMs for 25X and above sys 5 tems when these PCBs are substituted for p the TM Combo PCB 01 505 20 01 TM MODE PCB A12 7500 0322 XX UM4 05 60 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No Function Normal Position 7500 0322 Not for Field use Open Not used Open Not used Shorted
7. 01 504 02 01 Figure 4 9 Display Controller Test Switch Diagram SECTOR LINEAR A B Figure 4 10 Display Controller Test One 0 4 04 6 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 4 6 Data Comm Fault Isolation Test Refer to Peripheral Field Service Adjust ment Procedure Manual 4 7 Error Messages The UM 4 system at software levels 11 X and above displays error messages on the system monitor in response to error condi Fault Isolation 4 tions detected within the system and in its peripheral devices Error messages initi ated in the peripherals are addressed in the Fault Isolation tables Error messages initiated in the UM 4 are shown in Table 4 2 Error messages will appear at the bottom of the monitor screen in the for mat described in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 System Malfunction Messages 11 X and higher The System Malfunction Message will appear at the bottom of the monitor in the following format XXnnnn SYSTEM MALFUNCTION NOTIFY CUSTOMER SERVICE XX will indicate which board failure was detected Values for XX are System Controller Beamformer Motor Controller Pulse Processor Doppler Processor TM AUX VCR nnnn is the error code Currently the following error codes are assigned 2 3 NAK messages received from front end ACK or NAK received and no message transmitted Front end timeout RFP line remains active Minimum board set not available Received three il
8. Should be purged if encountered If encountered at this software replace with software listed in PROM matrix Minimum required for DO NOT use with MFI scanheads The Control Mod firmware code is blank for Control Modules which do not include TGC slidepots B UBUWNH 6 enuey 4 v Table 5 1 UM 4 Firmware Compatibility Matrix lt CTRL gt L Codes by System Software Level Cont d Module E 12 X 16 X 17 X SYSTEM CNTRLR 41 12 061 41 16 10 41 17 15 06 UM 4A OB only 41 12 07 UM 4 HFC and 81 11 02 81 12 06 81 16 10 81 17 15 81 23 14 81 25 08 8 26 07 8n 27 06 8n 28 03 8 29 11 8n 30 05 8n 31 06 8n 32 04 UM 4 FPC 81 12 07 81 16 11 81 17 15 01 81 23 19 82 25 09 8n 27 08 8 28 04 8 30 083 81 17 15 06 82 23 20 83 25 09 8 30 10 82 17 15 08 83 23 20 83 17 15 08 and 8n 27 06 8n 28 03 8n 29 11 8n 30 05 8n 31 06 8n 32 04 UM 4PLUS 8n 27 08 8n 28 04 8 30 083 8 27 10 8 30 10 CAD Mod SW NV0046 0046 NVOO46 DOM NV110 NV110 NV110 NV110 CAD Mod SW NV111 NV111 NV111 NV111 INTL 1 Should be purged if encountered 2 8n Where n 1 English 2 3 French 3 Minimum required for MFI 6c S0 viINn 9 5 4 Configuration Instrument 5 41 Hidden
9. 0 4 09 12 FIGURE 7500 0362 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 0 4 09 15 FIGURE 7500 0370 PCB UM4 09 22 FIGURE 3500 1261 XX 1262 XX 0 4 09 25 FIGURE 7500 0374 PCB UM4 09 29 FIGURE V 7500 0313 XX PCB UM4 09 32 FIGURE VI 7500 0346 0 4 09 35 FIGURE VII 7500 0273 0 4 09 38 FIGURE VIII 7500 0411 0 4 09 41 0 4 09 6 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 PCB UP DOWN REV INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CSR MASTER SPARES KIT DOCUMENT NUMBER 6420 0009 01 1 0 PURPOSE To provide a document to accompany the UM 4 master kit to instruct the CSR on how to convert selected PCBs to different functionalities to conform to any UM 4 system In this the quantity of PCBs required in the kit can be minimized 2 0 FORM A cover page is provided for each set of instructions that apply to a particular PCB This cover page consists of a brief description of the meaning of the dash levels addressed It also will have a chart of the variables that make up the different dash levels D
10. EYBOARD SPEAKER BATTERY KEYLOCK a E P8 7 P9 PS P3 J32 oo J19 J18 eo J20 oo J16 oo J17 ee J26 99 J25 K J30 J28 Je7 ox LJ o e o 2 J13 J12 J11 O o J4 3 Pin 1 2 3 Open 3 Pin 1 2 Shorted 3 Pin 2 3 Shorted JUMPER KEY 2 Pin Open 2 Pin Shorted 06 505 09 01 Figure 5 9 CAT902 Single Board CPU CAD Module UM4 05 82 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 5 6 UM 4 Scanhead Compatibility Matrix 5 6 1 Key SCANHEAD TYPE The type or series of scanhead is listed in bold print at the begin ning of each category Not all scanhead categories may be supported by a specific system UM 4 categories include static transducers linear arrays access annular arrays specific applications TRT IVT ICT some 72X and veterinary SCANHEAD NAME The common name for the scanhead PART NO The base part number of the scanhead Only those part numbers stocked and shipped by ATL Customer Service are included DASH NO The current revis
11. 2275 0170 3500 1259 04 PRINTER INTERFACE SN PRINTER CAD MODULE ALT 3500 0592 2275 0222 02 SMALL PRINTER TP 10 LARGE PRINTER 182 or 320 PAR PRINTER 182 or 320 HAND CONTROLLER Figure 1C 3 UM 4 Human Factors Cart HFC Cabling Diagram Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual VIDEO GRAPHICS PRINTER YP 1810 UP 850 UP860 UP870 VIDEO COPY PROCESSOR P60U 01 ESO1 B13 04 UM4 01C 3 1C Cabling FRONT REAR 7248 OR 2 gt Lid 3500 1530 02 CONTROL ACCESS T B SCANHEADS Y U 3500 1528 01 MONITOR 1 PULSE AND RF ELECTRONICS 520 EHE OUT BNC PRINTER STATIC 2 gt u gt 3 lt DOPPLER gt 2275 0170 2 gt 1 gt FOOTSWITCH M G c RUE 3500 1259 04 VCR E 3500 1532 01 NV 8420 AG 2400 BR1600U DR VCR 46 6400 NOTES 1 gt CABLE IS PART OF ASSEMBLY INDICATED BY FLAG 2 gt CABLE IS HARDWIRED AT THIS END 3 gt EXTERNAL INSTALLATION CABLE SUPPLIED WITH PRINTER
12. FSELT 1 LEVEL TRANSLATION FSELA 1 7 AAI DUPLEX CW SCANHEAD CW PULSER 6 CW TRAns Oe l CWPO DUPLEX CW 2D PDUP 7mmTctu DUPLEX CWIN CW NORMAL LL FSELA 1 2 25 MHz BAND PASS FILTER VER f JPSELT 2 l LEVEL TRANSLATION FSELA 2 gt 8 FSELA 2 5 MHz FSELT 3 N LEVEL TRANSLATION FSELA 3 gt FSELA 3 10 MHz TGC 415 CWOUT EO TU DOPPLER ACQ PCB vzo umTnmctu 15V RELAYS 8V LC FILTER CMOS SOURCE BUS 8V LC gt F ICTER FILTER PCB CMOS SOURCE BUS SYSTEM RECEIVER ASSY W DUPLEX CW 3500 1016 XX 1 DASHED LINE INDICATES CHANGES SYSTEM RECEIVER TO INCORPORATE RF RELAYS MINIATURE RF RECEIVER BOX AND LABE FEEDTHROUGHS SHOWN IN DUPLEX CW M TU DATA PATH 3500 0581 XX DUPLEX ODE CONNECTERS MOUNTED ON SYSTEM THESE HAVE NO REFERENCE NUMBERS LED ONLY WITH THE SIGNAL MNEMONIC MOUNTED ON SYSTEM RECEIVER BOX ejeqyueis S VL System Data Path 1 ACC SELECT PCB SYSTEM X DUA
13. NOTES CRT Connector to EI2 E7 E8 E9 EIO EIl Not Shown 2 Fuse Fl Bus Max 1 2 Slo ATL 2700 0124 ACM MONI TOR VERT OSC 2 a N CA TOP LIN HORIZ OSC H PHASE 2 ALM MONI TOR 01 ES03 A05 02 Figure 3 6 Aspect ACM and ALM Monitor Adjustment Locations Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 03 9 3 Adjustments 3 6 5 Aspect Ratio Figure 3 7 1 Place the linearity graticle or the 90 degree corner of a piece of paper on the sector display Adjust R7 HEIGHT for a 90 degree sector The aspect ratio is now set for 1 1 Repeat width height centering and aspect ratio until no changes are nec essary Verify that all graphics are visible on screen Date in upper left and PRESET in lower right Aspect Ratio Caliper Calibration The caliper method uses the system cali pers and either a plastic ruler or marks ona piece of paper to assure that horizontal and vertical lines of the same displayed length are physically the same length 1 Set the calipers for 100 mm hori zontally centered on the display Figure 3 7 2 Set the X calipers for 100 mm verti cally centered on the Figure 3 7 display UM4 03 10 Physically measure the caliper dis
14. Control Module Optional Equipment Module OEM Video Printer gt Electronics Module EM 1 502 01 02 Figure 2B 1 UM 4 Series Configurations Sheet 1 of 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02B 3 2B Installation CL Optional Control Module Equipment Module OEM gt Electronics Module EM Fan Module 01 502 02 02 Figure 2B 1 UM 4 Series Configurations Sheet 2 of 2 UM4 02B 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2B 4 Installation Procedure The UM 4 Human Factors Cart HFC and the UM 4A Small Cart are shipped in either a wooden or corrugated container The wood container is used for domestic ground shipments and the corrugated con tainer is used for international and domes tic
15. 1 EFT BFT PULSE AND RF STATIC 2 gt 1 gt DOPPLER SPEAKER SPEAKER 1 gt 2275 0095 AMP BOX ASSY SPEAKE 2275 0192 01 FOOTSWITCH 2275 0194 01 1 gt CABLE IS PART OF ASSEMBLY INDICATED BY FLAG 2 CABLE IS HARDWIRED AT THIS END 3500 1532 01 VCR NV 6400 3 gt EXTERNAL INSTALLATION G 7400 CABLE SUPPLIED WITH PRINTER 01 501 16 02 Figure 1 6 UM 4PV Cabling Diagram 0 4 01 6 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Cabling 1 FRONT REAR 3500 1530 02 CONTROL 1 a B een gt 2275 0042 MDDULE 3500 1528 01 MONITOR LINEAR 2 01 wal VIDED Cie eun 3 DUT BNC
16. 2 MONITOR 2251 0003 2275 0057 2275 0057 CONTROL MODULE 2275 0106 2275 0122 2275 0090 ELECTRONICS MODULE EM 2275 0092 3500 4036 01 AUDIO VIDEO AN MODULE BULKHEAD 2275 0126 2275 0109 LS 8 LINESCAN RECORDER cm 2275 0121 VGR 4000 PAGE PRINTER 3500 0623 01 MATRIX 1010 3500 0613 LENZAR 2100 MULTI IMAGE CAMERA 2275 0125 VIDEO OUTPUT 2275 0228 01 DOPPLER SPEAKERS AND AMPS VCR AG 2400 2275 0088 3500 0491 2275 0173 2250 0223 GENERIC VCR PANEL 3500 0515 MONO DOM VCR NV 8420 BULKHEAD VIDEO COPY INTERFACE 3500 0944 01 3500 0610 STEREO DOM VCR VR 40A 3500 0700 02 3500 0723 02 AUX VIDEO MONO INTL VCR NV 180 EG 3500 0465 01 2275 0103 PHOTO MODULE 3500 0700 02 3500 4037 01 STEREO VCR DOM AG6400 AG 7400 STEREO VCR INT AG 6200 INT AG 6300 DOM 3 gt 3500 0915 01 DATA COMM MODULE 2275 0176 _ 2275 0129
17. Front Shield Cable tray or rail crossb Figure 2B 4 HFC Disassembly 0 4 02 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2B Installation Rear EM Bezel gt Oo o a o m TAIL A Rear EM Bezel See Detail A Front Shield Front EM Bezel Rail 2 plcs 01 ESO2 A06 02 Figure 2 5 UM 4A Small Cart Disassembly UM4 02B 11 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2B Installation 2B 4 6 Electrical Inspection NOTE Do not handle PCBs without proper static protection or damage can result 1 Check all PCBs in card cage and ensure that they are firmly seated in correct slots Slot designations are stamped on the top card ejectors as shown in Figure 2B 6 NOTE actual complement and PCB and PROM dash levels are depen dent upon feature options and software levels Refer to COA or Shipping Manifest PCB PROM Matrices in Section 5 and Figure 2B 6 for part numbers dash lev els and locations Document any PCB software feature discrepancies or back orders on the Installation FSR 2 Verify that PCBs required for the sys tem configuration are installed UM4 02B 12 3 Verify that miniature RF connectors are securely connected to the front edge of the following PCBs if installed Doppler Pulser A1 Beamformer
18. KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VCR CONTROL HARDCOPY DEVICES FOOTSWITCHES p gt CONTROL PANEL BUFFER SERIAL BUS 20 COUNT STATUS DRIVERS K circuits lt 3 CPU XDRID UM4 01A 4 DISPLAY GROUP 4 gt T M MODE SCAN CONVERTER A12 MARKERS amp ANNO TATION MEMORY GAMMA A CORRECTION EAD amp FILTER MEMORY PRO CESSING LINESCAN RECORDER DATA PATH SCROLL CONTROL DECI MATION AND MUX y REAR PANEL ALPHANUMERIC KEYBOARD AUX MONITOR PHOTO MODULE LINESCAN REC PAGE PRINTER OR MATRIX CAMERA MODULE VCR DECODER VCR CONTROL 5 SPLITTER VIDEO TIMING CIRCUITS ALPHA NUMERIC GENERATOR OVERWRITE MUX GRAPHICS GEN FRAME BUFFER MEMORY DISPLAY MEMORY GRAY BAR GEN ERR DISPLAY CONTROLLER A14 TO 2D SCAN CONVERTER SEE IMAGING DATA PATH BLOCK DIAGRAM SEE AUDIO DATA PATH BLOCK DIAGRAM MAY BE ON TM MODE ON TM AUXILIARY PCB OR TM MODE COMBO PCB ALTHOUGH NOT PART OF THE DOPPLER DATA PATH THE 2D SCAN CONVERTER IS REQUIRED FOR DOPPLER OPERATION REFER TO FIGURE 1A 5 FOR 3500 1016 XX RECEIVER AND DUPLEX CW PATH 01 ESO1 B04 01 Figure 1A 3 Doppler Data Path Block Diagram Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual AUDIO GROUP A V MODULE FROM SYSTEM VOLUME CONTROL A V MODULE AUDIO L R AUDIO SOURCE 2 2 VCR L R DO
19. XDRPOS XDRPOS XDRPOS XDRPOS SFUNCI TGC SET TGC SET TGC SET TGC SET TGC SET SFUNC J ARROW HF HF HF HF SFUNCK BIOPSY HF HF HF HF BIOP BIOP BIOP BIOP SFUNCL NN NN NN NN SFUNC Reject Low level signal HF HF HF HF reject REJ REJ REJ REJ SFUNC NEW PATIENT NN NN NN NN SFUNC HELP 2 NF NF NF NF SFUNC R SMOOTH Set smooth from HF HF HF HF 1104 SMOOTH SMOOTH SMOOTH SMOOTH SFUNCS ECG Trigger Tone ON OFF SFUNC T LINE NN NN NN NN SFUNC U TGC DEL TGC Delete HF HF HF HF TGC DEL TGC DEL TGC DEL TGC DEL SFUNC V DEL UP DEL 2D HF HF HF HF DELUP DELUP DELUP DELUP SFUNC W DN Up Down HF HF HF HF UP DN UP DN UP DN UP DN SFUNC Y FIELD Sector Angle First Letter H Help Message Second Letter F Feature is functional No Help Message Not functional for that version software Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05A 7 5A Configuration S1 Systems Table 5A 2 UM 4 S1 Control Functions SOFTWARE LEVEL DESCRIPTION Disk Storage 5 6 NN Fast Smoothing HF Swap HF Alternate Frame Rate NN Default Menu HF NN ECG Tone ON OFF NN Cursor Left ALPHA NF Cursor Right ALPHA
20. made for mounting external VCRs to Front Panel the cart POWER ON ON 12 Verify the switch settings on the VCR LIGHT ON Refer to Table 28 1 through CAMERA REMOTE OFF Table 2B 5 S VHS ON Table 2B 1 BR1600 Control Settings TRACKING CENTER CENTER SLOW TRACKING CENTER CENTER AUDIO LIMITER ON ON NORMAL HD LEVEL 5 5 AUDIO SELECTOR NORMAL NORMAL AUDIO DUB OFF OFF MEMORY OFF OFF Side Panel Control Setting Front Panel POWER SP EP REC LENGTH MEMORY Rear Panel TRACKING Top Panel HEADPHONE CENTER RF LEVEL 1 Turn on only after system power AUDIO IN SELECT HD OFF Bottom Panel Table 2B 2 AG 5700 Control Set CAMERA EXT OFF tings AUDIO IN FRAME Control Setting AUDIO DUB CH2 Front Panel AUDIO OUT SELECT LAND R E CENTER HI FI LEVEL L R Both 3 00 Rear Panel 2H 6H NTSC 2H i niy DOLBY NR OFF YC FILTER OFF FRAMING OFF DETAIL OFF PICTURE QUALITY CENTER Rear Panel AUTO REPEAT SENSOR RECORD MODE LOCK S VHS VIDEO Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02B 17 2B Installation Table 2B 4 180 Control Settings Control Setting Front Panel TAPE SELECT CAMERA SELECT Side Panel LIGHT Bottom Panel COLOR Table 2B 5 AG 2400 Control Set tings Control Setting Front Panel CAMERA REMOTE OFF PO
21. 4 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as 01 COMMENTS This change renders the PCB compatible with software at a lower Rev than 12X UM4 09 28 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 01 509 06 01 Figure IV 7500 0374 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 29 9 Reference 7500 0313 XX PULSE PROCESSOR 51 CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following page describes how to Down Rev this PCB from 03 to 02 The 03 supports 17X software The 02 supports 4X 5X 6X software The following chart is a synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure V for PCB layout 7500 0313 XX 03 02 12 4X 5X 6X U78 4201 0214 02 4201 0214 01 3 UM4 09 30 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0313 XX 1 PULSE PROCESSOR 5 PCB From 03 To 02 System UM 4 Date 8 4 87 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 4201 0092 LABEL BLANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Remove IC from U78 socket See Figure V 2 Install 4201 0214 01 into U78 socket 3 Make sure all switches on SW1 are ON 4 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the b
22. BILITY System features that may or may not be compatible with a specific revision PROM Footnotes at the bot tom of the table explain the different codes that can be found here If no code is entered that feature does not influence selection of that PCB 0 4 05 5 5 Configuration PROMs INDIVIDUAL PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL PROM Dash No Part Dash 11 12 16 17 23 25 26 29 30 Ref P N Dash 7500 No No 8X X X X X X X 28X X X Des 4201 No Notes 0347 05 9 8000 0134 02 Y U39 0238 02 Y Y n Y 1 18 Figure 5 3 PROM Replacement Matrix Jumper Matrix Figure 5 4 1 PCB PART NO The base part number ofthe PCB Only part numbers stocked and shipped by ATL Customer Service are included PCB DASH The revision number ofthe PCB Only part numbers stocked and shipped by ATL Customer Service are included JUMPER REF DES The reference designator for the jumper or dipswitch The reference designator corre sponds to the location of the jumper or dipswitch on the PCB JUMPER PINS JUMPER FUNCTION JUMPER NORMAL POSITION Nor mal position may be different from that required for the function For example TM Combo PCB is manufactured for synced systems Although JP11 is pro 0 4 05 6 vided to support non sync systems its normal position is open
23. CONTROL GROUP p gt HARDCOPY DEVICES MICRO PROCESSOR OUTPUT JS ADDRESS GENERATOR A11 OUTPUT ADDRESSING amp CONTROL Y CONVERTER 2D SCAN BUFFER MEMORY A10 MEMORY PAGE0 OUTPUT MEMORY MUX L 1 INTER gt POLATOR amp ANNO MARKERS TATION GAMMA CORRECTION 2 amp FILTER ECG PRO CESSING TP oc 01 ESO1 B03 01 MEMORY LINESCAN RECORDER L INTERFACE 9 T M MODE SCAN CONVERTER A12 zi P DisPLAY A DECIMATION MEMORY VCR CONTROL 7 KEYBOARD DISPLAY GROUP AN MODULE VCR DECODER B VCR CONTROL FOOTSWITCHES CONTROL PANEL ALPHANUMERIC VIDEO SPLITTER REAR PANEL PCB VIDEO MICRO PROCESSOR TIMING CIRCUITS ALPHA NUMERIC GENERATOR GRAPHICS GEN FRAME BUFFER MEMORY DIS PLAY MUX OVERWRITE MUX AUX MONITOR PHOTO MODULE LINESCAN REC PAGE PRINTER OR MATRIX CAMERA VIDEO DRIVER MON ITOR REAR PANEL PCB MEMORY V POST VIDEO I PROC RELAY D u GRAY BAR p B GEN DISPLAY ERATOR _ CONTROLLER A14 1 gt SEE DOPPLER DATA PATH BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 gt FOR RESOLUTIO
24. Not for Field use Open Board ID Open Board ID Shorted Board ID Open Board ID Open ECG Closed Diagonal ECG pattern when open ECG Closed ECG data ON OFF M mode test Open Vertical gray scale when closed M mode test Open Horizontal gray scale when closed Board ID Shorted Board ID Open Board ID Open Board ID Open Not used on UM 4A OB Closed Not used on UM 4A OB Closed M mode test Open Vertical gray scale when closed M mode test Open Horizontal gray scale when closed 1 Both S1 1 and S1 2 must be closed and ECG turned ON on Control Panel S1 1 closed S1 2 open ECG trace w o data or noise S1 1 closed S1 2 closed ECG trace w data or noise S1 1 open S1 2 closed scrolling diagonal ECG test pattern Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 61 5 Configuration A12 TM Mode Combination PCB PCBs 7500 0411 REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 11 12 0411 07 08 09 11 12 0411 07 08 09 11 1 PROMS required 2 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions 3 Does not require TM Aux PCB 4 These TM Combo PCBs are externally clocked Conversion not required if 7500 0373 05 or higher motherboard is present PROMs INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL PROM COMPATIBILITY Part Dash P N No No 4201 0411 07 8000 0270
25. PAN ZOOM MAGNIFICATION IMAGE BOUNDARY LIMITS A12 A13 TM MODE 2D SCAN CONVERTER FORMATS M MODE AND DOPPLER ULTRASOUND DATA INTO SCROLLING RECTANGULAR COORDINATES WITH RASTER TV TIMING M MODE AND DOPPLER SCAN CONVERSION SHIFTS A LINE OF DATA IN AT ULTRASOUND SCAN RATE 1 10 KHZ SHIFTS OUT AT TV HORIZONTAL SWEEP RATE 15 750 KHZ EIA 16 625 HZ CCIR FORMATS ECG SIGNAL ONTO DISPLAY AREA A12 TM MODE OO PCB IS S1 ONLY NO DOPPLER STORES M MODE AND DOPPLER VIDEO FOR FREEZE FRAME PROCESSES AND FORMATS M MODE DOPPLER AND ECG DATA SENDS M MODE DOPPLER AND ECG VIDEO TO HARDCOPY STRIPCHART PERIPHERAL A13 TM AUXILIARY PCB REQUIRES 02 OR HIGHER TM MODE PCB GENERATES ANNOTATIONS AND MARKERS FOR SCROLLING M MODE AND DOPPLER DISPLAYS A12 TM COMBO EQUIVALENT OF COMBINED TM MODE AND TM AUX PCBS UM4 01A 2 DISPLAY GROUP VIDEO MONITOR A14 DISPLAY CONTROLLER PCB WGENERATES ALL TV TIMING SIGNALS GENERATES COMPOSITE VIDEO GENERATES ALPHANUMBERICS AND GRAPHICS WPROVIDES VIDEO MULTIPLEXING IN 2D M MODE DISPLAY ACQUIRES AND STORES VIDEO FRAMES FOR DUAL IMAGE AND IMAGE TO DISC FUNCTIONS WFRAME GRABBER MEMORY FOR VCR PLAYBACK M POST PROCESSING FOR IMAGE ENHANCEMENT WSENDS VIDEO TO MONITOR AND THROUGH A V MODULE TO AUX MONITOR AND PERIPHERALS SWITCHES VIDEO OUTPUT BETWEEN REAL TIME AND VCR PLAYBACK AUDIO VIDEO MODULE PERIPHERALS
26. SFUNC M Steered IVT NN NN NF NF SFUNC Doppler Wall Filter NN W FIL NF NF W FIL W FIL NF W FIL SFUNC O Reject Low level signal reject HF REJ NF NF REJ REJ NF REJ SFUNC Q HELP NF NF NN NN SFUNC R SMOOTH Set smooth from1 to 4 HF SMOOTH NF NF SMOOTH SMOOTH NF SMOOTH SFUNC S ECG Trigger Tone ON OFF HF TONE NF NF TONE TONE NF TONE SFUNC U DEL TGC Delete HF TGC DEL NF NN TGC DEL TGC DEL NN TGC DEL SFUNC V DEL UP DEL 2D HF DELUP NF NF DELUP DELUP NF DELUP SFUNC W UP DN Up Down HF UP DN NF NF UP DN UP DN NF UP DN SFUNC X Doppler Reject NN REJECT NF NF REJECT REJECT NF REJECT SFUNC Y FIELD Sector Angle HF NF NF NF SFUNC Z Doppler Invert HF NF NF NF SFUNC SFUNC lt SFUNC Activates calc software Refer to appropriate operation manual section Doppler angle left right Refer to appropriate operation manual section Doppler Sample volume Incr decr Refer to appropriate operation manual section First Letter Second Letter F Feature is functional Not functional for that software version Help Message No Help Message NOTE There are no SFUNC functions for B F P T Ultram
27. The revision number ofthe PCB Only part numbers stocked and shipped by ATL Customer Service are included PROM KIT PART NO The part num ber of a PROM kit set for a PCB INDIVIDUAL printed in this column indicates that no PROM kit is available and that the PROMs must be individu ally ordered See the INDIVIDUAL PROM column and order all individual PROMS using the PROM PART NUM BER and DASH NUMBER listed The PROMs that compose the PROM kit are also listed under INDIVIDUAL PROM PROM KIT DASH The revision number of the PROM kit LEVELS manufacturing software build identifi cation number The codes that appear in the rows adjacent to the different Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual NOTES or PROM KIT PART NUMBER indicate the relationship between a specific revision PROM kit and a specific soft ware build INDIVIDUAL PROM REF DES The reference designator for the individual PROM listed under INDIVIDUAL PROM PART NUMBER The refer ence designator corresponds to the location on the PCB in which the indi vidual PROM is installed INDIVIDUAL PROM PART NO The base part number of the individual PROM The base part number of the individual PROMs that comprise the PROM kit are also listed here INDIVIDUAL PROM REV NO The revision number of the PROM kit The revision numbers of the individual PROMs that comprise the PROM kit are also listed here FEATURE
28. 8 vO 45A ON ono 2 S 33 wo Table 8 4 DETAIL B DETAIL A 01 508 08 02 Figure 8 4 UM 4 Electronics Module 2 of 3 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 35 8 Replaceable Parts rA 01 508 09 02 Figure 8 4 UM 4 Electronics Module 3 of 3 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 36 Replaceable Parts 8 E The following index numbers are not used on this figure 15 50 and 51 Figure 8 5 HFC Optional Equipment Module Assembly 1 of 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 37 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 5 Figure 8 5 FHFC Optional Equipment Module Assembly 2 of 2 UM4 08 38 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 6 DETAIL Table 8 6 F
29. Check for defective EFT connector Replace EFT Panel Assem bly Parts Section 9 Wide horizontal bars in image Scan Converter PCBs A9 10 11 Verify 2D Sector opera tional Replace Scan Converter PCBs 9 10 or 11 Configuration Section 5 Beamformer Focus PCB A3 Replace Beamformer Focus PCB A3 Configuration Section 5 Checkerboard pattern dark bands broken images dropouts or vertical lines after booting Beamformer Controller PCB A4 PCB is 7500 0548 08 Replace with 75001 0548 09 return 08 for rework to 09 r uonejos yned enuey 4 v 6 0 MODEL UM 4 Symptom No sector or linear update image frozen and random Possible Cause Motor Controller PCB A8 Fault Isolation PROBLEM CATEGORY 2D SECTOR AND LINEAR Solution 1 Replace Motor Controller PCB A8 Reference Configuration Section 5 Vertical lines in both sector and linear linear modes Display Controller PCB A14 1 Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 No 2D echoes in either sector or linear M mode ok Display Controller PCB A14 1 Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 uonejos yned r 06 70 enuey p j v MODEL 0 4 Symptom Excessive noise in far field
30. Ref only Insulator Keyboard Controller PCB Ref only Cable Assy System Interconnect Ref only Cable Assy Keyboard Controller PCB Ref only Cable Softkey Control Control Mod Ref only Buzzer Assy Sonalert Ref only PCB Keyboard Controller Ref only Kit PROM Ref only Keyboard 56 Key w o Legends Ref only Keyboard 56 Key w Legends Ref only Not used Ref only Bezel Molded Ref only nsert Bezel 4400 0021 Knob Rubber 0 625 4400 0021 01 Knob Rubber Brn 0 675 4400 0022 Knob Rubber 0 825 4400 0022 01 Knob Rubber Brn 0 875 Ref only Pot Precision 5K 3500 0421 01 Joystick Ref only Plate Joystick Mounting 2100 0461 02 Trackball Assy Replaces 04 Req No 34 overlay 3000 0177 03 Trackball Assy Medasonics Ref only Plate Trackball Adapter Ref only PCB Hardkey Backlight Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Ref only PCB Hardkey Interconnect UM4 08 23 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 9 Control Module Assembly ATL Part No Ref only Description Cable Assy Hardkey Interconnect Ref only Cable Assy Hardkey Backlight PCB Ref only Top Assy Softkey Ref only Top Assy Softkey Ref only Bezel Molded Ref only Switch Array Memb
31. Compatibility for 17X S1 Systems lt CTRL gt L codes UM4 05A 5 5A Configuration S1 Systems 4 Configuration Instructions 5A 4 1 Hidden Default Configuration New defaults defined or changed by 17X Feature Set D User defaults for transducer type changed under the A1 defaults menu The following are defined as the default transducer TRT Linear Linear IVT TRT Sector EFT Annular Access N o O N The following is a list of the hidden defaults for Feature Set D Press CTRL E and then 11 to gain access to the hidden defaults Default Name Setting Note 1 Full Feature VCR Y N Smart AV 2 Small VCR HFC Y N 3 M Mode Present Y N 4 Doppler Present Y N 5 ECG Present Y N 6 Enable Y N Frame Grab 7 Data Comm Enabled Y N Disk Drive 8 2 Disk Drives Y N 9 TRT Biopsy Enabled Y N 10 HFLA Present Y N 7 5 MHz DFT UM4 05A 6 Press H1 for OB CALCS 1 enabled O disabled Press H2 for CARD CALCS 1 enabled O disabled To verify the hidden default configuration press 12 5A 4 2 UM 4 Special and Control Functions 4X through 6X Table 3 1 and Table 3 2 summarize the special function SFUNC and the control function CTRL keys for software releases 4X through 6X In Table 3 1 and Table 3 2 an H in the first column indicates that a help message exists an N indicates that a help mes sage does not exist
32. Image quality of the 2D update during M mode operation is marginal radial lines and extreme far field noise remains after zoom and depth have been used Dual mode images contain noise when SELECT is toggled too quickly Ifa sector image is inverted up down and left right the Doppler sample volume cursor on the 2D update disappears UM4 05 13 5 Configuration e ECG turned on M line activated exit M line and the M mode scale remains on the ECG display The M mode scale remains after ECG is turned off To remove the scale press CNTL P 11X The release of 11 02 software introduces a change in the audio data path The two audio channels are routed from the elec tronics module through the rear panel con nector PCB to the A V module and then under certain conditions to the VCR At the A V module the system can switch the audio routing based upon the following conditions 1 Ifthe system is configured for full fea ture VCR with a VCR mounted on the cart the audio is routed through the A V module to the VCR At the VCR the audio is looped back to the A V module through the audio output jack of the VCR This audio signal is then amplified at the A V module for the speakers and headphone audio 2 Ifthe system is configured for ageneric VCR without a VCR in the system then the audio is routed directly to the audio amplifier circuitry on the A V module and then to the speakers and head phones New
33. tance on the screen with the plastic ruler or mark the distance on a piece of paper Place the ruler or paper reference beside the X calipers a ACM Adjust R7 Height and R11 Top Linearity until these calipers are the same distance apart as the cali pers 0 05 b ALM 525 line video adjust R60 Height R39 Top Linearity and R35 Bottom Linearity until these calipers are the same distance apart as the calipers 0 05 ALM 625 line video adjust R51 Height R39 Top Linearity and R35 Bottom Linearity until these calipers are the same distance apart as the calipers 0 05 Repeat width height centering and aspect ratio until no changes are nec essary Verify that all graphics are visible on screen Date in upper left and PRESET in lower right Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual SMOOTH 2 ALPHA HOSPITAL NAME gain NAME ID 100 VCR STOP 0000 CAL 1 28 W CAL X N28 W all LPHA HOSPITAL NAME gain NAME ID 100 VCR STOP 0000 gt 01 03 002 01 Figure 3 7 Aspect Ratio Test 3 6 6 Focus Adjust Focus R51 R104 for optimum pre sentation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Adjustments 3 3 6 7 VCR Roll 1 Verify that the monitor does no
34. 1 0 1 5 0 5 Zones 1 3 1 0 Zones 1 4 0 30mm 1 0 Zones 4 5 2 0 Zone 5 30 45mm 0 25 1cm 1 0 Zones 1 3 0 30 9 2 cm 2 0 Zones 4 5 0 50 3 cm 0 35 76CLA 35CV76 0 5 lt 30mm 2 0 lt 30mm 1 0 30 110 3 0 30 60 4 0 60 75 5 0 75 110 mm 6 0 gt 110 mm TRT L5 5 Lin ear also see Sector table 1 0 1 Refer to Scanhead Matrix in Section 5 for label definitions 2 Corrected penetration using 0 7 dB MHz phantom Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02C 15 2C Performance Tests Table 2C 8 Linear Scanhead Image Quality Characteristics 7500 0548 XX Beamformer Controller Linear Scan head Minimum Depth Penetration cm Axial Resolu tion mm Lateral Resolu tion mm at Focal Point cm Focal Point cm Near Field Artifact cm 0 5 25 mm 1 0 25 100 mm 0 5 25 mm 1 0 9 25 100 mm 0 5 25 mm 1 0 9 25 100 mm 0 5 Q 25 mm 1 0 9 25 100 mm 76 mm CLA 35CV76 0 5 lt 25 mm lt 20 mm 1 0 25 100 mm 20 80 mm gt 80mm 40 mm CLA 35CV40 0 5A lt 25 mm lt 20 mm 1 0 gt 25mm 20 50 mm 50 80 mm gt 80mm 50CV40 0 5 25 mm gt 60mm 1 009 2
35. 16X RANGE DEPTH 100 percent 1 Special Function O 180 mm for 3 5 MHz 160 mm for 5 0 MHz FOCAL ZONES All 5 NOTE With 16X p21601 or higher Pulse Processor Software installed Dynamic Range should be set to 58 dB for 16X p21600 or lower set Dynamic Range to 47 dB See Far Field Noise on page UM4 04 41 for details 5 Examine the surface of the scanhead for any physical defects replace the scanhead if any are found 6 Lightly coat the surface with acoustic gel 7 Hold a thin screwdriver perpendicular to the surface of the scanhead and slowly slide it down the scanhead using mimimal pressure on the screw driver Figure 4 13 The tower like image should have five separate sections widths Only one tower should be displayed Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual There should not be any drop outs or duplicate or intermittently dupli cated towers as the tower moves across the display Select the fifth focal zone by selecting one focal zone and moving the PAN ZONE indicator down as far as pos sible Again hold a thin screwdriver perpen dicular to the surface of the scanhead and slowly slide it down the scanhead There should be eight sections rep resenting reception focal zones Look closely as they can be hard to discern It may be necessary to adjust the TGC and ZOOM controls for the best image There should not be any drop outs or dup
36. 3 Requires 16X or higher software 4 When installing the 3500 0426 Monitor Module Assembly on a UM 4A OB or CV exchange the dress plates between the defective and replacement monitors 5 Smart A V for VCR status UM4 05 76 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 UM 4A Components UM 4A OB CV PV only Components REPLACEMENT FEATURE COMPATIBILITY LEVEL Part No CV Notes System 3500 0581 04 Receiver 05 UM 5 only Rear Panel 7500 0318 07 11 L L Requires 7500 0373 04 or higher motherboard 12 ECG Module 3500 0518 01 1700 0002 11 120V Supply 12 L L 240V 1700 0032 01 L 120V UL approved backward compatible Hardkey 4000 0155 20 25 Control JS S L Module JS S LM 21 26 4000 0154 24 29 TB S L 34 39 44 TB S LM 25 30 35 40 45 Softkey 4000 0156 20 24 Control Module 18 21 19 Monitor 3500 0426 00 01 Module 60 61 3500 0764 02 03 04 62 05 06 3500 1087 01 02 60 03 61 3500 0696 01 02 60 61 3500 0908 02 60 03 61 04 05 1 When installing 3500 0426 or 3500 1087 Monitor Module Assembly on UM 4A or CV exchange the dress plates between the defective and replacement monitors Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 77 5 Configuration System Receiver PCB System Receiver Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH
37. Aspect Ratio 1 Place the linearity graticle or the 90 degree corner of a piece of paper on the sector display Adjust R120 HEIGHT for a 90 degree sector The aspect ratio is now set for Repeat width height centering and aspect ratio until no changes are nec essary 4 Verify that all graphics are visible on screen Date in upper left and PRESET in lower right Aspect Ratio Linear Only Systems The caliper method uses the system cali pers and either a plastic ruler or marks ona piece of paper to assure that horizontal and vertical lines of the same displayed length are physically the same length 5 Set the calipers for 10 cm horizon tally centered on the display Setthe X calipers for 10 cm vertically centered on the display Physically measure the caliper dis tance with the plastic ruler or mark the distance on a piece of paper Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Adjustments 3 Place the ruler or paper reference beside the X calipers and adjust R120 HEIGHT until these calipers are the same distance apart as the calipers Repeat width height centering and aspect ratio until no changes are nec essary Verify that all graphics are visible on screen Date in upper left TGC PRE SET in lower right and Hospital ID in lower left Focus Adjust R24 for optimum focus Brightness Limit 1 3
38. Calc package disabled Verify customer purchased calcs Enable calcs Hardcopy report is printed on only half the page Defaults configured to small printer Check printer configuration Reconfigure printer defaults No EFA AUA One or more measure ments below mini mum tolerance Check measurements Re measure if necessary One or more measure ments below minimum tolerance Check measurements Re measure if necessary Unit will not accept LMP System current date in error Reset current date Customer believes cal culations are in error e g constant EFA of 28 weeks Intermittent lock up System Controller PCB A15 changed without resetting CURRENT INVESTIGATORS tables Reset CURRENT INVESTI GATORS to customer s pre ferred default settings System Controller PCB A15 Verify tables are opera tional Replace System Controller PCB A15 Configuration Section 5 Intermittent loss of one caliper while in Dual Image Normal occurrence Inform customer ensure active caliper is visible when pressing IMAGE SELECT Inaccurate measure ments in linear and sector Scan Converter Inter face PCB A9 Check for egg shaped cysts in linear with a phantom Replace Scan Converter Interface PCB A9 Configuration Section 5 r 9 v0 vINn enuey 9IAJ8S plal v MODEL 0 4
39. Part No 7500 0511 8500 1016 Function Software Feature configura tion Normal Position Shorted for Doppler at 25X or higher Open for non Doppler at 25X or higher Open for Doppler and non Doppler at 23X and below Not functional storage pins Not functional These are dummy pins pro vided to store the jumper when not required to be installed on pins 1 2 Rear Panel PCB Rear Panel Jumpers Figure 1C 1 JUMPER OR SWITCH 7500 0318 Function Mechanically bypasses CAD Normal Position Open Normal configuration Shorted Software configuration Shorted for 23X software and above Software configuration Shorted for 17X software and below Software configuration Shorted for 23X software and above Was JR2 on 06 07 PCB Software configuration Shorted for 17X software and below Video Interface 7500 0472 01 Video Interface Jumpers 7500 0472 01 PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH No jumpers no CAD Part No UM4 05 78 Function Normal Position Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Table 5 4 UM 4 CAD Module Jumper Matrix PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Ref ATL Ref Normal Des Part No Des Function Position A2 CINE 7500 7701 shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted With 7500 7704 XX AGO board shorted Without 7500 7704 XX AGO board 7500 7715 shorted shorted short
40. SCOPE UM 4A only EFFECTIVITY Immediate CAUSE Surge current causes breakdown of the metal inside the fuse holder This may be aggravated by incomplete installation of the fuse carrier into the fuse holder In time the breakdown of the metal causes oxidation to form which increases resistance and makes the assembly more sensitive to surge currents Eventu ally the fuse holder will fail SOLUTION Installation of a new Power Distribution Assembly on the next call or next PM MATERIAL ITEM DESCRIPTION ATL PART NUMBER QTY 1 Power Distribution Assembly 240V in 240V or 120V out 3500 1463 01 1 100V 120V 3500 1468 01 1 220V 240V 3500 1469 01 1 2 Rear Panel 1065 1689 02 1 3 Label 4100 0719 02 Domestic 1 4100 0894 01 Int l 4 Foam Tape Qty in inches 2210 0135 18 in UM4 07 38 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 PROCEDURE 6 Turn off power 7 Remove Rear Panel Item 2 in Figure 2 8 Inspect the Power Distribution Assembly f fuses continue to blow or there is evidence of melting or overheating replace the Power Distribution Panel with appropriate replacement in the table above Continue with step 4 f the Power Distribution Assembly is either 3500 1094 04 3500 1095 03 or 3500 1096 04 or if the Power Distribution Assembly is a 3500 1463 3500 1468 or 3500 1469 no further action is required and the system can be reassembled 9 Remove Power Distribution Assembly 10 Install replacement
41. Symptom Monitor arm will not rise Possible Cause Middle link pin on arm Fault Isolation PROBLEM CATEGORY MECHANICAL Solution Replace middle link pin with 1064 0335 Rev B Reference NV 8420 VCR cas sette door is blocked by the A V Module Unsecured A V Module mounting plate Replace the VCR mount ing plate 1064 0249 with VCR mounting plate 1064 0249 Rev E Missing locking con nectors on ribbon cables Incorrect connectors Cables affected EM to A V D 2275 0106 EM to A V E01 2275 0090 EM to DC F 2275 0103 Use care when installing new systems Verify cables are secure Inaccessible micro phone jack when Len zar camera is mounted on HFC Inadequate clearance between A V Module and Lenzar camera Plug in the microphone before installing the Lenzar camera Install a right angle head phone adapter Radio Shack 274 371 Contact Technical Support A new chassis assembly exists 4000 0143 12 Dom 4000 0143 13 Int l and higher Monitor to EM cable breaks internally Frequent Monitor removal Demo or mobile account Repair cable and provide strain relief Difficulty in installing the Monitor Module Assembly on UMAA OB and CV systems Presence of dress plate which is only compatible with HFC Remove dress plate install it on defective monitor assem bly and return to the factory Install dress plate
42. System Monitor Monitor Mounting Block See Detail Monitor Platform Detai Monitor Swivel Ass y Mounting Collar Bevel side down Monitor Arm DIN Connectors Monitor Platform Bottom Platform Cover DETAIL B ROTATED 180 DETAIL A 01 502 08 02 Figure 2B 7 HFC System Monitor Installation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02B 15 2B Installation Keyboard Support Control Module Cable Velcro Pads 4 See Detail A REAR OF CONTROL MODULE D 01 ESO2 A09 02 Figure 2B 8 HFC Control Module Installation NOTE Control setups are included only for peripherals shipped with new systems due to the variety of OEM types that may be shipped with refurbished systems Please refer to the appropriate OEM field UM4 02B 16 service manual for other cabling details and switch settings 10 If the system is configured with an internally mounted VCR verify the cable connections per Figure 1C 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Installation 2B 11 If a generic user supplied VCR is to Table 2B 3 AG 6400 7400 Control be connected the system must be Settings configured with a generic VCR panel assembly Use cables supplied with the VCR or obtained at a local elec tronics supply stores No provision is Control Setting AG 6400 7400
43. Table 2C 11 Initial Camera Control 1 Verify that paper is properly loaded in Positions the printer 2 Turn printer power off at the printer mee wee 3 Press and hold the button appropriate to the printer as listed below Printer Button TP 10 PAPER FEED ALPHACOM 42 PAPER ADVANCE MICROLINE 92 LINE FEED MICROLINE 182 LINE FEED MICROLINE 320 TOF QUIET Input Number As required Exposure Time T1 Image Polarity IMG Brightness B 80 Contrast C110 Multiple Interlace IDBL 2C 15 Report Printers This test procedure applies to the TP 10 4 Switch ON the printer and continue to and Alphacom 42 small report printers hold PAPER FEED PAPER and to the Microline 92 182 184 and 320 ADVANCE LINE FEED or TOF large report printers QUIET for about two seconds then Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02C 29 2C Performance Tests release it The printer begins printing the ASCII characters in sequence 5 After about ten seconds turn the printer OFF and remove the printed test from the printer 6 Examine the test and verify that all characters are properly formed and readable and that no dots in the char acter matrix are missing 7 If printing on a Microline 92 182 or 320 is too light to evaluate replace the printer ribbon and repeat steps 1 through 6 8 Print a report to verify correct opera tion with system 2C 16 UM 4CAD System Ope
44. 25 04 software was the first Demo sys tem version of 25X 25 08 was the FCD version of this soft ware New Features e 76mm 3 5 MHz scanhead 35CV76 M mode and 2D with the CVA 76 scan head Changeable scanhead defaults for con trols and functions 25X software consolidates the UM 4 product line software to a single baseline for future system deliveries of UM 4s UM 4CADs and the Full Feature UM 4A formerly UM 4A CV and PV 25X also supports those features which were developed for 24X Problems Corrected 25X problems TBA Known Problems Known problems are identified in the Oper ating Notes documents part numbers 4707 0010 03 UM 4CAD and 4707 0001 02 UM 4 26X 26 07 software was the FCD version sup porting the 240V CCIR UM 4CADt UM4 05 21 5 Configuration New Features The major features ofthe International ver sion ofthe UM 4CAD are similar to those of the UM 4 and UM 4CV systems with the following additional features Operator interface Special English French or German CAD softkey panels Improved TGC controls slide pots Parallel printer port Hand held remote controller Data acquisition Synchronized frame rates for Access and AA scanhead Interface to external ECG option Display Time alignment trace time aligned with 2D display detect time aligned with 2D display Cineloopr image capture and review CAD Stress echo image capture and revie
45. 2700 0192 0 1 ee Fuse 0 4 A Slo Blo 2700 0059 e Fuse 2 5 A Slo Blo 2700 0061 ee Fuse 5 A Slo Blo PCB Data Comm Signal Dist PCB Data Comm Isolation RS 232 Iso Xfmr Assy 2700 0062 2700 0063 Circuit Breaker 1 5 A 1 Pole Circuit Breaker 8 A 1 Pole Receptacle AC Hosp Grade Transformer Isolation Cable Assy Pwr Sup Iso Xfmr Cable Assy Iso PCB RS 323 Cable Assy Iso PCB Distr PCB Cable Assy Data Comm Pwr Epson Cable Assy Data Comm 34 Pin Disk Drive 3 5 Micro floppy 2 Sided Cover Data Comm Bezel Connector Bezel Disk Drive 2700 0065 2700 0067 UM4 08 22 Fuse 3 15 A Extra Slo Blo Fuse 1 6 A 250 V Extra Slo Blo Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual ATL Part No Table 8 9 Control Module Assembly Description Replaceable Parts 8 4000 0154 xx Control Module Hardkey TB 4000 0155 xx Control Module Hardkey JS 4000 0156 xx Control Module Softkey TB 4000 0214 xx Control Module TGC Slidepot Dom CAD 4000 0222 xx Control Module TGC Slidepot Intl 4100 0260 Overlay Full Feature Hardkey Text descriptors 4100 0326 Overlay Generic Hardkey Text descriptors Ref only Base Assy Hardkey Base Assy Softkey Ref only Base Molded Ref only Regulator Assy Ref only Bail Base Assy
46. 4 11 3 Linear Image Quality Troubleshooting Penetration 1 The first thing to check when the sys tem does not meet penetration criteria is the Power Supply especially the 70 80 Volts and 170 Volt supplies 170 Volts used only on sector scan heads 2 Then checkthe linear pulser voltage at TP 22 of the A5 Pulse Processor PCB a With POWER at minimum 5 VDC b With POWER at maximum 60 VDC 3 Replace Pulse Processor PCB if not to these specs 4 Replace Beamformer PCB set A2 and 4 if in specs UM4 04 43 4 Fault Isolation DC Output Volts DC 5 25 Volts Adj Tolerance 1 0 05V Ripple Peak Peak 100 MV P P 15 Volts Motor Controller 2 0 3V 100 MV P P 15 Volts Motor Controller 2 0 3V 100 MV P P 24 Volts 2 0 48V 50 MV P P 6 Volts Adj 1 0 06V 50 MV P P 15 Volts Analog Adj 1 0 06V 50 MV P P 15 Volts Analog Adj 1 0 15V 50 MV P P 480 Volts S1 70 Volts S2 3 2 1V 50 MV P P 80 Volts S1 70 Volts S2 3 2 1V 100 MV P P 170 Volts 3 5 1V 100 MV P P 10 Volts 9V on some systems 1096 1 0V 500 MV P P 1 Use a 1 1 probe to check Peak Peak ripple or inaccurate too high results occur Noise Noise problems can be caused by a wide variety of possibilities Do not overlook any of the following items 1 Ma
47. 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 03 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 27 08 Rev B June 3 1991 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing CTRL Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented Once the Smoothing settings 2 or 4 have been saved as a scanhead default lt CTRL gt U the smoothing settings 1 and 3 cannot be saved as scanhead defaults The system automatically increases these default values to 2 or 4 respectively In this situation you must use special function SMOOTH to change from the default setting to the desired setting Scanhead defaults are erroneously included in Table 3 2 in the
48. 505 086 02 BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER 4 7500 0548 XX Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 A5 Pulse Processor PCB HFC 4APLUs PCBs 7500 0370 3500 1261 62 3500s are not to be reconfigured in the field PCB REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY Dash No NON 40mm 17500 16X DOP CVA 17 25X SYNC AIVT 0370 08 09 24 25 26 27 1261 01 1262 01 gt UM 4A PCBs CV PV only 7500 0370 XX 0370 09 R R R 1 2 05 rolled to 09 1 PROMs required 2 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions 3 7500 0548 XX 0549 XX and 0370 24 25 are UM 4PLUS PCBs The 0548 and 0549 PCBs must be used together 0370 24 25s are backward compatible to 12X when configured with 8000 0570 XX software 4 3500 1261 625 are relayout of 7500 0370 24 25 they are backward compatible to 12X when config ured with 8000 0570 XX or higher software Do not order 7500 0561 XX generic PCB 5 7500 0370 08 09 PCBs support with 30 08 8000 0177 12 13 or higher software PROMs INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL PROM COMPATIBILITY Part Dash 16 23 25 26 29 Ref P N Dash HR No No 17X X X 28X X Des 4201 No AA LA MFI 6220 0013 01 070 028
49. If the second letter of the column is an F then that SFUNC or CTRL function key works If the function is also available on the softkey panel the softkey message is in brackets directly below the letters Some CTRL selections have two func tions one when the keyboard is in the ALPHA mode another when the keyboard is in the SFUNC mode These are noted after the description If a note is not included then the selection operates the same in either mode 5A 4 3 UM 4 Special and Control Functions 17X Information about the special function and control function keys for software release 17X is also contained in the Ultramark 4 Softkey Version Operation Manual 4701 0001 03 or higher Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration S1 Systems 5A Table 5A 1 UM 4 S1 Special Functions SOFTWARE LEVEL DESCRIPTION s 9 4 5 6 17 SFUNC T UPDATE Trigger update TGC UP TGC UP TGC UP TGC UP SFUNC NN NN NN NN SFUNC C REJECT SFUNC D 2D ALT Alternate Frame NF NF NF NF Rate SFUNC E B W Video invert B W B W B W B W SFUNCF SFUNC G PT POS Patient Position PT POS PT POS PT POS SFUNCH SCHDP Scanhead Position
50. Interconnect cable Inspect cable Repair or replace cable VCR Verify output of VCR during playback Replace VCR AN Module Verify output of A V Module Repair or replace A V Mod ule Configuration Section 5 No video playback See Fault Isolation Tables Section 5 2 Video Section 5 VCR lock up VCR time out in PLAY or RECORD if paused over four minutes Verify VCR not timed out Inform customer of time out function Scrambled video dur ing playback from VCR tracking adjust ment has no effect AG 6400 or 7400 VCRs Customer trying to review a tape recorded with a VCR set to LP or EP SLP Record and play back video with VCR in SP mode Only tapes recorded in stan dard play SP will play back correctly on AG 6400 or AG 7400 VCRs NOTE EP SLP modes result in poor playback image quality uonejos yned r v VO vVIAn enuey 9IAJ3S plal v MODEL 0 4 Symptom Excessive noise lock ups erratic operation Possible Cause Poor power connections 1 Fault Isolation Inspect power plug PROBLEM CATEGORY Solution Reassemble power plug INTERMITTENTS Reference Poor AC ground to sys tem Move system to another power outlet Ground system to a cold wa ter pipe with 12 gauge wire Local TV or radio inter ference or static on nearby electrical equip ment 1 Correlate
51. Keyboard Hand Controller CAD w cable Alt 2100 0565 01 w 2100 0625 01 3500 0954 01 0 4 08 26 Panel Assy Printer Power Connector UM 4CAD Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 This page intentionally left blank Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 27 Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 1 OE N 4 Ah I rig GR 5 3 Table 8 1 01 508 01 01 UM 4 Human Factors Cart 1 of 4 Figure 8 1 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 08 28 Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 1 Table 8 1 e G a 7 a Table 8 1 DETAIL 01 508 02 01 Figure 8 1 UM 4 Human Factors Cart 2 of 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 29 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Figure 8 1 FUM 4 Human Factors Cart 3 of 4 UM4 08 30 Ultramar 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 1 S BOTTOM VIEW Table 8 1 Table 8 1 01 508 01 01 Figure 8 1 UM 4 Human Factors Cart 4 of 4 Figure 8 2 No Figure Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 31 Replaceable Parts 8 y co 2 plecs Xu 2 ples
52. Performance Tests 2C The strip chart recording should dis play little or no blotching or burning of the paper a bronze coloring If the blotching is excessive adjust the tem perature control on the recorder Adjust the intensity control or the con trast control as necessary to produce an acceptable recording Onasoftkey system press SWEEP on the M mode panel On a hardkey sys tem press SWEEP RATE on the con trol panel Verify that the recorder changes recording speed each time the control is pressed Press the Strip Chart footswitch to halt recording If the recorder does not work properly refer to the LS 8 section of the Cam eras Field Service Manual 2C 14 Lenzar 2100 Multi Image 1 Camera Load one sheet of fresh unexposed film or paper into a cassette If using film the dull side emulsion of the film must face the dark slide Switch the UM 4 ON and verify thatthe camera exhibits the following a Each of three test messages TEST and 0000 are dis played three times in sequence for one second each When the message is displayed all switch LED indicators are lit b A short 1 KHz tone is sounded c COLD is displayed for approxi mately one minute during warm up UM4 02C 27 2C Performance Tests d CAL is displayed during the cal ibration sequence e CASS is then displayed Insert the cassette in
53. Press DEL and UNFRZ to return the system to normal operation 2C 12 Matrix 1010 Multi Image 1 Camera Set system power to ON On pow er up the camera goes through a four minute warm up period display indi cates WT4 WT2 WT1 When the sequence is completed the display indicates 0 and generates a tone If desired the warm up period can be overridden by holding down EXP Expose for approximately one second See Figure 2C 5 for front panel controls Perform the camera self test function by pressing the EXP Exposure Inter val Count and then simultaneously pressing CNT The self test has passed when AOK appears on the dis play See the 1010 Camera Service Manual for explanations of error mes sages UM4 02C 23 2C 3 Performance Tests Press PRINT on the UM 4 control panel under the following conditions in the order listed and verify that the error message MI CAMERA ENTRY ERROR is displayed on the system monitor without film cassette inserted with cassette inserted and top dark slide in place with cassette inserted top dark slide out and view port door open Install a fresh sheet of film in the cas sette Insert and latch cassette then remove top dark slide Cassette should be UM4 02C 24 pulled into camera and camera display should indicate 71 Using the procedure below set expo sure interval brightness and contrast to the setting listed in Table 2 9 for
54. The 05 supports Annular Array and 12 MHz Sync in Doppler systems The 08 is the same as 04 but has a radial line noise fix The 04 supports Annular Array and 12 MHz Sync in non Doppler systems The 11 is the same as 03 but has a radial line noise fix The 03 supports 12 MHz but not Annular Array in Doppler systems The 10 is the same as the 02 but has a radial line noise fix The 02 supports 12 MHz Sync but not Annular Array in non Doppler systems the 02 is back wards compatible to the 01 The 01 is not 12 MHz Sync and does not support Annular Array The following chart is a synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure III for PCB layout 7500 0370 XX 09 05 25 08 04 24 11 03 10 02 01 Sync Coppler Sync Sync Sync Non Sync AA Non Doppler Doppler Non Doppler Either AA 90 9 OHM 90 9 OHM 237 OHM 237 OHM 237 OHM 2820 0187 2820 0187 2820 0074 2820 0074 2820 0074 74 14 OSCILLATOR 74 14 OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR 2035 0331 3401 0027 2035 0331 3401 0027 3401 0027 N C 1 2 N C 1 2 N C JUMPERED DON T CARE DON T CARE DON T CARE DON T CARE UM4 09 16 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0370 XX S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB System UM 4 Date 1 21 88 11 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 2820 0074 RESISTOR 237 OHM 1 4100 0092 LABEL BL
55. Top cable 3500 0584 Cable Dop PIsr Rcvr A1 J1 PD PULS 3500 1021 01 Cable Dop Plsr Rcvr A1 J2 CWPI 3500 0587 Cable PP Rcvr A5 J1 2D RF 3500 0586 Cable PP Revr A5 J2 2D PULS 3500 0585 Cable PP Rcvr A5 J3 TGC 3500 0615 Cable PP BF Focus A5 J4 A3 FOCUS 3500 0589 Cable Dop Acq Rcvr A6 J1 CW OUT 3500 0588 Cable Acq Rcvr 6 2 3500 0694 01 Cable Dop Acq Dop Proc A6 J4 A7 J2 3500 0695 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Cable Dop Acq Dop Proc A6 J3 A7 J1 0 4 08 15 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 4 UM 4 Electronics Module Cont d ATL Part No 2275 0078 Description Cable Ribbon 2D Scan Conv A9 P4 A10 P4 Ground Straps A2 Case 2 plc 1514 0060 Screw 4 40 X 3 8 PNH 6 plc Shield Front EM 1066 0169 Mylar Adhesive inside Shield 1064 0466 Panel EM Left Side 1064 0467 Panel EM Right Side 1064 0214 Not Used Cover EM 3 Sided FPC and Stand Alone 1064 0465 01 Top Cover EM 1065 0385 01 Bolt Mounting OEM Module 4 plc mushroom Not Used Not Used 3500 0695 01 Cable Assy Local Oscillator 90 degrees u w 7500 0394 01 amp up 3500 0694 01 Cable Assy Local Oscillator O degrees u w 7500 0394 01 amp up 198 12443 00 PCB Puller not shown 7500 0269 PCB Extender
56. Use DSDD disks ATL P N 2100 0153 Press DISK on the Freeze softkey panel or special function DISK on the hardkey keyboard The Disk Menu should be displayed on the system monitor see Figure 2C 3 NOTE 7o delete errors while entering menu selections or text in the main disk menu and all subsequent menus us the left arrow key z instead of DEL This is necessary because in the disk menus DEL is used to return to a pre vious menu UM4 02C 21 2C Performance Tests DISK MENU Disk Drive Select Disk Format Disk Directory Store Image Report Recall Image Report Delete Image Report Directory Edit Copy Disk Image Report Serial Communications ENTER CHOICE 1 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 2C 3 Data Communications Disk Menu 3 With the Disk Menu displayed press 1 then ENTER When the Disk Drive Select menu is displayed enter 2 then ENTER The double arrow symbol should now be in front of Select Drive B indicating that drive B is selected Press 3 then ENTER Formatthe disk in drive B by pressing 2 and ENTER If the Format Disk warn ing is displayed press Y Enter your name into the NAME field press ENTER and press DEL The message Disk Format in Progress is dis played When formatting is complete and the Disk Menu is displayed three or four minutes press 4 and ENTER From the Store Image Report menu press 1 and ENTER Enter test into the
57. Vdc Refer to SB UM4 104 and adjust CAD P S CAUTION Voltage too high will damage CAD disk drives Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Software Release All CAD systems Configuration 5 Table 5 9 Software Related Anomalies Cont d Symptom During exam CAD FAULT ERROR HIT CONTROL P mes sage appears Fault Isolation DO NOT hit lt CTRL P gt patient exam information will be lost Corrective Action Power down system power up and re enter CAD mode and CON TINUE LAST STUDY Refer to SB UM4 103 Trouble acquiring frames Verify correct system setup Both CAD defaults must be ON Data Comm Default must be OFF TR OFF must be flashing All CAD No CAD graphics Defective Rear Panel PCB 0318 Jumpers JR1 or JR2 if present in wrong position 1 Jumper JR1 2 and JR1 3 if present Jumper JR2 1 and JR2 2 K1 of K2 on 0318 PCB defective 1 Replace 0318 PCB per Matrix in Config uration Supplement CAD Graphics CGA Overlay PCB 1 Replace CAD Mod ule Duplex CW new system or new upgrade AA scanhead does not work blank sector on screen Verify system configu ration with CTRL L 1 Bmfmr not installed 1 System is Sector only no AA S H conn is AA CW Duplex 2 Bmfmr installed 1 Troubleshoot Bmfmr front end All CAD System locks up between pre stress and post stress Ke
58. and secure with three 5 32 inch len setscrews e Connect monitor cable to video cable on underside of monitor plat form f Verify that monitor can swivel 180 degrees from stop to stop 0 Adjust setscrews in side of monitor mounting block see Figure 2B 7 so that monitor does not fall for ward or backward NOTE Do not connect or disconnect the Control Module with system power turned on A blown fuse in the Power Supply will occur This fuse is not field replaceable 6 Connect coiled cable located on key board support to connector on rear of Control Module Secure connector us ing captive screws 7 Lay coiled cable into channel Figure 2 8 and set rear of control module into keyboard support Press into place to lock Velcro pads on bot tom of Control Module Metal key on UM4 02B 14 keyboard support fits into slot in bot tom of control module to help hold it in place 8 Connect footswitch assembly cable to connector located on lower left front corner of EM Lock connector in place using its captive screws 9 Hang storage bin on front bezel of EM system without Lenzar camera NOTE Before installing a peripheral not shipped with or configured specifically for the UM 4 system call ATL Technical Sup port for information on compatibility and installation This includes peripherals origi nally purchased for use with other ATL products Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Installation 2B
59. sync requires more than JP1 change Sync Shorted refer to Up Down Rev Instructions 7500 0517 Connects analog and digital Shorted grnd Connects analog and digital Shorted grnd Factory test only Shorted Factory test only Shorted Selects RAM memory Open Selects ROM memory Shorted Connects analog and digital Shorted grnd Connects analog and digital Shorted grnd Internal power supply Shorted External power supply Open Internal power supply Shorted External power supply Open Internal power supply Shorted External power supply Open Internal power supply Shorted External power supply Open N A Closed N A Closed N A Closed N A Closed Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 53 5 Configuration fu 027 042 gg 066 027 SWI 126 933 Ol Ia i SWI ds NOTE There are several types of dip switches used for S1 Set 51 1 through 51 4 as follows UI2 IO OL Io fot Generally RED dipswitch All down closed BLACK dipswitch All up el closed el MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB A8 MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB A8 7500 0304 750
60. 01 ESO1 B14 03 Figure 10 4 UM 4A Cabling Diagram UM4 01C 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Cabling 1 3500 1530 02 CONTROL 1 gt 2275 0042 MODULE ECG LEADS 3500 1528 01 MONITOR LINEAR 2 gt Li gt DFT ACCESS MODULE PRINTER SCANHEADS CEM 15 PULSE AND RF EFT BFT STATIC 2 gt O gt DOPPLER SPEAKER SPEAKER FOOTSWITCH ASSY HEADPHONES 2275 0192 01 2275 0194 01 AUDIO TES OUT 1 gt CABLE IS PART OF ASSEMBLY INDICATED BY FLAG d VCR 3500 1532 01 VIDEO AG 6400 AG 7400 2 gt CABLE IS HARDWIRED AT THIS END 3 gt EXTERNAL INSTALLATION CABLE SUPPLIED WITH PRINTER 01 501 15 02 Figure 1 5 UM 4CV Cabling Diagram Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01C 5 1C Cabling 3500 1530 02 CONTROL MODULE 3500 1528 01 MONITOR ELECTRONICS ACCESS MODULE SCANHEADS CEM VIDEO B W OUT BNC PRINTER ED
61. 08 0411 09 8000 0270 11 12 UM4 05 62 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No Function Normal Position 7500 0411 Not for Field Use Open Test Open Test Shorted Not for Field use Open PCB ID Open PCB ID Open PCB ID Shorted PCB ID Open Non Sync Open Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions Sync Shorted Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions Non Sync Open Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions Non Sync Open Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions Sync Shorted Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions Non Sync Open Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions N A Shorted N A Shorted ECG data Closed ECG data ON OFF T1 ECG test Closed Diagonal ECG gray scale when open T2 M mode test Open Vertical gray scale when closed T3 M mode test Open Horizontal gray scale when closed Scrolling ATL logo Closed Scrolling ATL logo when closed N A Open N A Open N A Open 1 Both SW1 1 and SW1 2 must be closed and ECG turned on Control Panel 1 closed 2 open ECG trace w o data or noise 1 closed 2 closed ECG trace w data or noise 1 open 2 closed scrolling diagonal ECG test pattern Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 63 5 Configuration b fy b a 2 Jp JP5 JP6 JPI B NUM ne di LIN
62. 09 4000 0144 10 L bracket Defines attachment procedure for the HFC and OEM modules B Blocks Defines the HFC with longer cables for the monitor and the keyboard This will allow the cables to reach the EM The others require the extension cables BOLD PRINT Defines compatibility for CAD hand controller Screws for both parts are 8 32 x 7 16 KH Screw P N 1517 0093 01 2 Pics 01 5 047 01 1 UM4 07 16 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L Service Bulletin PAGE 1 OF 2 Date November 30 1987 S B No UM4 63 Rev To Domestic Service Personnel E C N E 1266 AND E 1256 Author Steve Carter UM 4 HFC Tracking and Lenzar Mounting Problems PROBLEM 1 UM 4 with a Lenzar Camera will not track straight when pushed CAUSE When you install a Lenzar Camera you remove the footswitch tray This is the support for the front of the rails With the added weight of the Lenzar on the front the rails are tilted at angles causing the cart to track to one side SOLUTION Order and install the following Qty Part Number Description 1 1065 0646 01 Rail Strap 6 1516 0167 6 32 x 1 4 Screw 1 1065 0520 02 Lenzar Tray see note NOTE Order only if a drill and 3 16 bit are not available PROCEDURE Refer to Figures 1 and 2 1 Remove the
63. 1096 XX 2700 0224 01 Fuse 1 25A 250V Slo Blo 2700 0061 Fuse 5A 250V T Rated 2 plc 2265 0036 01 Cord Power 2 5m w o connector 240V Alt 2245 0018 cord w 3100 1555 01 plug 3100 1555 02 Connector Power Cord 240V u w 2265 0036 01 3500 0629 xx Power Distribution Assy 120V Obsolete Ref only 2700 0225 01 Fuse 10A 120V 2plc 2700 0231 01 Fuse 240V 2 plc Note 3 Video Printer Note 3 VCR Panasonic 1064 0588 02 1064 0539 02 Not Used Note 2 1064 0520 01 Bracket VCR Mounting Bracket VCR Mounting AG 6400 AG 2400 NV 180 Monitor Module Assy 8 10 Plate Dress Tilt Swivel UM4 08 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 3 Ultramark 4AFF 4A and Cont d ATL Part No 1065 0292 Description Spacer Monitor Upper 1065 0540 Spacer Monitor Lower 1065 0411 Washer Lower Thrust 1520 0004 Set Screw 5 16 18 x 5 16 cone point 1516 0076 Screw 6 32 x 5 16 1064 0369 01 Mtg Plate Front Storage Bin 2 plc 1516 0005 Screw 4 plc 1516 0017 Washer 4 plc 1066 0176 02 Storage Bin 1065 2477 01 Bezel Front EM was 1064 0233 02 Requires labels 4100 0372 01 Label UM 4A EM plc 7500 0362 xx Bmfrmr 4100 0706 02 Label UM 4PLUS E
64. 3 7248 DR 2 n ELECTRONICS ACCESS p VIDED SCANHEADS CEM PRINTER UP 850 870 U 3500 1259 04 2275 0170 REPORT G PRINTER i gt 182 184 EPI PULSE AND RF y O gt SPEAKER STATIC 2 gt 0 gt DOPPLER SPEAKER H 15 BDX HEADPHONES ASSY gt mD CEXCEPT AG 5700 FOOTSWITCH M 2 4y ED SPEAKER 2275 0192 0 D 2275 0194 01 AUDIO G5700 1 ONLY HEAD NOTES 5 1 gt CABLE IS PART OF ASSEMBLY IN OUT INDICATED BY FLAG _ 2215 0193 01 IN ves E AG 6400 2 CABLE IS HARDWIRED VIDED AG 7400 AT THIS END AG 5700 DUT 3 gt EXTERNAL INSTALLATION 3500 1532 01 CABLE SUPPLIED WITH PRINTER 2275 0185 01 VIDEO IN W O VCR 4 3500 0723 02 01 VCR VIDEO OUT USED W AG 5700 BR1600 01 ESO1 B17 03 Figure 1 7 UM 4A Full Feature and 4APuus Cabling Diagram Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01C 7 Section 2A Pre Installation Requirements 2A 1 Introduction The purpose of this evaluation is to ensure a trouble free installation and to assist the customer in providing an environment that supports the reliable performance of an ATL ultrasound system This document is intended to guide you through a compre hensive inspection that ensures all physi cal electrical and environmental conditions are appropriate for optimum system operation NOTE Some parts of this section include policies equipment requirements and procedures that may apply only to U S field use For dealers affiliates or ot
65. 4 Beamformer Controller PCB HFC 4APLUs PCBs 7500 0362 XX 7500 0548 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY NON 16X NON DOP DOP 76mm 17X SYNC SYNC SYNC CVA 0362 02 04 09 0548 06 105 0362 02 04 09 1 PROMS required 2 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions 3 7500 0548 0549 and 0370 24 25 are UM 4PLus PCBs The 0548 and 0549 PCBs must be used together 4 CAUTION Do not swap 0548 and 0362 PCBs The first does not support AA scanheads and the second does not support AIVT scanheads There are also sync differences refer to matrix 5 Replace 0548 07 08 PCBs with 10 on next call basis PROMs INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL PROM COMPATIBILITY DPLX Part Dash P N CW No No 4201 CVA 0362 02 Individual 8000 0178 8000 0178 lt lt lt lt I 09 8000 0507 0548 06 8000 0579 8000 0579 1 76mm CVA only lt lt lt lt lt gt gt gt gt UM4 05 40 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No Function Normal Position 7500 0362 Test Shorted Test Shorted Test Shorted Test Shorted Non Sync Open Sync Non Sync conversion req
66. Access C 2 25 101 25909 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 Access C 3M 101 25909 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 84 Access C 5 ML 101 25909 03 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 85 Access C 5M 101 25909 04 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 Access C 7 5 101 25909 05 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 Access 2 25 W Dop 101 25909 06 16 26 36 46 56 66 Access C 3M w Dop 101 25909 07 17 27 37 47 57 67 Access C 5M w Dop 101 25909 08 18 28 38 48 58 68 Access C 10 Multi 101 25909 09 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 81 Access C 10 PV 101 25909 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 82 1 No new sales 0 4 05 84 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Table 5 6 UM 4 Scanhead Compatibility Matrix Cont d SCANHEAD TYPE SCANHEAD NAME PART NO HARDWARE NOTES WOBBLERS Annular Array AA 3 5M w Brake 101 25900 05 09 11 w Brake AA 5M w Brake 101 25900 06 10 12 w Brake AA 3 5 DBF 4000 0188 Replace 101 25900 05 09 11 AA 5 0 DBF 4000 0189 Replace 101 25900 06 10 12 End Fire Transducer EFT 13mm ADR 4000 0068 EFT 17mm ADR 4000 0069 EFT 13mm 4000 0109 EFT 17mm 4000 0110 BFT 3 4000 0123 SPECIAL APPLICATIONS AA 3 0 2 0 CW Duplex 4000 0236 ACS DD 2 25 2100 0621 Mercury S H Duplex ACS DD 3 0 2100 059
67. Check the fabrication number of Interface PCBs the PCB Domestic part num a If the fabrication number is bers 2500 0273 Rev B continue with the procedure If the fab rication number is not 08 10 60 2500 0273 Rev B mark the FSR as inspection complete bers 7500 0273 03 NOTE Fab number can be 7500 0273 02 04 06 International part 05 found on the solder side of the A 07 O9 11 61 PCB on the top left corner 2 Verify C162 0 1 UF P N 3725 0003 is attached to C56 see figure below Verify C163 270 PF P N 3725 0039 is attached to U83 pin 2 and U83 pin 4 see figure below Replace PCB if either of the capacitors is missing Effectivity Next PM or next call basis Complete FSR indicate verifica tion of rework for the 2D Scan Converter Interface UM4 07 60 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual v ToU QU Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 01 SVCB 033 01 Service Bulletins 7 UM4 07 61 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO a Y Y S ervice Bulletin G Date 5 1993 S B No UM4 134 Rev To All Field Service Personnel E C N No Author David D Vega UM 4 Display Controller Problem on Boot up Effectivity UM 4 HFC and Small Cart Systems UM 4 HFC and Small Cart Systems Problem Symptom UM 4 System monitor screen is white and the status
68. Clean fuse holder and reseat fuse Dirty pot especially Brightness Clean pots with freon and verify adjustments Adjustments Section 3 uonejos r ec VO viNn enuey 9IAJ8S 4 v MODEL UM 4 Symptom Horizontal Raster fluc tuations Possible Cause Poor crimp on E 30 or E 36 on monitor PCB PROBLEM CATEGORY Fault Isolation 1 Inspect E 30 and E 36 Solution 1 Recrimp wires into E 30 and 36 IMAGE QUALITY Cont d Reference Excessive dirt build up on R 27 Horizontal Oscillator adj 1 Free dirt with tweeker 6005 0230 01 and clean pot with freon then verify adjustments Adjustments Section 3 Intermittent Far Field Noise Beamformer Focus PCB 7500 0361 05 oscillation Replace with 7500 0361 07 PCB or higher Checkerboard pattern dark bands broken image dropouts or vertical lines when system is booting up 7500 0548 07 or 08 in PCB Slot A4 Bus contention problem over heats U148 eventually causing it to fail Bus contention only occurs during boot up Replace PCB with 09 upon failure or upon next call basis v uonejos Hned enuey 9IAJ8S plal v c VvO viNn MODEL 0 4 Symptom No M mode on strip chart recorder ok on monitor Possible Cause Interconnect cable Fault Isolation PROBLEM CATEGORY M MODE Solution Repair or re
69. Configuration Section 5 System will not change from sector to linear linear to sector Motor Controller PCB A8 If rest of system operational replace Motor Controller PCB A8 Configuration Section 5 System will not drive multifrequency or 10 MHz scanheads Motor Controller PCB A8 If other Access scan heads ok replace Motor Controller PCB A8 Configuration Section 5 System lockup Motor Controller PCB 1 Sector only system 2 Failure to select sector scanhead Replace U27 Configuration Section 5 No auto repeat func tion on keyboard Control Module Replace EPROM Z5 on the KeyTronic PCB EPROM part number is 4204 0013 01 response from the keypad on the Control Module Capacitor C1 on the Keyboard Controller PCB If C1 has a diameter exceed ing 5 inch then replace C1 with a thinner capacitor 3740 0029 2 Contact Technical Support r 9 70 enuey 4 v MODEL 0 4 Symptom No 2D sector echoes on monitor mech operation ok screen graphics ok Possible Cause Scanhead Fault Isolation Try another scanhead Solution Replace scanhead PROBLEM CATEGORY 2D SECTOR IMAGE Reference Pulse Processor PCB 5 Verify echoes present in M mode and Linear Replace Pulse Processor PCB A5 Configuration Section 5 Interconn
70. Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Analysis Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 3 6 Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 04 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 27 10 RevB June 3 1991 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation
71. EXAM TYPE field then press DEL The message File Transfer in Prog ress should be displayed while the transfer is taking place UM4 02C 22 From the Disk Menu press DEL The system should return to the normal operating mode Press CTRL S to store the image from the scanning mode Press DISK on the Freeze softkey panel or special function DISK on the hardkey keyboard When the Disk Menu is displayed press 5 and ENTER At the file prompt enter 1 then ENTER Once the file is recalled from the disk it is dis played on the screen Verify that the image is the first one you stored Toreturn to the Disk Menu on a softkey system press RETRN and then DISK both on the Freeze panel On a hard key system press special function DISK The Disk Menu should be dis played Press 3 and ENTER to call up the disk directory Verify that the two images you stored are listed in the directory While in the directory delete the second image by pressing 2 and ENTER At the file prompt press 2 and ENTER When the warning mes sage is displayed press Y Verify that the second image is deleted Return to the Disk Menu by pressing 3 and ENTER Press 7 and ENTER The disk direc tory is displayed Move the cursor to the NOTES LOCATION field ofthe first image by pressing ENTER Verify that annotation can be entered into the field Press DEL to return to the Disk Menu Ultramark 4 Field Servic
72. G Date August 23 1994 S B No UM4 145 Rev To AllField Service Personnel C O No 100344A Author Stan Trussell Silk Screen Indicating Mislabeled Polarity for C128 on the UM 4 Display Controller PCB PROBLEM Noise interference in video display SCOPE PCB part number 7500 0827 03 assembly part numbers 3500 1480 02 Domestic and 3500 1481 02 PAL EFFECTIVITY Upon failure CAUSE The silk screen on the PCB fab is backwards from what the actual orientation is for C128 The automated surface mount machine places the part in the correct orientation but it is believed that operators later in the build process might change the capacitor to match the polarity marking on the PCB SOLUTION Replace PCB only if noise appears in video display and capacitor has been veri fied to be reversed same polarity as silk screen see Figure 1 A new fabrica tion will be released to correct the artwork AVIdSIG Koh ot Ic Ic OL Io 01 5 088 01 Figure 1 UM4 07 76 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y AT S ervice Bulletin G Date December 5 1994 S B UM4 146 Rev To All Field Service Personnel Author David D Vega C A R Domestic 120V NTSC UM 4 Small Cart with AG 7400 VCR PROBLEM Service Documentation doe
73. G Date March 31 1994 S B UM4 143 Rev To AllField Service Personnel C O No 100100 Author Laurence J Simanek Failure of CLA 15 mm 5 MHz Intravaginal Scanhead to Initialize on UM 4 Systems PROBLEM The UM 4 system will not initialize the CLA 15 mm 5 MHz IVT Array Scanhead This problem could occur intermittently or consistently SCOPE Systems with Beamformer Controller PCB 7500 0548 09 and below and or CLA 15 mm 5 MHz IVT Array Scanhead 4000 0238 06 and 07 EFFECTIVITY March 24 1994 CAUSE Changes in components due to obsolescence caused erratic operation of the CLA 15 mm 5 MHz IVT Array Scanhead The failure of the UM 4 to recognize the IVT personality is due to ringing effects on the clock input It was recommended that both the IVT and Beamformer Controller be repaired These two corrections Will work independent of each other or together SOLUTION If the UM 4 exhibits intermittent or no initialization of the CLA 15 mm 5 MHz IVT Array Scanhead replace the Beamformer Controller with a 7500 0548 10 PCB 1 Ifthe problem described is not specific to the UM 4 initialization of the CLA 15 mm 5 MHz IVT Array Scanhead replace the IVT Array Scanhead with 4000 0238 08 2 If problem persists replace both Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 73 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO a WITH PARTS YES NO a ATL Service Bulletin Date September 12 1994
74. PROMS are correct If not correct replace them with the separately ordered PROMs Return all unused PROMs 9 Install PROMs in CAUTION nsure that all PROMs are installed carefully and correctly Use the replacement matrix the PCB sil houettes Figure 5 6 for correct sockets and orientation Observe anti static precautions Ensure that the IC part number label is properly attached Figure 5 6 Ensure that pin 1 on the IC matches pin 1 on the socket Pin 1 is identified by a notch in the body of the IC at the top middle or a dot or dimple adjacent to pin 1 Ensure that PROM pins are straight spaced properly and aligned with the socket prior to insertion into the socket After insertion ensure that all pins are in their sockets and that the IC is fully seated 10 Ifthere isa checkin the CONVERT col umn refer to the Up Down Rev Instructions and modify the PCB according to the procedures therein 11 Usethe jumper matrix to verify all mov able jumper positions 12 Install the PCB into the correct slot 13 Verify that the replacement parts cor rect the system failure Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual NOTE the replacement parts DO NOT correct the failure remove them and rein stall the original parts and reconfirm the failure Continue troubleshooting with the original configuration DO NOT leave the new parts installed if they do not correct the failure 14 Return all failed
75. PROMs are not interchangeable Always order parts designated with an recommended for the system s software level or order like for like only if so authorized by L designator NOTE These levels should be verified a next call basis for existing MFI systems 30 05 soft ware can remain only in non MFI systems WARNING Do not order the 7500 0561 XX Pulse Processor PCB This is a generic PCB that requires switches to be configured and the PCB to be calibrated WARNING Do not install a generic PCB if it does not have a 3500 xxxx xx part number label affixed for example the latest Display Controller Scan Converter Interface and Pulse Processor PCBs that are listed in the replacement matrix under a 3500 number A generic 7500 PCB requires configuration and in some cases a specific crystal and calibration that should not be attempted in the field The jumper information for these PCBs is included in the service manual only So correct configuration can be verified UM4 07 56 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 Background The MFI scanhead was introduced in January 1992 It was supported by 30 05 system level software In August 1992 30 08 software was released to improve the management of the system s acoustic output performance when used with the scanhead Installation of upgrade kits on systems with scanheads is scheduled to be completed by March 31 1993 It was decided that 30 05 s
76. Press lt CTRL B gt twice to reset smoothing function r uonejos Hned enuey 4 v ZE VO VIAOQ MODEL UM 4 Symptom Noisy sector image Possible Cause A Cable dressing PROBLEM CATEGORY 2D SECTOR IMAGE Cont d Fault Isolation Route sector motor drive cables behind linear con nectors and ECG cables are routed in front Solution 1 Route cables properly Reference B Pulse Processor PCB A5 1 Replace Pulse Processor PCB A5 uonejos ned r 8L v0O VIADQ enuey 4 v MODEL 0 4 Symptom No linear image Screen graphics con trols ok Possible Cause Power Supply Fault Isolation Verify 70 V 80 V for S1 at power supply Solution 1 Replace Power Supply PROBLEM CATEGORY 2D LINEAR IMAGE Reference Configuration Section 5 Beamformer PCBs A2 3 4 Verify Linear M mode operational Replace Beamformer PCBs A2 3 or 4 Configuration Section 5 Pulse Processor PCB A5 Replace Pulse Processor PCB A5 Configuration Section 5 Scan Converter PCBs A9 10 11 Verify 2D Sector mode operational Replace Scan Converter PCBs 9 10 or 11 Configuration Section 5 EFT Panel Assembly Check for broken coax cable at RF connector on Motor Controller PCB Check for broken coax cable at RF connector on the Receiver module
77. Req Mgr approval 2100 0121 0 4 08 16 Battery 1 2V Nicad 4 14 95 4 plc Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 5 HFC Optional Equipment Module Assembly ATL Part No Description Optional Equipment Module OEM Chassis Assy OEM Base OEM Panel Support Rt Side Panel Support Lt Side Panel Dress Rt Side Panel Dress Lt Side Plate Slide oc 5 o mi Plate Locking Bracket Mounting Front Bezel Bracket Mounting OEM Rear Bezel Bracket Mounting OEM Connectors 2251 0004 Cable EM B OEM Keyboard Lower cable non extended OEM 2275 0064 Cable EM A Monitor Lower cable non extended OEM Panel Power Switch Insert Not Used 3500 0608 02 Volume Control Assy HFC 4400 0022 Knob Rubber 875 Dia x 5 H 3500 0910 06 Power Distr Assy 120 Vac 3500 0951 05 Power Distr Assy 240 Vac Ref only Switch Power Rocker Bracket Cables Note 2 Video Cassette Recorder Plate Mounting VCR Bracket Mounting VCR Audio Video Module Plate Clamp A V Module Data Communications Module Bracket Mounting Data Comm Note 2 Photo Module or Video Copy Processor Bracket Mounting For item 28 Not Used 1065 0949 01 Bezel CAD Bullnose 8 11 Ultramark 4 Field Service
78. Sector only Possible Cause Scanhead Fault Isolation PROBLEM CATEGORY Solution Replace scanhead IMAGE QUALITY Reference System Receiver Replace System Receiver Configuration Section 5 Defective grounding Inspect cables and system grounds Excessive noise in both Linear and Sector images Scan Converter Inter face PCB A9 Replace Scan Converter Interface PCB A9 Configuration Section 5 Pulse Processor PCB A5 Replace Pulse Processor PCB A5 Blocky image in both Sector and Linear Scan Converter OAG PCB A11 Replace Scan Converter OAG PCB A11 Configuration Section 5 Scan Converter Inter face PCB A9 Replace Scan Converter Interface PCB A9 Scan Converter Buffer PCB A10 Replace Scan Converter Buffer PCB A10 Radial lines in Sector image and vertical lines in Linear Cable between Scan Converter Interface A9 and Scan Converter Buffer A10 Repair or replace cable Configuration Section 5 Poor image quality and poor penetration Sec tor AA Pulse Processor PCB 5 Replace Pulse Processor PCB A5 Configuration Section 5 Poor image quality on 1 system Pulse Processor PCB A5 or higher Verify Pulse Processor PCB A5 is 7500 0313 02 Replace Pulse Processor PCB A5 with 02 or higher NOTE must have 5X or higher software Questionable image quality with
79. Simanek Incorrect Relay on Dual Linear Array PCB 7500 0630 01 on UM 4 Systems PROBLEM On the Dual Linear Array PCB ATL P N 7500 0630 01 one or more incorrect 5 volt relays manufacturer s part number TN2E L 5V may be installed in the K 1 to K 34 locations CAUSE Vendor inadvertently mixed 5 volt parts with 12 volt parts MATERIAL Since there are 34 of these relays the incorrect operation of the PCB is dependent upon quantity and location of the wrong devices Incorrect relays on PCB 7500 0630 01 could produce the following results Poor image quality Wrong scanhead annotation Wrong scanhead identification amp I limit issues EFFECTIVITY Dual Linear Array PCBs should be inspected on a Quality Assurance visit formerly PM or next call basis if the customer complains about above issue PROCEDURE Visually inspect both 7500 0630 01 Dual Linear Array PCBs and verify that all relays have the correct manufacturer s part number TN2E L2 H 12V 1 If you identify any incorrect relays TN2E L 5V on the PCB replace the Dual Linear Array PCB with a correct version 2 Return the defective Dual Linear Array PCB with a note on the RCA to MRB 3 Document your activity on a hard copy service report or through the elec tronic CCDE UM4 07 72 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y 1 Y S ervice Bulletin
80. Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The calc measurement cursors will not attach to the trackball on a frame grabbed image unless there was an active scanhead running prior to entering VCR playback If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it UM4 06 26 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 7 When recalling an image previously stored with ECG data via data comm the ECG data will either be missing or incorrect General Analysis An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation While in an
81. Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images 7 Images stored using the STORE softkey are erased when VCR playback is activated To prevent erasure use the Page Capture function described in Capturing Single Frame Images The message CAD module fault may appear on the monitor display when first pressing the CAD softkey or when other softkeys are pressed rapidly To prevent this from occurring wait for about 35 to 40 seconds after switching power on before pressing the CAD softkey Once in CAD mode always wait for the new softkey panel to be presented before selecting the next function In rare occasions the CAD functions may appear to lock up and a Press control P message may be presented If unsaved images on the hard disk DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which is a command to clear all images off the hard disk Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again Then pressing the CAD softkey will permit you to access the images that were on the hard disk at the time of the fault In some cases with the initial delay set to zero the system will capture images before the wave begins This happens because the initial delay of zero is calibrated to permit synchronized capture with a variety of host ECG machine inputs with varying propagation delays Setting the initial delay between 50 and 100 ms is recommended as a trial starting value to be adjusted to meet the specific timing requirements of each hos
82. alphanumeric keyboard day dd month mm year yyyy hour hh minute mm Leave a space Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C between each element of the date and time Rotate the OUTPUT POWER control while observing the POWER display onthe left side ofthe screen Verify that the power level can be varied from 0 percent to 100 percent and that the intensity of the main bang changes Rotate the DEPTH control Verify that the depth can be changed and that as the depth increases the frame rate decreases 7 Select PAN ZONE then a Move the trackball or joystick to activate the PAN ZONE cursor and move it to one side of the scan image Pan Zone cursor will dis appear several seconds after movement has stopped Time is set under 2D defaults b Rotate the ZOOM control clock wise and verify that the display zooms in on the area of the image targeted by the PAN ZONE cursor The cursor should be in the center of the screen at the end of the zoom UM4 02C 7 2C Performance Tests 2C 7 Monitor Aspect Ratio WARNING 7his procedure only validates Monitor alignment but must be performed before validating measurement accuracy in paragraphs 2 8 1 and 2C 8 2 1 Set the calipers horizontally cen tered 100 mm apart on the display 2 Setthe x calipers vertically centered 100 mm apart on the display 3 Physically measure and compare the distances between the two
83. and 5 5 Change the depth setting to the value shown in the table for the selected scanhead 6 Press CTRL U and then press Y to save the settings 7 Verify the settings are stored by resetting the system CTRL P and by rebooting the system UM4 07 80 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Section 8 Replaceable Parts 8 1 Introduction This section is intended for use by ATL Technical Service Representatives Listed are the major field replaceable parts for the Ultramarke 4 systems Some internal parts of major subassemblies are included for international use only for example the Data Comm and Audio Video Modules which are currently end item swaps domestically The parts are listed at the current recommended replacement level at the time of printing Changes to ATL equipment are sometimes made reflecting component or design improvements Sub sequent revisions to part numbers espe cially those assigned to PCBs are reflected in the Configuration section which includes compatibility and PCB PROM ment matrices 8 2 Description An explanation of the columns in the tables follows Figure Number Fig No This column lists the figure number of the illustration on which a particular index number or reference designation will be found The Figure and its corresponding Table will have the same number unless otherwise noted For example Figure 8 1 goes with Table 8 1 Also a Figure may be made up of more
84. and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing CTRL Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented Scanhead defaults are erroneously included in Table 3 2 in the operation manual These scanhead defaults do not appear in the user default menu To change scanhead defaults see Setting Scanhead Defaults on page 3 13 of the operation manual 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a FROZEN image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE while the system is in 2 D mode and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Me
85. beyond 02 or Open for 32K x 8 EPROMs earlier Shorted for Test Mode Shorted for 16K x 8 5 Open for 32K x 8 EPROMS Shorted for 64K x 1 RAMs Open for 256K x 1 RAMs Shorted to Connect External Serial Port TXDE to RXDE for testing Shorted to Connect External Serial Port DTR to DSR for testing Shorted to Connect External Serial Port RTS to CTS for testing Shorted to Connect External Serial Port TXD to RXD for testing Shorted to Connect Control Module Serial Port TXDFP to RXDFP for testing Open if U7 14 and U25 32 ar P N 2054 0001 Shorted if U7 14 and U25 32 are 2070 0226 01 Programs Dyn RAM Cont Programs Dyn RAM Cont Programs Dyn RAM Cont Programs Dyn RAM Cont Programs Dyn RAM Cont Programs Dyn RAM Cont Shorted to Provide DISK READY for testing Open for Single Sided Disk Drive Shorted for Double Sided Disk Drive N N o E 1 Shorted for 64K x 8 EPROMs open open shorted for all 07 09 10 11 63 oponi for 07 09 63 03 higher but not 60 open for 60 and 02 and below open open open open open Phardware dependent hardware dependent PP Dynamic RAM Controller short orted shorted o Shoned open shorted shorted swa sAs 6 uoneunDuuo enuey v 6L VS0 vVIAn Table 5A 5 Jumper Matrix Cont d JUMPER OR SWITCH Eae ome E
86. controls Rotary Controls Power Zoom Depth Imaging Gain Doppler Gain Softkey contains higher level con trols tracks modality functions 0 S FUNC and lt CTRL gt Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Demonstrate the Installation 2B TGC Slide Pots Hardkey Mode Image Processing VCR and Measurement keys Rotary TGC Trackball Keyboard Alphanumeric controls Volume control All Transducer Ports including Scan heads and ECG Monitor arm and Keyboard latches Describe the hardcopy devices pro vided with the system and have the operator reload the applicable OEM paper VCR tapes film etc New Patient lt CTRL gt P function Demonstrate the Patient Data Entry function Demonstrate the Xducer Select func tion Discuss the philosophy behind the system and scanhead specific defaults and how they are used to quickly program the system for spe cific applications Discuss and demonstrate how to con nect and disconnect scanheads Describe and demonstrate the primary 2D controls e Mode Select Depth Focus Gain Power TGC Freeze Cineloop Image Review Describe and demonstrate the key board based Annotation function Describe and demonstrate the primary 2D Measurement controls Show the operator the appropriate section in the Operator s Manual UM4 02B 23 2B 14 15 16 17 Installation Linear measurements Circumf
87. once the process is initiated it cannot be interrupted or aborted Do not press any keys simply wait for the process to end before beginning another process During playback of captured images some vertical shifting may be apparent on successive images The message Establishing CAD Module Communication may appear on the monitor when selecting the CAD softkey too soon after initial power up To prevent this from occurring wait for about 15 seconds after switching power on before pressing the CAD softkey Distorted or blank images may be captured and stored if a Page capture is attempted with a frozen image Use Page capture with real time images only Images captured using linear scanheads will not be synchronized to the video rate and may appear distorted or contain blank video frames when replayed UM4 06A 18 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A UltramarkR 4CAD Ultrasound System 4707 0010 05 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 28 03 and 28 04 Rev C June 3 1991 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be e
88. overlay when changing M mode depth Identify symptom Select FREEZE and then unfreeze to recover 12X 16X and 17X ECG stops scrolling in 2D mode The sector image splits at the cen ter with one half live the other frozen or ran dom data Reduced 2D sector overlay on the top left corner of the scrolling mode is turned off From 2D ECG mode press RETURN twice 12X and 16X Annular array split image IVT wavy image IVT lateral jerk Identify symptoms Install Motor Controller adaptive software kit 8000 0313 01 12X and 16X with TP 10 Thermal Printer installed Delay in keyboard response This delay is normal None 12X and 16X UM 4 with annu lar array Double image artifact with annular array con figured to default to smoothing F3 or F4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Identify symptoms 1 Configure the sys tem default to F1 or F2 2 Press CTRL B twice UM4 05 87 5 Configuration Software Release UM 4 with Access 10PV Table 5 9 Software Related Anomalies Cont d Symptom Audio ringing with con comitant Doppler noise bands present Fault Isolation Corrective Action None Notify area supervisor 11X and higher Random lock ups in various modes with random error mes sages displayed on the screen Identify symptoms Order and replace the smart A V module 7500 0143 10 11X and 12X Loss
89. system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls On hardkey and softkey systems with dual linear when the user power up default is set to linear the scanhead select must be pressed twice to select the right array scanhead After selecting it once the scanhead select works normally On hardkey and softkey systems a transducer must be active prior to using the remainder ofthe system controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing CTRL Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented On dual Access hardkey systems only selecting an array scanhead after using a 5 0 7 5 or 10 0 MHz Access scanhead connected to the right receptacle causes loss of transducer identification and control of TGC and depth Resetting the system restores normal operation To prev
90. tion by interrogating certain modules to establish their presence in the system The modules either return a 6 character code or a NOT INSTALLED message The codes are listed below 3 The first two characters denote the module BF Beamformer Controller PCB 48 Motor Controller 7500 0348 XX 04 Motor Controller 7500 0304 XX p2 Pulse Processor S2 system 1 Pulse Processor S1 system dp Doppler Processor 4 VCR Smart A V Module SELECT is toggled too quickly Stored image scaling error in which a dual trigger sector image is stored expand zoom is changed and the recalled image does not match the graphics overlay Resolution of the planimetry calculation changed 5 MHz IVT ID changed to prevent lock ups associated with previous ID Known Problems When a TP 10 Thermal Printer is print ing the keyboard responds slowly This is normal operation The data transmis sion rate of 600 bits per second of the System Controller PCB to the thermal printer causes a delay that ties up the serial bus Control inputs from the key board during this transmission will be The third and fourth characters denote the firmware level delayed In 8X software the keyboard is disabled during printing Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05A 3 5A Configuration S1 Systems Depth graphics extends into ECG field Immediately after power up the use of print to obtain a Polaroid print sometimes causes a Photomod
91. with ECG trigger When a 2D sector image is stored VCR play is initiated then stopped recalling the image often results in vertical lines through the image In 2D M mode the 2D depth markers and image shift upward slightly when panning to the fifth focal zone accuracy is unaffected Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual TGC curve and 2D image gain are not aligned exists with previous releases of DFT scanheads The M mode sweep is slightly shifted down relative to the 2D image TRT biopsy guide graphics will reappear after leaving dual TRT images This occurs with a single stored image with biopsy guide active after trackball move ment TGC graphics are erased if pan zoom or expand is adjusted Depth graphics extends into ECG field this anomaly also appears in 12X With a hardkey system a blank M mode display results when entering M mode while in VCR play During disk save and recall of HFLA Doppler with ECG the ECG intermit tently changes from black on white to white on black Improper store and recall using store function 1 when HFLA 2D with ECG is stored recalled image is system ECG 2 some HFLA Duplex data is not stored i e Doppler line SV SV depth SV size and SV angle annotation Immediately after power up the use of print to obtain a Polaroid print sometimes causes a Photomodule time out error message The photo is made and the message clears by itself This anomaly also occurs in 12X In
92. 0 disabled Press H4 for CARD DOP CALCS 1 enabled 0 disabled Press H5 for OB DOP CALCS 1 enabled 0 disabled 25X deleted ADMS and added 11 DB Test Pattern Enable Y N Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 28X added 14 Dual Access Connections Y N 15 Dual Linear Connections Y N Press for OB CALCS 11 1 enabled GYN FERT Calcs 0 disabled 31X Deleted Unit Present Added Cineloop Changed CAD Module Enabled to CARD Mode No change to feature function 5 4 2 UM 4 Special and Control Functions 4X through 12X Table 5 2 and Table 5 3 summarize the special function SFUNC and the control function CTRL keys for software releases 4X through 12X In Table 5 2 and Table 5 3 an H as the first letter indicates that a help message exists an N indicates that a help mes sage does not exist If the second letter is an F then that SFUNC or CTRL function key works If the function is also available on the softkey panel the softkey message is in brackets directly below the letters Some CTRL selections have two func tions one when the keyboard is in the ALPHA mode another when the keyboard is in the SFUNC mode These are noted after the description If a note is not included then the selection operates the same in either mode Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 5 4 3 UM 4 Special and Control Functions 17X Information about the special fu
93. 01 TM MODE AUXILIARY A13 7500 0374 XX Jumpers JUMPER OR SWITCH Function Normal Position 7500 0374 Not used Scrolling ATL logo Scrolling logo when OFF Not used UM4 05 66 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 A14 Display Controller PCB HFC PCBs 7500 0300 XX 3500 1409 1410 XX 3500 1480 81 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 525 625 or 3500 Lines Lines lt 0300 04 05 06 07 24 25 28 29 3500 1409 01 02 03 A A R R L L L L L rir r rr mi rir r r mrm gt gt lt lt lt lt lt Z Z Z Z lt zZ lt Z lt Z lt Z z 3500 1410 01 02 03 3500 1480 02 3500 1481 02 1 3500 1409 1410 XX consist of Generic Display Controller 7500 0300 30 with correct crystals and calibration 2 3500 1480 1481 XX consist of Generic Display Controller 7500 0827 XX with correct crystals and calibration 3 Do not order 7500 0300 30 or higher PCBs or 7500 0827 XX PCBs Jumper information is for configuration reference only order the appropriate 3500 assembly to assure receiving a PCB properly configured and adjusted for the specific application UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only 7500 0300 XX 0300 04 06 24 28 PROMs NOTE There are no PROMS required for the Display Controlle
94. 02 04 08 10 or 24 as is appropriate COMMENTS This change renders the PCB as Non Doppler Sync when it was Doppler Sync before 0 4 09 20 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0370 XX S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 02 To 01 System UM 4 Date 8 4 87 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY NONE REWORK INSTRUCTIONS NONE COMMENTS Conversion is not necessary as 02 is backwards compatible Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 21 9 Reference SHIELD BODY ALTERNATE LOCATION FOR JP8 JUMPER BLOCK BOARD ae 01 509 04 01 Figure 7500 0370 UM4 09 22 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 3500 1261 XX 3500 1262 XX PULSE PROCESSOR PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following two 2 pages describe how to REV this PCB from a 3500 1261 01 to a 3500 1262 01 The 3500 1261 01 is a Doppler Sync PCB The 3500 1262 01 is Non Doppler Sync PCB The following chart is a
95. 1 Adjust the ambient lighting and align the monitor brightness and contrast to operator preference 2 Use the applicable procedures in the OEM Service Manuals to adjust hard copy quality to customer preference It is advisable to gain final approval from the end user of the hardcopy rather than to rely on your own personal pref erence or that of the sonographer Retain the final hardcopy for insertion UM4 02B 22 into the Customer Information Direc tory CID Program the institution name date and time Repeat verification of electrical power quality using the UM 4 and its external OEMs as the final load Also review the ambient temperature RF and ESD conditions recorded earlier Record all measurements and observations on the Installation FSR Verify that the tested outlet is clearly marked Install any Manual Changes and Operation Notes into the Operator s Manual Separate OEM manuals can be inserted into the pouches of the same manual Have the Operator s Manual and the Operator s Reference Guide handy for review with the sys tem operator so that questions can be answered during their in service If a CID was not presented during a Pre Installation Inspection update a CID for presentation during the in ser vice Insert all hardcopies taken during system set up Complete and attach a PM sticker to the left side of the monitor Position the system in the optimal loca tion to p
96. 1 to CLOSED SECTOR M MODE A Figure 4 7 TM mode Test Three Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Fault Isolation 4 4 5 2 Display Controller Test Switches Figure 4 8 and Figure 4 9 On the Display Controller PCB only two switches are operational on SW1 S1 2 labeled T1 and S1 3 labeled DOM Figure 4 8 S1 2 T1 injects a horizon tal gray scale pattern into the input of the Display Controller PCB either mode The point at which the test signal is injected into the circuit is shown in Figure 4 9 S1 3 DOM is set to configure the system s video format for either NTSC OPEN or CCIR CLOSED 1 Set 81 2 T1 to CLOSED 2 Verify that a horizontal gray scale pat tern is displayed Figure 4 10 3 Return S1 2 to OPEN NTSC OPEN CCIR CLOSED Figure 4 8 Display Controller Test Location 0 4 04 5 4 Fault Isolation PLAYBACK VIDEO FROM VCR DISPLAY CONTROLLER 14 CONTROL DATA CPU VIDEO FROM PARALLEL TIMING CIRCUITS ALPHA GRAPHICS NUMER IC GEN GENERATOR yy FRAME BU MEMORY 5 DISPLAY DISPLAY DATA MUX FROM 2D AND gt TM SCAN CONVERTERS GRAY BAR GENERATOR EL VIDEO OUTPUT TO DRIVER
97. 10 10 PV 5 7 4 10 5S 7 58 10S 1 Refer to Scanhead Matrix in Section 5 for label definitions 2 Corrected penetration using 0 7 dB MHz phantom 3 5ML allows light rings at 1 4 cm NOTE Scanhead specifications not listed are not available Test for system performance with scanheads that have specifications listed Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02C 11 2C Performance Tests Table 2C 5 Sector Scanhead Image Quality Characteristics Sector Scan head DUPLEX CW Minimum Depth Penetration2 cm Axial Resolu tion mm Lateral Resolu tion mm at Focal Point cm Focal Point cm Near Field Artifact cm D D 3 0 MERCURY DD 2 25 DD 3 0 SPECIAL PURPOSE IVT 3 7 9 2 0 3 0 IVT 5 6 0 0 6 1 5 ICT 7 5 4 1 0 5 2 0 x10 4 0 2 0 1 0 3 5 lt 3 0 3 5 4 5 5 0 7 5 gt 6 3 lt 1 0 40 mm lt 2 0 40 gt 2 5 1 0 40 mm lt 1 0 20 TRT L5 5 Sector also see Linear table 4 3 0 8 1 8 1 Refer to Scanhead Matrix in Section 5 for label definitions 2 Corrected penetration using 0 7 dB MHz phantom Table 2C 6 Annular Array Scanhead Image Quality Characteristics NOTE 7500 0362 04 and higher Beamformer Controller PCBs 7500 0
98. 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C P3 26A 26B 26C 31A 31B 3B 3C 7B 8B 9B 31C 10B 11B 14B 19A 19B 19C MOTOR CONTROLLER A8 Power Fail J 3 16 Reset J 3 18B 30 60 Vilis 1 29A SCAN CONVERTER OUTPUT ADDRESS GEN A11 J 3 44 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A EC 16 168 TEC 5 Volts 13 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 Return J 1 1A 4A 6B 6C 7A 10A 13A 3A 3B 7B 8B 9B 10B 15C 16A 19A 21B 23C 11B 14B 15A 15B 15C 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B 19A 19B 19C 21C J 2 3B 6B 8B 9A 9C 12B 15B 15 Volt Motor 16A 16C 17B 18B 19A Control J 3 20 20B 20C 19C 22B 26B 27A 27C 15 volt Motor 31B 32A 32C Control J 3 22A 22B 22C J 3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A Return J 3 21A 21B 21C 3B 3C 2 3 4 6 8 10 6 Volts 13 32 6 Volts 13 32 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01B 5 1B Power Distribution Table 1B 1 Power Distribution Cont d FAN MODULE 5 Volts Return 15 Volts 15 Volts Analog Ground Reset 15 Volts 15 Volts Analog Ground J 3 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 6C J 2 3B 9A 9C 19A 19C 26B 27 27 32 32 J 3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C J 3 25A 25B 25C 13 27 27 27 13 26 26 26 3 186 P4 9 P4 7 P4 1 2 6 8 10 TM AUXILIARY A13 5 Volts Digital Ground P3 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 6C P3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C DISPLAY CONTROLLER A14 5 Volts Return 15 Volts 15 Volts Analog Ground J 3 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 6C J 3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C J 3
99. 2 plc p o 3000 1325 01 2950 0583 01 Caster 6 Heavy Duty Swivel Lock Len zar 2 plc p o 3000 1326 02 2950 0411 01 Caster 5 Tente w Brake Smooth Stem 2 plc p o 3000 1325 01 2950 0520 01 Caster 6 Heavy Duty Il Total Lock Lenzar 2 plc p o 3000 1326 02 1615 0005 Cap Screw 6 x 20mm DIN912 Caster mtg 4 plc 1065 0468 Spacer EM to Rail 6 plc 1065 0646 01 Cross Brace Lenzar installation 1516 0074 Screw 6 32 x 3 8 PNH INT SEM PD ST ZN 8 plc u w 1065 0646 01 1065 2481 01 Cable Footswitch Tray was 1066 0153 1516 0074 Screw 6 32 x 3 8 PNH INT SEM PD ST ZN 6 plc u w 1066 0153 3500 0484 04 Footswitch 2 Pos FF 2DTM 3500 0486 04 Footswitch 4 Pos FF PRINT VCR 2DTM Note 1 Electronics Module 8 4 Note 1 Optional Equipment Module OEM 8 5 Note 2 Photomodule CAD Module 8 11 Video Copy Processor Peripheral manual Note 3 Audio Video Module 8 7 Repl matrix Note 2 VCR Internally Mounted Note 1 Human Factors Assy HF Module 8 6 Ref 1065 0443 Cable Cleat 3 Pos 1065 0442 Cable Cleat 2 Pos 0 4 08 4 1064 0338 01 Storage Tray w o CAD Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Table 8 1 ATL Part No 1065 0952 02 Description Storage Tray Replaceable Parts 8 UM 4 H
100. 25A 25B 25C 13 27 27 27 J 1 30A 30B 30C 31A 31B 32A 32B 13 26 26 26 SYSTEM CONTROLLER A15 5 Volts Return 4 8V Battery Reset Power Fail UM4 01B 6 13 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6B 6C J 1 10A 10B 13A 13B 21A 21B 21C 23A 24B 24C 25 25 26 27 30 31B 12 19 19 22 13 15 13 18 13 16 24 Volts Return 1 12 1 4 5 LINESCAN RECORDER PAGE PRINTER VGR 5 Volts Return J 4 C 12 4 C 14 23 25 SYSTEM MONITOR 24 Volts Return J 1 A 1 3 J 1 A 2 5 PHOTO MODULE 24 Volts Return J 3 E 1 2 J 3 E 9 15 DATA COMM MODULE 5 Volts Return J 6 F 34 J 6 F 20 23 28 30 35 37 CONTROL MODULE 10 Volts Return J 2 B 1 J 2 B 8 9 REAR PANEL 7500 0318 01 02 5 Volts Return 24 Volts Return 10 Volts Return P1 21 23 P2 9 11 P1 1 3 P1 9 11 P4 1 2 P4 3 4 REAR PANEL 7500 0318 03 above 5 Volts 15 Volts 15 Volts 24 Volts Return 10 Volts Return P3 21 22 P3 32 33 P3 27 28 P3 1 3 P3 9 11 P4 1 2 P4 3 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Table 1B 2 Power Module Connec tions Power Mother Rear Panel Supply board PCB J2 J3 14 Footswitch cable Hardwired in U318 01 02 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Power Distribution 1B Table 1B 3 Power Supply Fuses Power Supply ATL Part Part Number Value Number 1700 0009 02 1700 0002 04 09 11 F201 F202 15A 125V 2700 0072
101. 35CV76 Mercury 2 25 MHz 3 0 MHz DD2 25 DD 3 0 Static Transducers 2 25 MHz 5 0 MHz 10 0 MHz CW2 25 CW 5 0 CW10 0 Duplex CW Scanhead 3 0 MHz 2 0 MHz D D 3M Specialty Scanheads IVT 5 0 MHz mech l MFI 5 0 7 5 MHz IVT 5 0 MHz 11mm Radius Array IVT ICT 7 5 MHz TRT 5 0 MHz linear TRT 5 5 MHz sector IVT 5 5 0MFI 7 5MFI IVT 5 0 ICT 7 5 TRT L5 TRT S5 1 Not available on Ultramark 4A systems 0 4 05 83 5 Configuration Table 5 6 UM 4 Scanhead Compatibility Matrix SCANHEAD TYPE SCANHEAD NAME PART NO I HARDWARE NOTES STATIC TRANSDUCERS PRB 2 25 MHz CW Dop 126 26900 PRB 5 0 MHz CW Dop 126 26900 PRB 10 0 MHz CW Dop 126 26900 LINEAR ARRAYS DFT 3 5 Ziff Conn 4000 0162 New Conn UM 4 8 DFT 5 0 Ziff Conn 4000 0163 New Conn UM 4 8 LA 7 5 HR 4000 0179 LA 5 0 HR 4000 0187 ACCESS Access A 3L 733 101 24900 01 06 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 Access A 3M 733 101 24900 02 07 13 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 Access A 5ML 733 101 24900 03 08 14 20 26 32 38 44 50 56 62 Access A 5M 733 101 24900 04 09 15 21 27 33 39 45 51 57 Access A 3 Multi 734A 101 24900 05 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 Access A 5 Multi 101 24900 11 17 23 29 35 41 734AD 47 53 59 Access 3 Multi 101 25910 01 02 04 06 08 10 12 Access B 5 Multi 101 25910 03 05 07 11 13 14 Multi
102. 4 Verify that the AC line voltage is within the specified tolerance with the load applied There must be less than 3 VAC RMS measured between neu tral and ground with full load 5 Verify that waveform distortion com mon mode noise and normal mode noise are within the specifications Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Preventive Maintenance 2D included in the General Service Manual 6 If a wiring fault has been discovered advise the customer immediately to have it corrected as soon as possible 7 Ensure that there is no noise generat ing equipment plugged into the same AC line as the ATL system Refer to the General Field Service Adjustment Procedure and perform the Power Line Test if there appears to be a problem 8 Affix a Power Line Data sticker next to the qualified outlets in the primary operational areas Advise the cus tomer to use only the qualified outlet for the system and its associated peripherals 2D 5 3 2 Electrostatic Discharge 1 Ask the system operators about their experiences with static discharge 2 Verify the presence of ESD if possible 3 Discuss preventive measures includ ing static mats sprays and humidifi ers 2D 5 3 3 Radio Frequency Interference Note any potential RF generators that can inject noise into the system Typical gener ating devices may include gel warmers coffee pots air conditioners fans comput ers lab equipment surgical equipment treadm
103. 4 93 NOTE The following CAD related parts were removed from the Domestic Mas ter Spares Kit These parts will need to be ordered as required and in addition to the UM 4 Master Spares Kit for repair of a Domestic UM 4CAD system A forth coming kit will be created that includes these parts Part Number Description Qty Req d 4000 0225 05 CAD Module 1 4252 0486 02 CAD Disk 1 4252 0486 03 CAD Disk 1 4252 0486 04 CAD Disk 1 4252 0486 05 CAD Disk 1 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 63 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO E a Y F Y S ervice Bulletin G Date July 6 1993 S B No UM4 136 Rev A To All Domestic Field Service Personnel E C N No Author David D Vega PROBLEM EFFECTIVITY CAUSE SOLUTION HINTS UM4 07 64 AG 5700 on UM 4 Small Cart Jittery or wavy playback image UM 4 Small Cart systems with an AG 5700 VCR The AG 5700 VCR is sensitive to any vibration while it is in the RECORD mode The vibration is interpreted by the VCR as a jittery or wavy image and is recorded by the video as such Possible causes include an out of balance or defective fan on the system and or system location i e on an upper floor and or next to an elevator Advise the user that in order to obtain jitter free and wave free images they should not subject the UM 4 system to any kind of vibration or movement while the VCR is inthe RECORD mode If user o
104. 4 Field Service Manual 7 Service Bulletins DATE TO October 27 1988 All Field Service Personnel AUTHOR Bob Morrisson Slow PROMs Potential Cause of Lock ups WITH ATTACHMENTS YESL SERVICE BULLETIN WITH PARTS YESL S B NO E C N NO INFO 67 NOTE This service bulletin does not address software or firmware compatibility Use the Replacement Matrix for compatibility issues Manufacturing has informed us that some of the UM 4 and UM 8 PCBs being returned from the field have 8K x 8 450 nanosecond PROMS installed in them Manufacturing has also identified these 8K x 8 450 nanosec ond as the cause of intermittent lock ups and erratic operation of the UM 4 and UM 8 based systems If you are having intermittent or erratic operation of a UM 4 or UM 8 it would be worthwhile to check for 8K x 8 450 nanosecond PROMs On the UM 4 check the manufacturing part numbers of the following PROMs LOC A4 1 A4 S2 A5 S1 A5 S2 A7 A7 A8 S1 A12 A12 A V Mod PCB Beamformer Controller Beamformer Controller Pulse Processor Pulse Processor Doppler Processor Doppler Processor Motor Controller T M Mode T M Combination Keyboard Ctr VCR Interface PCB Part No 7500 0324 XX 7500 0362 XX 7500 0313 XX 7500 0370 XX 7500 0347 XX 7500 0390 XX 7500 0305 XX 7500 0322 XX 7500 0411 XX 7500 0283 XX 7500 0395 XX Ref U31 U32 U33 U34 U78 U70 U39 U108 U27
105. 4000 0144 HFC CART L Bracket 3000 0112 02 and OEM Modules HFC CART Block 3000 0112 02 1 HFC Cart Block 3000 0112 02 Compatibility Chart for the Human Factors Extnd HFC Block 3000 0231 01 Reference 9A Univers HFC L Bracket 3000 0249 01 No dash 60 06 662 01 61 amp 02 62 03 63 amp 04 64 05 65 07 67 08 68 09 692 3 10 702 3 4 11 715 12 726 13 737 148 1 L Bracket and Block refer to the attachment method between and OEM modules 2 HFC modules configured with longer monitor and keyboard cables which reach the EM The others require extension cables Compatible with CAD hand controller Phillips head screws replace the friction retainer pins for keyboard support assembly pins Adds Lenzar cable management 4 40 inch cap head allen screws replace phillips head screws note 4 Deletes two Belleville cone washers 1563 0061 and adds two Keps nuts 1543 0002 which are locked down with the standard 10 32 nuts 1543 0001 after monitor arm tension is set N 8 14 and higher and the 60 series incorporates oil filled dampers instead of gas shocks CAUTION Do not use pin removal tool P N 6005 0563 01 for removing the upper gas spring pivot pins on 4000 0144 10 and above versions of the Human Factors Module The pins on 10 and 11 modules are secured with P
106. 47 5 0 MHz M L Access A 47 3 0 MHz L Access A 47 3M 5M 7 5S Access A 47 Scanhead 2 25 MHz M Access C Dynamic Range 3 0 MHz M Access C 5 0 MHz M L Access C 7 5 MHz S Access C 5S 7 5S 10S Access C 1 POWER and GAIN values displayed on the screen may vary 1 digit but shall not exceed 100 2 DEPTH values displayed on the screen can vary 3 digits 3 Select frequency of scanhead then press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system before reading UM4 02C 6 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2C 6 Miscellaneous Controls To perform steps 1 through 3 on a UM 4 with a softkey control module first press FORMAT on the main panel 1 Press B W and verify that the tonal val ues of the image and the graybars are reversed i e from black to white or white to black Return the image to its normal state Press L R and verify that the image reverses from left to right observe the traingle or asterisk in the image area Return the image to its normal state Press UP DOWN and verify that the image is inverted top to bottom Return the image to its normal state Perform the following steps to test the real time clock hardware and soft ware and the NiCad batteries or Super Caps used to power the clock while the system power is switched off a Press lt CTRL gt Z on the alphanu meric keyboard b Enter the date and time on the
107. 5700 1065 0511 03 Base OEM Plate Slide OEM 1064 2106 0 Plate Keyboard Mounting UM4 PLUS 1 1065 4089 0 Panel Left Side 3 1065 4093 0 Panel Right Side 3 1064 0521 0 Tray S H UM4A 3 1065 1290 0 Scanhead Holder Urethane 1 1064 0532 0 Frame 1 Tubing Extended 26 5 front to back 2 AG5700 1065 0534 0 Mounting Bracket Monitor 2 1064 1287 0 Tray Right S H 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09A 3
108. 75 3 75 MHz Access C 2 25 2 0 MHz Access C 3M 2 31 MHz Access C 5M 3 75 MHz Access C 5ML 3 75 MHz Duplex CW 2 31 MHz The duplex CW Doppler frequency is for both the AA amp CW portions of the scanhead UM4 05 86 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Software Release 11X and higher Configuration 5 Table 5 9 Software Related Anomalies Symptom Intermittent lateral shift or jerk in sector depth dependent Access scanhead Fault Isolation Verify Motor Controller software at 8000 0133 08 per PROM Replacement Matrix Corrective Action Install PROM kit 8000 0133 08 if not present 11X and higher A system lockup occurs when changing from an annular array scanhead to an IVT Verify Motor Controller software at 8000 0133 08 per PROM Replacement Matrix Install PROM kit 8000 0133 08 if not present OB Difficulty installing Monitor module 3500 0426 00 Check for presence of dress plate used only on UM 4 HFC Remove dress plate before installation and return it with the defec tive monitor module assembly UMAA CV and PV Overheating of the isolation transformer Fuse in Power Distribu tion module too high in value Should be 3 0V 120V or 1 5V 240V Troubleshoot cause of overload then replace external fuse or Power Distribution module internal fuse 12X 16X and 17X Loss of M mode TGC
109. 7500 0273 16 17 Use 6220 0095 03 Field Mod Scan Converter UM 5 For 7500 0273 20 21 Use 6220 0095 02 Field Mod Scan Converter UM 5 For 7500 0273 10 11 Use 6220 0095 04 Field Mod Scan Converter UM 4 UM4 07 36 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 STRATEGY International Dealers should order required kit quantities from Solingen West Ger Cont d many Service International Affiliates should order required kit quantities from Bothell WA USA Service Operations Domestic This defect has not been a problem domestically However PCBs will be updated in the factory Systems will be updated as 2 D SC Interface PCBs are replaced for failure and not on a next call basis Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 37 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y 1 1 Y S ervice Bulletin G Date February 25 1994 S B No UM4 118 Rev C To Field Service Personnel C O No Author Laurence J Simanek UM 4A Power Distribution Assembly Part Numbers 3500 1094 1095 1096 Domestic 3500 1094 01 02 03 120V 100V International 3500 1095 01 02 220V 240V 3500 1096 01 02 03 240V in 120V out This bulletin supersedes Service Bulletin UM4 118 UM4 118 Rev and UM4 118 Rev PROBLEM In the AC input receptacle of the Power Distribution Assembly UM 4A only the fuses may repeatedly blow and or the fuse holder may show signs of melting Refer to Figure 1
110. A V Module Repair or replace A V Mod ule Configuration Section 5 System Controller PCB A15 Check System Controller PCB Repair or replace System Controller PCB A15 Configuration Section 5 EM Motherboard Check motherboard Repair or replace EM Motherboard Configuration Section 5 Display Controller PCB A14 Check Display Controller PCB Repair or replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 Rear Panel PCB Check Rear Panel PCB Repair or replace Rear Panel PCB Configuration Section 5 uonejos r 8c vO vIAn enuey 4 v MODEL 0 4 PROBLEM CATEGORY PERIPHERALS Cont d Symptom Possible Cause Fault Isolation Solution Reference Error message SCR Recorder printing when 1 Wait for completion of print PRINTER BUSY ON PRINT is pressed cycle ENTRY Interconnect cable Check cable Repair or replace cable Error message SCR Recorder printing when Wait for completion of print PRINTER BUSY EXIT PRINT is pressed cycle ERROR No power to recorder Check recorder power 1 Apply power to recorder switch and power cable No power to A V Module 1 Check power to A V Mod 1 Apply power to A V Module ule Interconnect cable Check cable 1 Repair or replace cable Error message MI Camera in warm up 1 Allow camera to warm up CAMERA BUSY ON cycle abou
111. A sector scanhead is connected to the sys tem The system is set to its power up default val ues except that a sector scanhead is selected The footswitches are connected to the sys tem The Main panel is displayed on the softkey control panel 1 Connect an ECG harness to the UM 4 ECG connector on the Scanhead Con nector Panel 2 Connect the ECG harness to a subject For this test the technician perform ing the test may also act as the sub ject 3 Onthe softkey Main panel press ECG and on the ECG panel press ECG ON On the hardkey control panel press ECG TRIGGER 4 Verify that the ECG trace begins to scroll across the bottom of the 2D image UM4 02C 18 5 On the softkey control panel press TRGSEL or on the hardkey control panel press TRIGGER SELECT 6 Verify thatthe solid line onthe right end of the ECG display Trigger Cursor 1 has changed to a dotted line Trigger Cursor 2 Verify that the trackball or joystick moves the trigger point on the trace while the dotted line remains stationary 2C 9 3 Doppler If an Access scanhead with a Doppler arm is used with the system under test connect it to the system before beginning this test A CW static transducer should also be con nected if used with the system 1 Press XDR then press ACCESS on the Transducer Select panel to select the connected mechanical scanhead and press RETRN 2 Press FOCUS on the 2D Image Pro cessing panel
112. Access connector and or the EFT IVT connector AND the linear connec tor are present not by whether or not the customer has a linear scanhead Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 SECTION 1 PLUS SYSTEMS To order an EM the core part number as well as the feature part numbers must be listed onthe order There should be atotal of two part numbers for linear only systems without Frame Grabber three part numbers of linear only systems with Frame Grabber four part numbers of sector linear systems without Frame Grabber or five part numbers for sector linear systems with Frame Grabber see Example A These part numbers determine the EM hardware configuration ONLY The soft ware level must be referenced in the comment section of the order Also note in the comment section whether the system is a UM 4PLUS or a UM 4APLUS NOTE The part numbers below have an 8500 prefix GRP Description Feature System Type Part Number Core EM 120V 60 Hz 1001 02 CW Duplex 1 Core EM 120V 60 Hz 1060 01 Dual Linear Core EM 120V 60 Hz 1001 06 Linear Only UM 4 UM 4A Sector w CW Dup 1005 02 1005 02 2 Sector Linear 1014 03 1014 03 S L w CW Duplex 1014 04 1014 04 Sector w Dual Lin 1059 01 1059 01 Single Acc w EFT 1029 03 1029 03 3 Sin Acc W EFT Dop 1029 11 1029 11 Dual Acc w EFT 1029 07 1029 07 Dual Acc w EFT amp Dop 1029 13 1029 13 ECG M mode 1013 02 1013 02 4 M mode only 1013 01 1026 01 w o M mode ECG 1013 03 1013 03 5 w F
113. Addi tionally replacement software may not have the same lt CTRL L gt code as the orig inal For example the replacement soft ware for the Motor Controller PCB in 12X through 25X systems is software build 24 08 it has a CTRL L code of 482403 refer to 5 3 Compatibility How to use Matrices 1 Note the configuration system fea tures and software build Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 2 Troubleshootthe system to the PCB or module level 3 Remove the bad PCB and determine the PCB part and dash numbers NOTE Do notreturn suspected bad parts at this time Retain parts in their original condition for 1 later failure analysis and 2 the possibility that their reinstallation may be necessary for further troubleshoot ing 4 Use the PCB replacement matrix to determine the replacement PCB The correct replacement level is denoted by an or an L in the replacement level column for the software build Pay special attention to the FEA TURES and NOTES columns and their code explanations at the bottom of the table 5 If PROMs are required refer to the PROM matrix and order the appropri ate firmware for the PCB 6 Ifconvertability is required refer to the Up Down Rev Instructions to verify you have on hand the components required to modify the replacement PCB for the system 7 When ordering from the PCB and PROM replacement matrices a Provide the following inf
114. Adjust brightness and contrast con trols fully CCW Adjust 19 Brightness Limit until retrace lines are visible Readjust brightness and contrast 3 5 5 Assembly 4 5 Set system power to OFF Install cover on bezel 0 4 03 7 3 Adjustments 3 6 Aspect ACM and ALM Monitor Adjustments Figure 3 6 WARNING High voltages exist within the monitor Use care during adjustment Perform the following video monitor adjust ments with a VCR and scanhead con nected NOTE When two controls are called out the first pertains to the ACM Monitor and the second to the ALM Monitor for example R48 R108 3 6 1 Preparation 1 Turn system power off remove moni tor cover and polaroid filter 2 Verify jumper J8 is to the left for 525 line video or to the right for 625 line video 3 Turn system and VCR power on Warm up monitor for ten minutes 4 Verify correct date is displayed on the monitor Also verify TGC PRESET is shown in lower right of screen If a Hospital ID lt CTRL E gt B3 has not been entered enter ATL Ultrasound 3 6 2 Contrast and Brightness 1 Place system in linear mode 2 Set CONTRAST to maximum and BRIGHTNESS to minimum 3 Adjust G2 grid 2 pot R48 or R103 until linear image is just visible in a normally lighted room 4 Set CONTRAST to minimum and BRIGHTNESS to maximum Verify screen is uniformly gray with no retrace lines UM4 03 8 5 Adjus
115. Adjustments 3 1 Materials and Equipment 3 2 Monitor Arm Tension Adjustment Figure 3 1 1 Fully extend monitor arm Remove Oscilloscope upper and lower monitor arm covers Extender PCB 7500 0269 Test pattern video tape 199 19087 00 2 Tighten tension nuts on arm to 16 inch tweeker 6005 0230 01 dampen movement Figure 3 1 Sector overlay 124 22357 3 Replace covers Tension Nut One or Two EN 45 111101017 VES 01 503 01 01 Figure 3 1 HFC Monitor Arm Tension Adjustment Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 03 1 3 Adjustments 3 3 Power Supply Figure 3 2 3 Connect DVM common lead to COM test jack on power supply Connect 1 Set system power to OFF and discon other lead to jack corresponding to nect scanheads voltage under test Figure 3 2 4 Check 5 6 and 15 analog volt 2 Remove front bezel and card cage outputs are according to specifications shield in Table 3 1 Adjust if necessary Adjustments All other labeled points are test points
116. After completing a planimetry measurement the pan zone function can be activated causing the image to move sideways without the cursor tracing The scale does not change Obstetrical Calculations 7 Because of differences in HC AC ratio calculations between version 32 X software and earlier versions confusion may exist at multiple system sites using more than one version of system software In systems with software prior to 32 X the normal range offered for an HC AC ratio is based the Average Ultrasound Age AUA instead of gestational age calculated from the Last Menstrual Period LMP See manual change 4705 0001 37 for more information on HC AC ratios in systems with software prior to 32 X In systems with 32 X software the normal range offered for an HC AC ratio is based on gestational age calculated from the Last Menstrual Period LMP To prevent confusion at multiple system sites where more than one version of system software may exist be sure to identify the software version of the system on which you are working by observing the system software label This label is located in the upper left corner of the lower front panel on the system Labels that read Software Level 32 indicate version 32 X software Systems without such a software label contain a previous software version Any age or estimated date of delivery EDD determined by last menstrual period LMP occurring in a leap year 1992 1996 may be inaccurate by a day For e
117. B S H SHLDR SK SKT SS SW TB TBA TBD TBL TERM UM U M U W VAC VCR VDC VID W W O WHT XFMR Replaceable Parts 8 Philips Head Places Part Of Positive Position Pan Head Power Supply Power Peripheral Vascular Ultramark 4PV Reference Tabbed Section Right Hand Round Replace s Receptacle Right Stand Alone Should Be Scanhead Shouldered Softkey Socket Stainless Steel Switch Trackball To Be Added To Be Determined Table Terminal Ultramark Unit of Measure Use With Voltage Volts Alternating Current Video Cassette Recorder Volts Direct Current Video With Without White Transformer Zero Insertion Force UM4 08 3 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 1 ATL Part No Description UM 4 Human Factors Cart HFC 3500 1325 01 Rail Assy w o Lenzar 5 Casters Set of 2 rail assys 3500 1326 02 Rail Assy w Lenzar 6 Casters Set of 2 rail assys 1065 2482 01 Tubular Rail Smooth Stem 2 plc was 1065 1095 02 2950 0186 01 Cap Plastic Screw Cover 4 plc 2950 0186 00 Base Plastic Screw Cover 4 plc 1064 0545 01 End Cap Rail 4 plc 1517 0063 01 Set Screw 8 32 x 3 8 HD Cup PT ST ZN 8 plc 1530 0036 01 Screw 5 16 24 x 5 8 SKH CS HD SS 6 plc tubular rails only 1561 0017 Washer Int Lk 5 16 ST ZN 6 plc 2950 0411 02 Caster 5 Tente w Swivel Lock Smooth Stem
118. BELL E CONE WASH Figure 1 10 32 NUT Service Bulletins 7 ES 002 ER 2 PLAC NITOR ARM ES P N 1543 0001 01 SVCB 016 01 UM4 07 47 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES No WITH PARTS YES Service Bulletin PAGE 1 OF 1 Date November 5 1992 S B UM4 127 Rev To Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Laurence J Simanek Mis Configured 2D Scan Converter Interface PCB in the UM 4 Systems PROBLEM The possibility exists that the UM 4 2D Scan Converter Interface PCB 7500 0273 xx is mis configured resulting ina measurement error or inaccu rate display All revision levels must be checked to insure proper configuration SCOPE This bulletin affects all material in CSR car stock upgrade kits or any stocking locations A purge notice has been issued to the field organization Domestic and international customers will need to be audited per the customer lists attached EFFECTIVITY Immediate purge of all stock locations Customer verification and purge Program start NOVEMBER 13 1992 Program completion MARCH 31 1993 CAUSE Installation of an incorrect Crystal at position Y1 on the PCB and mis configura tion of the jumper at JR1 MATERIAL If a mis configured 2D Scan Converter Interface PCB is discovered order and replace through normal ordering process SOLUTION 1 All materials in car stock airb
119. CAD softkey too soon after initial power up To preventthis from occurring wait for about 15 seconds after Switching power on before pressing the CAD softkey Distorted or blank images may be captured and stored if a Page capture is attempted with a frozen image Use Page capture with real time images only Images captured using linear scanheads will not be synchronized to the video rate and may appear distorted or contain blank video frames when replayed Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetry measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 4 06 21 Section 7 Service Bulletins Service Bulletins Start on the next page Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 1 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES SERVICE BULLETIN WITH PARTS YESj DATE April 5 1988 ET TO All Field Service Personnel S B NO O 53 Rev AUTHOR David D Vega E C N NO UM 4 UM 8 and 4000
120. CTRL X Reset VCR Counter SFUNC NN NF NF NF CTRL Y Doppler Arm Local Remote HF LCL RMT NF LCL RMT N LCL RMT F LCL RMT NF LCL RMT CTRL 2 Clock Calendar Set HF NF NF NF SFUCT CTRL Doppler Grid ON OFF Refer to appropriate operation manual section U First Letter F Feature is functional N Not functional for that software version H Help Message Second Letter N No Help Message NOTE There are no CTRL functions for D F G R T V UM4 05 34 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 5 5 Ultramark 4 Hardware Configuration See the following PROM and Jumper Matrices All system configuration electronic equip ment or replaceable parts descriptions will include line voltage and video format when applicable If only one dash level is listed for a software feature then that dash is acceptable to both video formats or line voltages For example PCB PART NAME PART NUMBER past Display Controller 7500 0300 16 17 Power Supply 1700 0010 02 1700 0011 02 02 Delay Controller 7500 4031 Definitions EIA is the 525 line video format standard of which NTSC is the color subset CCIR is the 625 line video format stan dard of which PAL is the color subset Some countries apply different safety requirements than those generally encountered in the United States Where applicable the safety age
121. CW or Mercury scanheads UM4 07 66 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 6 1 Unique Part Numbers Part Number Description System Software Labels place on front cover of Electronics Module 4100 0929 01 Label Software Level 32 English 4100 0930 01 Label Software Level 32 French 4100 0931 01 Label Software Level 32 German System Controller PCB 7500 0312 12 64 66 8000 0598 19 Kit Software 32 04 English 81 32 04 4201 0937 18 PROM U16 4201 0938 18 PROM U17 4201 0939 18 PROM U18 4201 0940 18 PROM U19 4201 0941 18 PROM 033 4201 0942 18 PROM U34 4201 0943 18 PROM U35 4201 0944 18 e PROM 036 8000 0599 19 Kit Software 32 04 French 82 32 04 4201 0945 18 PROM U16 4201 0946 18 PROM U17 4201 0947 18 e PROM 018 4201 0948 18 PROM U19 4201 0949 18 PROM U33 4201 0950 18 PROM U34 4201 0951 18 e PROM 035 4201 0952 18 PROM U36 8000 0600 19 Kit Software 32 04 German 83 32 04 4201 0953 18 PROM U16 4201 0954 18 PROM U17 4201 0955 18 PROM U18 4201 0956 18 PROM U19 4201 0957 18 PROM U33 4201 0958 18 PROM U34 4201 0959 18 PROM U35 4201 0960 18 PROM U36 Motor Controller 7500 0348 09 027 11 12 U33 60 61 62 8000 0133 15 Kit Software
122. DISPLAY CONTROLLER PCB E SINGLE BOARD CPU PCB B SYSTEM MONITOR CAD VIDEO IN CAD VIDEO OUT HARD DRIVE lt I FLOPPY DRIVE gt PARALLEL SYSTEM CONTROLLER PCB 40 40 10 VIDEO RAM BUSES 1 amp 2 40 40 40 VIDEO gt MEMORY RAM lt PRINTER AUX VIDEU ejeqyueis S VL enuey 4 v 6 VLO vVIND 42018 g vi 10 608 1053 10 DATA INTERFACE E ISOLATORS MUX AND DRIVERS FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER ISOLATORS FLOPPY DISK DRIVE A FLOPPY DISK DRIVE B RS 232 PORTS ejeg uiejs S Section 1B Power Distribution INTERNAL UNREGULATED 15V MC FAN CONTROL MODULE 15V MC PRIMARY PCB 10V RECTIFIERS 145V MC MOTOR CHAN
123. Default Configuration User defaults for transducer type are changed on the A1 defaults menu The fol lowing are the hardkey selection sequence TRT Linear Linear IVT TRT Sector EFT Annular Access NO Of WD The following lists the hidden defaults starting with 16X Press CTRL E and then 1 to gain access to the hidden defaults To configure the system refer to the COA and use the keyboard to enter the correct codes Y N 0 1 as indicated by the prompt on the video screen To verify the hidden default configuration press 12 After setting the desired defaults press the DEL key to save the settings and exit the Default Menu Default Name Setting Note 1 Full Feature VCR Y N Smart AV 2 Small VCR HFC Y N 3 M Mode Present Y N 4 Doppler Present Y N 5 ECG Present Y N 6 Redig Enable Y N Frame Grab UM4 05 30 7 Data Comm Y N Disk Drive Enabled 8 2 Disk Drives Y N 9 TRT Biopsy Y N Enabled 10 HRLA Present Y N 5 0 HRLA 7 5 MHz HFLA Press H1 for OB CALCS 1 enabled 0 disabled Press H2 for CARD CALCS 1 enabled 0 disabled 23X deleted TRT Biopsy and added 9 CAD Mode Y N Enabled 10 CAD Unit Present Y N 11 ADMS Enable Y N never released 12 HFLA Present Y N 5 0 HRLA or 7 5 MHz HFLA 13 Updated Doppler Board CW Duplex Y N Yes 0511 04 or lower receiver No 0511 05 higher receiver Press H3 for PV CALCS 1 enabled
124. Designations 6 Verify rear panel connectors are seated correctly Figure 1C 1 and that all screws are in place 7 On the HFC s OEM verify that cables from power strip assembly are secure ly connected to peripheral devices 8 Verify that cables from EM to peripher als are properly and securely con nected 9 Insure proper switch configuration of installed OEMs per instructions in appropriate peripheral manuals 2B 4 7 HFC Assembly 1 Position front OEM bezel on locating pins and secure with two screws Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2 Position both A2 ground straps over bushings on EM so that when front shield is installed ground straps are secured between shield and bushings by mounting screws Install front shield over card cage and secure with five screws Position front EM bezel on locating pins and secure with two screws Position rear OEM bezel on OEM and secure with four screws If necessary mount monitor onto Hu man Factors monitor platform Figure 2B 7 using the following steps UM4 02B 13 2B Installation WARNING Use caution when removing the bands securing the monitor arm or releasing the monitor latch If the monitor is not mounted the arm can spring upwards and cause injury a Extend monitor arm b Feed monitor cable through ac cess hole in monitor platform c Insert monitor shaft through ac cess hole in monitor platform d Install mounting collar flat side up
125. Dual Trace Voltmeter Digital 4 3 General Troubleshooting Steps Although each problem is unique the fol lowing steps are usually useful to help iso late the problem and troubleshoot the system 1 Verify the complaint 2 Identify other problems or symptoms by performing performance tests 3 Perform a visual inspection including all cables and PCBs 4 Checkthe power supply for loose con nectors and verify output voltages 5 Simplify the system configure the sys tem in the minimum possible configu Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual ration for which the problem still exists Refer to paragraph 4 8 6 Referto Table 4 6 in this section to iso late problems observed during perfor mance tests 4 4 LED Status Indicators Status indicators are provided on three PCBs in the UM 4 card cage see Figure 4 1 The Motor Controller A8 and System Controller A15 PCBs each have a set of LEDs that can be used to aid troubleshooting in the field LEDs on the Pulse Processor A5 PCB are not gener ally useful in troubleshooting 4 4 1 Motor Controller LEDs Figure 4 1 Table 4 1 The four LEDs on the Motor Controller PCB DS1 through DS4 indicate the type of scanhead currently selected This is a combined function of the input connector selected and the scanhead attached to that connector Table 4 1 interprets the legitimate combinations of LEDs When the LED code does not correctly identify the scanhead c
126. ES01 B10 01 1 gt 70V AND 70V USED ON S2 SYSTEMS 2 gt 1 1 EXCEPT FOR 3500 1096 XX 80V AND 80V USED ON 51 SYSTEMS WHICH IS 2 1 240V IN 120V OUT Figure 1B 1 Power Module Block Diagram Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UMA 01B 1 ELECTRONICS MODULE 5 VOLTS RETURN SYSTEM POWER MODULE 120 240 VOLTS AC RETURN 120 240 VAC AUDIO VIDEO MODULE 5 VOLTS 5 VOLT RRTN AN P2 EO1 22 25 VOLT UNREG DC VCR DIGITAL INTERFACE SCR OR 120 240 PAGE PRINTER VAC MATRIX CAMERA P6 1 M 13 AUX 24 MONITOR MODULE 12 VOLTS AMPLIFIERS PWR SUPPLY 12 VOLTS 5 VOLTS 5 VOLT RETURN 12 VOLT RETURN 24 VOLTS VCR STEREO INTERFACE P1 2 24 VOLT RETURN PHOTO MODULE UMA 01B 2 Figure 1B 2 01 ESO1 B11 01 Module Power Distribution Ultramark 6 Field Service Manual Power Distribution 1B J7 SV RAILS 5 ALL ANALOG amp DIGITAL PCBs 1 DIGITAL 2 CIRCUIT E E MOTHERBOARD 2725 24V 36 P1 REA MONITOR PAN 1 E 32 32 34 34 umm v 24 15 170 1 gt 70 80V 6 6 HV RET 15VMC 1 70 80V MOTOR CONTROLLER PULSE PROCESSOR
127. Examine the A3 A5 RF coax cable Replace if frayed or connectors are loose 8 Checkthe ground strap attached to the A2 PCB Make sure it is securely sol dered to the PCB clean and makes good contact to the EM front shield Screw 9 Repeat step 8 for the A4 PCB if itis a 03 and has a similar ground strap 10 Use contact cleaner on the EM front panel scanhead connectors 11 If these steps have not resolved the problem order and install A2 A3 A4 and A5 PCBs Power Supply A2 to A4 ribbon cables e Chabin cables Linear scanhead connector 4 11 4 AA Image Quality Tests NOTE Perform Linear image quality tests including Power Supply before testing AA image quality AA scanheads share most of the linear front end but also use the Motor Con troller PCB The following tests are performed while scanning the phantom Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 1 Fault Isolation 4 Set system controls as follows POWER OUT 100 percent PUT REJECT 1 Special Function O EDGE ENHANCEMENT 1 GRAYSCALE 2 SMOOTHING F1 CTRL B DEPTH Maximum DYNAMIC 58 dB 47 dB 16 RANGE FOCAL ZONES 6 2 Adjust power and TGC controls to obtain a uniform distribution of back ground texture echoes to the greatest depth possible while maintaining echo free cysts Press FREEZE and evaluate penetra tion and lateral and axial resolution Penetration Penetration is the
128. Features Data Comm disk functions VCR status on screen e Optional Data Comm RS232 dual floppy no modem 5 0 MHz IVT TRT UM4 05 14 5 MHz and 10 MHz CW Doppler The lt CNTL gt L codes are available with 11X System Controller firmware and higher The lt CNTL gt L feature allows the user to determine the system configura tion by interrogating certain modules to establish their presence in the system The modules either return a 6 character code or a NOT INSTALLED message The codes are listed below The first two characters denote the module BF Beamformer Controller PCB 48 Motor Controller 7500 0348 XX 04 Motor Controller 7500 0304 XX p2 Pulse Processor S2 system s1 Pulse Processor S1 system dp Doppler Processor TA TM Aux or TM Aux Combo VCR Smart A V Module The third and fourth characters denote the firmware level The last two characters denote the revision level Problems Corrected Field reports contain occasional refer ences to system lockups when depth zoom or other keyboard changes occur e With the linear scanhead focus set to zone 5 entering M line automatically moves the skinline off of the video screen and disables the depth control Image quality of the 2D update during M mode operation is marginal radial lines and extreme far field noise remains after zoom and depth have been used Dual mode images contain noise when SELECT is toggled too qui
129. Focus A3 Pulse Processor A5 Doppler Acquisition A6 Doppler Pro cessor A7 and Motor Controller A8 4 Verify secure connection of ribbon cables between Beamformer Front End A2 and Beamformer Controller A4 PCBs if installed and between 2D Scan Converter Interface A9 and 2D Scan Converter Buffer A10 PCBs The tracer stripe must be on the bottom edge of all ribbon cables 5 On systems with ECG verify that rib bon cable connector on front edge of TM mode Scan Converter PCB A12 is securely seated and is positioned as shown in Figure 2B 6 The tracer stripe on the ribbon cable must be on the bottom edge Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Pulse Processor Slot 15 F Connectors 1 0 Installation 2B Ground Strap Slot AI 240V N STBY ON 120V Ribbon Cables Tracer strip must be on bottom NOTE Cables are not shown properly dressed to eliminate noise Ribbon Cables Tracer stripe must be on bottom Footswitch Motor Controllers RF Connectors Ground Strap 01 ESO2 A07 02 Figure 2B 6 Electronics Module PCB Slot
130. Generally red switches have a CLOSED label and black have an ON label e RED dipswitches are CLOSED on when positioned down toward the PCB e Black dipswitches are ON closed when positioned up away from PCB UM 4 Scanhead Compatibility Matrix Figure 5 5 Key 1 TYPE The type or series of scanhead is listed in bold print at the beginning of each category Not all scanhead cate gories may be supported by a specific system Categories include static transducers linear arrays access Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual annular arrays specific applications TRT IVT ICT and 72X SCANHEAD NAME The common name for the scanhead PART NO The base part number of the scanhead Only those part num bers stocked and shipped by ATL Cus tomer Service are included DASH NO The current revision num ber of the scanhead BKWD COMP Backward compatibil ity This column indicates which pre vious revision scanheads can be replaced by the current revision FWD COMP Forward compatibility This column indicates if a specific dash level can replace a higher revision scanhead HARDWARE NOTES Reserved for additional comments X including detailed backward compatibility information SYSTEM SW COMPATIBILITY These columns indicate compatibility of the various scanheads to the sys tems listed The coding in the columns indicate lowest software revision level tested and
131. IVT after selecting annular from IVT Lateral measurements with 10 PV using 5 short were inaccurate by as much as 796 M mode focal zone graphics do not match when a focal zone other than the nearest was selected Modified the biopsy guide calibration warning 2D sector displays wedges of both real time and frozen data when 2D update is turned off in M mode and M mode depth is set UM4 05 19 5 Configuration Graphics problem when recalling a stored image after another scanhead is selected Hitting focus button on hardkey systems while IVT is in use caused system mal function message Background gray level changes when an image is stored then going to VCR play back When ECG was enabled the portion of the CW Doppler graphics that were within the ECG zone were blanked The month was missing one digit if you entered and exited Doppler in the same minute Local remote user default had no effect Both d arm and trackball were active at the same time The annular array scanhead did not automatically go to half frame rate when smooth 3 was selected In linear operation pressing FREEZE then switching to dual image update of the real time image is not performed on the right side fo the scan plane During VCR search if an invalid number was entered was displayed in the gray bar and could not be erased Known Problems 4705 0010 02 Ultramark 4CAD Ultra sound System Operating Notes and Errata lists th
132. J 3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 19A 19B 19C J 3 23C J 3 23B 3 24A 24B 24C 3 25 25B 25C 13 27 27 27 13 26 268 26 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Power Distribution 1B Table 1B 1 Power Distribution Cont d Reset 13 18 15 Volts 12 9 5 Volts J 3 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 6A 15 Volts 2 7 6B 6C Analog Ground 2 1 Return 13 1 1 1 2 2 2 3A 3B 3C 170 Volts 13 23 HV Return 13 24 24 24 15 Volts 13 25 25 25 15 Volts 13 27 278 27 SCAN CONVERTER INTERFACE A9 Analog Ground J 2 9 20A 9 27B 9 30C 5 Volts J 3 4 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C J 6A 6B 6C Digital Ground J 1 1A 4A 6B 6C 7A 10A 13A 15C 16A 19A 21B 23C 28B 29B 30B 31B 32B 2 3B 6B 8B 9A 9C DOPPLER ACQUISITION A6 12B 15B 16 16 5 Volts P3 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 1 B 18B 19A 19C 22 26 27 27 318 32B 32C Digital Ground P3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C 15 Volts analog P3 25A 25B 25C 15 Volts analog P3 27A 27B 27C Ground P3 26A 26b 26C 31A 31B 31C SCAN CONVERTER BUFFER A10 5 Volts J 3 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C DOPPLER PROCESSOR A7 EE Mcd 5 Volts 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C Digital Ground 13A 15C 16A 19A 21B 6A 6B 6C 23C 28B 29B 30B 31B Digital Ground P3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 32B 3A 3B 3C 12 3 6 8 9 9 12 6 Volts P3 32A 15B 16A 16C 17B 18B 6 Volts P3 32C 19B 19C 22B 26B 27A Analog Ground P2 2A 2B 4A 4B 4C 5A 27C 31B 32A 32C 6A J 3 1A
133. Lat Mid Inf Mid Ant Date 07 DEC 1988 i Time 08 18 AM ID 08304459 Location GENERAL HOSP Operator Comment Bas Lat Qualitative Regional Wall Motion Report REST Mid Post Bos Post LV Wall Motion Score Index 1 00 1 00 Normal gt 1 99 Markedly Abnormal Bos Post Percent Normal Muscle 100 100 Normal lt 50 Markedly Abnormal Z EXERCISE Sept Ap Ant Mid Sept Mid Ant LV Wall Motion Score Index 1 00 1 00 Normal gt 1 99 Markedly Abnormal Percent Normal Muscle 100 100 Normal lt 50 Markedly Abnormal Mid bat Mid Post 1 Normal 3 Akinetic 5 amp neurysnal 7 Dyskinetic w scor 2 Hypokinetic 4 Dyskinetic 6 Akinetic w scar X Uninterpretoble Page 2 Pnt Nam Smith James Date 07 DEC 1988 Qualitative Regional Wall Motion Scores Exercise p Lot p Inf Ant Mid Sept Mid Lat Mid Inf Mid Ant Bos Sept Bos Lot Bos Inf Bos Ant Mid Post Bos Post Bos Post Ant Sept Api Sept Mid Sept Mid Ant Mid Post 1 Normal 3 Akinetic 5 Aneurysmal 7 Dyskinetic w scar 2 Hypokinetic 4 Dyskinetic 6 Akinetic w scar X Uninterpretoble Page 3 01 502 12 01 Figure 2C 8 Printed CAD Report UM4 02C 38 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C 2C 17 Performance Tests Checklist Initialization j M Mode j Con
134. Linear AA scanheads Perform image quality check r uonejos Hned enuey 4 v Le v0O vINn MODEL 0 4 Symptom Far field noise rings in Sector image Possible Cause Unshielded segments on the Front Panel BNC coax cable PROBLEM CATEGORY Fault Isolation Solution Replace the unshielded coax cable with a shielded one 8500 0580 Ensure removal of plastic insulator on BNC connector IMAGE QUALITY Cont d Reference Thin horizontal lines in linear echo area with 5 MHz and multiple focal zones Unknown Uncorrectable None Vertical jail bars or towers columns of weaker returning echoes Loose or broken ground strap Check ground strap on Beamformer Front End A2 Replace or repair ground strap Loose PCB shields Check PCB shields Resolder contact point between shield and PCB Intensity flickering or flashing Aspect High Contrast Monitors 3500 0764 XX 3500 1087 XX 3500 4094 XX Loose connection Inspect connections inside UM 4 UM 5 monitor Insure good connection Loose connection at P2 4 causing high volt age arcing Inspect connections Insure good connection Loose securing nut Inspect T4 for loose nut over the ferrite core of T4 causing high voltage arcing and a high pitched whine Tighten nut Poor power fuse F1 Inspect fuse and holder fit or dirty fuse holder
135. M mode operation in the OB calcs module the Fetal Heart Rate menu is now the default menu Turning on OB calcs by pressing CALC now displays the default menu not the last menu displayed Hardkey changes 4705 0004 12 For M mode operation in the OB calcs module the Fetal Heart Rate menu is now the default menu The EFT default setting under Transducer Type in the User Default Menu was changed to IVT to better reflect the scanheads currently in use Turning on OB calcs by pressing CALC now displays the default menu not the last menu displayed Minor errors in the manual have been corrected NOTE A abel will be affixed to the electronics module cover of all 32X systems to iden tify them to operators and CSRs Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 65 7 Service Bulletins 2 0 3 0 3 1 3 2 4 0 5 0 6 0 SERVICE PHILOSOPHY MANDATORY For systems configured with 32X or higher only PCBs tested with 32X or higher software are allowed to be installed with that software Therefore only those PCBs listed in the 32X column of the UM 4 Replacement Matrix are allowed to be ordered for installation in 32X systems PCB replacements in systems with 31X or lower software shall still conform to the usage instruction in Section 5 Configuration of the UM 4 Field Service Manual 4720 0001 05 with Manual Change 4725 0001 07 July 1 1993 or higher 08 to be released in mid De cember 1993 PRODUCT CODES US
136. M4A only ION INSIDE THE WITH POWER APP IN A BLOWN FUS POWER SUPPLY 01 ESO1 A01 05 Figure 1C 1 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual EM Rear Panel Connections UM4 01C 1 1C Cabling Motherboard Card Cage NEZ N y Z OTE Power supply is removed and turned to show connectors 01 501 02 01 2 Power Module Connections Figure 1C Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01C 2 ECG LEADS LINEAR DFT ANNULAR ARRAY 724B OR ACCESS SCANHEADS EFT BFT PULSE AND RF STATIC DOPPLER FOOTSWITCH 8 gt 9 gt CABLE IS PART OF ASSEMBLY INDICATED BY FLAG CABLE IS HARDWIRED AT THIS FLAG ONLY ONE OF THE CABLES SHOWN MAY BE CONNECTED TO THIS CONNECTOR TWO CABLES ARE CONNECTED IN OEM TO ALLOW SEPARATION OF NEWER HUMAN FACTORS MODULE FROM EM ATTENUATOR CABLE REQUIRED WITH 04 AND 05 A V MODULE PART NUMBER SPECIFIES PANEL AND CABLE EITHER DATA COMM OR CAD EITHER PHOTO MODULE OR CAD CABLE SELECTION DEPENDS ON HF MODULE DASH LEVEL SEE PARTS TABLE 8 11 2275 0064 2275 0102 00 15 2275 0101 2251 0004
137. Measure the width with the cali pers b The measured width is the lateral resolution UM4 04 46 c The scanhead s lateral resolution should meet the specifications listed in the appropriate scanhead table in Section 2C Performance Tests 3 Select each focal zone and repeat step 2 Axial Resolution Axial resolution is the ability of the system to distinguish targets on an imaginary line perpendicular to the scanhead face verti cally in the scan plane 1 Measure axial resolution with the pin groups at 3 7 and 12 cm depths onthe phantom see enlargement in Figure 4 14 Optimize the display of each pin group by adjusting image controls and scanhead transmit focal zones The bottom pins in each set are verti cally separated by 0 5 mm If they can be distinguished from each other the axial resolution is 0 5 mm Determine the closest two pins that can be clearly distinguished sepa rated vertically from other pins in the same group Determine axial resolution for each depth 3 7 and 12 cm 2 scanhead s axial resolution should meet the specifications listed in the appropriate scanhead table in Sec tion 2C Performance Tests Noise 1 Leave system controls set as for pre vious AA tests Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Fault Isolation 4 2 Adjust DEPTH control until the maxi mum depth is displayed 3 Set TGC for a uniform homogeneous display of the phantom as done
138. Motor Controller PCB anomaly EFT to Access or Access to EFT scan head change results in frozen image To prevent this situation upon installation of 5X ensure that the transducer power up default is set for an Access scanhead 6X New Features MHz IVT scanhead weeks added to OB Calcs tables now 40 weeks Problems Corrected EFT streaking 25 frames second Motor Controller anomaly UM4 05A 2 Help function updates softkey panel pointers for Freeze Unfreeze but does not process keys or change panels Does not allow softkey panel changes in Help mode Linear smear at zone transition with DFT scanheads French screen annotations for caliper measurements Unless the pulser is turned off at a mode change from 2D to M Mode the Access reed switches are damaged ECG turned on M line activated exit M line and the M Mode scale remains on the ECG display The M Mode scale remains after ECG is turned off To remove the scale press lt CNTRL gt P 12X NOTE While there are no S1 systems configured with 12X the following 12X data apply to 17X S1 systems The release of 12X software introduces a change in the audio data path to S1 systems The two audio channels are routed from the electronics module through the rear panel connector PCB to the A V module and then under certain conditions to the VCR At the A V mod ule the system can switch the audio routing based upon the followi
139. NF Cursor Down ALPHA NF Cursor Up ALPHA NF Software NF Carriage Return Line Feed ALPHA NF Background NN Hide Annotation ON OFF HF NEW PATIENT HF HELP Toggle help for CTRL NF NN Image Direct HF NN TGC Default Save TGC HF NN NN Doppler Arm Local Remote H F LCL RMT Clock Calendar Set 5A 5 Ultramark 4 Hardware Configuration See the following PROM and Jumper Matrices All system configuration electronic equip ment or replaceable parts descriptions will include line voltage and video format when applicable If only one dash level is listed for a software feature then that dash is acceptable to both video formats or line voltages UM4 05A 8 HF For example PCB PART PART NUMBER SH 7500 0300 Display Controller 16 17 Power Supply 1700 0010 02 1700 0011 02 02 Delay Controller 7500 4031 Definitions EIA is the 525 line video format standard of which NTSC is the color subset CCIR is the 625 line video format stan dard of which PAL is the color subset Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Some countries apply different safety requirements than those generally encountered in the United States Where applicable the safety agency will appear in the Notes column For example UL U
140. S B UM4 100 Rev A To All Domestic Field Service Personnel E C N No Author David D Vega Electronics Module EM Part Numbers for UM 4 Based Systems INTRODUCTION UM4 07 32 This service bulletin supercedes S B UM4 100 This Service Bulletin will help you determine which EM part numbers to order for the different system types and configurations available For more informa tion refer to the Product Configuration Matrix code and Service Bulletin UM4 117 or call the Technical Support Group for assistance in determining the correct type and configuration of the system Once the type and configuration of the system has been determined refer to the corresponding section of this bulletin Section 1 UM 4PLUS and UM 4APLUS aka UM 4AFF Section 2 UM 4S2 and UM 4A CV PV and NR UM 4 Section 3 UM 4S1 NOTES 1 UM 4AFF denotes a full feature UM 4A This type of UM 4A can have all the features of an HFC UM 4 minus the HFC The UM 4A is sometimes called the small cart 2 NR UM 4 is a stand alone configuration used with Northgate Research lithotripsy equipment This UM 4 is no longer being manufactured 3 A stand alone system can have all the hardware and software features except for Doppler of a UM 4S2 system minus the cart caster rail assembly Original Equipment Manufacturer products module OEM mod ule and the HFC module 4 A system is considered to be Sector Linear based on the fact that the
141. S LM 35 40 45 Softkey 4000 0156 18 Control Module 20 24 TGC 4000 0214 05 Slidepot Control 06 07 Module 08 09 10 60 4000 0222 08 09 10 11 60 1 3500 0581 04 is alternate for 03 only 2 Requires 7500 0373 04 or higher rev motherboard 7500 0318 06 and 11 are functional equivalents 3 Requires 3500 0915 02 cable for CAD 4 1700 0032 01 is backward compatible 5 UL approved 6 No support for CAD Data Comm or LS 8 7 UM 5 only E Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 75 5 Configuration HFC Components cont d REPLACEMENT LEVEL 31X 16 17X up A N Module 4000 0143 06 62 07 61 10 64 11 63 12 16 18 66 14 17 60 Monitor 3500 0426 00 01 Module 60 61 3500 0764 02 60 03 61 04 62 05 06 3500 1087 01 60 02 03 61 04 05 61 3500 0501 Data Comm 4000 0158 01 4000 0159 gt omJi rrir Di gt rir Dy Sl rye D gt i rir DvD Sl rye gt 20 Sl rye Dl gt rir DvD Sl z z z z z zZ Z Z CAD Modules CAD Program Disk CAD Module 4000 0225 17X 4252 0486 02 2 23 4252 0486 05 4252 0486 05 4252 0486 05 4000 0227 4252 0486 05 4000 0228 4252 0503 05 1 RS 232 only 2 RS 232 plus two disk drives
142. SWITCH Ref Ref Motor Controller 2D Scan Converter Interface 2D Scan Converter OAG 7500 0304 7500 0348 7500 0273 7500 0314 Test Non sync Not Used Not Used Used Not Used Not Used Not Used SMPL CLK for CAD Not Used Video Select 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 I N Normal Operation closed Stisnotforfielduse is not for field use closed closed closed closed S1 is not for field use closed closed closed open open open closed open open open 17X and down open open 60 Hz open 50 Hz closed Domestic International suu ls S 6 vs 9L VS0 vVIARQ enuey 9IAJ3S 4 v Table 5A 5 Jumper Matrix Cont d JUMPER OR SWITCH Ref PCB Name PCB Part No Des Function Normal Position Motor Controller 2D Scan Converter Interface 2D Scan Converter OAG 7500 0304 7500 0348 7500 0273 62 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 Non sync Not Used Not Used Used Not Used Not Used Not Used SMPL CLK for CAD Not Used Video Select Normal Operation Test closed Stisnotforfieduse is not for field use closed closed closed closed S1 is not for field use closed closed closed open open open closed open open open 17X and down open open 60 Hz open 50 Hz closed Domestic International suu ls S 6 uo
143. Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES WITH PARTS YES Service Bulletin Date June 24 1991 S B No Info 78 Rev A Date All Field Service Personnel E C N No To David D Vega Ultramark 4 6 and 7 Systems with CAD ECG Adapter Cables PURPOSE PARTS REQUIRED Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual This Service Bulletin supercedes Service Bulletins UM7 01 UM4 101 and Info 78 To define ATL ECG adapters for customer supplied ECG equipment Refer to the figure below for a general cabling diagram to connect the various ECG instruments to an ULTRAMARK system with CAD Parts are available ONLY for the following manufacturers Quinton Hewlett Packard Marquette and Cambridge Figure Mating Adapter Item Ref Description ECG Manufacturer ATL Part Number A UM 4 amp UM 7 Adapter All above named 3500 0981 01 A UM 6 Adapter All above named 3500 1090 01 to Cable All above named 2265 0041 01 Ds ECG Adapter Quinton 3100 1731 01 Hewlett Packard 3100 1733 01 Marquette None required Cambridge None required UM4 07 9 7 Service Bulletins A kit for the UM 6 is also available under the Sales part number 8000 051 6 01 consisting of the following Adapter ECG interface 3500 1090 01 BNC cable male to male 2265 0041 01 Connector adapter 3100 1731 01 Connector adapter 3100 1733 01 The above named ECG manufacturers are the only ones we provide adapters for In additi
144. Trigger to on TR ON Select WINDOW Verify that the window moves as the trackball is moved Set the window to the desired location then enter this location by pressing WINDOW Press GREY to call up the prompt Hit any key to capture an image with a grey bar Press any alphanumeric key to cali brate the grey scale The message Setting grey scale appears on the screen Press CMP ON data Compression ON which is used to compress data being stored to floppy and PD ON Footswitch Pedal on screen annota tion ON Press RETRN 2C 16 9 Acquire Images 1 2 3 Press CAPTUR Press CINE Verify the display shows Cine Armed and Trigger ON in upper right corner UM4 02C 31 2C 4 Performance Tests Press the SET WINDOW button on the hand controller and verify that the win dow can be positioned with the system trackball Press SET WINDOW again to lock the window position Press footswitch 1 to acquire a cineloop sequence of a rapidly mov ing image NOTE A rapidly moving image may be obtained by rocking the sector scanhead on the phantom 6 Verify that the system acquires a cine loop sequence and begins to play it back Verify that the trackball controls the speed and direction of the playback Verify that the hand controller a and keys control playback speed and the 4 and keys step the cineloop one frame at a time
145. U14 U48 U10 U5 Programmed PROM P N All All All All 4201 0214 00 01 02 4201 0285 01 02 03 04 06 4201 0238 All 4201 0238 All 4201 0172 All 4201 0225 All 4201 0225 All 4201 0130 4201 0295 On the UM 8 check the manufacturing part numbers of the following PROMs LOC A5 Graphics PCB VTR Interface PCB Part No 112 25319 112 25309 03 06 112 25326 112 25825 13 14 15 16 Ref U66 U3 U123 U37 Programmed PROM P N All 121 26817 00 to 06 All 121 22825 05 07 08 09 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 You may have to peel back the PROM identification label to see the manufacturer s part number Acceptable PROMs ATL P N 2057 0004 EPROM 200ns 2764 2 28 PIN Mfgr Name Mfgr Part Number Advanced Micro Devices 2764 2 Intel Corp 2764 2 SEEQ Tech Inc PQ5133 2 ATL P N 2057 0005 EPROM 8K X 8 250ns 2764 28 PIN DIP Mfgr Name Mfgr Part Number Advanced Micro Devices AM2764DC Intel Corp D2764 ATL P N 2057 0009 PROM UV Erasable 8K X 8 250ns 2764A Mfgr Name Mfgr Part Number Advanced Micro Devices AM2764ADC Intel Corp 2764A Unacceptable PROMs ATL P N 2056 0007 PROM 2764 8K x 8 Erasable 28 PIN Mfgr Name Mfgr Part Number Advanced Micro Devices AM2764 4DC Frequency Sources Inc MBM27C64 30 Fujitsu MBM2C64 30Z Hitachi HN482764G 4 Intel Corp 2764 4 Texas Instruments Inc TM
146. a facilities representative usually an electrician or BMET be available if possible 4 02 2 2 4 Creating a Positive First Impression Help your customer get off to a smooth start Position the site inspection as a val ue added service that enhances system performance and reliability This is an opportune time to begin differentiating yourself from other service vendors 1 Introduce yourself to the doctors the technologists the head of the depart ment and the BMETs Present your business card to each of them and thank them for their purchase of an ATL ultrasound system 2 Inquire about current problems they may be having with other equipment in the general vicinity 3 Also ask about any current or planned construction This step and the pre vious one may provide insight into both existing conditions and the potential for future environmental improve ments 4 Circle the applicable steps in the Pre Installation Flow Chart section of the Site Evaluation FSR 2A 5 Physical Access for Delivery Installation and Operation Perform the following steps to ensure the delivery and placement of the system go smoothly 1 Inform the customer about the dimen sions of the system both crated and uncrated Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Using these dimensions evaluate the site for delivery Pay particular atten tion to the availability of a loading dock the availability of elevators or ramps an
147. air shipments Both of these containers are discarded after installation The carton containing the system monitor will be in ei ther the main shipping container or another carton Accessories manuals and other system components are packed in another carton which is shipped separately Occasionally the old stye container shown in Figure 2B 2 may be used for certain systems configured with a Lenzar Camera CAUTION Systems configured with Lenzar Cameras may have rail crossbrace removed Proceed carefully to prevent damage to rails or Electronic Module EM Install brace as soon as system is lowered from pallet 2B 4 1 Tools Required e CSR Tool Kit 193 90003 01 Ratchet or impact wrench with 9 16 inch socket Impact wrench 198 12396 00 Impact socket 198 12395 00 UM 4 Service Manual 4720 0001 05 Applicable OEM Service Manuals Pre Installation Procedure Customer Information Directory and Inserts Pre Installation FSR Installation FSR PM Sticker 4725 0265 01 e Power Data Sticker 4765 0247 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Installation 2B Cable Management Hooks 2950 0464 01 CSR Tool Kit Three Pronged Outlet Test Plug Oscilloscope ONEAC Line Viewer Multimeter Tissue Phantom WARNING Dangerous voltages are present inside the UM 4 Do not connect system to AC line voltage until proper line voltage has been verified and a thorough inspection of system ha
148. clips to 10 0V test point and ground on PCB A8 Motor Controller PCB Figure 3 3 If necessary pull Motor Controller PCB board A8 far enough to gain access to test points then insert PCB back into card cage Connect a 5 0 MHz sector scan head to the system Use an Access S H if a 5 0 MHz sector IVT is not avail able 4 Set system power to ON Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 10 Verify that the scanhead annotation displayed on the monitor matches the active scanhead Verify that voltage is between 9 995 VDC and 10 004 VDC If necessary adjust R44 to 1000 VDC 7500 0517 XX PCBs have no adjust ment pot Set system power OFF Remove test leads Verify that the RF connectors to PCB connectors are firmly installed on the PCB Replace the PCB if the voltage cannot be adjusted into tolerance UM4 03 3 3 Adjustments DVM DVM ADJUSTMENT 7500 0304 XX Analog Ground 7500 0348 TP Analog Gnd 7500 0348 TP Analog Gnd 7500 0517 XX TP20 TP27 Analog Gnd NONE Front Edge BT MER d 10 0 TP1 TP2 or TP20 amm 9 i gt 10VDC ID Adjust TPi Analog Ground 0348 L RF Connectors k s Bottom Edge 01 ES03 A03 02 Figure 3 3 Motor Controller Adjustments 3 5 Old Style Monitor Adjustments Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 NOTE old and new style mo
149. coax cable A close inspection of those crimped is also needed Some cable assemblies use RF connectors which are too large for the type of coax cable used therefore when they are crimped they don t make contact with the cable see detail A Problem has been corrected in Manufacturing Systems floor has been purged NOTE This connector sleeve when crimped properly and of the correct size is what provides the strain relief for the cable 3 Under investigation lease significant of three problems SOLUTION Replace assembly with the appropriate revision Return old assembly for evaluation repair per normal procedures like any class A part NOTE replacement of any connector assembly which has one or more con nectors not crimped Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 27 7 Service Bulletins CHECK HERE FOR CRIMP ON SLEEVE RF CONNECTOR SLEEVE COAX CABLE SOME CONNECTORS ARE TOO LARGE AS SHOWN HERE AND EVEN WHEN THESE ARE CRIMPED IT IS INEFFECTIVE 01 SVCB 048 O1 Figure 1 UM4 07 28 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YESH wo SERVICE BULLETIN WITH PARTS YESL DATE January 16 1989 yn PE TO All Field Service Personnel S B UM4 98 AUTHOR Tony Bills E C N NO Rear Mount of UM 4 Utility Tray PROBLEM Unhappy UM 4 Lenzar Customers CAUSE Lenzar systems cannot have the utility tray mounted on the front of the sys
150. cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs If the VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P I
151. deepest position of the background texture echoes with consis tent tissue presentation 1 Pick a point where density of echoes is definitely diminished Use the calipers to measure this depth Remember to add or subtract the correction factor marked on the phantom The scanhead s penetration should meet the specifications listed in the appropriate scanhead table in Section 2C Performance Tests Concentric Ring Artifacts 1 Find the concentric rings at the top of the image while the AA scanhead is positioned on the phantom UM4 04 45 4 Fault Isolation 2 Measure the depth of the rings The rings should not exceed AA 3 5 MHz 2 2 cm AA 5 0 MHz 1 5 Image Wobble Wobble is defined as a lateral movement jerk ofthe sector more atthe edges than in the center 1 Test at various depths minimum to maximum and at various focal zone settings Wobble will be most evident in parts of the sector image outside the focal zone A maximum of four scan lines of wobble is acceptable at the sector edges Lateral Resolution Lateral resolution is the ability of the sys tem to distinguish targets along an imagi nary line parallel to the scanhead face horizontally in the scan plane 1 Set the focal zone to the top of the image using the FOCUS control 2 From the vertical column of pins determine which displayed line reflec tor is the narrowest within the focal zone a
152. either 3 5 or 5 0 MHz annular array scan heads A blank M mode display results when selecting M line from Access 2D and entering M mode while in VCR play with hardkey On the Calculation menu some charac ter fields have blanking and some do not Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration S1 Systems 5A GREY annotation partly overwritten by VCR search error message Toggling FRZ causes FPS display to vary intermittently when using HFLA 1X magnification and the fifth focal zone Trying to SELECT STORED inverted video image causes distortion 5A 2 2 UM 4 Features The replacement levels of PCBs and PROMs for the UM 4 are dependent upon the features of the system The UM 4 fea tures are defined below Feature Definition 51 The Pulse Processor PCB A5 is a 7500 0313 and there is no System Receiver PCB 3500 0581 S2 The Pulse Processor PCB A5 is a 7500 0370 XX and there is a System Receiver PCB 3500 0581 XX NOTE Only the S1 variation of the UM 4 is covered in this document For the S2 and its permutations refer to Section 5 Config uration S2 Systems 5A 3 Compatibility 5A 3 1 Determining Software Level During boot up the System Controller software level appears briefly at the lower right of the screen Repeatedly pressing lt CTRL gt P will repeat the display if it is missed during boot up NOTE CTHL L codes are found only on 12X or higher systems Refer to 5 3
153. feed button on the printer to ensure that each report starts at the top of a new page After completing a planimetry measurement the pan zone function can be activated causing the image to move sideways without the cursor tracing The scale does not change The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling German Software only When you first select UNGUELT TASTE while in Kalk the system displays an invalid response To get the desired response press UNGUELT TASTE again Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 21 6 Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 10 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 30 10 RevA March 21 1994 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls On hardkey and softkey systems a transducer must be active prior to using the remainder of the system controls On hardkey and softkey systems with dual linear when the user power
154. for carry ing and maintaining adequate levels of each item Add other items as necessary Equipment Anti static mat CSR tool kit Phantom Oscilloscope Multi meter Three prong line tester Vacuum cleaner ONEAC Lineviewer Materials PM Parts see Table 2D 1 2D 4 Reference Documentation Refer to these documents as necessary e B amp W Printer 4720 0220 XX e Color Printers Field Service Manual 4720 0221 XX e Camera Field 4720 0222 XX e VCR and Report Printers Field Service Manual 4720 0223 XX General Service 4720 0219 XX PM FSR Form 198 19055 00 Field Service Manual Manual Service Manual UM4 02D 1 2D Preventive Mainenance Table 2D 1 Parts General Supplies Part Description Preventive Maintenance Part Paper towels local Glass cleaner Fantastic 409 etc local Alcohol wipes local Acetone wipes local Cable Management Supplies Part Description Part Velcro 2210 0125 Velcro 2210 0126 Velcro white 9901 0035 Plastic J hooks 2950 0464 0 1 Cable ties small 2208 0003 Cable ties medium 2208 0058 Cable ties large 2208 0061 Freon 2301 0546 0 1 9901 0025 0 1 Latex gloves 6320 0004 0 1 15A Hubble plug 3100 0714 Fiberglass brush 6320 0001 0 1 BNC connector 3100 0800 RCA to B
155. free of the clamps 4 Reassemble the plug and tighten the strain relief assembly onto the outer covering of cable Position the heatshrink to within ten inches of the now inspected plug and shrink it Indicate in the comments section of the FSR that S B Info 53 Rev A has been accom plished 0 4 07 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 Approximately one foot of yellow heatshrink has been provided with this bulletin If and when you run out reorder using ATL P N 198 12342 02 Be advised that the unit of issue is in inches Example If you want 12 of heatshrink tubing then order 198 12342 02 quantity 12 If you determine from your inspection that the plug needs to be replaced P Ns are provided below for the two types that ATL uses Both are Hospital Grade Plugs and can be used but the preferred practice is to replace like for like Housing Color Part Number Black 3100 0714 Gray 3100 0933 SUGGESTION Advise your customers and sales personnel that regardless of how tight the strain relief is on the power plug they are not to pull the plug out of a receptacle by the cable Always grasp the plug itself when removing it from the wall Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 3 7 Service Bulletins SERVICE BULLETIN DATE March 7 1988 S B NO INFO 59 TO Field Service Personnel AUTHOR Tony Hartford Barry Bernard E C N NO 2D RFI and Doppler Noise Caused by ECG PROBLEM System picks up
156. from defective monitor assembly onto the replacement moni tor assembly r uonejos ned Fault Isolation 4 4 10 UM 4 KEYBOARD TESTER 2 Turn the system ON NOTE For Softkey with slidepot TGC only CAUTION Do not remove or connect the tes 3 Follow the prompts on the keyboard ter with the system under power display A test selection menu will be 1 With the system OFF insert and displayed after the initial softkey test secure the tester in series with the key Disregard the HARDKEY selection on board cable and the keyboard this menu UM 4 Keyboard Cable UM 4 Keyboard Tester P N 4500 1632 01 Oo T e cp C C UM 4 Keyboard O1 SVCB 015 01 Figure 4 12 UM 4 Keyboard Tester Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 04 37 4 Fault Isolation 4 11 Linear and AA Image Quality Verification Was S B UM4 70 Some image quality problems may actually be caused by hard failures For example penetration or resolution could be reduced or noise
157. gt EE men _ Des PCB Name PCB Part No Des Function Normal Position A15 System Controller Cont d 7500 0312 Selects amount of Precom pensation applied to Disk Write data sation applied to Disk Write data Selects amount of Precom shorted pensation applied to Disk Write data Selects amount of Precom shorted pensation applied to Disk rite data Selects amount of Precom open unen applied to Disk rite data Selects amount of Precom shorted pensation applied to Disk Write data Selects amount of Precom open pensation applied to Disk Write data Open for Disk Transfer Rate open of 250K bits sec Shorted for Disk Transfer Rate open to 500K bits sec Open if 053 and 054 Installed shorted Open if U53 054 Installed shorted Rear Panel 7500 0318 06 07 N A shorted Snot for 17X Software and shorted elow swa sAs 6 vs 5A Configuration S1 Systems 5A 6 Software Related Anomalies Software Release Symptom Fault Isoaltion Corrective Action 12X and higher Intermittent lateral shift or jerk in sector depth depen dent Access scanhead Identify symptom Install PROM kit 8000 0133 08 12X and higher A system lockup occurs when changing from an annular array scanhead to an IVT Identify symptom Install PROM kit 8000 0133 08 Loss of M mode TGC overlay when changing M mode depth Identify symptom Select FREEZE and
158. heavy RFI noise when is hooked up and the scanhead is touching the patient May be intermittent Manifested in the following display 2D RT Wavy concentric rings or Snake Noise possibly accompanied by random bri ght white dots ECG Broad noisy and erratic DOPPLER Noise bands that cycle from low frequency or velocity to high frequency or velocity and back accompanied by a correlative audio sound POSSIBLE CAUSES 1 Defective or poor quality ECG pads or electrodes Patient cable or leads twisted or routed too close to an RFI generating device 2 3 Loose or dry electrodes 4 Electronic failure Though mentioned here internal equipment problems will not be addressed in this bulletin SOLUTIONS Replace with afresh set of electrodes If possible try another type or vendor Any elec trode used should have SILVER SILVER CHLORIDE 2 Reroute the cables for the ECG and the scanhead s Try another set of cables 3 Check for proper skin preparation and electrode placement PROPER PAD AND PATIENT PREPARATION 1 Use alcohol to break down surface oils A tincture of Benzoin is recommended in severe cases to aid in electrode adhesion Dry the skin well and rub it with a gauze pad to redden the skin this brings the blood closer to the surface providing a better signal before applying the electrodes Attach the monitor leads to the pad before applying them to the patient Ensure that the gel on the pad is moist Apply t
159. if Reduce volume until booted high high volume setting at power up r uonejos Hned enuey plal v Z VO vINn MODEL 0 4 Symptom Peripheral does not respond to PRINT con trol Possible Cause Peripheral Fault Isolation Verify peripheral is opera tional with control cable from system disconnected PROBLEM CATEGORY PERIPHERALS Solution 1 Repair or replace peripheral Reference PER Svc Man Control Module Verify PRINT command input to System Controller PCB A15 at P1 pin 15B Repair or replace Control Module Configuration Section 5 System Controller PCB A15 Verify PRINT command out put of System Controller PCB A15 at P1 pin 23B for 140 and 170 peripherals at P1 pin 27B for Photo Mod ule Replace System Controller PCB A15 Configuration Section 5 AN Module Verify input and output of A N Module Repair or replace A V Mod ule Configuration Section 5 Interconnect cable Check interconnect cable Repair or replace intercon nect cable All error messages Peripheral malfunction Verify correct stand alone operation of peripheral Repair or replace peripheral No video to peripheral Verify video to peripheral See Fault Isolation Tables Section 5 2 Video Section 5 Interconnect cable Check cable Repair or replace cable AN Module Check
160. in penetration tests 4 Reduce FAR FIELD GAIN until the far field noise disappears 5 If penetration specs can still be met under these conditions the system meets the noise specification Far Field Noise Review the discussion of far field noise under linear image quality tests 4 11 5 Image Quality Troubleshooting Penetration 1 Verify the Power Supply voltages per paragraph 4 11 3 The 170 Volt sup ply is the primary AA voltage Also verify that there is no ripple on the 15V 2 Then checkthe linear pulser voltage at TP 22 of the A5 Pulse Processor PCB a With POWER at minimum 5 VDC b With POWER at maximum 150 VDC 3 Replace Pulse Processor PCB if not to these specs Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 4 Replace Beamformer PCB set A2 and 4 if in these specs Noise 1 Check for environmental noise see linear procedure Check AA ribbon cables for loose or frayed lines noisy cables may not show a physical defect Verify Cable stripes are down Dress other cables around the AA cable in various ways to see how they affect noise Check for loose hardware bad solder joints on shields see linear proce dure Check linear AA front end cables and connectors see linear procedure Check the linear front end PCBs shields ground straps front panel and scanhead connectors see linear pro cedure If these steps have not resolved the
161. indi cates that the beamformer software is 25 05 for a 7500 0362 08 beamformer that will support CVLA and AA scanheads but it is compatible in 25X or higher systems A physical part number check should confirm that PCB feature and software NOTE f the compatibility of a PCB is in question order a replacement PCB and software listed for the system software level Refer to Section 5 and Section 5A for more details UM4 05 3 2 x 5 Configuration PCB Replacement Matrix Figure 5 2 NOTE There are separate matrices for HFC and UM 4A PCBs and modules For UM 4APLUS and UM 4A FF full feature systems use the HFC matrix REPLACEMENT PCB REF DES The reference desig nator of the PCB is normally printed on the PCB extractors and denotes the card cage slot location PCB NAME The common name ofthe PCB PCB PART NO The base part number ofthe PCB Only part numbers stocked and shipped by ATL Bothell are included PCB DASH The revision number ofthe PCB Only revisions stocked and shipped by ATL Bothell are included LEVELS The manufacturing software build identifi cation number The codes that appear in the rows adjacent to the to the differ ent PROM KIT PART NUMBER rela tionship between a specific PCB revision and a specific software build The different codes that can be found here are 0 4 05 4 L Like for like recommended replacement A functionally equ
162. into transport and install transport Turn system power ON Set recorder controls to settings in Table 2C 10 Allow the recorder to warm up for several minutes a Set UM 4 TM mode TM mode Combo PCB switch S1 4 to CLOSED for UM 4 grayscale test pattern b Set LS 8 SCRIF Interface PCB Gray Scale switch S2 to OPEN for LS 8 grayscale test pattern Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Table 2C 10 Initial Recorder Control Positions Control Position 1 ON 10mm sec Higher set tings will affect calibra tion INTENSITY 5 0 CONTRAST 5 VIDEO CONTRAST Midrange TEMP erature 5 0 RECORD WIDTH switch As Necessary With the system in sector or linear mode press PRINT on the 2D Proces sing softkey panel or on a hardkey system press PRINT When the paper stops press EJECT on the recorder front panel until the print clears the transport Verify that the recorder produces a print of the 2D image Verify that the print represents all six teen gray shades on the gray scale bar and that the gray shades are evenly spaced On a softkey system press RETRN and then press M LINE On the M line panel press M MODE On a hardkey system press M MODE CURSOR and then 2D TM Press the footswitch assigned to Strip Chart The recorder should start print ing a strip chart recording at the sys tem default sweep speed Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual
163. introduced without disabling the system Image quality problems should be first treated as hard failures The following tests elaborate on some of the procedures in the Performance Tests section of this manual CAUTION This equipment contains compo ents which are electro static sensitive Proper static procedures protection and equipment must be used prior to opening and during han dling of of this equipment Failure to use proper ESD procedures will cause damage to these components Such damage to compo nents is not covered by ATL warranties Refer to General Field Service Manual P N 4720 0219 01 for details 4 11 1 Tower Test Linear only This test verifies that all elements in the lin ear scanhead are operational and firing in the correct sequence 1 Connectalinear scanhead and turn on the system 2 Select the linear scanhead a Softkey SK press LINEAR then appropriate scanhead softkey b Hardkey HK press SCANHEAD SELECT until correct scanhead ID is displayed on left side of monitor 3 Repeatedly press FOCUS SK or DYNAMIC FOCUS HK UM4 04 38 a Each depression should add another focal zone indicator to each side of the image display b When five zones are displayed the next depression should return the image to a single focus zone 4 Set controls a follows POWER OUT PUT REJECT EDGE ENHANCEMENT 1 GRAYSCALE 2 SMOOTHING F1 lt CTRL gt B DYNAMIC 58 dB 47 dB
164. jumper switch settings 2D 5 5 Mechanical and Electrical Integrity Remove front and rear covers shields and retainers Verify proper operation of the casters and locking mechanisms Verify that the wheel is in tight contact with the rim and that the retaining bolt is tight applying LoctiteR if necessary Disassemble the power plug and check for loose connections Examine the power cable at the bulk head connection for signs of wear strain or discoloration Ensure ade quate strain relief Inspect the 1 2V batteries if present and their connectors and sol der joints These connections can cor rode and cause a voltage loss Clean with contact cleaner if required and replace the batteries if the time date are not being held All other user defaults will be retained by U6 on the System Controller Verify the EM power supply 5 volt lugs are tight at the motherboard Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 7 Inspect and clean linear annular scan head connector contacts with a brush and solvent This should be done at both the transducer and system con nectors 8 Verify the proper operation of the mon itor springs and tilt and swivel mount 9 Verify proper operation of the Control Module support on HFC systems 10 Inspect the system for signs of physi cal stress loose hardware or PCBs bent castors etc This is particularly important if the customer uses the sys tem a
165. long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall fil
166. may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement ofthe Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM Inappropriate sample volume and Doppler angle annotation may appear on the screen when returning from the calcs menu and entering CW Doppler To clear the annotation press RETRN then CW DOP to resume CW Doppler operation When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF UM4 06A 6 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images 7 Images stored using the STORE softkey are erased when VCR playback is activated To prevent erasure use the Page Capture function described in Capturing Single Frame Images When capturing images from the VCR the ECG trigger threshold can only be set with the CAD Cine Hand Controller arrow keys not with the trackball Use the hand controller arrow keys if you want to set the threshold when cap
167. meet the customer prefer ence It is recomended that monitor pots be highlighted with a marker white out at the center position after the optimal image is acquired This will aid in achieving consistency between the video monitor images and the associated hardcopy results 2D 6 Peripheral Devices Preventive Maintenance Inspection Procedure NOTE Perform these preventive mainte nance procedures in concert with the pro cedure for the system under inspection UM4 02D 7 2D Preventive Mainenance 2D 6 1 VCRs 1 2 3 4 Clean external surfaces Verify all switch settings Inspect external cable assemblies Listen for signs of mechanical prob lems If playback quality is poor clean tape path as per Section 2B in the VCRs and Report Printers Service Manual 4720 0123 01 ATL Service Shop personnel do not recommend cleaning the internal tape path on portable VCRs 2D 6 2 Matrix Multi lmage Camera 1 Clean and inspect external covers and the air filter Verify the integrity of the interconnect cable assembly and power cable Remove covers to gain access to all internal assemblies Perform an internal cleaning and inspection Verify the integrity of cables especially the cassette dark slide detect switch cables PCBs and socket mounted devices Using lens cleaner no alcohol and tis sues clean the mirrors lenses and the face Verify proper operation of the cassette and
168. microphone while the VCR is record ing After recording for at least 30 seconds press STOP on either the softkey or the hardkey control panel Verify that the VCR stops Press REWIND either control panel Verify that the VCR rewinds and stops at the beginning of the tape Press PLAY on either control panel Verify that the VCR plays back the image recorded in steps 3 through 6 Verify that the image is sharp and clear and that there is no jitter or tear ing in the image Also verify that the audio output of the VCR can be heard clearly through the speakers Plug a pair of headphones into the head phone jack on the A V Module and Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 10 2C 11 1 Performance Tests 2C ensure that the speakers are discon nected and that the audio coming through the headphones can be heard clearly Press PAUSE on either control panel Verify that the VCR stops and that an image is displayed on the screen with out an excessive amount of distortion or tearing Press PLAY then FR GRB to test the framegrabber if installed Verify that the image is sharp and clear and that there is no jitter or tearing in the image Press STOP on either control panel Press EJECT on the VCR and remove the cassette Data Communications Module Eject and remove the customer s disks from both disk drives if installed and insert a disk which can be used for test ing into each drive
169. monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled In rare occasions the CAD functions may appear to lock up and a Press control P message may be presented If unsaved images are on the hard disk DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which is a command to clear all images off the hard disk Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again Then pressing the CAD softkey will permit you access to the images that were on the hard disk at the time of the fault Capturing a static CW Doppler spectral display as the first image captured since power up may result in an abnormal image or display mode If this occurs capture a 2 D image first then return to static CW Doppler to capture the Doppler spectral display During image capture when the hard disk is full a message Press any key is displayed but pressing the keyboard has no effect Press any softkey to resume operation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 17 6A CAD Operating Notes When recalling exercise images the recall menu may read exercise 08F page 256x120 The menu should read exercise O8F quad 256x120 The recall menu displays Press page button to display the next page of the menu if more images are available but no PAGE button is shown Press the MORE softkey to display the next page of the menu When storing to or recalling from floppy disk
170. of the System Controller PCB indi cates that the system has been booted up Problem occurs after power is first turned on or after the system is cycled off then on follow ing a warm up period UM4 07 62 Possible Cause U125 Sync generator on the Display Controller PCB does not output any of the required timing signals to the PCB resulting in no video output Manufacturing Engineering has isolated the problem to a particular batch of C s that are used in the U125 loca tion The have a date code of 9240 These parts have been pulled from the production line Solution Replace the Display Control ler PCB upon failure Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y E AT S ervice Bulletin G Date June 29 1993 S B UM4 135 Rev To All Domestic Field Service Personnel E C N No Author David D Vega PROBLEM EFFECTIVITY CAUSE SOLUTION UM 4 Master Spares Kits Difficulty in meeting shipping requirements of UM 4 Master Spares Kit ATL P N 6220 0023 08 DOM Also no spares kit exists for International 220 240V PAL systems All UM 4 Master Spares shipments Unavailability of CAD related spare parts DOM lack of spares kit INT L Remove CAD related parts from the Domestic Master Spares Kit create and release International Master Spares Kit ATL P N 6220 0023 11 available 6
171. operation manual These scanhead defaults do not appear in the user default menu To change scanhead defaults see Setting Scanhead Defaults on page 3 13 of the operation manual 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a FROZEN image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE while the system is in 2 D mode and position the cursor at the desired target area M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth and zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode UM4 06 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation
172. orH orl or J or K CAD Operating Notes 6A Doppler invert Increase velocity range Enable calculations and tables Increase sample volume Decrease sample volume Decrease velocity range Function Enable disable Datacomm menu Move Doppler angle left Move Doppler angle right Function Enable disable fast variable persistence Swap images toggle datacomm Enable disable Doppler grid Enable disable blank background around text Enable disable left column annotations New patent Help Storage image on disk Save system parameters Synchronize de synchronize scanhead to monitor frame rate Set the clock calendar Function Move Doppler angle to the left Move Doppler angle to the right Decrease the sample volume size Increase the sample volume size M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 11 6A CAD Operating Notes 7 If depth and zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote control
173. order refer to the Replacement Matrix in the Configuration section to determine the correct replacement part number Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 7 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 2 UM 4 Full Peripheral Cart NOTE Only the following parts are available for the Full Peripheral Cart PCBs software and peripherals should be ordered using the replacement matrices in Section 5 For other parts or information call the Customer Support Center or Country Manager ATL Part Description 3500 0501 Monitor Assy Large Cart 2251 0002 Cable EM B to Control Module 2251 0004 Cable EM B to Control Module Lower cable 2275 0107 Cable EM D to A V Module D 2275 0094 Cable EM E to A V Module E01 2275 0104 Cable EM F to Data Comm Module F 2275 0123 01 Cable EM Data Comm Module to Printer Ribbon cable 3500 0600 00 Fan Assy Behind VCR UM4 08 8 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 3 Ultramark 4AFF 4A OB and 4CV ATL Part No Description 3500 1325 01 Rail Assy 5 Casters Set of 2 rail assys 1065 2482 01 Tubular Rail Smooth Stem 2 plc was 1065 1095 02 2950 0186 01 Cap Plastic Screw Cover 4 plc 1517 0040 Set Screw 8 32 x 3 8 PNH 4 2950 0186 00 Base Plastic Screw Cover 4 plc 1064 0545 01 End Cap Rail 4 plc 1517 0063 Set Screw 8 32 x
174. pairs of cursors Verify that the distances are within 05 inches 1 25mm 2C 8 Mechanical Scanheads Including Annular Array NOTE While Annular Array scanheads AA are mechanical scanheads they are also arrays whose signal paths are through the Beamformer Also perform the Linear tests in paragraph 2 8 2 NOTE TRT scanheads contain both mechanical and linear scanheads Test THTs using paragraphs 2C 8 1 and 2C 8 2 as appropriate 2C 8 1 AA Access 724B EFT BFT IVT MFI ICT or TRT Sector Scanheads 1 Select the AA Access 724B EFT IVT ICT MFI or TRT sector scan head pressing SCANHEAD SELECT on the hardkey control panel or by pressing AA ACCESS or EFT on the softkey Transducer Select panel UM4 02C 8 2 Use this step to check only multi fre quency scanheads a On the hardkey control panel press DYNAMIC FOCUS to select each of the three transducers on the scanhead On the softkey control panel press 2DPROC on the Main panel then press FOCUS on the 2D Image Processing panel to select each of the three transducers on the scan head On MFI scanhead use switch to select each transducer b Verify that the transducer fre quency displayed on the left edge of the screen changes as you select the transducers Also verify that the frame rate changes as the transducers are selected Select the lowest transducer frequency 3 Set the controls on the UM 4 Control Module as fol
175. patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The calc measurement cursors will not attach to the trackball on a frame grabbed image unless there was an active scanhead running prior to entering VCR playback If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images UM4 06 14 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 7 Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it When recalling an image previously stored with ECG data via data comm the ECG data will either be missing or incorrect Analysis Openline Access does not genera
176. position 1 a Select camera memory 1 by pressing the 1 switch on the cam era b Select negative image by pressing POS NEG c Press EXP Exposure Interval Count and set exposure interval by pressing and holding the increment and decrement keys Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Expose Performance Tests 2C Positive Negative Contrast Display Pos Neg 2 Ne lt o lt Memor y Keys Brightness F Power Exposure Interval Count te Slot 01 ESO2 A10 02 Figure 2C 5 Matrix 1010 Camera Front Panel Controls and Indicators d Press BRT Using Table 2C 9 set brightness to the desired setting with and e Press CNT Using Table 2C 9 set contrast to the desired setting with and With a frozen image displayed on the UM 4 system annotate the image with the settings you just programmed into the camera For example the first exposure should be annotated with 25 100 15 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 8 10 Make an exposure by pressing PRINT on the UM 4 control panel Repeat steps 6 and 7 using the setting from the next position in Table 2C 9 Continue changing settings and mak ing exposures using the PRINT key the camera EXP Expose key and the Freeze Pri
177. problem order and install A2 A3 A4 and A5 PCBs Power Supply A2 to A4 ribbon cables Chabin cables UM4 04 47 Section 5 Configuration S2 Systems NOTE following usage rules also apply to 51 systems See Section for S1 system configuration information 5 1 Usage Rules For Section 5 5 1 1 The usage rules for the Configuration sec tion explain the contents and how to use the information contained therein This section contains specific information about the system including Introduction Change Summary Feature Set Identification Firmware Codes lt CTRL L gt Configuration Instructions PCB Replacement Matrix Software Replacement Matrix PCB Jumper Matrix PCB Silhouettes Scanhead Compatibility and Replace ment Matrix Software Related Anomalies 5 1 2 Change Summary The change summary comprises opera tion application and technical issues It contains a description of recent changes to the system Included are lists of new fea tures problems that have been corrected since the last software revision and exist ing problems of which you should be aware Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual The change summary explains issues that are too involved for explanation in the tables or matrices of this section For example replacement levels of PCBs and PROMS for the UM 4 are dependent upon the feature set of the system Doppler Duplex CW CAD sync non sync etc Feature identific
178. problem with AM radio Move system to another location Turn off interfering equip ment Intermittent system boot or shutdown Loose screws securing power supply to Main PCB 1 Check screws Tighten screws securing power supply to Main PCB ON OFF switch ter minals Tighten lug connectors Install strain relief Keyboard slow to respond during print ing with small report printer Normal occurrence with small report printer Educate operator Intermittent lock up Configuration Section 5 Lock up of keyboard in sector Linear or M mode System Controller PCB 7500 0312 Rev K 1 Check revision of System Controller PCB A16 Replace System Controller PCB A16 Configuration Section 5 Photo Module intermit tently ejects film Photo Module drive motor Install 1uf 100V capacitor 3725 0331 across drive motor connector Intermittent lateral shift in sector image with Access scanhead Motor Controller PCB A8 Replace Motor Controller PCB PROM U26 Change depth setting Configuration Section 5 r uonejos Hned enuey 9IAJ8S 4 v S vY0 vVIAn MODEL 0 4 Symptom Erratic movement of measurement markers Possible Cause Trackball Fault Isolation Solution Replace trackball PROBLEM CATEGORY MEASUREMENT Reference System will not go into one or both calculation modes
179. procedure perform each section included here 2D 5 1 Site Survey 1 Schedule the PM appointment well in advance so thatthe customer will allow sufficient time for its completion Dis cuss system problems at this time so that you are prepared to address and resolve them during the PM appoint ment 2 Speak with all available system users about any concerns that they have about ATL or our products This information should be logged on the PM FSR for appropriate action Notify the regional sales manager if appropriate 3 Communicate issues to the appropri ate ATL representative see Table 2D 2 UM4 02D 4 Table 2D 2 ATL Department Tele phone Extensions Department Extension Applications Hot line 3500 Applications Coordinator 7329 or 7047 Professional Education 7330 Professional Medical Supply 3502 Sales Switchboard 7255 Graphics Department 7503 Service Hot line 7911 Customer Complaints Regula 7179 tory Affairs 2D 5 2 System Performance Issues 1 Inquire about system performance since the last service call Document system performance issues on the PM FSR Request hardcopy or VCR images that demonstrate reported problems Examine past FSR activity located in the Customer Information Directory or your own files Help your customer set up and maintain a system perfor mance file if one does not presently exist If the reported system problem
180. required If a block is left blank the scanhead is NOT compat ible to that system 0 4 05 7 5 Configuration SCANHEAD NAME PART NO HARDWARE NOTES OB CV PV CAD PLUS WOBBLERS Annular Array 9 4 H Y 5 Figure 5 5 UM 4 Scanhead Compatibility Matrix 0 4 05 8 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual How to Interpret Coding in Matrices In the procedure below designates the stocked replacement level for PCBs the PCB to order A designates Alternate or functional equivalent may be sent by factory as a substitute 1 requires exact replacement due to physical electrical feature support or stocking issues PCBs are reworked and stocked at the highest rev level possible for that build Occa sionally PCB builds are rev d to reduce cuts and jumps a re layout The new dash level remains a functional equivalent to the parent PCB and as such may be listed in the matrix as L or as an alternate A This revision is listed only to authenticate compatibility of the PCB in the event one is shipped as a substitute for a listed replacement PCB it should not be ordered by field personnel unless it is the only replacement based on features and software level In the software matrix Y Yes and N No indicate correct replacement level For PCBs other than the System Controller PCB the original software may not be at the same level as the system level
181. since changes in brightness may occur during a passage Exiting the CAD mode pressing RETRN from the CAD softkey panel without first storing captured images onto the hard disk causes those unstored images to be permanently erased To prevent this be sure to store captured images onto the hard disk or floppy disk before exiting the CAD mode During image capture when the hard disk is full a message Press any key is displayed but pressing the keyboard has no effect Press any softkey to resume operation When recalling exercise images the recall menu may read exercise 08F page 256x120 menu should read exercise O8F quad 256x120 The recall menu displays Press page button to display the next page of the menu if more images are available but no PAGE button is shown Press the MORE softkey to display the next page of the menu In some cases the system will not capture VCR images synchronized with the ECG R wave trigger If this occurs re calibrate the gray scale on the VCR playback image to maximize the chances of a properly synchronized capture When storing to or recalling from floppy disk once the process is initiated it cannot be interrupted or aborted Do not press any keys simply wait for the process to end before beginning another process When recalling images from a floppy disk RECALL FL DSK if the name and identification fields do not exactly match the name and ID currently entered on th
182. synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure IIIA for the PCB layout 3500 1261 01 3500 1262 01 Sync Sync Doppler Non Doppler AA AA 74F14 Oscillator 2035 0331 3401 0027 N C Jumpered Jumpered N C Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 23 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE X PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 3500 1261 02 BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER From 3500 1261 X To 3500 1262 XX System UM 4 EMEN x PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 3401 0027 IC Oscillator 1 4100 0092 Label Blank 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Change U84 from a 74F14 to the Oscillator 3401 0027 2 Remove the jumper from JP15 and install it at JPI4 3 Using the label 4100 0092 or any small blank stick on label re mark the PCB as a 3500 1262 XX COMMENTS This change renders the PCB as a Non Doppler Sync when it was a Doppler sync before 0 4 09 24 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 01 ESO9 A05 01 Figure 3500 1261 1262 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 25 9 Reference 7500 0347 XX DOPPLER PROCESSOR PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Since the 05 version of this PCB is backwards compatible to the 04 and the 04 is backwards compatible see note no co
183. the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To adjust the Doppler angle without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update
184. the OEM HFC assembly Push the slidelock s in slightly while pulling down on the OEM HFC assembly Perform steps 1 through 5 in reverse order to re assemble the system UM4 02E 3 2b Mechanical Procedures Monitor Monitor Platform Monitor Arm AC Outlet Assembly or CAD Isolated Transformer Assembly Keyboard Support or Data Comm Storage Tray Blanking Panel or Printer Interface Photo Module or Video Printer or CAD Module OEM Front Cover Cable Tray Rail Assembly OEM Rear Cover EM Rear Cable Cover 01 502 13 01 Figure 2 1 System Component Locations UM4 02E 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Mechanical Procedures 2b Slidelock 15 EM Top Cover Bolt 1 gt Small Cart Slide Locks are located at front of assemby 01 502 14 01 Figure 2E 2 OEM Mounting Details Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02E 5 2E Mechanical Procedures 1516 0074 1066 0153 From Fan Mod UM4 02E 6 Ground Stud ERS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY 1065 0646 01 1550 0056 01 LOCTITE 2501 0146 0125 01 Figure 2E 3 Rail Mounting Details 01 502 15 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Section 3
185. the instal resolved and report them to CSC as applicable lation If there are issues that will affect the Applications in service advise the Applications Representative or the Regional Clinical Specialist 5 Time activate a commitment in your Day Planner to make a follow up phone callto your customer within sev eral days and again one week after completion to assure satisfaction with their new system 6 Retain a copy of system records and create a file for your new account 7 Submit the Installation FSR and the Pre Installation FSR if done at the time of Installation via normal proce dures Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02B 25 Section 2C Performance Tests 2C 1 Introduction This section contains a series of perfor mance tests to be performed on the Ultra mark 4 Ultrasound system following installation upgrade or repair The pur pose of these tests is to verify the correct operation ofthe system hardware and firm ware Tests described in paragraphs 2C 4 through 2C 11 apply to the UM 4 system core and must be performed on all UM 4 systems at the time of installation regard less of configurations or options The remaining performance tests apply to spe cific options or configurations and must be performed at the time of installation as applicable WARNING Caliper measurement accuracy and Monitor aspect ratio must be verified after installation after every repair involving PCB replacement or power
186. there is no part number for Sector only UM4 07 35 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES L1 NO WITH PARTS YES L1 NO E Service Bulletin PAGE 1 2 Date July 5 1990 S B No UM4 116 Rev To All Field Service Personnel E C N Author Tony Bills International Pixel Drop out When in F2 Smoothing on UM 4 and UM 6 Systems PROBLEM On International 240V CCIR UM 4 and UM 5 systems when SMOOTHING is to F2 or F4 pixel drop out is observed The potential for this problem exists on Domestic versions as well but has not been seen CAUSE A timing error in the Frame Averager on the 2 D SC Interface PCB A9 SOLUTION Rework to the 2 D SC Interface PCB PART NUMBERS The following are the current dash versions of this PCB 7500 0273 Current Rev Fab Previous Rev Fab Domestic International Domestic International UM 4 14 15 UM 4 10 11 UM 5 20 21 UM 5 16 17 These have changed to the following dashes respectively Domestic International Domestic International UM 4 22 23 UM 4 60 61 UM 5 24 25 UM 5 62 63 STRATEGY International This defect has been a major problem in International systems only International systems should be updated The method of this upgrade will be on a next call basis There will be no format upgrade program International PCBs may be upgraded in the field using the following kits For 7500 0273 14 15 Use 6220 0095 01 Field Mod Scan Converter UM 4 For
187. transmission will be delayed In 8X software the keyboard is disabled during printing NOTE three problems listed below are corrected with the Motor Controller adaptive software which is actually a hard ware and firmware change It consists of the following U27 PROM change to 4201 0265 07 the addition of a capacitor between U49 6 and 7 on the Motor Con troller PCB IVT wavy image IVT lateral jerk 12AA New Features Annular array Problems Corrected N A Known Problems A double image artifact occurs in annular array when the UM 4 is configured to default smoothing F3 or F4 This occurs under the following conditions Pow er up press CTRL P or when the annu lar array scanhead is selected again This symptom is most apparent in car 0 4 05 15 5 Configuration diac applications with a 3 5 MHz annular array To prevent this anomaly configure the system for F1 or F2 cycle through the smoothing options prior to scanning or press CTRL B twice to put the system into fast smoothing 16X Included are the requirements for what is called Feature Set D This software com prises the English and German versions that support the UM 4A and the UM 4PV for Medasonics New Features Frame Grabber LA 7 5 HRLA scanhead New disk drives UM 4CV LA 7 5 HRLA scanhead Linear up down function operational TRT biopsy guide path Problems Corrected System interrupt when changing fr
188. up default is set to linear the scanhead select must be pressed twice to select the right array scanhead After selecting it once the scanhead select works normally When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing lt CTRL gt Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented The PV setup G6 area of the user default menu includes the following line Averaging mode no Because averaging is not an option in the PV calculation mode this line is accurate although its inclusion in the user default menu may give the erroneous impression that averaging is an option If you change the frequency of the MFI scanhead after the system has timed out due to inactivity the system is unable to recognize the new frequency Before changing scanhead frequency take the system out of the time out mode by pressing any key as instructed by the message displayed on the screen If both and 10PV scanheads are connected to your system using the MFI after the 10PV will cause erratic operation To avoid this condition do not use these scanheads on the system at the same time 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image si
189. users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls On hardkey and softkey systems with dual linear when the user power up default is set to linear the scanhead select must be pressed twice to select the right array scanhead After selecting it once the scanhead select works normally On hardkey and softkey systems a transducer must be active prior to using the remainder ofthe system controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing CTRL Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved w
190. using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The calc measurement cursors will not attach to the trackball on a frame grabbed image unless there was an active scanhead running prior to entering VCR playback If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 17 6 Operating Notes Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it When recalling an image previously stored with ECG data via data comm the ECG data will either be missing or incorrect Analysis Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the ma
191. wait for the process to end before beginning another process During playback of captured images some vertical shifting may be apparent on successive images The message Establishing CAD Module Communication may appear on the monitor when selecting the CAD softkey too soon after initial power up To prevent this from occurring wait for about 15 seconds after switching power on before pressing the CAD softkey Distorted or blank images may be captured and stored if a Page capture is attempted with a frozen image Use Page capture with real time images only Images captured using linear scanheads will not be synchronized to the video rate and may appear distorted or contain blank video frames when replayed Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 9 6A Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4CAD Ultrasound System 4707 0010 03 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 25 08 August 11 1989 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls The CI STR softkey st
192. was released in March 1989 to correct an OB calc problem and a CAD Module Fault error with new CAD CPU 23 19 will continue to be shipped with non CAD systems until 25X is released Supports the UM 4HFC and the UM 4A including the CV and the PV New Features UM 4HFC LA5 HR scanhead ICT 7 5 with biopsy guide overlay Improved UP811 interface Slidepot TGC control CAD features for off line systems Annotated hospital ID Removable Doppler scale grid Improved user default menu and factory settings e DCE Integrated CAD features Scanhead time out for inactivity UM 4CV and UM 4PV All of the above except Improved UP811 interface e CAD Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 UM 4A All of the above except Improved UP811 interface and CAD PV and Cardiac Doppler analysis cal culations packages Slidepot TGC controls CAD Features Deleted Small Printer Support Problems Corrected OB calculations previously referred to both gestational age and to menstrual age References to gestational age are eliminated and EFA and AUA are now used instead With dual images and TRT biopsy active on the left image trying to turn off the biopsy guides resulted in the display of biopsy guides on the right image Caliper readout occurred on the left side of the screen when making measure ments on a frame grabbed image while the normal location for annotation on the right side contained Singing
193. 0 0348 XX k a U58 U57 JP5 SI JP6 JP7 512 JP3 i JPI uPA JPI aw JP 1O JP9 jpg MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB A8 7500 0517 XX UM4 05 54 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 A9 Scan Converter Interface Combot and Cinet PCBs HFC 4APLUS PCBs 7500 0273 3500 1413 14 XX 1 3 3500 1425 26 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 525 625 Line Line Video Video 0273 06 07 08 09 60 61 22 23 3500 1413 01 02 2 rr r r r gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt lt Z Z Z Z lt zZ lt Z lt Z lt Z lt lt 3500 1414 01 02 3500 1425 01 02 3500 1426 01 02 0273 06 08 60 22 1 Combines functions of Scan Converter Interface and Buffer PCBs 2 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions 3 3500 1413 1414 XX consist of Generic Scan Converter Combo PCB 7500 0778 with a specific jumper and crystal configuration 1415 amp 1416 are UM 5 equivalents Do not order 7500 0778 XX generic PCB 4 3500 1425 1426 XX consist of Generic Scan Converter Combo w Cine PCB 7500 0798 with a specific jumper and crystal configuration 1427 amp 1428 are the UM 5 equivalents Do not order 7500 0798 XX generic PCB NOTE There are no PROMS required for the Scan Converter Interface Combo or Cine PCB
194. 00 0346 XX 7500 0394 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL Configuration 5 FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 16 17 0394 04 05 07 UM 4A PCBs OB gt 7500 0346 7500 0394 XX 0346 01 02 0394 04 05 07 1 P Purge 2 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions 3 04 should be used to replace all 02 and 03 PCBs 4 7500 0346 02 is functionally equivalent to 7500 0394 04 but neither is functionally equiv alent to the 7500 0346 01 version 5 For UM 4APlus or UM 4A FF systems refer to the HFC A4APLUS Matrix 6 Conversion is not required for 23X or higher sys tems NOTE There are PROMS for the Dop pler Acquisition PCB Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual b len lo JR2 JR4 JR3 U87 lo JRI E3 01 505 12 01 DOPPLER ACQUISITION PCB A6 7500 0346 XX NOTE There are no field configurable jumpers on 7500 0394 XX UM4 05 47 5 Configuration Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No 7500 0346 Function Maximum Gain Test Mode Normal Position Normal Gain Control Hardware Identification Hardware Identification Hardware Identification 7500 0394 Test Mode Board I D Board I D UM4 05 48 Board I D Hardwired at factory Ultramark 4 Field S
195. 00 0456 Cable MB P8 Power Supply Sensor signals EM 3500 0506 01 Cable Dop Audio MB Rear Panel 2100 0121 Battery 4 plc 3700 0134 01 Super Cap 2 plc U Channel EM Card Cage Cover EMI Motherboard 1066 0169 Mylar Adhesive for inside Cover 3500 0738 01 Fan Module Assy 5 Fans 3500 0738 02 Fan Module Assy Euro 5 Fans 2100 0386 Fan 24 94 4 plc 2100 0387 Fan 18 30 Vdc 32 CFM 1 plc 3500 0432 Cable Assy Fan 3500 0431 Fan Module Assy 2 Fans 2100 0125 00 Fan 24 Vdc 110 CFM 2 plc 3500 0432 Cable Assy Fan PCB Assy Fan Module Controller Cover Fan Assy 7500 0630 01 Dual Linear Relay PCB 2 plc Not shown 7500 0384 02 PCB Access Select 1064 0531 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Plate Mounting Dual Access u w 3500 0518 xx only 0 4 08 13 Replaceable Parts Table 8 4 UM 4 Electronics Module Cont d ATL Part No 3500 0581 xx Description System Receiver Assy 3500 1016 xx System Receiver Assy Duplex CW Ready 7500 0511 xx PCB Assy System Receiver Duplex CW Ready 1065 1148 01 Bracket Adapter 3500 1016 System Receiver For older EMs only 3500 0583 Cable Sys Rcvr MB P1 J16 2275 0171 Cable DFT to Motherboard 2275 0278 01 Cable Dual Linear PCB to Moth
196. 012 01 502 003 01 Figure 2C 7 ECG Reference Bar Positioning y 10 Use the hand controller 4 and keys to set the left edge of the white refer ence bar at the left edge of the ECG trace Press NEXT The following mes sage appears Choose the right edge of the ECG win dow Use the hand controller P keys to set the right edge of the white reference bar at the right edge of the ECG trace The reference bar extends the width of the ECG trace as you press the hand controller P key Press NEXT Press RETRN then CAPTUR then CINE Press the CAPT footswitch Verify that the system acquires a cine loop sequence and begins to play it back Verify that the hand controller 4 and keys step the cineloop one frame at a time Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Press PLAY on the hand controller and verify that the cineloop sequence advances continuously Press STOP on the VCR Press RETRN 2C 16 12 Default Setup 1 From the CAPTUR panel press CAP Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C SET then CINE to enter the Cine Setup Menu Set the menu as follows NOTE Set defaults only on new installations or if directed by customer etc Play Delay 100 msec Resolution High Res Windowed Zoom 256 x 240 Capture Length 8 images Interim Delay 50 msec Initial Delay 50 msec 0 4 02 35 2C 2 Performance Tests Press RE
197. 02262 U16 0379 U19 0382 U33 0383 U36 0386 U16 0379 U19 0382 U33 0383 U36 0386 U16 0379 U19 0382 U33 0383 U36 0386 1 S n where E English F French G German 2 8000 0226 XX is for 12X 16X and 17X UM 4A OB systems Higher level UM 4A OB systems use UM 4 HFC software Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 71 5 Configuration 0312 12 64 66 PROM KIT PROMs System Controller REPLACEMENT LEVEL INDIVIDUAL PROM Part No 8000 0598 Dash No 29X 30X 31X Ref D P N Dash es 4201 No 8000 0599 8000 0600 8000 0598 8000 0599 8000 0598 8000 0599 8000 0600 8000 0598 8000 0599 8000 0600 1 S n where E English F French German 2 There is no 29X German version software UM4 05 72 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual PROMs System Controller REPLACEMENT LEVEL PROM KIT Configuration INDIVIDUAL PROM 5 Part No 0312 12 64 66 8000 0598 Ref Des U16 U19 U33 U36 P N 4201 8000 0599 U16 U19 U33 U36 8000 0600 U16 U19 U33 U36 1 S n where E English F French G German Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 73 5 Configuration Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No Function N
198. 02B 1 2B Installation Time needed to complete the instal lation Delivery access Set up facilities Staffing needs Disposal of non returnable packing materials Askthe customer to notify you via CSC at 800 433 3246 once their system arrives Notify the Sales Representative of your arrangements 2B 3 On site Preparation 1 Introduce yourself to the staff present your business card and verify that you UM4 02B 2 may proceed with the installation of their system Inspect the operational location for the system to verify that it will comply with the physical needs of the system and any external OEMs Inspect the location where the system will be uncrated to verify that you have a safe adequate and well lit space Inspect the packing material for ship ping damage including the Shock watchr and Tilt watchr indicators Notify Traffic immediately at x7100 for guidance if any shipping problems are encountered Open the packaging and perform a brief physical inspection of the system and accessories for signs of shipping damage Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Installation 2B iis c te Monitor Human Factors Module
199. 04 0 Remote Control Sony 811 UP1810 1 Mounting Bracket P 60U 1065 0912 0 Cover Video Printer 2 1516 0076 Screw 6 32 x 5 16 1517 0040 Screw 8 32 x 3 8 PNH 1 These power distribution assemblies require 1065 1689 02 rear panel and appropriate label item 48 2 To order refer to the Replacement Matrix in the Configuration section to determine the correct replacement part number 3 To order a peripheral refer to the appropriate Peripheral Field Service Manual Cameras B W Recorders or Misc to determine the correct replacement part number UM4 08 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 4 UM 4 Electronics Module NOTE order part that includes a dash level of refer to the Replacement Matrix in Section 5 Configuration for the correct dash level ATL Part No Description Electronics Module EM EM Chassis Card Cage 1700 0032 xx Power Supply Assy 120V 120 VAC only 1700 0002 xx Power Supply Assy 120V or 240V 2700 0072 Fuse 15 0A 250V Slo Blo 120V F201 F202 2700 0045 Fuse 8 0A 250V Slo Blo 240V F201 F202 7500 0318 xx Rear Panel Assy Shield Plate Motherboard Shield Plate Motherboard Motherboard PCB 3500 0443 03 Cable Assy EM Rear Panel Video Out Push on 3500 0957 01 Cable Assy EM Rear Panel Video In Screw On 35
200. 0511 04 or lower Sys tem Receiver and 0517 Motor Controller PCB AA is supported with appropriate Beam former Controller and Motor Controller PCBs refer to matrix Non AA Motor Controllers are the default replacement PCB to reduce service calls to non AA systems Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Known Problems Refer to Operating Notes 4707 0001 12 5 2 2 UM 4 Systems and Features The replacement levels of PCBs and for the UM 4 are dependent upon the features of the system Listed below are short descriptions of physical features that can be used to quickly verify the pres ence of a configuration or feature System Definition and Physical Attributes UM 4 A full featured multi purpose system manufactured in two configurations the human fac tors cart HFC and the full peripheral cart FPC out of pro duction since 1986 Beam former Controller 7500 0362 04 or higher supports AA scan heads but not array IVT UM 4 S1 The Pulse Processor PCB A5 is a 7500 0313 and there is no System Receiver neither 3500 0581 XX nor 3500 1016 XX Software levels are 3X to 6X and 17X UM 4 S2 S2 replaced S1 in 1985 The Pulse Processor PCB A5 is a 7500 0370 XX and there is a System Receiver either 3500 0581 XX or 3500 1016 XX Software levels are 17X and higher UM 4A A small cart OB system UM 4A does UM 4OB not have speakers and does not in Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configu
201. 07 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L Service Bulletin PAGE 1 OF 4 Date June 3 1991 S B No UM4 60 Rev D To Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Dennis Kracht Identification of Human Factors Module and OEMs This bulletin supersedes UM4 60 Rev C There are presently six versions ofthe Human Factors Modules in the field This service bulletin will help you identify the correct part number needed when ordering a replacement Remember that each level is an improvement from the one above it Also refer of the chart for its compatibility 4000 0144 no dash level This is the oldest version and can be identified by the aluminum plates with three captive screws that secure it to the OEM module See Figure 1 Item 33 On the no dash level module the cable length for the monitor and keyboard is short and extender cables are needed so it will mate with the EM Part numbers for the extenders are MONITOR 2275 0064 KEYBOARD 2251 0004 4000 0144 06 This version is similar to the no dash level module except that the cables which extend from the monitor and the keyboard are long enough to reach the EM Extender cables are not needed and the aluminum plates will be replaced with the stronger angle brackets These bracket part numbers are LEFT SIDE 1065 0687 01 RIGHT SIDE 1065 0686 01 4000 0144 01 This is the first o
202. 1 et sack ln dc Acie nod 7500 0313 XX PULSE PROCESSOR SI PCB 7500 0313 XX PCB REWORK SHEET SI PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 03 02 41 7500 0346 XX DOPPLER ACQUISITION PCB 7500 0346 XX PCB REWORK SHEET DOPPLER ACQUISITION A6 PCB From 01 10 502 c oie Rex eue Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 10 0 4 09 13 0 4 09 14 0 4 09 16 UM4 09 17 0 4 09 18 0 4 09 19 0 4 09 20 0 4 09 21 0 4 09 23 0 4 09 24 0 4 09 26 UM4 09 27 0 4 09 28 0 4 09 30 0 4 09 31 UM4 09 33 UM4 09 34 0 4 09 5 9 Reference 7500 0273 XX 2 D SC INTERFACE PC UM4 09 36 7500 0273 PCB REWORK SHEET 2 D SC INTERFACE A9 PCB From 23 61 1nt 1 22 60 14 110 15 11 Int l To Non 23X 0 4 09 37 7500 0411 XX TM MODE AUX COMBO UM4 09 39 7500 0411 XX PCB REWORK SHEET T M MODE AUX COMBO A12 PCB From 07 08 To UM4 09 40 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE 7500 0348 09 06 05 04 PCB UM4 09 11 FIGURE IA 7500 0348 10 08
203. 1700 0009 01 1700 0002 05 06 10 12 1700 0009 01 1700 0002 01 F300 2 5A N A F201 F202 8A 250V 2700 0045 UM4 01B 7 Section 1C Cabling NOTE 02 AND HIGH HAVE 4700 PF INDUCTOR IN R m gt E BE NU 2 JUMPER CLEAN UP DASH NUMBERS 12 00 THIS OT DISCONN CONTROL MODULE WILL RESULT may be at ither location from ECT OR CONNECT Video In Video Out to CAD mm Stripchart Recorder CAD Module Printer Interface CAD Module SCSI Interface ORIGINAL STYLE EAR PANEL PCB DASH NUMBERS NO DASH 01 02 05 07 K1 e A Monitor B Control Module C D A V Module E Photo Module F Data Comm Module G H P No Function m DASH NUMBERS 11 e 13 14 NM 45 K1 HE Vi t COST REDUC U DASH from VCR NUMBERS 03 04 06 10 11 Video In Video Out to VCR Video Out to Monitor deo Out o VCR
204. 20 menu should read exercise O8F quad 256x120 The recall menu displays Press page button to display the next page of the menu if more images are available but no PAGE button is shown Press the MORE softkey to display the next page of the menu When storing to or recalling from floppy disk once the process is initiated it cannot be interrupted or aborted Do not press any keys simply wait for the process to end before beginning another process During playback of captured images some vertical shifting may be apparent on successive images The message Establishing CAD Module Communication may appear on the monitor when selecting the CAD softkey too soon after initial power up To prevent this from occurring wait for about 15 seconds after switching power on before pressing the CAD softkey Distorted or blank images may be captured and stored if a Page capture is attempted with a frozen image Use Page capture with real time images only Images captured using linear scanheads will not be synchronized to the video rate and may appear distorted or contain blank video frames when replayed GREY on the Setup softkey panel optimizes the match between the gray scale of the captured images and system real time images This function is not fully implemented for matching the gray scale of captured images and VCR images its use with VCR images is not recommended Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 7 6A Opera
205. 24V BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER FRONT EN OP AMPS m BEAMFORMER PROCESSO 1 gt MDDULE S 000 OU Im MOTOR CONTROLLER REAR PANEL BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER FRONT END MOTHERBOARD gt AMPS 2 gt w w A ALL ANALOG CIRCUITS ALL ANALOG CIRCUITS w o A bin O G AQ O G REAR PANELS gt gt 1 gt 01 08 07 09 ALL ANALOG CIRCUITS 8 gt 06 10 11 ALL ANALOG CIRCUITS e e MOTHERBOARD gt J8 44 BEAMFORMER gt TTL SIGNAL POWER FAIL RESET P1 FAN MODULE 67 2 6 7 COMMON THERMAL SHUTDOWN POWER WARNING vvv vvv 3500 0456 3500 0432 YELL BROW NC BLAC WHITE J3 OR P4 CREAR PANEL Je CONTROL MODULE RET 1 gt 70 ond 70V used on S2 systems 80 ond 80V used on S1 systems 01 501 12 01 Figure 1 3 UM 4 Power Distribution Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01B 3 1B Power Distribution Table 1B 1 Power Distribution POWER SUPPLY BEAMFORMER FRONT END A2 TTL Control Signal 80 Volts S1 14 12 Power Fail Reset Thermal Shutdown 5 Volts 5 Volt Return 170 Vo
206. 3 61 22 60 14 10 15 11 for Int l Smpl Clk Sync Non Sync 51 3 ON CLOSED OFF OPEN UM4 09 36 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0273 XX 2 D SC INTERFACE A9 PCB From 23 61 Int l System UM 4 Date 8 27 90 22 60 14 10 15 11 Int l PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 4201 0092 LABEL BLANK REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Open Switch SI 3 See Figure VII 2 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the PCB as Non 23X or higher near the dash level indicator COMMENTS This change renders the PCB as a Non 23X or higher software type Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 37 9 Reference eee s DETAIL A 01 509 09 01 Figure 7500 0273 UM4 09 38 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 7500 0411 XX T M MODE AUX COMBO PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following page describes how to down convert this PCB from 06 to a non Sync type The 08 is the same as the 07 but is a new Fab The 07 is the same as the 06 but is convertible to non Sync The 06 is the same as the 05 but has 12 MHz clock Sync changes for 240 volt sys
207. 3 8 HD Cup PT ST ZN 8 plc 1530 0036 01 Screw 5 16 24 x 5 8 SKH CS HD SS 6 plc only u w tubular rail 1520 0006 Screw 5 16 24 x 1 1 2 SKH CS HD SS 6 plc for non tubular rail 1561 0017 Washer Int Lk 5 16 ST ZN 6 plc 2950 0411 02 Caster Tente w Swivel Lck 5 Smooth Stem 2 plc Alt 2950 0411 04 2950 0411 01 Caster Tente w Brake 5 Smooth Stem 2 plc Alt 2950 0411 03 1615 0005 Cap Screw 6 x 20mm DIN912 Caster Mtg 4plc 1064 0468 Spacer EM to Rail 1065 2481 01 Tray Cable Footswitch was 1066 0153 1516 0074 Screw 6 32 x 3 8 PNH INT SEM PD ST ZN 6 plc u w 1066 0153 3500 0484 03 Footswitch 2 Pos FF 2DTM 3500 0639 01 Footswitch UM4A 1 Pos Electronics Module 8 4 3000 0207 XX Optional Equipment Module OEM ence For OEM see Section 9 Refer 1065 0511 XX Base OEM 1064 0512 XX Plate Slide OEM 1065 1289 01 Cable Clip Scanhead Wireform 4 plc 2 plc Doppler 1064 0514 XX Plate Keyboard Mounting 1064 0515 XX Panel Left Side 1065 4091 XX Panel Left Side UP 870 4100 0381 01 Label Non Doppler Not p o OEM 4100 0380 01 Label Doppler Not p o OEM 1064 0516 XX Panel Right Side 1065 4090 XX Panel Right Side UP 870 Panel Shee
208. 362 and lower PCBs and 7500 0548 XX PCBs do not support Annular Array scanheads Sector Scan head AA 3 5M Minimum Depth Penetration Axial Resolu tion mm Lateral Resolu tion mm at Focal Point cm Focal Point cm Near Field Artifact cm AA 5M AA 3 5 DBF AA 5 0 DBF 1 Refer to Scanhead Matrix in Section 5 for label definitions 2 Corrected penetration using 0 7 dB MHz phantom UM4 02C 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2C 8 2 Linear Scanheads This test checks the performance of linear and curved linear scanheads and the Beamformer PCB sets used in the UM 4 series 1 Select LINEAR softkey or press SCANHEAD SELECT hardkey The scanhead label must be displayed on the left side of the image for example DF 3 5 85CV76 or TRT L5 2 Press FOCUS softkey 2D Image Pro cessing panel or DYNAMIC FOCUS hardkey a Verify that each key depression adds another focal zone indicator to each side of the image display b When five zones are displayed the next key depression must reset the display to a single focal zone c Move the PAN ZONE cursor up and down using the trackball or joy stick and verify that the focal zone indicators move with the cursor you may have to press PAN Z first 3 Set the controls as follows POWER OUT 100 percent PUT REJECT 1 Special Function O EDGE 1 ENHANCEMENT GRA
209. 4 36 7500 0373 04 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 04 1064 0552 03 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 03 500 0738 02 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0738 02 7500 0318 10 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 10 3500 1016 01 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 1016 01 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 A binding post was added for a better ground Also the EM Rear Panel was relayed out to incorporate all the changes ECO 1897 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 25 7 Service Bulletins SOLUTION Remember that TSG approval is required to order the following parts Cont d 3500 0454 XX Chassis Assembly 7500 0344 XX Motherboard 7500 0373 XX Motherboard 1064 0244 XX Card Cage 1064 0552 XX Card Cage If there are any other questions about the compatibility of UM 4 chassis please call TSG TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Here are some situations that you might find If you experience problems with the Motherboard you might see Battery charge circuit is not working Batteries won t hold a charge Battery holders broken Intermittent signal lines gt If you experience problems with the Card Cage you might see 1 That it is cracked 2 Rail bolts pulled out 3 mobile account system If you experience problems with the Fan Assembly is bad you might see 1 Fan Board won t run the fans 2 One fan won t run at the right speed 3 Footswitch cable is intermittent If you experience problems with the Rear Panel you might see 1 Video going to all OEM devices is bad Video A
210. 5 01 N N N 8000 0177 01 02 N N N 02 0 N N N 03 0 Y N 06 Y Y N 07 08 Y Y N 08 09 Y Y N 10 11 Y Y N 112 012 Y Y N 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 24 26 8000 0570 04 04 Y Y Y 25 27 8000 0570 04 04 Y Y Y 1261 01 8000 0570 04 04 Y Y Y 1262 01 8000 0570 04 04 Y Y Y 1 Linear noise fix 3 3500 1261 62s are relayout of 2 Euro alternate only w o Gain governor 7500 0370 24 25 they are backward compat ible to 12X when configured with 8000 0570 XX or higher software Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 05 43 5 Configuration This page is intentionally left blank UM4 05 44 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No Function Normal Position 7500 0370 N A Shorted N A Shorted N A Shorted N A Shorted N A Shorted 7500 0370 N A Shorted N A Shorted Shorted for Doppler Sync Hardware Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions Open for Non Doppler Sync dependent Open for Non Sync Non Doppler Open for Doppler Sync Hardware Refer to Up Down Rev Instructions Shorted for Non Doppler dependent Sync Open for Non Sync Non Doppler 3500 1 26 Shorted op 3500 1262 01 Non Dop Doppler Open Sync configuration Non Doppler Shorted Doppler Shorted Sync configuration Non Doppler Open Shorted 1 Do not order the generic 7500 0561
211. 5mm 11 mm IVT IVT 5 0 0 5 25 mm lt 20 mm 1 0 gt 25 mm 20 40 mm gt 40mm 1 Refer to Scanhead Matrix in Section 5 for label definitions 2 Corrected penetration using 0 7 dB MHz phantom UM4 02C 16 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2C 9 M Mode ECG Doppler and Cineloop Tests The following tests must be performed on systems equipped with M mode ECG Doppler and or Cineloop options 2C 9 1 M Mode Tests Use steps 1 through 8 to test the sector M mode function and steps 9 through 16 to test the Linear M mode function Test both functions on systems configured with those functions Before beginning these tests the system should be set up as follows The appropriate scanheads are connected to the system The system is set to its power up default val ues except that a sector scanhead should be selected The footswitches are connected to the sys tem The Main panel is displayed on the softkey control panel 1 On either the softkey control panel or the hardkey control panel press M LINE 2 Verify that a sector image with the M line bisecting it is displayed 3 On the softkey M line panel press M MODE or on the hardkey control panel press 2D TM 4 Verify that M mode is selected and that the M mode markers scroll across the screen Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C Repeat steps 3 and 4 using the 2D
212. 6 Mercury S H Duplex TRT 4000 0173 01 02 03 04 Sec Lin IVT 3 0 4000 0171 Note 9 IVT 5 0 4000 0172 Note 9 IVT Array 11 mm 4000 0238 MFI 5 0 7 5 4000 0271 CVA 3 5 40 mm 4000 0176 CVA 5 0 40 mm 4000 0174 CVA 3 5 76 mm 4000 0231 ICT 7 5 4000 0230 72X SERIES 724B 5 GGK 101 24488 724B 5 GGK 101 24488 NOTES 1 Replace with 4000 01 88 XxX 6 Use of Mercury Motor Controller or UM 4PLUS beam 2 Replace with 4000 0189 XX former renders UM 4 system incapable of supporting 3 Replace with 4000 0109 AA scanheads 4 Replace with 4000 0110 7 Also compatible with UM 4DBF Int l only 5 02 and 03 are functional equivalents and inter 8 Refer to Scanhead Cap Code table changeable 9 Dash levels 07 and below do not have fill ports Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 85 5 Configuration Table 5 7 Scanhead Cap Codes First Letter Second Letter Third Letter Frequency Transducer Focal Focal MHz Diameter Point Zone mm cm cm The duplex CW Doppler frequency is for both the AA amp CW portions of the scanhead Table 5 8 Pulsed Doppler Operating Frequencies 4 25 XX and above Scanhead Type Pulsed Doppler Frequency Access A 3M 2 31 MHz Access A 3L 2 31 MHz Access A 5M 3 75 MHz Access A 5ML 3 75 MHz Access A 3M 5M 7 55 2 31 3 75 3 75 MHz Access A 5M 58 7 55 3 75 5 0 5 0 MHz Access B 3 5 7 5 2 31 3 75 3 75 MHz Access B 5 7 5 10 3 75 3
213. 7 NOTES NOTE Jumper position refers to the physical position of the jumper as you look at the component side of the PCB with the connectors down For example indi cates a jumper in the 1 2 position Some two pin jumpers are either installed or left open and still others are hardwired Jump ers that are installed or open are so noted in the jumper matrix some jumpers that are hardwired are also included for refer ence Dipswitch setting refers to the physical position of the individual switch as you look at the component side of the PCB with the card edge connectors facing down For example OFF UP OPEN e ON DOWN CLOSED Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Dash Part No No Ref Pins Function Normal Position Notes Des 7500 0347 JP1 1 2 Shorted for 8K x 8 RAM Shorted 6 H Y i Figure 5 4 Jumper Matrix CAUTION There are several types of dip switches used on PCBs At least two red varia tions have been used on PCBs manufactured at Bothell and a black version was used on UM 4 and UM 5 systems manufactured in Solingen Germany 1 Do not change switch positions unless specifically directed to do so or you are confident that a switch in the wrong position Write down switch positions before making changes Some switches are labelled CLOSED and others labelled ON both mean the same thing
214. 700 0002 12 UM4 07 24 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 SOLUTION The EM Rear Panel modified to support the high contrast monitor ECO 1481 Cont d 3500 0454 27 3500 0454 28 7500 0373 03 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 03 1064 0552 01 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 01 3500 0738 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0738 01 7500 0318 02 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 02 3500 0581 04 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 04 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 These changes support the CAD system ECO 1488 3500 0454 29 3500 0454 30 7500 0373 04 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 04 1064 0552 01 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 01 3500 0738 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0738 01 7500 0318 03 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 03 3500 0581 04 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 04 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0032 01 3500 0454 31 3500 0454 32 7500 0373 04 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 04 1064 0552 03 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 03 3500 0738 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0738 01 7500 0318 06 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 06 3500 0581 04 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 04 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 This will correct Lenzar image problems ECO 1600A 3500 0454 33 3500 0454 34 7500 0373 04 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 04 1064 0552 03 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 03 3500 0738 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0738 01 7500 0318 06 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 06 3500 1016 01 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 1016 01 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 This change will introduce the CW Duplex scanhead The System Receiver has completely changed ECO 1769 3500 0454 35 3500 045
215. 8 RAM Shorted JP2 Shorted for 32K x 8 RAM Open JP3 Shorted for 16K x 8 Shorted JP4 Shorted for 16K x 8 Open JP5 JP14 Not used Open Not illustrated because not movable SW1 Not used N A Not used N A Not used N A Not used N A 7500 0390 Test Shorted Memory expand Open Disable Sync clock Shorted Memory expand Open Memory expand Shorted Not used N A Not used N A Not used N A Not used N A k UI I2 e UIII e UIIO JP3 0107 dim OL JP2 OL 062 SWI U60 SWI 0102 959 Pl oll JP4 UP5 JP3 TIT U39 JP2 U69 U74 JPI U68 094 fo m o e i 01 ES05 A13 01 01 505 14 01 DOPPLER PROCESSOR A7 DOPPLER PROCESSOR A7 7500 0347 XX 7500 0390 XX Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 51 5 Configuration A8 Motor Controller PCB HFC 4APLUs PCBs 7500 03045 7500 0348 7500 0517 REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 32X DOP SYNC Notes 0348 64 Y N 1 2 Order only for AA 10 11 1 Order only for AA 65 1 4 61 1 4 62 1 4 0348 12 1 4 0517 03 1 3 aC A A 1 0348 64 A 14 R R R 1 1 PROMs required 2 Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions in Section 9 3 Software supporting 7500 0517 XX does not support MFI refer to PROM matrix for correct 7500 0348 XX and software choice 4 Non AA versions recommended for non AA systems due to increased
216. A only FSR Product Coding USA There is no FSR code for 32X software Product Configuration Codes USA X 32X software FEATURES SUPPORTED All features supported by 31X FEATURES NOT SUPPORTED No features have been deleted from 31X HARDWARE DESCRIPTION While there are no specific hardware changes associated with 32X upgrading a system to 32X will most likely require that hardware replacements conform to a list of approved PCB assemblies This is due to the formal definition of compatible hardware that will be released with 32 04 A total system hardware field baseline will not be required however all replacement PCBs upgrade or repair in a 32X system must be on the compatible list Do not install a PCB in a 32X system unless it is included in the 32X column of the Replacement Matrix NOTE A number of PCBs are also being depopulated as a cost reduction measure circuitry for features no longer offered for sale is being removed Therefore when selecting PCBs pay particular attention to the FEATURES columns in replacement matrices to ensure correct operation after PCB replacement For example to reduce fail ures due to a relay failure the new replacement for the Motor Control PCB will not support AA scanheads Only AA systems will receive an AA Motor Controller PCB all others will receive a defeatured PCB to reduce failures Also the 13 Hear Panel PCB will not sup port CAD or LS 8 the 05 receiver will not support Duplex
217. AND AUXILIARY MONITOR 01 501 02 02 Figure 1 1 UM 4 Functions Sheet 2 of 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual DFT 5 FORMER ACCESS 5 SYSTEM REC SYSTEM CONTROLLER KEYBOARD CONTROLLER DISP CONT VIDEO DR SIMPLIFIED IMAGING DATA PATH DATA COMM MODULE ACQUISITION GROUP XDR ID DFT ANNULAR ARRAY 724B ACCESS lt EFT 7248 ACCESS EFT i 2220 ANALOG CONTROL SIGNALS EFT ACCESS 724B lt 7248 ACCESS lt ert lt RF SELECT 81 DOPPLER PULSER S2 A1 POSITION QUANTI TIZERS MOTOR DRIVERS 3 BEAMFORMER A1 A4 CONTROL lt A4 XDR ID TGC FOCUS A2 A3 SYSTEM RECEIVER RF RELAY gt SERIAL BUS d d MICRO PROCESSOR PULSE PROCESSOR A5 SERVO CONTROL CIRCUITS CPU 5 0 gt LINE COUNT gt STATUS I s E Er Ls ECG LEADS SYSTEM CONTROLLER DATA COMM INTERFACE PARALLEL PORTS A15 FLOPPY DISK CONT INTERFACE A9 ACQUISITION ADDRESSING amp CONTROL FRAME u AVERAGER MEMORY MICRO PROCESSOR PERIPHERAL PORTS KEYBOARD CONTROLLER BUFFER
218. ANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Remove the top cover of the Pulse Processor shield see Figure Ill 2 Remove R222 if R222 is not mounted on a solderable post cut the leads as close to the body of the resistor as possible and use those leads to install a new resistor per Step 3 3 Replace R222 with a 237 OHM resistor 2820 0074 4 Replace the Pulse Processor shield 5 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as 03 if it was originally a 05 or a 11 if a was originally a 09 COMMENTS This change renders the board as a Non Annular Array compatible and allows it to function with non Annular Array software The 03 version that results is a Sync type which requires an external clock from the Doppler processor Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 17 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0370 XX S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB System UM 4 Date 1 21 88 10 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 2820 0074 RESISTOR 237 OHM 1 4100 0092 LABEL BLANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Remove the top cover of the Pulse Processor shield see Figure Ill 2 Remove R222 if R222 is not mounted on a solderable post cut the leads as close to the body of the resistor as possible and use those leads to install a new resistor per Step 3 3 Replace R222 with a 237 OHM resistor 2820 0074 4 Replace the Pulse Processor sh
219. Brackets Qty 2 1064 0369 01 to the Rear EM Bezel with the phillips screws Qty 4 1516 0005 and washers Qty 4 1560 0017 7 Reinstall the Rear EM Bezel Ultramark 4 Field Senice Manual 2 UM4 07 29 Install the Storage Utility Tray on the EM rear Panel 7 Service Bulletins pr XE E aes na jo s 4 1 M d l ee MI IRAE CE t d XM oe NAR au Ah X if Dp S if PLACE PLACE l E LARGE TEMPLATE E SMALL TEMPLATE i BOTTOM N S E i 1 lt 1 1 d J 1 i de oc x AA gt z 01 SVCB 050 01 INSIDE EM REAR BEZEI UM4 07 30 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 TUYA 13239 CUT OUT 2 AC N ep 4 2 n EE eS a a 1431 5 F of o N 9 2 2 2 5 22 5 P m AAILSAP 1 31 BEZEL DRILL TEMPLATE 01 SVCB 051 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 31 WITH ATTACHMENTS 8 WITH PARTS YES Service Bulletin Date January 9 1991 PAGE 1 OF 2
220. CR playback If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 29 6 Operating Notes 7 When recalling an image previously stored with ECG data via data comm the ECG data will either be missing or incorrect General Analysis 7 While any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system 7 When printing multiple reports some reports may not start at the top of a page Before printing a report press the form feed button on the printer to ensure that each report starts at the top of a new page 7
221. DEL UM 4 Symptom No video to monitor or peripherals Possible Cause Rear Panel PCB or interconnect cable 1 Fault Isolation Check for video at Rear Panel Connector A coax A1 or Connector E coax A1 PROBLEM CATEGORY VIDEO Solution Reference Configuration Section 5 Repair or replace Rear Panel PCB or Repair or replace intercon nect cable MBJ9 to Rear Panel J8 Motherboard Check for video at J9 on Motherboard Configuration Section 5 Repair or replace Mother board Display Controller PCB A14 Verify video at pin 31C of Display Controller PCB Configuration Section 5 Replace Display Controller PCB if no video No video on monitor peripherals ok Rear Panel PCB Verify video at Rear Panel Connector A coax A1 Configuration Section 5 Repair or replace Rear Panel PCB Video cable Check cable Repair or replace cable Monitor failure Verify CRT filaments lit Check and replace fuse as required Repair or replace monitor Verify proper video input If video input ok repair or replace monitor No video on peri pheral monitor ok No power to peripheral Ensure Data Comm is switched on Turn Data Comm on Check fuse in Data Comm Replace fuse Check peripheral power input Repair or replace peripheral Peripheral failure Verify input to peripheral Repair or replace peripheral Interconne
222. DOA and unused parts with the proper Return Control Authorization RCA form insuring Configuration 5 that the RCA form is for the specific order the serial number is correct and that all components included are listed NOTE fthe new parts did not correct the problem and are being returned to the fac tory label them Used for Troubleshoot ing I C Orientation Indicator XX XXXX XXXX XX XXXX XXXX OOOOOOOO SOCKET PIN LOCATOR Correct Orientation of Label Top of Socket Key Towards Pin 1 Indicator T di Apply Even Pressure E d Non Static Surface 2 ALIGNING PINS FOR INSERTION SIDE VI EW Figure 5 6 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 01 505 01 01 IC Orientation 0 4 05 11 5 Configuration 5 1 9 Software Anomalies 2 SYMPTOM A phenomenon or circum stance considered as an indication or characteristic of an inappropriate condition or event The System Anomaly section consists of software related troubleshoot
223. Disconnecting Access scanheac 1 Freeze system 2 Disconnect Lemo connector 3 Disconnect BNC connector NOTE For older systems or your peace of mind follow the procedure in the operation manual written for and shipped with the system Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 69 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES WITH PARTS YES NO a a Y i Y Service Bulletin G Date January 3 1994 S B No UM4 140 Rev To All Field Service Personnel Author Noel Joseph Non Annular Array Motor Controller PROBLEM Unreliable Relay on the Motor Controller causing premature failure CAUSE Relay K1 on the Motor Controller tends to stick This relay is necessary for the Annular Array and CW Duplex Scanheads to function As a cost reduction and reliability improvement the K1 relay has been removed on the Motor Controller for Non Annular Array and Non CW Duplex systems SOLUTION For Non Annular Array and Non CW Duplex systems order Motor Controller PCB numbers 7500 0348 12 60 61 62 For Annular Array and CW Duplex systems order Motor Controller PCB num bers 7500 0348 09 10 11 NOTE Refer to the UM 4 Configuration section of the Service Manual Motor Controller PCB 7500 0348 12 is a new layout and will not support Annular Array CW Duplex non sync systems and systems with CAD PROCEDURE Check system performance with all scanheads after replacing the Motor Controller PCB UM4 07 70 Ultramar
224. Do not operate a system in the presence of flammable gases or anesthetics or in an oxygen enriched environment i e in an explosive atmosphere An explosion could result Mechanical Safety CAUTION Use caution when transporting the system over uneven surfaces includ ing entry to or exit from elevators WARNING Stacking equipment other than equipment specified by ATL on the system Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Introduction can cause unstable it to become mechanically CAUTION Do not use esters or ketone solutions to clean parts Discoloration or worse will result System Safety Symbology Document IEC601 1 International Elec trotechnical Commission Safety of Medi cal Electrical Equipment classifies patient connections according to whether the outer enclosure is grounded or floating non conducting The classifications are shown below Grounded chassis Protection against electrical shock is provided by connection of chassis to the safety ground IEC601 1 Type B Isolated patient 601 1 Type BF connection IEC Isolated patient 601 1 Type CF connection IEC and O on circuit breaker and power switch represents ON and OFF respectively O This symbol identifies safety note Be sure you understand the func tion of this control before using it Drip proof hand held appliance trans ducer assembly This instrument may be safely handled with wet hands Identifi
225. EAMFORMER CONTROLLER PCB 7500 0362 XX PCB REWORK SHEET BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER A4 PCB From 04 03 02 01 To 7500 0370 XX PULSE PROCESSOR PCB 7500 0370 XX PCB REWORK SHEET S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 05 09 03 11 7500 0370 XX PCB REWORK SHEET S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 04 08 02 10 7500 0370 XX PCB REWORK SHEET S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 03 QT ieu Rue un 7500 0370 XX PCB REWORK SHEET S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 05 03 09 11 25 To 04 02 08 10 24 7500 0370 XX PCB REWORK SHEET S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 202 us nose REDE ERE GO adip 3500 1261 XX 3500 1262 XX PULSE PROCESSOR 3500 1261 XX 3500 1262 XX PCB REWORK SHEET PULSE PROCESSOR PCB From 1261 To 1262 XX 7500 0347 XX DOPPLER PROCESSOR 7500 0374 XX TM MODE 2 2 7500 0374 XX PCB REWORK SHEET TM MODE AUX A13 PCB From 02 10 70
226. ER PROVIDES USER INTERFACE BETWEEN CONTROL ACQUISITION GROUP Sheet 1 CONTROLS DATA COMM DISC DRIVES MODULE CONTROLS AND SYSTEM CONTROLLER PERFORMS ALL MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS FUNCTIONS GENERATES REPORTS AND DRIVES PRINTER N 7 SERIAL BUS PARALLEL BUS gt LN 1 gt COMBO AND CINE PCBs COMBINE FUNCTIONS OF A9 S C INTERFACE AND A10 S C BUFFER PCBs CINE PCB HAS EXPANDED MEMORY FOR CINELOOP SERIAL BUS 9 11 2D SCAN CONVERTER FORMATS 2D ULTRASOUND DATA EITHER POLAR SECTOR OR RECTANGULAR LINEAR INTO RECTANGULAR COORDINATES WITH RASTER TV TIMING A9 S C INTERFACE COMBO OR CINE PCB RECEIVES CONTROL ACQUISITION AND ADDRESS DATA AND SYSTEM CONTROLLERS WACQUISITION CONTROL OF 2D AND TM MODE SCAN CONVERTER GROUPS VIA ACQ AND SAMPLE CLOCKS FRAME AVERAGING SMOOTHING INTERPOLATES SECTOR COORDINATES TO RECTANGULAR COORDINATES ROW AND COLUMN FOR DISPLAY MEMORY READ WRITE CONTROL FROM BEAMFORMER PULSE PROCESSOR AND MOTOR A10 SCAN CONVERTER BUFFER PCB 2D SCAN CONVERSION SHIFTS A LINE OF VIDEO IN AT ULTRASOUND SCAN RATE 1 10 KHZ SHIFTS OUT AT TV HORIZONTAL SWEEP RATE 15 750 HZ EIA 16 625 HZ CCIR STORES 2D IMAGES FOR FREEZE FRAME AND IMAGE STORE FUNCTION A11 S C OUTPUT ADDRESS GENERATOR MANIPULATES DISPLAY ADDRESSES TO PRODUCE AND OTHER DISPLAY FEATURES GENERATES FRAME RATE
227. ER SUPPLY 1700 0002 10 With this level the Power Supply was improved for noise reduction The Receiver was upgraded for noise problem in Doppler noise bands ECO 1159 3500 0454 13 3500 0454 14 7500 0373 01 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 01 1064 0244 CARD CAGE 1064 0244 3500 0431 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0614 01 7500 0318 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 3500 0581 01 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 01 1700 0002 11 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 The EM Rear Panel assembly was modified to support extra video out for the Sony printer on the UM 4A systems Also notice that the Power Supply was modified for UL approval ECO 1196 3500 0454 15 3500 0454 16 7500 0373 01 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 01 1064 0244 CARD CAGE 1064 0244 3500 0431 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0614 01 7500 0318 02 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 01 3500 0581 01 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 01 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 This chassis was modified so that dual access connector will fit The Receiver was modified so the dual access connector cable won t be in the way of the screw that holds the Receiver to the Card Cage The Motherboard was modified for the dual access compatibility ECO 4004 3500 0454 17 3500 0454 18 7500 0373 02 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 02 1064 0244 01 CARD CAGE 1064 0244 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 061 4 01 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 01 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 02 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 23 7 Service Bulletins SOLUTION This change incorporate
228. ES columns SYNC NON SYNC etc NOTE facolumn is blank that feature is not a determining factor for that PCB and does not need to be considered NOTE The PCB and PROM matrices are compiled to provide support for all existing systems with the least number of dash lev els PCBs not included in these matrices Will be reworked at the factory to the high est possible level as they cycle through the supply system If a PCB is not listed in this table it does not have configurable jumpers i e no mov able jumpers PCB Silhouettes S2 Figure 5 7 switches jumpers and l C locations are shown for configuration requirements and firmware listed in the various matrices Scanhead Compatibility Matrix Compatibility is indicated by the lowest software level required for operation See S2 Section 5 6 for Scanhead Matrix UM4 05A 9 0L VSO VIARQ enuey oles 4 v Table 5A 3 UM 4 S1 PCB Replacement Matrix Ref Frame Con Des PCB Name PCB Part No ax 5X 6X 17X Grab vert mmm TTT Tt tt tt Lu FE Bmfrmr Focus 7500 0320 7500 0361 Bmfrmr Controller 7500 0324 7500 0362 pe MI MINE Motor Controller 7500 0304 7500 0348 AL LTTE S C Buffer 7500 0315 Fc ese ae Oa aa CO Su o TTP gt gt gt m gt gt gt gt gt gt 2 277 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt
229. Figure Bottom View of LENZAR CAMERA LENZAR TRAY 4 T 1 A RAIL STRAP p 7 8 4 SCREW 4 Pics M Figure 2 Side View of 01 SVCB 049 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 19 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L Service Bulletin PAGE 1 OF 2 Date December 18 1987 S B UM4 69 Rev To Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Phu Nguyen Use of the Microphone on the UM 4A CV and PV with AG 6400 VCR PROBLEM This Service Bulletin provides instruction on how to use the microphone input on the UM 4A CV and PV systems with the AG 6400 VCR Audio dubbing can be accomplished by performing the following set up 1 VCR switch setting Refer to illustration for switches location Set the HD Audio Input select switch to LINE The NORM Audio Input Select switch must be toggled from LINE to MIC per the following Set to LINE for Doppler audio input from the UM 4 system Set to MIC for audio input from the microphone Set the Audio Selector switch to NORMAL when playing back the audio dubbed onto channel 2 along with audio recorded onto channel 1 such as Doppler audio When Audio Selector switch is set to HD only audio recorded Doppler audio is played back 2 Microphone If yo
230. L ACCESS RECEIVER ACCSEL ANNUL AR ARRAY MOTHER BOARD LINEAR CONNECTOR LINEAR EAR ANNULAR ARRAY DUAL ACC SELECT PCB SYSTEM DUAL ACCESS RECEIVER ACCSEL DUAL LINEAR POWER amp CONTROL gt PANEL MOTHER BOARD 1 LINEAR DUAL LINEAR SCANHEAD RELAY PCB m SCANHEAD DUAL LIN DUAL ACC 1 ACCSEL CONTROL SIGNAL SWITCHES LINEAR AND ACCESS SCANHEAD CONNECTORS IN EITHER MODE 01 ESO1 807 01 Figure 1 6 Dual Access Dual Linear Circuit Details Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01A 7 8 enuey 4 v 4 N L ureJbeiq avo r wn 0 808 1053 0 HAND CONTROLLER SYSTEM CONTROLLER PCB i ECG ECG MODULE
231. LEVEL PROM COMPATIBILITY Part Dash 16 23 25 26 29 Ref P N Dash HR No No 17 X X 28X X Des 4201 No AA LA MFI X 0370 08 6220 0013 09 8000 0177 8000 0177 8000 0177 08 09 8000 0177 8000 0177 24 26 8000 0570 25 27 8000 0570 1261 01 8000 0570 lt lt lt KL KL KL KL KIL KL KIL KI lt 21212 lt lt lt KL KL KL KL KIL KE KK ZZ 21212 lt lt lt K K K 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1262 01 8000 0570 UM4 07 58 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 1 Linear noise fix 2 Euro alternate only w o Gain governor 3 Order 8000 00570 04 instead of 02 the 04 is an updated version of the 02 containing revised power tables Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 59 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y Y S ervice Bulletin G Date March 31 1993 S B UM4 133 Rev To Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Noel Joseph 2D Scan Converter Interface Oscillator Rework Verification Problem Symptom Possible Cause Solution Incomplete rework causes Incomplete rework on the Inspect the 2D Scan Converter inaccurate measurements 2D Scan Converter PCB Interface PCB for the completion Scope All 2D Scan of the rework Converter 1
232. Label Software Level 32 UM4 English 4100 0930 01 Label Software Level 32 UM4 French 4100 0931 01 Label Software Level 32 UM4 German 1516 0114 Screw 6 32 2 plc 1514 0060 Screw 4 40 2 plc 1064 0304 Panel Blank 9901 0015 Tape Foam Double Sided u m inch 119 27314 01 Label Surgery WARNING 4100 0363 01 Label Serial Number Intl 4100 0363 02 Label Serial Number Dom 4100 0341 Label TUV Intl 4100 0371 01 Label UL Dom 1065 0520 05 Bracket Lower Lenzar Mounting UM4 08 6 1065 1150 02 Bracket Lower Front Lenzar Mounting Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 1 UM 4 Human Factors Cart HFC Cont d ATL Part Description 1065 0525 02 Bracket Lenzar Mounting 1517 0040 Screw 8 32 x 3 8 PNH 1517 0005 Screw 8 32 x 3 8 FLH 1516 0141 Screw 6 32 x 5 16 2210 0137 Tape Foam u m foot 1065 0521 01 Bracket Keyboard Support 3500 1055 01 Jack Assy Headphone Microphone For system w Lenzar only 2208 0125 01 Clip Saddle Cable Holder For system w Lenzar only 1 To order refer to the Reference section to determine the correct replacement part number 2 To order a peripheral refer to the appropriate Peripheral Field Service Manual Cameras B W Recorders or Misc to determine the correct replacement part number 3 To
233. Line on the keyboard there is a key labeled clear Line This can be easily done if the customer is annotating on the screen and then clearing that annotation SOLUTION Engineering is presently investigating why sfunc clear line is mimicking sfunc ctril x No solution is available at this time Advise your customer of the potential hazard and inform me of any site experi encing the problem Will Need The Key Sequence The Customer Used And Any Other Information That Can Be Acquired Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 41 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO Service Bulletin PAGE 1 OF 1 Date April 3 1992 S B UM4 120 Rev To All Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Bach Tuyet Thi Nguyen PROBLEM CAUSE EFFECTIVITY SOLUTION UM4 07 42 UM 4 VCR Tape Counter Some customers may complain that the UM 4 VCR tape counter and or on screen counter resets to zero after the system is turned off When power is applied the VCR generates a reset signal to reset its own tape counter to zero This reset signal is also sent to the A V module and the system control bus which causes the on screen counter to reset to zero All UM 4 HFC systems with portable VCRs except the NV 8420 Recommend the customer work around the problem as follows 1 Recommend that your customer use the E M ON OFF switch this swit
234. M New Logo 2 plc 7500 0548 xx Bmfrmr 4100 0618 01 Label UM 4A Monitor 4100 0707 02 Label UM 4PLUS Monitor New Logo 4100 0929 01 Label Software Level 32 UM4 English 4100 0930 01 Label Software Level 32 UM4 French 4100 0931 01 Label Software Level 32 UM4 German 3500 0671 04 Speaker Amp Box Assy 7500 0355 PCB Audio Amp 4400 0022 Knob Rubber 875 Dia 4400 0022 01 Knob Rubber 875 Dia Brn PV 3500 0662 03 Speaker Assy w Cable 2 plc Doppler Note 2 Control Module See Section 5 for P Ns 1065 1276 02 Bezel Dress Video Printer UP 870 Not Used Not Used 1064 0518 01 Cover Back System w o Printer 1065 1689 01 Cover Rear OEM Serial Data Port Connector 3500 1259 02 Cable OEM Serial Data Port Rear Panel System w Printer or new style power distr assy 22 4100 0894 01 Label OEM Rear Panel Int l Req for 1065 1689 XX cover 4100 0719 02 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Label OEM Rear Panel Domestic Req for 1065 1689 XX cover 0 4 08 11 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 3 Ultramark 4AFF 4A and Cont d ATL Part No Description 3500 1528 0 Cable Monitor Video Copy Molded UM 4A Reg for AG 5700 VCR Alt 1 2275 0184 02 6013 0116 01 Remote Control P 60U Note 3 2100 05
235. M SEC 1 50 Access B3 only yields 1 50 M SEC no specs available 2C 9 4 Cineloop 1 Scan yourself or move the scanhead while scanning a phantom to obtain an active 2D display 2 Press FRZ then CINE NOTE Do not remove the scanhead after accessing Cineloop images with the Trackball for at least 45 seconds 3 Rotate the trackball right and left to verify a Cineloop sequence has been captured and stored 4 Press RETRN and enter any other mode to leave Cineloop mode 2C 10 VCR Tests The following set of tests is used to check the performance of the HFC or Full Peripheral mounted VCRs all of which can be operated from the system control panel Test VCRs on the UM 4A small cart using the controls on the VCR since they cannot be controlled from the system Control Module All controls and connectors used in this procedure are located on the front or side panel of the VCR Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Load a blank VHS video cassette into the recorder Plug a microphone into the micro phone jack on the A V Module If you are using a condenser microphone ensure that a fresh battery is installed in the microphone On the hardkey control panel press RECORD or on the softkey control panel press VCR and then press RECORD Verify that both the PLAY and RECORD indicator LEDs on the VCR are lit or that the information dis play on the VCR indicates REC Scan the phantom and speak into the
236. M4 02D 10 Remove covers to gain access to all internal assemblies Perform an internal cleaning and inspection Verify the integrity of cables PCBs and socket mounted devices Clean the rollers with alcohol Photograph all system modalities and verify proper video alignment Listen for signs of mechanical problems Review camera images with operator for approval 2D 6 5 B W Printers 1 2 Clean and inspect external covers Verify the integrity of the interconnect cable assembly and power cable Verify the physical integrity and opera tion of all doors buttons and knobs Verify switch settings Verify print quality If there are lines in the print attempt to clean the print head with the appropriate head clean ing sheet Print all system modalities and verify proper printer alignment Listen for signs of mechanical problems Review printer images with operator for their approval Provide the system operator with a head cleaning sheet and demonstrate its use Advise them how to order addi tional sheets Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2D 7 Scanheads 1 Clean transducer and cable with disin fectant such as Vespore Avoid using alcohol or lanolin based products as they can soften the transducer cap Inspect cables transducer housing and scanhead lens or face for signs of physical damage Verify that the LEMO connector on mechanical scan heads is tight Check fo
237. Manual 1517 0079 Screw and Washer CAD Bullnose 2 plc 0 4 08 17 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 5 HFC Optional Equipment Module Assembly Cont d ATL Part Description 1064 0229 04 Front OEM w Photo Mod Uses 1064 0228 00 1065 1172 01 Bezel Front OEM CAD or Video Printer Uses 1064 0228 01 1064228 10 Bezel Blank w o Photo Mod Use w 1064 0289 xx 1064 0228 01 Bezel Blank w o Video Printer or CAD Use w 1065 1172 01 1064 0228 01 Bezel Blank w o Video Printer or CAD Use w 1065 1172 01 1064 1276 02 Video Printer Dress UP870 Use w 1065 1172 01 1064 0304 Tape Double sided Req 12 for 1064 0228 00 01 2 for 1065 1276 01 02 Bezel Blank A V Module 1064 0248 04 Bezel Rear OEM w Bump Non CAD 1064 0304 Bezel Blank Data Comm Rear 3500 1431 01 Assy Printer Interface HFC Domestic Replaces Data Comm 3500 1259 03 Cable Assy RS232 Serial Comm Rear Panel to Printer Inter face Panel 3500 1431 XX 1064 0302 Bezel Blank Data Comm Side 1064 0299 Bezel NV 8420 VCR 1064 0444 Bezel Upper VR 40 VCR Bezel Lower VR 40 VCR Bezel Assy Generic VCR 1064 0301 Bezel Blank VCR 1 To order refer to the Reference section to determine the correct replacement part number 2 To order a peripheral refer to the appropriate Peripheral Field Service Manual Cameras B W Recorders or Misc to determine the correct
238. Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling at the end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 7 6 Operating Notes Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a
239. Motor Controller 32X 4201 0265 15 PROM Motor Controller U27 or U33 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 67 7 Service Bulletins 7 0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION Manual Change UM4PLus Softkey English 4705 0001 36 Rev A Manual Change UM4PLus Hardkey English 4705 0004 12 Rev A Ops Notes 32X English 4707 0001 12 Rev B Manual Change UM4PLus Softkey German 4775 0001 36 Rev A Manual Change UM4PLUS Hardkey German 4775 0004 12 Rev A Ops Notes 32X German 4771 0001 12 Rev B UM4 07 68 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO a Y Y S ervice Bulletin G Date August 16 1993 S B No UM4 138 Rev Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Paul Peterson UM 4 Lemo BNC Connector Sequence Problem Symptom Possible Cause Confusion regarding proper Contradicting procedures Follow instructions as procedure for scanhead exist between old and recent described in the operation removal and connection operation manuals manual issued with the sys tem The original procedure was based on the assumption that disconnecting the Lemo first might cause damage to the scanhead The Motor Controller PCB Engineer recommends the following procedure Connecting Access scanheads 252 1 Freeze system A 2 Connect BNC connector emo 3 Connect Lemo connector
240. N PLUS SYSTEMS PULSE PARALLEL BUS DATA PATH 2 gt FOR SYSTEMS WITHOUT RESOLUTION PLUS SYSTEM RECEIVER FUNCTIONS ARE PROVIDED BY CIRCUITRY ON THE PULSE PROCESSOR PCB 7500 0313 PROCESSOR PCB IS PART NUMBER 7500 0370 FOR SYSTEMS WITHOUT RESOLUTION PLUS PULSE PROCESSOR PCB IS 7500 0313 4 MAY BE ON TM MODE PCB OR ON TM AUXILLARY PCB Figure 1 2 Imaging M Mode Data Path Block Diagram Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01A 3 STATIC XDCR CW ACCESS f STATIC TRANSDUCER 5 gt ACCESS EFT STATIC TRANSDUCER access 5 EFT 1 ANALOG CONTROL SIGNALS EFT ACCESS ACCESS EFT lt SYSTEM CONTROLLER SYSTEM REC MOTOR CONT ACQUISITION GROUP CW PULS KEYBOARD CONTROLLER SIMPLIFIED DOPPLER DATA PATH SYSTEM CONTROLLER A15 DATA COMM MODULE FLOPPY DISK CONT PARALLEL BUS PD PULS DOPPLER PULSER A1 CW BUFFER 2D PULS SYSTEM RECEIVER T R BUFFER P laced B P FILTER POSITION QUANTI TIZERS LINE SERVO MOTOR CONTROL MICRO PROC ES ES PULSER PULSE PROCESSOR A5 m DOPPLER PROCESSOR A7 SERIAL MICRO CW BUS PROCESSOR PULSER INT amp MEMORY INTFC DOPPLER ACQ DOPPLER ACQUISITION A6 RF RELAY ZMS ae PHASE SHIFT amp SUMMING CONTROL MUX 42 25 INT
241. NC connector 3100 1845 0 1 BNC barrel connector 3100 0799 75 ohm terminator 3100 1062 6 ft BNC cable 2275 0176 18 in BNC cable 101 20769 3 6 Clean filter labels 4100 0355 Access fill kits 130 27009 0 7 WAA fill kits 8000 0467 0 1 Yellow Eureka bags 6005 0244 0 1 Brown Eureka bags 6005 0244 0 1 PM field service reports 4765 0373 0 1 PM stickers 4765 0265 0 1 PM certificate 198 19058 0 0 Nylon PM bag UM4 02D 2 6005 0593 0 1 Cable labels 2209 0048 Cable tie blocks 2208 0002 Cable anchors 2208 0070 Cable clamp 1 in 2208 0116 Cable clamp 2 in 2208 0063 Cable strap 8 2208 0073 Cable strap 6 2208 0105 Scanhead clip holder sm 6005 0461 0 1 Scanhead clip holder med 6005 0461 0 2 Nylon mesh cable wrap 2210 0191 Adhesives Paints and Lubricants Part Description Part Tak Pak 2301 0244 Super glue 2301 0264 Super gel 2301 0503 0 1 Adhesive pack 2301 0194 Loctite 2301 0258 Epoxy silicone sealant 2301 0145 Thermal repair 2301 0369 Blue Loctite 2301 0256 Ivory paint 1 199 19015 0 2 Black paint 199 19016 0 3 Ivory spray paint 2301 0552 0 1 White paint 199 19015 0 1 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Table 2D 1 Par
242. NEL AND CONTROLLER TRNSFMR FILTERS LINE 115 230VAC CONDITIONING RECTIFIER CONTROL SV RAIL FROM POWER AND AND AND PULSE SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGE WIDTH 5V RECTIFIERS PCBs ASSEMBLY FILTER CONFIG MODULATOR CHANNEL AND STRAPPING TRNSFMR FILTERS 15V MC RTN REGULATORS SYSTEM 15V AN 15 AN POWER SWITCH E gt 5 system L 6 PCBs e p 3 p 31 p gt AV MODULE 9 DATA COMM gt 7 p OR CAD CURRENT 8 p gt VIDEO PRINTER SENSING J2 P W 9 BEAMFORMER V We 8 PULSE PROCESSOR 170V HIGH We 6 PULSE PROCESSOR 1 SYSTEM T OVARBOV VOLTAGE 212 7oviesov POWER SWITCH 80 CONTROL 1 70V 80V 15V AN RTN POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSY 6V p gt 12 gt BEAMFORMER HV RTN 16 24V SECONDARY PCB er 2 d SYSTEM MONITOR PHOTO MODULE HIGH CURRENT F3 E m OVER VOLTAGE DETECT X OUTLETS SHUTDOWN CONTROL LINE OVER CUBBENT CONTROL 2aVRTN FAN MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION ASSY HIGH TEMP THERMAL CUTOUT HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL SENSE J6 POWER FAIL BF READY CONTROL RESET SYSTEM BEAMFORMER 1 LOGIC PCBs LOGIC COMMMON THERMAL SHUTDOWN FAN MODULE 5 01
243. ONTROL FOR MECHANICAL SCANHEADS END FIRE WOBBLERS ACCESS ROTARY INCL DPLX CW AND MERCURY ANNULAR ARRAY SENDS XDCR FIRE TO PULSE PROCESSOR PCB A5 FOR ALL MECHANICAL S Hs INCL AA REPORTS TRANSDUCER ANGLE TO SCAN CONVERTER D S MECHANICAL SCANHEADS DISPLAY GROUP SHEET 2 gt V SYSTEM RECEIVER S2 ONLY RF RELAYS T R SWITCHING B P FILTERS AMPS RCV FRONT END FOR STATIC PROBES AND ALL MECHANICAL SCANHEADS INCL DUPLEX CW XMT amp RCV FRONT END FOR SECTOR 2D IMAGING INCL DUPLEX CW NOT AA RECEIVE FRONT END FOR STATIC CW AND PULSED DOPPLER RF FILTERING AND NOISE SUPPRESSION APPLIES TGC FROM PULSE PROCESSOR TO 2D SIGNAL SWITCHES TO PULSE PROC FOR 2D PULSER OR TO DOP PULSE SWITCHES RF SIGNAL TO PULSE PROCESSOR FOR ACCESS AND EFT 2D OR TO DOPPLER ACQUISITION FOR MECH DOP 7500 0511 XX SWITCHES 2D amp PULSE DOPPLER BETWEEN EFT ACCESS AND DUPLEX CW SCANHEADS SWITCHES CW BETWEEN STATIC PROBES AND DUPLEX CW SCANHEADS ECG MODULE PATIENT SYSTEM ECG ISOLATION ECG SIGNAL AMPLIFICATION 01 501 01 01 Figure 1A 1 UM 4 PCB Functions Sheet 1 of 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01A 1 CONTROL GROUP A15 SYSTEM CONTROLLER PCB SRECEIVES USER COMMANDS FROM CONTROL MODULE AND FOOTSWITCH CONTROLS SYSTEM PCB S AND PERIPHERALS PROVIDES SYSTEM INTERFACE TO DATA COMM MODULE OR SERIAL PORT KEYBOARD CONTROLL
244. P N 4730 0001 06 Rev C Ultramark 4 ULTRASOUND SYSTEM field service manual Service Manual 4730 0001 06 Rev B consists of UM 4 Service Manual P N 4720 0001 06 9 6 94 with the following manual changes inserted 4725 0001 10 9 6 94 4725 0001 11 4 14 95 September 1999 A detailed Table of Contents and List of Effective Pages begins on Page i It includes the latest change date for each page in the manual Original pages will not have any date in the Contents and List of Effective Pages or at the bottom of the page A change bar li located in the outside margin of a page denotes the specific part of a page that was changed at that date A pointing hand indicates the portion of a figure that has been revised Advanced Technology Laboratories Inc P O Box 3003 Bothell WA 98041 3003 COPYRIGHT E 1992 BY ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY LABORATORIES INC ALL RIGHTS RESERVED PRINTED IN USA Access CAD and Ultramark are registered trademarks of Advanced Technology Laboratories Inc HDI Open Line Access and Advanced Technology Laboratories are trademark of Advanced Technology Laborato ries Inc Matrix is a trademark of Matrix Corporation Polaroid AutoFilm and FreezeFrame are trademarks of Polaroid Corporation Okidata and Microline are registered trademarks of Oki America Inc Introduction Introduction This manual provides only information most often neede
245. PB2503 PB2503 PB2503 PB2503 PB2503 PB2503 7500 0548 XX PB2703 PB2703 PB2703 PB2703 PB2703 PB2703 MOTOR CNTRLR 481203 481206 481214 482107 482107 482402 482402 482403 482403 482403 482404 482404 482404 482404 4824063 482406 482407 7500 0304 for 041208 041208 UM 4PV 48 002 Mercury 172604 172614 172614 172614 MC172614 MC172614 MC172614 7500 0517 PULSE PROCES p21008 21205 p21600 21600 22401 p22402 p22402 p22703 p22404 p22404 22404 22405 22405 SOR p21105 21210 21601 21601 p22403 22404 p22501 22501 224053 P22502 22502 22501 P225023 7500 0370 24 25 amp p22705 p22705 p22705 22705 22705 22705 22705 22705 22705 227054 22707 22707 3500 1261 62 227073 for 1 systems 5111001 11100 511100 DOPP PROCES db1006 94610061 461609 db1609 db1614 db2406 db2406 db24062 SOR db2408 db2408 db2408 db2408 DP2408 DP2408 DP2408 TM AUX 1008 1008 TA1008 1008 1012 2401 TA2401 TA2401 2402 TA2402 TA2402 TA2402 TA2402 TM COMBO TA2402 VCR STATUS VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 004 VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 VCROO4 CONTROL MOD NA NA NA NA V20008 20008 720008 V20008 V20008 V20008 V20008 V20008 V20009 V20009 V20009 V20009 V20009 V20009 V20009 V20009
246. PPLER AUDIO SPEAKERS PARALLEL 2 L R PLYBK AUDIO CONTROLLER PCB 2 VCR SWITCH AMPS I SYSTEM 5 CONTROL CONTROLLER AUDIO FROM DOPPLER ACQUISITION PCB HEAD PHONES LIR AUDIO AN MODULE WITHOUT VCR STATUS MICROPHONE a R gt accel DATA PATHS MODULE VCR 7 CONTROL CONTROL CONTROLLER 7 MICRO PROCESSOR SWITCH UM 4 HFC AUDIO DATA PATH VCR 5 STATUS STATUS 2 SYSTEM 4 gt REAR PANEL gt LSR DISPLAY MIC CONTROLLER VIDEO VCR SPLITTER p gt PHOTO AN MODULE WITH VCR STATUS SMART VCR CONTROL AND STATUS DATA PATH UM 4A PV AND CV AUDIO DATA PATH 01 501 05 01 Figure 1A 4 UM 4 Audio Data Paths and VCR Status Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 01A 5 9 VLO vVIND enuey 4 v S V L ounbi4 x ldnd 10 908 1053 10 FILTER FROM PULSE FROM FPULSEL DOP P2 e PULSER PUES e Je FT4 PROC PCB PULS FPULSEL DRIVER XDCRSEL wl c FILTER FXDCRSEL gt 6 EFT ase PANEL ___ 5 FXDCRSEL gt DRIVER RELAY
247. Points Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 03 5 3 Adjustments 3 5 4 Image Adjustments Linearity 1 Load test pattern video cassette into VCR and rewind Play VCR to produce a grid pattern Adjust L2 CW for minimum raster width and CCW for optimum overall horizontal linearity Stop VCR Width 1 2 Magnify the image using zoom control to make the right border of the ultra sound display visible Adjust L1 Verify distance between left side of gray bar and right border of the ultrasound display area measures 6 0 inches Figure 3 5 Phasing Adjust R33 to center raster horizontally Verify all display elements are visible Height Adjust R120 so that height of the ultra sound display area is 4 inches Figure 3 5 Top Vertical Linearity 1 2 Play VCR to produce a grid pattern Adjust R124 for equal spacing between horizontal grid lines at middle and top of screen UM4 03 6 Bottom Vertical Linearity 1 Adjust R123 for equal spacing between horizontal grid lines at middle and bottom of display 2 Repeat height and top vertical linearity adjustments to eliminate interaction TGC ID PRESET TGC ID PRESET 01 503 001 01 Figure 3 5 Ultrasound Image Mea surement 3 Stop VCR 4 Rewind and remove test pattern video tape Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual
248. Power Distribution Assembly Item 1 in Figure 1 11 Attach Item 3 and Item 4 to replacement rear panel Item 2 in Figure 2 12 Install Rear Panel 13 Power up system 14 Complete service documentation indicating parts replaced 15 Return material to ATL for disposition Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 39 7 Service Bulletins OUT ECEPTACLE REAR VIEW 01 SVCB 017 02 Figure 1 01 SVCB 017 02 UM4 07 40 Figure 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES WITH PARTS YES Service Bulletin PAGE 1 OF 1 Date September 5 1991 S B No UM4 119 Rev To All Field Service Personnel E C N Author Dennis Kracht Intermittent VCR Counter Reset UM 4 5 Systems PROBLEM Intermittently during system operation the VCR counter will reset to 0000 The counter located atthe bottom of the monitor will also read 0000 This may happen in any modality CAUSE There are two different key stroke sequences which will cause the counter to reset these key stroke sequences are sfunc ctrl x normally used to reset the VCR counter sfunc clear
249. Power Plugs This Service Bulletin supersedes S B 53 PROBLEM The strip length on the power cord may be too short on some systems The cables with short conductors allowed the wire to be pushed into the Hospital Grade plug far enough to get the insulator in the way of the screw clamp A good connection may have been made at the time of assembly and testing but through stress and or shrinkage the insulation could pull out of the clamp leaving a loose connection EFFECTIVITY system currently in the field could have this problem No safety hazard is involved but it may cause some system performance malfunctions SOLUTION Itis advised that you check the plugs a next call basis and to include this check as part of a normal service call PROCEDURE 1 Disassemble the plug and verify that the conductor length is approximately 5 16 The plug should have a gauge molded into it that you can use as a guide Slip a 1 2 piece of yellow heatshrink onto the cable This will provide an external indica tion that the cable has been checked Reinsert the wires into their appropriate holes Do not tin the wires a The ground lead is green and should go to the green screw b The neutral lead will be either blue or white and should go to the nickel colored Screw The hot lead will be either black or brown and should go to the copper or brass col ored screw Tighten the screws securely and visually verify that the insulation is
250. Press PLAY onthe hand controller and verify that the cineloop sequence advances continuously Using a playback speed of approxi mately two frames per second verify all images and all frames meet the fol lowing requirements All frames must be free of jitter caused by differences in the two video fields making up the frame Each frame must have a unique image No duplicate images are to appear in consecutive frames There should be no data dropouts in any of the images UM4 02C 32 2C 16 10 1 Image gray scale matches the origi nal live image Image Select Store Recall Ensure that there is a blank floppy disk in the disk drive If the disk isn t for matted the system will format it before storing the data Press the STOR footswitch to store the cineloop sequence on the hard disk The message Storing Data Please Stand By appears at bottom of the screen Press the DONE footswitch when stor age has been completed Press CINE Press FL STR to store the images on the floppy disk a Using the trackball move the high lighted area down to the Cine 64 Fr line b Press SELECT then CONTUE The message Saving Patient Data appears on screen c Follow any system prompts that appear on screen until the mes sage Successfully Completed Storing Patient Data to Floppy appears Press any alphanumeric key on the keyboard to continue Press RETRN the
251. ROLLER TO PROGRAMMABLE PULSE WIDTH GENERATOR CONTROLS BEAMFORMING PHASES APERTURE CREATES PARABOLIC BEAM OUTER ELEMENTS FIRE FIRST CENTER ELEMENTS FIRE LAST VIA MECHANICAL ANALOG DELAY LINES VARIES TRANSMIT FOCUS BY ZONE VARIES DELAY RATIOS OF PARABOLIC BEAM CURVE SHIFTS APERTURE VIA HV MUX SWITCHES ON FRONT END PCB ELEM 1 32 gt 2 33 ETC SHIFTS DELAYS TO MAINTAIN SYMMETRY ROTATION SENDS PULSERS TO BEAMFORMER FRONT END PCB CONTROLS BEAMFORMER FOCUS PCB DEROTATION REMOVING APERTURE PHASING ID S LINEAR SCANHEADS INCL SENDS LINEAR XDR FIRE TO PULSE PROCESSOR Section 1A System Data Path CONTROL GROUP SHEET 2 AS PULSE PROCESSOR PCB 51 SYSTEM RECEIVER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS SAME AS S2 PULSE PROCESSOR 2 GENERATES 2D XMT PULSES FOR ALL SCANHEADS CONTROLS POWER OUTPUT GENERATES TGC FOR SYS RCVR AND BMFMR FRONT END 2 CONVERTS ANALOG RF INTO DIGITIZED ECHO DATA EDGE ENHANCEMENT DYNAMIC RANGE A6 DOPPLER ACQUISITION PCB PROCESSES CW AND PULSED DOPPLER SIGNALS FROM SYSTEM RECEIVER TO GENERATE FORWARD AND REVERSE FLOW SIGNALS WALL THUMP AND NOISE FILTERING A TO D CONVERSION GENERATES FORWARD AND REVERSE AUDIO SIGNALS DOPPLER PROCESSOR GENERATES CW AND PULSED DOPPLER XMT PULSES FOR ALL SCANHEADS FFT OF DIGITIZED DOPPLER SIGNALS GRAYSCALE MAPPING TIMING SIGNALS FOR DOPPLER PCB S A8 MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB POSITIONAL C
252. Ref W3 3 Tbl 3 1 15V 15V jacks on power supply 415 0V 0 3V 15V pots Ref W3 3 3 1 Motor Controller 10V ID Ref erence TP1 on Motor Controller PCB and chassis ground 10 000V 0 005V Use PCB exten der Ref 3 4 Old Style Monitor Voltage Regulator U1 pin 2 20 0V 0 05V Ref W3 5 2 Horiz Osc Connect U4 pin 14 to chassis ground Horiz sync bar positioned verti cally Ref W3 5 3 Vert Osc Connect 04 14 to chassis ground scope to high side of R132 17 5 msec wave form Ref W3 5 3 Linearity Display Use VCR grid or caliper methods Ref W3 5 4 Width Display Verify width in Fig 3 5 Ref W3 5 4 Phasing Display Center raster hori zontally Ref W3 5 4 Height Display Verify height in Fig 3 5 Ref W3 5 4 Top Vert Linearity Display Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Equal spacing between horiz grid lines at middle top of dis play Use VCR grid or caliper methods Ref W3 5 4 0 4 03 13 3 Adjustments Adjustment Table 3 2 UM 4 Adjustment Summary Cont d Measurement Location Old Style Monitor Cont d Requirement Component Bottom Vert Linearity Display Equal spacing between horiz grid lines at middle bottom of display Use VCR grid or caliper methods Ref W3 5 4 Aspect Ratio Display Horiz
253. S B UM4 144 Rev A To All Field Service Personnel Author Noel Joseph C A R 216 10 Vdc Adjustment on UM 4 Motor Controller This service bulletin supercedes S B UM4 144 PROBLEM Potential for measurement error with the 10Vdc adjustment on the Motor Con troller in UM 4 systems SCOPE All UM 4 systems CAUSE Reference 10Vdc out of tolerance EFFECTIVITY Next call and at every Quality Assurance call SOLUTION Perform the following procedure 1 Remove all non mechanical scanheads from system 2 Attach a 5 MHz IVT scanhead use any Access scanhead if IVT is not avail able 3 Attach a DVM to test points on the Motor Controller with mini clips see Table 1 for locations 4 Initialize the 5 MHz IVT scanhead or Access scanhead 5 Verify the voltage is between 9 95 Vdc and 10 04 Vdc 6 See Table 1 for adjustment pot location the 7500 051 7 XX Motor Controller has no adjustment 7 Ifthe adjustment cannot be made replace the Motor Controller Table 1 Test Point Locations PCB Part Number DVM DVM Adjustment 7500 0304 TP1 Analog GND R44 7500 0348 00 to 09 TP7 AGND R44 60 64 65 UM4 07 74 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 7500 0348 08 10 TP1 AGND 11 12 61 7500 0517 XX TP27 AGND Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 75 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y Y S ervice Bulletin
254. S2764 45JL ATL P N 2057 0007 EPROM 8K x 8 450ns P2764A 4 Mfgr Name Mfgr Part Number Advanced Micro Devices AM2764A 4DC Intel Corp D2764A 4P 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YESL SERVICE BULLETIN WITH PARTS YESL DATE January 25 1989 B N INFO 7 TO AllField Service Personnel S B NO O 70 AUTHOR Darrell Jacoway Bruce Bury E C N NO Field Correctable Monitor Problems PROBLEM following problems have been observed on the Aspect Monitors P N 2100 0478 XX used on all Ultramark Products and may be correctable at the field level Problem Cause Solution Intensity Flickering or Loose video connection Ensure good connection Flashing inside monitor see Fig 1 UM 4 only A loose connection at P2 4 Ensure good connection causing high voltage arcing Aloose securement nut over Tighten nut the ferrite core of T4 causing high voltage arcing and a high pitch whine A poor power fuse F1 fit Clean fuse holder or reseat or dirty fuse holder Horizontal Raster poor crimp of E 30 or Recrimp E 30 or E 36 Fluctuations E 36 Excessive dirt build up on Free dirt with tweeker R 27 the horizontal oscillator supplied in S B 492 and use pot freon spray to clean R 27 NOTES If parts replacement appears necessary replace the monitor Write any defects and any corrective action attempted on the RCA Help us help you Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual
255. STALLED 74F14 74F14 2035 0331 2035 0331 2 3 2 3 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 9 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0348 XX MOTOR CONTROLLER 8 From To Non Sync System UM 4 Date 10 10 88 10 09 08 06 05 04 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 2831 0013 RESISTOR 1 K OHM 1 8 W 2035 0140 IC 74F04 4100 0092 LABEL BLANK REWORK INSTRUCTIONS For 7500 0348 09 06 05 04 PCBs 1 Install a OHM resistor 2831 0013 at the R122 location see Figure 2 Change 062 to 74F04 2035 0140 Preserve any lifted pins and jumpers 3 Move thejumper connector at Pins 2 and 3 of JP1 to Pins 1 and 2 of JP1 4 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as Non Sync near the dash level indicator For 7500 0348 10 08 PCBs 1 Install a 1K OHM resistor 2831 0013 at the R37 location see Figure IA 2 Change U18 to a 74F04 IC 2035 0140 Preserve any lifted pins and jumpers 3 Move the jumper connector at Pins 2 and 3 of JP1 to Pins 1 and 2 of JP1 4 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as Non Sync near the dash panel indicator COMMENTS This change renders the PCB as a Non Sync type with its own independent clock 0 4 09 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual
256. Sec tion 2C Performance Tests Noise Set system controls as follows POWER OUT 100 percent PUT REJECT 1 Special Function O EDGE ENHANCEMENT 1 GRAYSCALE 2 SMOOTHING F1 lt CTRL gt B DYNAMIC 58 dB 47 dB 16X RANGE 2 Adjust DEPTH control until the maxi mum depth is displayed 3 Set TGC for a uniform homogeneous display of the phantom as done in penetration tests UM4 04 41 4 Fault Isolation 4 Reduce FAR FIELD GAIN until the far The 5 MHz DFT may show faint hori field noise disappears zontal lines at the focal zone transi 5 If penetration specs can still be met tions These are normal and cannot under these conditions the system be eliminated meets the noise specification Scanning Windows Ani 3mm O Nylon Fibers 4mm o Simulated Cysts Tissue Mimicking Gel ENLARGED VIEW OF NYLON RESOLUTION PATTERN 5cm Figure 4 14 RM 413A Phantom Geometry UM4 04 42 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Far Field Noise Older systems 16X and below configured for annular array scanheads have slightly greater gain than those not configured for AA This increase in gain does not yield greater penetration but it may increase noise when the FAR GAIN is near or at maximum Many times
257. T calcs Minor changes to OB calcs e g Fetal Heart Rate control relocated Known Problems Operating Idiosyn crasies Refer to Operating Notes 4707 0001 08 4707 0001 09 and 4707 0001 10 MFI frequency switching time is approxi mately one second in real time 2D Switching time will be 5 to 15 seconds in other modes If frequency switch is changed and immediately returned to original setting NOXDR will be displayed and MFI scan head will have to be reselected from the keyboard to recover normal operation 29X and above software now have a line feed in printed reports Configure print ers for Line Feed OFF 31X 31 07 software was the NRR Beta FCD version of Cineloopr Review New Features Cineloopr Review Features Deleted e CAD support UM4 05 23 5 Configuration Known Problems Referto Operating Notes 4707 0001 12 Rev B 32X MANDATORY Beginning with 32X only PCBs tested with 32X or higher soft ware are allowed to be installed with that software Therefore only those PCBs listed in the 32X column of the UM 4 Replacement Matrices allowed to be installed in 32X systems While there are no specific hardware changes associated with 32X upgrading a system to 32X will require that hardware replacements conform to a list of approved PCB assemblies This is due to the formal definition of compatible hardware that will be released with 32 04 A total system hardware field baseline is
258. TM footswitch Move the trackball or joystick and verify that the M line cursor moves in response to it On the softkey M mode panel press FRZ or on the hardkey control panel press FREEZE Verify thatthe image is frozen and returned to real time with alternate key depressions Repeat step 7 using the FREEZE foot switch On the softkey control panel press RETRN RETRN XDR and LINEAR to select the DFT scanhead On the hardkey control panel press SCAN HEAD SELECT until a linear scanhead is selected Verify thatthe linear image is displayed in the center of the screen On either the softkey control panel or the hardkey control M LINE panel press Verify that the real time linear image is displayed on the left and that the M mode markers scroll across the rectangle on the right Press the 2D TM footswitch several times and verify that the display switches between the M mode split screen format and the full screen M mode format Move the trackball or joystick and verify that the M line cursor moves in response to it UM4 02C 17 2C Performance Tests 15 On the softkey control panel press FRZ or on the hardkey panel press FREEZE Verify that the image is fro zen and returned to real time with alter nate key depressions 16 Repeat step 15 using the FREEZE footswitch 2 9 2 ECG Test Before beginning this test the system should be set up as follows
259. TRN and EXER to enter the Exercise Setup Menu Setthe menu as follows 100 msec High Res Windowed Quad Display 256 x 120 Capture Length 4 images Interim Delay 50 msec Initial Delay 50 msec Protocol 2 Stage Prevue Play Delay Resolution Press RETRN and ROUTNE to enter the Routine Setup Menu Set the menu as follows Play Delay 100 msec Resolution Norm Res Quad Dis play 256 x 120 Capture Length Interim Delay 50 msec Initial Delay 50 msec 8 images Press RETRN RETRN and SETUP to enter the GREY panel Select the fol lowing modes TR ON CMP ON PD ON These softkeys will flash when they have been selected Press RETRN to complete the default setting operation 1 Scanhead frame rate must be at 20 FPS to achieve these delays UM4 02C 36 2C 16 13 Exercise Capture NOTE This procedure assumes the Exercise Capture default setups are set as in 2C 16 12 Ale 2 Press CAPTUR then EXER After a moment the TIMER panel comes up Exercise Armed Trigger ON Rest Supine and Parasternal Long Axis appear in the upper right corner of the screen Scan the phantom during the following steps Press the Capt footswitch The mes sage Acquiring Images should flash at the top of the screen After the sys tem has finished acquiring that image the screen should display the acquired image Press the Cont continue footswitch This changes the name of the view to be
260. Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 9 Table 8 10 2 Table 8 10 Figure 8 10 Monitor 2 of 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 08 45 8 Replaceable Parts SE Module Cover Table 8 11 Card Guide Ref Disk Drive Mounting Bracket Ref OEM Front Panel SE Motherboard Klee Supply Guide Pin Ref 9 Floppy Drive CAD Module Table 8 11 Bottom Cover Bezel Slot 5 Fan FRONT REAR Slot 1 Table 8 11 TOP VIEW 01 ES08 A19 01 Figure 8 11 UM 4CAD Integral CAD Module UM4 08 46 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Section 9 Reference 9 1 Introduction Included in this section are mixed data such as the Up DownRev Instructions connector pin outs part identifications aids and other material previously con tained in the the original UM 4 Service Manual The Up Down Rev Instructions begin on page UM4 09 1 All other material begins on page UM4 09A 1 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 1 9 Reference PCB UP DOWN REV INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CSR SPARES KITS Laboratories Inc Neither the document nor the information contained therein should be disclosed or Laboratories Inc reproduced in whole or in part without express written p
261. WER ON TRACKING FIX the printer interface panel with cable part number 2275 0170 No provision is made for mounting printer to cart Table 2B 6 Recommended Settings for Medical Recording Film Paper Parameter User Num ber Input Num ber Exposure Time Image Polar ity Brightness Contrast Image Sequence SLOW TRACKING CENTER SPEED SP TAPE REMAIN NORM MEMORY OFF AUDIO DUB OFF Side Panel RF OUTPUT LIGHT ON CONVERTER 13 Reinstall rear mounting screws panel cover using 14 If a Lenzar 2100 Multi Image Camera is included connect IMAGE PRINTER connector D SUB on underside of rear OEM bezel to 2100 MIC using cable part number 3500 0623 01 15 Verify the switch settings on the MIC Refer to Table 2 6 16 If included connect a serial Report Printer to either connector K left most sub D on Data Comm Module or to UM4 02B 18 Multiple Interlace 17 Verify the switch settings on the printer Refer to Table 2B 7 18 Perform a printer self test 19 Confirm report printer switch settings by printing either a cardiac or obstetri cal report Refer to the Operation Manual for this procedure NOTE f the report is double spaced verify the printer Line Feed switch is set to OFF 20 If an external video printer is included connect the video out BNC on under side of rear OEM bezel to printer using the cable su
262. XX PCB It requires certain jumper and crystal configura tions and is not to be reconfigured in the field Order appropriate 3500 PCB from Replacement Matrix Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 45 5 Configuration k lel 051 U78 U53 vasl 959 OL A D B a el OI ac H k Eo oF Bl 01 ES05 A08 01 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 7500 0313 S1 ONLY OL 077 70 EE CAL NOTE JP8 E JP8 may JP5 be located 057 several xe locations cnt tern lo 5 JP6 0 0 JP8 JPI 2 fo 01 505 10 02 PULSE PROCESSOR 5 7500 0370 XX 0 4 05 46 C U36 U70 lois U42 or CAL usal e e Jp 0 0 0 n JP2 e 01 ES05 A09 01 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 7500 0370 k JPIO L3 JP2 D JP5 U67 JP4 ds spiz C Ja JPI2 D JP3 JP9 _ D a SSRN JP7 9 nm JP6 e 01 505 11 01 PULSE PROCESSOR 5 3500 1261 62 XX 7500 0561 XX Plus Configuration Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual A6 Doppler Acquisition PCB HFC 4APLUs PCBs 75
263. YSCALE 5 SMOOTHING F1 lt CTRL gt B DYNAMIC 58 dB 47 dB 16X RANGE DEPTH 180 mm for 3 5 MHz 160 mm for 5 0 MHz FOCAL ZONES AIl5 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C Lightly coat scanhead face with about 1 8 inch 8 mm of water or a coat of acoustic gel Perform a tower test refer to General Field Service Manual Verify five separate focal zones and that only one image is displayed Select the fifth focal zone by selecting the first focal zone and then moving the Pan Zone cursor down as far as pos sible Repeat step 5 Verify that nine reception focal zones are discernable It may be necessary to adjust the TGC and ZOOM controls for best image Press lt CTRL gt P to reset the Pan and Zoom functions Ensure that the sys tem parameters remain as set in step 3 Set the depth to 15 cm Position the scanhead on the tissue phantom to provide the best image Press FREEZE and evaluate the frozen image for the following qualities Penetration gt Table 2C 7 or Specifications Table 2C 8 Axial Resolu within Table 2C 7 or tion Table 2C 8 specifications Check the spatial accuracy of the image using the system s measure ment functions a Press FREEZE while scanning the phantom Press MEAS b Press CAL to display the caliper cursor UM4 02C 13 2C Performance Tests Use the trackball or joystic
264. Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image UM4 06 16 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 If depth or zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear or sector M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling at the end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected t
265. a longer is stocked See additional PROM or jumper tables 5 Requires 16X or higher software L Order like for lik a porate the smart A V module feature rder like like or convertibility documentation for addi DO NOT or downorade this P Purge PCB tional details pg 9 Y Yes compatible with feature feature swa sAs 6 uoneinBijuoS cL VS0 vINA enuey 4 v Table 5A 3 UM 4 S1 PCB Replacement Matrix Cont d Ref Frame Con Des PCB Name Name PCB Part No Part No Grab vert Hardkey Control Mod 4000 0154 26 31 TB S L 21 26 31 TB S LM 22 27 32 TB S LC 23 28 33 A Monitor Module 3500 0426 L L L 3500 0764 E L L L 03 LILI L L 3500 0501 LILILIL FPC CODING NOTES R Recommended replacement order level N Not compatible with feature or software 1 See S B No UM4 93 Rev C A Alternate acceptable replacement level build C PCB compatible with software but no FE Functionally equivalent longer is stocked n See additional PROM or jumper tables L Order like for like or convertlbility documentation for addi P Purge PCB tional details Yes compatible with feature FPC Full Peripheral Cart vs suu ls S 6 uoneinBijuoS Table 5A 4 UM 4 S1 PROM Replacement Matrix REPLACEMENT LEVELS INDIVIDUAL PROM FEATURE COMPATIBILITY EL suns unns Ee m en
266. a customer com plaint can be alleviated simply by explain ing this to them If not Pulse Processor PCB software 8000 0177 05 reduces the FAR GAIN so that this noise level cannot be reached This software should not affect penetration and can only be used with 7500 0370 04 05 or 08 09 Pulse Pro cessor PCBs All Pulse Processor PCB software above this level 8000 0177 05 incorporates this far gain reduction An exception are those kits footnoted as Euro alternate only w o Gain Governor in the replacement matrix in Section 5 Configuration This was requested by European Sales and is not available for Domestic systems NOTE 76X and 17X system use the same Pusle Processor Software NOTE With 23X p22112 or higher Pulse Processor Software installed Dynamic Range should be set to 58 dB for 16X 17X p21601 or lower set Dynamic Range to 47 1 Set system controls as follows POWER OUT PUT REJECT 100 percent 1 Special Function O GRAYSCALE 5 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Fault Isolation 4 SMOOTHING DYNAMIC RANGE FOCUS Zone 1 TGC Maximum F1 lt CTRL gt B 58 dB 47 dB 16X 2 With these settings there should be no noise 3 If the system passed all of the above tests the system is performing to specifications and no repair with respect to linear image quality is required If these criteria have not been met refer to the following proce dures
267. a via data comm the ECG data will either be missing or incorrect Analysis An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system When printing multiple reports some reports may not start at the top of a page Before printing a report press the form feed button on the printer to ensure that each report starts at the top of a new page After completing a planimetry measurement the pan zone function can be activated causing the image to move sideways without the cursor tracing The scale does not change The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling The fetal heart rate is not removed from system memory when lt CTRL gt P is pressed while in 2 D mode The previous patient s heart rate is not added to the OB Gyn report for the new patient but it is displayed on the screen until itis overwritten by new data To remove the fetal heart rate and all other data when you have fini
268. able A 10PV two pins spaced 8 0 centimeters will not meet these criteria with 17 X software problem was corrected with 23 Use the 55 transducer of a 10PV and measure in the far apart Verify the measurement dis played is 8 0 centimeters 3 mm field if no other scanhead is available Sector j Repeat steps b through h for all IVT ICT TRT failure to meet this test may be sector scanheads supplied with the due to a faulty Motor Controller system 10 Remove the scanhead from the phan tom wipe excess water or gel from the scanhead and set GRAY to 1 There must be no noise in the image 11 For multifrequency scanheads repeat steps 5 10 for each transducer 0 4 02 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C Table 2C 4 Sector Scanhead Image Quality Characteristics Minimum Lateral Resolu Sector Scan Depth Axial Resolu tion mm at Focal Point Near Field head Type Penetration tion mm Focal Point cm Artifact cm cm cm ACCESS A3L 1 3 4 2 A3M 1 3 3 5 5ML 0 8 2 2 A 5M 0 8 2 1 A 3 5 7 5 A 3M 1 8 3 5 A 5M 0 8 2 1 A 7 58 0 6 1 3 A 5 5 7 5 A 5M 0 8 2 1 A5S A 7 58 0 6 1 3 B 3 5 7 5 B 3M 1 0 0 5 1 8 15 B 5M 0 60 x 0 5mm 1 5 15 B7 5 0 40 x 0 5mm 0 9 15 B 5 5 7 5 B 5M 0 60 0 5mm 1 5 15 B5S B7 5 0 40 x 0 5mm 0 9 15 C 2 25M 1 9 3 1 C 3M 1 8 3 5 C 5ML 0 8 2 2 C 5M 0 8 2 1 C7 5S 0 6 1 3 C10 Multi 5M 0 8 24 7 55 0 6 1 3
269. act cleaner into switches and working them 17 15 06 ECG trace disappears when mode switched to CW Doppler No ECG in CW mode if system ECG default is set to OFF at power up 1 Set ECG default to ON cycle system power 0 4 05 90 Data Comm will not retrieve files six through ten High density disk installed 1 Use DSDD disks in Data Comm 2HD disks are for CAD units Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Section 5A Configuration S1 Systems 5A 1 Usage Rules for Section 5A Usage rules for S1 systems are the same as those for S2 systems Refer to Usage Rules for Section 5 on page UM4 05 1 5A 2 Change Summary 2 1 Software Changes NOTE Only 3X 4X 5X 6 06 and 6 15 software are found International Solingen manufactured UM 4 S1 sys tems Refer to the UM 4 S2 Configuration Supplement for other software level replaceable parts of software for interna tional S2 systems 3X New Features OB Calcs Problems Corrected N A Known Problems N A 4X Accompanying the installation of 4X was a revision of the Motor Controller PCB An M Mode lock up from 2D to M Mode problem was corrected with jumper modifications and an EPROM change The Motor Controller PCB is backward compatible to 3X Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual New Features CARD Calcs Data Comm Support Problems Corrected e Sample timing M Mode lock up from 2D to M Mode Known Pr
270. ails of operation 5 1 8 Hardware Configuration Verification of Existing System Hardware configuration must be based on the information in three matrices PCB replacement and PROM matrixes and a jumper matrix Hardware configuration involves verifying that PCBs PROMs and jumper positions are compatible in the spe Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual x 12x 16x 23x 28x 26x 27X 17 X Configuration 5 lt CTRL gt L CODES BY SYSTEM SOFTWARE LEVEL 23 X 25 X 26 X 27 X Control L Code Table cific configuration It is difficult to document all of the hardware and software combina tions possible in UM 4 systems Fortu nately the question of compatibility normally arises only during or after upgrades or extensive troubleshooting during which a number of PCBs were sub stituted shotgunned and left in the sys tem In that case it may be necessary to consult with regional or national service support Only jumpers that may require repositioning will be covered in the Up Down Rev Instructions 6420 0009 01 Rev G or higher located in Section 9 Nor mally all jumpers should be in the configu ration listed in the NORMAL column of the jumper matrix Verifying software with the lt CTRL L gt code table is a good place to begin confirming configuration compatibility Certain hard ware can also be verified through this table For instance a BEAMFORMER PB2503 lt CTRL L gt code not only
271. al image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it When recalling an image previously stored with ECG data via data comm the ECG data will either be missing or incorrect Analysis Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system When printing multiple reports some reports may not start at the top of a page Before printing a report press the form
272. an 8500 prefix GRP Description Feature System Type Part Number 1 Core EM 120V 60 Hz 1001 01 all 2 systems UM 4 UM 4A UM 4CV UM 4PV NR UM4 Sector only 1005 01 1005 01 1005 01 1038 01 1005 01 Linear only 1006 01 1006 01 N A N A 1006 01 2 Sector Linear 1014 01 1014 01 1014 01 1038 02 1014 01 Sector Annular 1015 01 1015 01 Sector Linear AA 1016 01 N A N A 1016 01 w o Acc EFT Dop 1029 01 1029 01 N A N A 1029 01 Single Acc w Dop 1029 04 N A 1029 04 N A N A Single Acc w EFT 1029 03 1029 03 N A N A 1029 03 Single Acc w EFT Dop 1029 05 N A N A N A N A 3 Single Acc only 1029 02 1029 02 1029 02 N A 1029 02 Dual Acc only 1029 06 N A N A N A 1029 06 Dual Acc w EFT 1029 07 N A N A N A 1029 07 Dual Acc w Dop 1029 08 N A N A N A Dual Acc EFT Dop 1029 09 N A N A N A N A ECG M mode 1013 02 1013 02 N A 1013 02 4 M mode only 1013 01 1026 01 N A N A 1013 01 w o M mode ECG 1013 03 1026 02 N A N A 1013 03 5 w Frame Grabber 1039 01 N A N A N A 1039 01 UM4 07 34 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 SECTION 3 1 SYSTEMS Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual EXAMPLE B The customer has an S2 UM 4 system at 17 XX software It has Single Access EFT Linear M mode ECG and Doppler Looking at the chart the CSR needs to order the following 8500 1001 01 Core EM 8500 1014 01 Sector Linear 8500 1029 05 Sin Acc with EFT and Doppler 8500 1013 02 ECG and M mode Reference the exa
273. ark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 33 5 Configuration Table 5 3 UM 4 S2 Control Functions DESCRIPTION Disk Storage Software Level 8X 12X 17X HN 23X 25X 26X NN 27X NN 28X amp Up NN Fast Smoothing HF NF NF NF Swap NN NF NF NF Default Menu HF NF NF NF Doppler Sample Angle Rotation LEFT SFUNC Cursor Left ALPHA H F ANG LT NF ANG LT NF ANG LT NF ANG LT NF Doppler Sample Angle Rotation RIGHT SFUNC Cursor Right ALPHA N F ANG RT NF N F ANG RT NF N F ANG RT NF N F ANG RT NF Doppler Sample Volume Incr Decr DECR SFUNC Cursor Down ALPHA H F SV DEC NF NF SV DEC NF NF SV DEC NF NF SV DEC NF Doppler Sample Volume Increase SFUNC Cursor Up ALPHA NF SV INC NF NF SV INC NF NF SV INC NF NF SV INC NF CTRLL Software NN NF NF NF CTRL M SFUNC Array IVT Steer LF ALPHA CR NN NF NN NF N F STEER NF NN CTRL N Annotation Background Inverse NF NF NF NF CTRL O Hide Annotation ON OFF HF NF NF NF CTRL P NEW PATIENT HF NF NF NF CTRL Q HELP Toggle help for CTRL NF NF NF NF CTRL S Store Image Direct NN NF NF NF CTRL U TGC Default Save TGC HF NF NF NF
274. ars 6 Onthe softkey Main panel press XDR Press the scanhead keys on the Transducer Select panel and verify that the corresponding scanheads are selected 7 On the hardkey control panel press SCANHEAD SELECT repeatedly and verify that all scanheads connected to the system are selected one at a time 2C 5 System Defaults This test is used when installing a system to ensure that certain system defaults are correctly set This procedure is not required for upgrade or repair unless default changes or reentry are necessary for example before replacing the System Controller PCB Table 2C 2 lists the defaults for pre 25X systems refurb or Table 2C 3 for 25X and up systems These recommended settings are merely starting points which the operator can change as needed to suit individual requirements Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 1 Compare Table 2C 2 or those of the system under test NOTE Change default settings only on sys tems being installed Do not change operator set default values unless requested to do so the operator the default Table 2C 3 against values Performance Tests 2C EDGE ENHANCEMENT POWER OUTPUT M MODE GRAY SCALE SMOOTHING DYNAMIC RANGE 2 Pre 25X systems only 2D REJECT a Pre 25X systems press the alpha numberic key s corresponding to the default name on the monitor display and press ENTER Change values as necessary 25X or
275. arts of the system are operating e System Controller PCB Serial communication link between the Con trol Module and the System Controller PCB Softkey display Pulse Processor PCB Motor Controller PCB if present 2D Scan Converter PCBs Display Controller PCB Beamformer Controller PCB if present Doppler Processor PCB if present Monitor CAD Module if present NOTE tis possible that portions of the listed components may be defective signal path Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C components etc but this test assumes that there is communication between the PCBs and that the Monitor is functioning 1 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 On the system peripherals observe and verify the following as applicable a VCR STOP indicator LED is on b Linescan Recorder or Page Prin terPOWER switch is illuminated c Multi image Camera warm up time count displays 3 Verify the following a The softkey control panel if pres ent displays the Main Panel b One of the attached scanheads is selected and if the scanhead is a mechanical acquisition type the scanhead rotor is turning The scanhead selected at power up is determined by the value set in the default table c A sector or linear image is dis played on the monitor correspond ing to the scanhead selected The information on the display includes the correct scanhead frequency and other data
276. ation data is included in the change summary because this information is too lengthy and too compli cated for easy explanation in the tables or matrices Feature identification provides a quick way to confirm a specific feature such as Doppler or Mercury or a system configuration such as an S1 system 5 1 3 Compatibility A number of PCBs in the UM 4 require operating software PROMs firmware The System Controller PCB software determines the overall system software level e g 17X The software on other PCBs will never be at a level higher than that of the System Controller and can be at a lower level Control L CTRL L Code Compatibility consists of a matrix that lists the various PCB software releases that may be encountered at each system soft ware level NOTE funsure of software or com patibility refer to the Hardware Configura tion instructions and order PCB and software if required that is appropriate for the system software level UM4 05 1 5 Configuration 5 1 4 Control L Code Table Figure 5 1 1 REF The PCB slot number or abbre viated module name Listed in the order they appear on the lt CTRL L gt display 2 MODULE The name of the PCB or module With the UM 4 different fea tures regularly dictated hardware changes resulting in more than one version of a PCB with specific soft ware Where the differences are readily discernable there will be sepa rate line items for each of the
277. ation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To adjust the Doppler angle without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove t
278. ause Manufacturing error during assembly of the monitor arm caused the monitor cable to be too short When the moni tor platform is swiveled to the right the cable connector prevents it from going any fur ther this puts undue strain on the cable and connector See Page UM4 09A 1 UM 4 HFC Systems shipped between February 25 1992 and June 5 1992 Solution Replace the monitor cable on a next call basis or upon fail ure Domestic U S Cus tomer Support Representa tives CSRs who have affected UM 4 HFC systems in their area will receive the necessary parts kit to com plete the rework ATL P N 8000 0849 01 International personnel will need to order ATL part number 8000 0849 01 for replace ment of the defective cable Estimated time for install for a system with Lenzar is 2 5 hours and for a system with out Lenzar 1 75 hours NOTE These parts are now available Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y 1 Y S ervice Bulletin G PAGE 1 OF 1 Date February 10 1993 S B No UM4 131 Rev To AllField Service Personnel E C N No Author Noel Joseph Footswitch Compatibility on all Ultramark 4 Systems PROBLEM Intermittent operation of the footswitch EFFECTIVITY Immediately CAUSE The new footswitch is a mechanical switch and will bounce when activated SOLUTION The System CPU has been modified
279. be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs UM4 06 20 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The calc measurement cursors will not attach to the trackball on a frame grabbed image unless there was an active scanhead running prior to entering VCR playback If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a du
280. ble upgrade Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 77 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO a WITH PARTS YES NO a ATL Service Bulletin G Date February 23 1995 S B No UM4 147 Rev To All Field Service Personnel Author Nguyen C A R System Controller PCB Modification for UM 4 5 Systems PROBLEM The modified System Controller Module P N 7500 031 2 13 will not support the UM 4 5 systems that have disk drive function CAUSE The floppy drive interface IC DC9229BT P ATL P N 2042 0012 U62 of the System Controller PCB is no longer available A design change was made to the UM 4 System Controller PCB module to remove the floppy disk drive function The change consists of removing the IC U62 and adding five jumpers SOLUTION For systems with a data communication floppy disk drive use System Controller PCB P N 7500 0312 12 or lower UM4 07 78 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO ATL Service Bulletin G Date March 13 1995 S B No UM4 148 To All Field Service Personnel Author David D Vega C A R UM 4 Default Settings for OB GYN Users PROBLEM OB GYN users cannot quickly use the UM 4 system without manual optimiza tion EFFECTIVITY All UM 4 OB GYN installations CAUSE Factory default settings for the CLA 76mm and CLA 11 40mm Array IVT have
281. called from the floppy disk Follow the prompts to recall the cineloop sequence Verify that the cineloop sequence can be successfully recalled and meets the criteria specified in Acquire Images with the exception of step 10 c UM4 02C 33 2C 2C 16 11 1 Performance Tests VCR Cineloop Capture Load a VCR tape that contains cardiac images including ECG that have been recorded on the system under test Go to the SETUP panel then press PLAY on the VCR front panel to initiate tape playback of cardiac images con taining a gray bar From the SETUP panel press GRAY to initiate the gray scale matching pro cess Follow the system prompts Verify the TR ON softkey is flashing If it isn t actuate it With the VCR in playback press ECG The first press displays the word NEXT on the softkey panel A white reference bar appears on the left of the video screen and at the top the message Choose the level of the ECG trigger Use the hand controller and M keys to set the reference bar to intersect the top of the ECG R wave but high enough not to intersect the T wave see Figure 2C 7 Press NEXT The following message appears Choose the left edge of the ECG win dow UM4 02C 34 F ALPHA Cine Armed ud eA Tee EU UN COEM QE NAME MICHAEL HUNT goin ID 48 38 1520 10 RAMSEY CENERAL VCR STOP 0
282. camera 2 Install the rail strap using four 6 32 x 1 4 screws 3 Mark the two holes from the bottom for the Lenzar tray Go to step 5 if your ordered a new tray 4 Remove the tray and drill the holes using a 3 16 bit Re mark the part as a 02 5 Install the tray and the last two screws 6 Re install the camera and check functionality PROBLEM 2 Lenzar Camera blocks AA transducer connector on UM 4 systems when an Annular Array upgrade is performed EFFECTIVITY UM 4 systems or Lenzar upgrades shipped prior to 8 17 87 CAUSE Incorrect Lenzar Mounting Plate SOLUTION Lenzar installation kit has been changed to move camera one inch to the left Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 17 7 Service Bulletins If you are preparing to do an AA upgrade on a UM 4 with a Lenzar installed prior to 8 17 87 or if an existing system has this problem order the following parts before going on site Item Part Number Lower Bezel Bracket 1065 0520 03 Upper Mounting Bracket 1065 0522 02 Lenzar Mounting Bracket 1065 0525 02 UM4 07 18 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 Nd E RAIL ASSEMBLY MOUNTING HOLES FOR FOOTSWITCH TRAY 6 Pics o o MARK HOLE HERE AND AT SAME POSITION ON THE OTHER END OF RAIL STRAP f 1 RAIL STRAP o 9 ALIGN THE TWO 5 HOLES OF THE STRAP WITH THE TWO CENTER HOLES FOR THE FOOTSWITCH TRAY FRONT
283. captured and files the previously captured image in memory Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the views are captured The last view to be cap tured is Apical 2 Chamber Press the Done footswitch The mes sage Saving Data Please Stand By flashes on the screen After it disap pears the upper right corner of the screen should now display Exercise Armed Trigger ON Post Supine and Parasternal Long Axis Scan the phantom during the following steps Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the views are captured The last view to be cap tured is Apical 2 Chamber Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 10 Press the Done footswitch The mes sage Saving Data Please Stand By flashes on the screen 11 After the message disappears press CINE then RECALL then HD DSK 12 Using the trackball move the high lighted area down to the Exercise 04 Fr PAGE 256 x 240 B amp W line 13 Press SELECT then CONTUE 14 Press DISPLY The following message appears on the screen There are image sets associated with this patient that need to have the best cardiac beat selected Please select the best beat and store the image NOTE This message is displayed to let the user know that they can select the best image out of the four that are displayed and store that one selection 15 Disregard the message and press the Stor footswitch 16 Repeat step 15 until the message Loading Data Please Stand a
284. cause of hard ware changes 16X S on this PCB is compatible with 12X systems The 02 supports Annular Array and 12 MHz Sync The 01 supports 12 MHz Sync but not Annular Array The Non Dash is not 12 MHz Sync and does not support Annular Array The following chart is a synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure for PCB layout 7500 0362 XX 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 Non Dash 12 MHz Sync 12 MHz Sync Non Sync Annulary Array 4201 0162 01 4201 0162 4201 0162 4201 0163 01 4201 0163 4201 0163 NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED 1 K OHM 2831 0013 74F14 74F14 74F04 2035 0331 2035 0331 2035 0140 2 3 2 3 N A Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 13 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0362 XX BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER A8 PCB From 04 03 02 01 To Non Sync System UM 4 Date 2 9 89 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 2831 0013 RESISTOR 1K OHM 1 8 W 2035 0140 IC 74F04 4100 0092 LABEL BLANK REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Move the wire that comes from the JPH 1 to the right solder post of R20 if itis on the left solder post See Figure II 2 Cutthe run to the pad directly underneath the R20 body underneath and hidden by the body of the resistor as one looks directly down on the PCB this run and pad are within the silkscreen for the R20 resistor body on the component side 3 Install 1K OHM
285. ch is located on the front of the E M Do not use the system ON OFF switch located on the right side of the HFC system When you turn off the E M switch the power is still provided to the system OEM module which includes the VCR as long as the system is plugged into the wall outlet 2 Do not unplug the system power cord from the wall outlet NOTE Some systems may have the new E M front cover PN 1064 0243 This new front cover has the E M switch blocked off The older style E M front cover has an access slot for the switch You may order P N 1064 0233 01 to replace the new style as needed Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L Service Bulletin Date April 1992 S B No UM4 121 Rev To Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Joseph UM 4 UM 5 Dual Access Compatibility Issue PROBLEM After replacing a dual access panel the UM 4 or UM 5 system will not ID access scanheads CAUSE A wiring change was made to the access cables to accommodate design changes to all access scanheads SOLUTION Check the part number of the dual access panel For part number 3500 0683 09 TO 12 panels use cable number 3500 0674 02 This cable con nects the access select relay PCB to the system motherboard NOTE f you have a 3500 0674 01 cable the conversion to a 02 can be done in the field EFFECTIVITY Holding the connector with
286. changing from M line to M mode the arrow pointer graphics location changes This anomaly also occurs in 12X and 8X NOTE The three problems listed below are corrected with the Motor Controller adaptive software which is actually a hard ware and firmware change It consists of Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 the following U27 PROM change to 4201 0265 07 the addition of a capacitor between U49 6 and 7 on the Motor Con troller PCB Annular array split image IVT wavy image IVT lateral jerk 17X System Controller PCB A15 software should be 17 15 06 or higher 17 15 01 should be purged and 8000 0125 25 soft ware kit should be ordered as a replace ment 17 15 01 Occurred in April of 1988 and addressed the following items A 8 mm lateral sample volume place ment error was corrected The error exhibited itself in the 2D portion of the Doppler mode when using the 10 MHz PV scanhead While in Frame Grab mode special func tion Y now correctly enables field selec tion of odd even or both fields for viewing The UM 4PV no longer has unique Motor Controller firmware standard firmware will be used Random graphics occur with successive search operations White bar above gray scale Poor sync of remote VCR on UM 4PV and UM 4CV Serial bus errors that resulted in system lockups Horizontal bars in pause with UM 4PV and UM 4CV UM 4PV and UM 4CV recorded tape run out lock u
287. ckly Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual sector image is inverted up down and left right the Doppler sample volume cursor on the 2D update disappears Known Problems Doppler measurement error in accelera tion velocity mode Stored image scaling error in which a dual trigger sector image is stored expand zoom is changed and the recalled image does not match the graphics overlay Resolution of the planimetry calculation changed 5 MHz IVT ID changed to prevent lock ups associated with previous ID Coordinate gain default setting between CW and Pulsed mode change 12X New Features UM 4A Improved DFT image quality Problems Corrected Doppler measurement error in accelera tion velocity mode Stored image scaling error in which a dual trigger sector image is stored expand zoom is changed and the recalled image does not match the graphics overlay Resolution of the planimetry calculation changed 5 MHz IVT ID changed to prevent lock ups associated with previous ID Coordinate gain default setting between CW and Pulsed mode change Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Known Problems When a TP 10 Thermal Printer is print ing the keyboard responds slowly This is normal operation The data transmis sion rate of 600 bits per second of the System Controller PCB to the thermal printer causes a delay that ties up the serial bus Control inputs from the key board during this
288. ct cable Check cable Repair or replace cable AN Module Power Sup ply Loss of video to VCR and Photo Module PHOTO MODULE BUSY EXIT ERROR message Replace F2 on A V Module Power Supply with 800 mA fuse 2700 0066 A N Module Verify A V Module is switched on 1 Turn on A V Module r uonejos ned enuey 4 v L vO vVIAD MODEL 0 4 Symptom Possible Cause Fault Isolation Verify input and output of A V Module specific con nector varies with periph eral PROBLEM CATEGORY VIDEO Cont d Solution 1 Repair or replace A V Mod ule Reference Configuration Section 5 Rear Panel PCB Verify video at Rear Panel PCB Connector E coax A1 Repair or replace Rear Panel PCB Configuration Section 5 playback No video during VCR No power to VCR Check VCR power switch Turn on VCR Check 12 volts from A V Module Repair or replace A V Mod ule VCR Verify output of VCR during playback Replace VCR Interconnect cable Check cable Repair or replace cable AN Module Verify output of A V Module at Connector E Repair or replace A V Mod ule coax A2 Configuration Section 5 Rear Panel PCB or interconnect cable Verify VCR video in at MBJ8 Repair or replace Rear Panel PCB or Repair or replace intercon nect cable Rear Panel P4 A2 to MBJ8 Conf
289. ct level of 17 XX in the comment section of the order Reference system type in comment section of the order ON Since the customer does not have the Frame Grabber option the above four part numbers are all that need to be ordered To order an EM the core part number as well as the feature part numbers must be listed on the order There should be atotal of three part numbers for systems with M mode or four part numbers for systems without M mode see Example C The three or four part numbers determine the EM hardware configuration ONLY The software level must be referenced in the comment section of the order Also note in the comment section that it is an S1 system The following chart lists the part numbers for S1 systems Description Feature Part Number 1 Core EM 120V 60 Hz 8500 1001 2 Linear only 8500 1006 Sector Linear 8500 1014 3 w EFT 8500 1004 00 w o EFT 8500 1004 01 4 w o M mode ECG 8500 1013 03 EXAMPLE C The customer has an S1 UM 4 system at 6 XX software They have an Access scanhead but no Linear scanhead They also have IVT but no ECG and M mode The part numbers that need to be ordered are as follows 8500 1001 Core EM 8500 1014 Sector Linear 8500 1004 00 EFT IVT 8500 1013 03 w o M mode ECG Reference the exact level of 6 XX in the comments section of the order Org C Io t Even though they don t have a Linear scanhead the Sector Linear part number is ordered because
290. curs it may be necessary to delete unneeded files from the hard disk and repeat the recall operation from floppy disk Use the compression mode CMP ON on the Setup softkey panel Cardiac Doppler Analysis Module In certain situations such as severe mitral stenosis you may not be able to position the second pressure half time cursor 55 to intersect with the slope of the spectral trace Therefore it may not be possible to measure pressure half time if severe stenosis is present In the Cardiac Doppler Analysis Module cardiac output be derived only from the aortic valve Vascular Analysis Module 7 Pressing while in the Vascular Analysis menu called Spectral Trace displays the Spectral Area menu When obtaining the pulsatility index in the Vascular Analysis Module the operator must measure and enter the systolic and diastolic peak velocities and do a spectral trace to obtain mean velocity For accurate results these measurements should be taken from the same waveform The spectral area must be calculated before the system will calculate the pulsatility index When measuring spectral peaks in the Vascular Analysis Module ratios displayed on the screen are erased if MARK is pressed To redisplay the ratios press MARK again to select the X caliper and position the caliper using the trackball The spectral window result is labeled as being in units of m or meters The result should have no label of unit
291. curs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing lt CTRL gt Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth and zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M
292. d black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled In rare occasions the CAD functions may appear to lock up and a Press control P message may be presented If unsaved images are on the hard disk DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which is command to clear all images offthe hard disk Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again Then pressing the CAD softkey will permit you access to the images that were on the hard disk at the time of the fault Capturing a static CW Doppler spectral display as the first image captured since power up may result in an abnormal image or display mode If this occurs capture a 2 D image first then return to static CW Doppler to capture the Doppler spectral display During image capture when the hard disk is full a message Press any key is displayed but pressing the keyboard has no effect Press any softkey to resume operation When recalling exercise images the recall menu may read exercise 08F page 256x120 menu should read exercise 08F quad 256x120 The recall menu displays Press page button to display the next page of the menu if more images are available but no PAGE button is shown Press the MORE softkey to display the next page of the menu When storing to or recalling from floppy disk once the process is initiated it cannot be interrupted or aborted Do not press any keys simply
293. d 27 X soft ware on the manufacturing line and becomes their field replacement 28 04 software was released November 28 1990 Corrected array scanhead identification problem Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual New Features e Dual Linear for UM 4PLus systems Known Problems e Known problems are identified in the Operating Notes document part number 4707 0001 05 Rev C 29X 29 11 software was the FCD version introducing English and French GYN FERT Calcs New Features Improved OB Calcs GYN FERT Calcs e CVA 76 Biopsy Guide Known Problems Possible double spaced reports recon figure printer no line feed Refer to Operating Notes 4707 0001 07 30X 30 05 software was the FCD version introducing the Multi Frequency Intra vaginal Transducer MFI 30 05 can be remain on non MFI systems only 30 08 or higher software with new MFI Doppler power tables replaced 30 05 MFI requires 30 08 or higher system software and minimum 8000 0177 12 13 8000 0570 04 P22405 P22502 P22707 Pulse Processor software 30 10 software was the FCD version that provided the German of GYN FERT Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 calcs English and French introduced with 29X New Features 30 05 30 08 Multi Frequency Trans ducer MFI Intravaginal 2D imaging with MFI Fetal M mode and 2D imaging with MFI Intravaginal New Features 30 10 e German GYN FER
294. d in the field Experienced personnel will be able to use accompanying performance testing and preventive maintenance checklists Organization The manual contains major tab divisions for diagrams procedures adjustments fault isolation configuration supplement Operating Notes Service Bulletins refer ence and parts ACTIVE DOCUMENT LIST lists all active documents pertaining to the Ultramarkr 4 Ultrasound System Listed are active ser vice bulletins service manuals operation manuals and operating notes DIAGRAMS includes diagrams of system data paths power distribution and cab ling PROCEDURES contains information on installation performance testing and pre ventive maintenance ADJUSTMENTS procedures for field authorized adjustments including adjust ment parameters and location diagrams FAULT ISOLATION fault isolation informa tion in tabular format CONFIGURATION hardware and soft ware compatibility information for specific system configurations Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual OPERATING NOTES contains operating information not incorporated into the operation manual SERVICE BULLETINS copies of all active service bulletins are included Hot Tips may be added as they are received by the CSR REFERENCE for information regarding interconnecting cables and connectors used in the Ultramarkr 4 as well as other miscellaneous information REPLACEABLE PARTS illustrated parts listi
295. d the width of passageways and doors Verify that adequate space is available for installation At each operational location verify the physical space for the system and any external peripherals Circlethe appropriate steps on the Site Evaluation FSR Pre Installation Flow Chart and note any potential difficul ties Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Pre Installation Requirements 2 2A 6 Ventilation Requirements It is not possible to verify the ventilation capacity of the site with the test equipment currently in your possession The intent of these steps is to bring to the attention ofthe appropriate facility representative the cool ing requirements of the system 1 If the room s seems excessively hot or humid to you ask for the facility engineer to make the appropriate adjustments and explain why Circle the appropriate items on the Site Evaluation FSR Pre Installation Flow Chart and note any potential difficul ties UM4 02A 3 2A Pre Installation Requirements 2A 7 Electrical Power Requirements WARNING For safety and liability reasons do not remove the outlet from the wall or gain access to any electrical systems Have the facility representative describe the wiring and inspect for the criteria specified here 1 Explain to the facilities representative that the electrical supply to the system should be a dedicated line noother equipment on the same line conform ing to the specifica
296. d wire ground The ground wire shall be an insulated solid cop per conductor bonded to the ground bus of Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 10 V P P the service panel The outlet shall be a Hospital Grade Receptacle for installa tions in North America or an Isolated Ground Receptacle Proper installation shall reflect compliance with the national electrical code UM4 02A 7 Section 2B Installation 2B 1 Introduction This section contains procedures for in specting and installing the Ultramarkr 4 Ul trasound System series UM 4 NOTE Some parts of this section include policies equipment requirements and procedures that may apply only to U S field use For dealers affiliates or other authorized service personnel who do not use the domestic U S service documents use your equivalent document where applicable Before the UM 4 system is delivered to the site perform a site inspection as described in Section 2A After you have completed the inspection and installation of the sys tem verify correct operation using the per formance tests described in Section 2C When you arrive atthe site introduce your self to the staff present your business card and verify that you may proceed with the installation of the system Minimal assembly is required to install the UM 4 or the UM 4A also known as the Small Cart Inspection includes examin ing the UM 4 for shipping damage verify ing the component inve
297. dark slide detect switches Verify the security of the view port door Lubricate cassette rails with Tri Flow if they are dry UM4 02D 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Inspect the integrity of the window shade and its attachment to the cas sette mechanism Check for excessive play in the cas sette mechanism and adjust if required If unable to adjust cassette driver circuitry suspect a defective servo pot Verify that the copper tabs hold the film cassette securely and that it does not interfere with its insertion Verify that the cassette finds its proper position without searching or chatter ing Verify the voltage levels are within specification on the 5 15 15 and 26 volt power supplies Replace the battery if the voltage reads less than 3 2 volts with the power off Verify the charging voltage of 5 0V at pin 9 and pin 18 on 035 or U36 on the Main PCB Verify thatthe camera video is properly terminated and that the rear panel switches are properly set Photograph all system modalities and verify proper video alignment Listen for signs of mechanical problems Inspect the customer s film cassettes for physical soundness Review MIC images with operator for their approval If the operator has expressed a con cern over camera drift use the follow ing procedure to isolate the problem at the camera the film or the processor Ultra
298. de the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient When you freeze the system while in ECG trigger mode and then press SELECT on softkey systems or IMAGE SELECT on hardkey systems the ECG trace on the stored image jitters Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 25 6 Operating Notes M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth or zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear or sector M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation ofthe ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling atthe end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operat
299. e SYSTEM ACCURACY 4 Usethe calipers to measure the distance between two horizontal nylon pins in the phantom which are spaced 60mm apart 5 Verify that the distance displayed on the display screen is 60mm x 3mm 5mm for EFT IVT and TRT sector 6 Use the calipers to measure the distance between two vertical nylon pins in the phantom which are spaced 80mm apart 7 Verify that the distance displayed on the display screen is 80mm 2mm NOTE f caliper measurements are out of specification contact the CSC and or PSC as well as regulatory affairs to issue a customer complaint and fol low up procedure NOTIFICATION DOMESTIC Please complete a FSR per the attached documentation and FSR coding Con tact the CSC center upon completion of customer verification Indicate the serial number INTERNATIONAL Please contact the upgrade coordinator Jason Powell with the system verified and completed Indicate the system serial number and the country FAX 206 487 7000 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 49 7 Service Bulletins FIELD SERVICE REPORT CODING 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 customer information SO number CC 05 SC Per current status PC Per current UM 4 code CI 50 CSR number FSR number Invoice mark NO Service completion date System location Customer phone number NA Customer contact Part numbe
300. e Doppler Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Table 4 5 Minimum Configuration Core S1 4 X and 6 X PCB installed Alternatives one must be installed X System boot 2D Sector overlay 2D Sector image Linear overlay Linear image M mode image gt 4 9 Troubleshooting Tables 4 9 1 Layout Figure 4 11 shows the typical layout of the fault isolation troubleshooting tables To effectively use these tables work with the assumption that the symptom listed is the only one that exists and that the proposed solution corrects only that symptom Other Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Fault Isolation 4 system functions are presumed to be working properly The following describes each area of the table 1 Model application or subject in this case the UM 4 2 Category classification of a problem into a specific division class or sys tem e g System Boot Image Quality etc 3 Index No anumber used in this table for reference purposes 4 Symptom an indication representing an underlying fault condition or other wise inappropriate system function 5 Possible Cause a condition which may have produced the symptom 6 Fault Isolation a step or procedure to help determine the cause of the symp tom 7 Solution the action to take to correct the cause of the symptom 8 Reference a source document or a sect
301. e scope of this procedure to quantify ESD levels you will need to use your senses to qualify the obvious presence of ESD You can judge the severity of ESD by observing the following characteristics e ESD voltages in excess of 2 000V cause a shock Tocreate an audible discharge the ESD must reach 5 000V A visible ESD discharge occurs at or above 10 000V ESD can result from low humidity carpet ing linen and clothing Avoid placing the system directly under or close to HVAC vents Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Pre Installation Requirements 2 1 Check for the presence of ESD by walking around the immediate area where the system will be installed and touching grounded surfaces 2 Ask the operators about their experi ences with static discharge 3 Suggest possible ESD minimizing devices techniques such as static mats humidifiers and sprays 4 Circle the appropriate step on the Site Evaluation FSR Pre Installation Flow Chart and note any potential difficul ties 2A 9 Radio Frequency Interference Radio frequency RF interference can be generated from a large variety of electrical devices and may not present itself as a problem until installation RF typically causes image noise If a noise problem occurs at the time of installation you will need to use the process of elimination to determine the RF source Familiarizing yourself with these sources now will help you quickly solve RF problems f
302. e tray or strap and set it aside Remove the rail assemblies Remove the three Allen bolts and lockwashers securing each rail assembly to the EM Remove the rail assemblies and set them aside 6 Re Assembly a Ensure that the spacer washers are centered on the bolt holes Fig ure 2 3 Set one rail assembly onto the EM HINT the brake caster goes to the rear and insert the rail bolts and lockwashers but do not tighten the bolts Repeat on the other rail assembly Install the cable tray Set the cable tray on the rails and secure using the screws Tighten the rail bolts set the EM Rail assembly upright and lock the brake casters Refer to Figure 2E 2 for the following Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual d Before attempting to install the OEM HFC assembly onto the EM Rail assembly ensure that the bolts on the top cover ofthe EM are the same type Also ensure that if they are silver in color that there are no lock washers under them The bolts are made to different specifications to be used with or without the lockwashers Alignment problems between the OEM HFC and EM Rail assem blies are common Some hints for easier assembly are 1 Check the EM top bolts as in step 6B above Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Mechanical Procedures 2b 2 If alignment seems impossible insert a pry bar into the gap between the EM chassis and the EM top cover and pry the cover up while pulling down on
303. e Manual To copy an image from one disk to the other press 8 and ENTER At the Copy Disk Image Report menu enter 2 and ENTER At the file prompt press 1 and ENTER When the Disk Menu is again displayed the image has been copied Select drive A by pressing 1 and ENTER Then press 1 and ENTER The double arrow symbol should be in front of Select Drive A Press 3 and ENTER to return to the Disk Menu Call upthe disk directory by pressing 3 and ENTER Verify thatthe image from disk B has been copied into the direc tory Press 9 and ENTER to enter the com munications mode The menu shown in Figure 2C 4 is displayed COMMUNICATIONS MENU TRANSMIT RECEIVE CONFIGURE PORT SELECT ENTER CHOICE 1 4 Figure 2C 4 Communications Menu 18 From the Communications Menu press 4 then ENTER The Select Port menu is displayed Press 1 and ENTER The double arrow symbol should switch from Port 2 to Port 1 Press DEL to return to the Commu nications Menu Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 19 20 Performance Tests 2C Press 3 and ENTER The Configura tion Menuis displayed Move the flash ing double arrow symbol to another baud setting by using the up and down arrow keys When you press ENTER the symbol should stop flashing and the one in front of the parity settings should start flashing Press DEL to return to the Communications Menu Press DEL again to return to the Disk Menu
304. e capture with real time images only Images captured using linear scanheads will not be synchronized to the video rate and may appear distorted or contain blank video frames when replayed Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 13 6A Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4CAD Ultrasound System 4707 0010 04 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 27 10 June 18 1990 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing CTRL Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented The CI STR softkey stores a Cineloop image onto the hard disk if one is present in video memory though the descriptive title is not used An easi
305. e erroneous impression that averaging is an option If you change the frequency of the MFI scanhead after the system has timed out due to inactivity the system is unable to recognize the new frequency Before changing scanhead frequency take the system out of the time out mode by pressing any key as instructed by the message displayed on the screen On hardkey systems only waiting one minute or more between pressing FRZ and selecting dual image mode causes the live image to be blank To recover from this situation change the OUTPUT POWER control setting To avoid this situation do not enter dual image mode while the system is in freeze mode 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient W
306. e is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images Images stored using the STORE softkey are erased when VCR playback is activated To prevent erasure use the Page Capture function described in Capturing Single Frame Images When capturing images from the VCR the ECG trigger threshold can only be set with the CAD Cine Hand Controller arrow keys not with the trackball Use the hand controller arrow keys if you want to set the threshold when capturing VCR images Do not capture images when the system is in Dual image mode and the ECG trigger is on If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled UM4 06A 20 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A In rare occasions the CAD functions may appear to lock up and a Press control P message may be presented If unsaved images are on the ha
307. e known problems with 23 14 software 4705 0001 14 Ultramark 4 Operating Notes and Errata lists additional known problems with 23 14 software 4705 0010 03 Ultramark 4CAD Ultra sound System Operating Notes and Errata lists the known problems with 23 19 software 0 4 05 20 4705 0001 18 Ultramark 4 Operating Notes and Errata lists additional known problems with 23 19 software 23 14 only In OB calcs if LMP or CRL is entered after Average Ultrasound Age has been calculated the Average Ultra sound Age will be updated with the LMP or CRL value 24X 24 15 software was the FCD version to support Duplex CW e 24X was placed on ship hold shortly after its release 25X replaces all 24X New Features Duplex CW Problems Corrected Setup Pressing CTRL E while in Cineloopr image capture displays mixed alphanu meric characters on the display Using lt CTRL gt Z to set date and time overwrites any annotation and graphics in the region used to display the date time prompt System Controls e Pressing lt CTRL gt O while editing a report in one of the analysis modules blanks the leftmost columns of the report The SET WINDOW key on the CAD Cine hand controller sets the position of the capture window only temporarily and the setting is not preserved for subsequent sessions Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Two Dimensional Acquisition Selecting between two images in d
308. e system the user is prompted for an action ADD REPLACE or ABORT ADD adds the images from the floppy onto the hard disk and the images now take on the patient information currently on the hard disk This is useful if the patient name or ID was entered slightly differently the last time e g Robert Smith vs Smith Robert REPLACE removes the images and patient information from the hard disk and replaces it with the images and information from the floppy The net effect is the same as if the user had pressed lt CTRL gt P before recalling images from the floppy ABORT permits the user to cancel the recall operation The data on the hard disk remains untouched During playback of captured images some vertical shifting may be apparent on successive images Enter the patient name 1 0 before entering the Cine softkey panel Otherwise the patient name and 1 0 will not appear on the wall motion analysis report UM4 06A 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images continued 7 Intermittent difficulties storing or recalling images to from floppy disk have been reported These problems can be minimized as follows When storing to floppy disk the system prompts the user to Press any key to continue Do not press additional keys during this process Recalling from floppy disk with the hard disk nearly full can cause problems in the recall operation If this oc
309. eakers A Beamformer Controller PCB A4 7500 0362 01 or higher or a Motor Controller PCB A8 7500 0348 04 05 06 08 or higher configured for sync as described in service bulletin UM4 55 AA Annular array scanhead and front panel connector System Receiver is 3500 1016 XX CW with cables from AA1 and AA2 to AA connector see Fig ure 1A 5 Duplex CW System Receiver Block Diagram A UM 4 enhanced with built in hardware and software for video Cineloopr Image Review and Coronary Artery Disease stress echocardiography applications ACAD module is mounted in the OEM no Data Comm Module Another Duplex CW scanhead Motor Controller is 7500 0517 XX does not sup port AA or MFI scanheads SYNC Duplex CADr Merc 5 3 Compatibility 5 3 1 Determining Software Level Systems at 8X or Below During boot up the software level appears briefly at the bottom left of the screen Repeatedly pressing lt CTRL gt P will repeat the display if it is missed the first time 0 4 05 26 Systems at 12 Above lt CTRL gt L codes Table 5 1 are available with 12X System Controller firmware and higher The lt CTRL gt L feature allows the user to determine the system configuration by interrogating certain modules to estab lish their presence in the system The mod ules either return a 6 character code or a NOT INSTALLED message YY ZZ software revision level software firmware le
310. ecall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it When recalling an image previously stored with ECG data via data comm the ECG data will either be missing or incorrect Analysis Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling German Software only When you first select UNGUELT TASTE while in Kalk the system displays an invalid response To get the desired response press UNGUELT TASTE again UM4 06 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 07 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 29 12 November 20 1991 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for
311. ect cabling Verify echoes present in M mode Repair or replace cable System Receiver Verify input and output of System Receiver Replace System Receiver Configuration Section 5 Scan Converter PCBs A9 10 or 11 Verify echoes present in M mode if present Scan Converter PCB defective Replace defective Scan Converter PCB A9 10 or 11 if M mode present Configuration Section 5 No image from Access or 72X scanhead EFT and Linear ok Scanhead Try another Access or 72X scanhead Replace scanhead Pulse Processor PCB A5 Verify drive pulses at J2 of Pulse Processor PCB A5 Replace Pulse Processor PCB A5 Configuration Section 5 Verify XDCRSEL at P2 pin 1A of Pulse Processor PCB A5 is less than 0 5 V with Access or 72X scanhead selected Replace Pulse Processor A5 Interconnect cable Verify FXDCRSEL at FT5 of receiver is less than 0 5 V Repair or replace intercon nect cable System Receiver or interconnect cable Verify drive pulses at scan head BNC connector use BNC Tee connector Replace System Receiver or interconnect cable Configuration Section 5 Artifacts with AA scan head Scan Converter frame rate not properly set upon initialization if sys tem default set to F3 or F4 smoothing Configure system default to F1 or F2 smoothing Cycle through smoothing functions F1 4 prior to scanning
312. ed shorted With 7500 7704 XX AGO board shorted Without 7500 7704 XX AGO board Color I O 7500 7710 shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted open CAT 902A shorted See Figure 5 13 shorted shorted open shorted shorted shorted shorted out high enabled enabled Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 79 5 Configuration Table 5 4 UM 4 CAD Module Jumper Matrix Cont d Ref Des CPU cont d open open closed open open open closed closed closed closed closed closed closed open open closed open open closed open 2100 0527 shorted shorted 2 open shorted shorted shorted shorted open open open open open open open shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted UM4 05 80 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Table 5 4 UM 4 CAD Module Jumper Matrix Cont d JUMPER OR SWITCH Ref ATL Ref Normal Des Part No Des Function Position CPU cont d 2100 0527 1 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 81 5 Configuration KEY BOARI See ian eee P8 P9 PS P3 O J4 P4 o n 1 2 n 1 2 Shorted n e 3 Shorted 06 ESO5 AO08 01 Figure 5 8 CAT902A Single Board CPU CAD Module JUMPER KEY 2 Pin Open 2 Pin Shorted
313. egrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement ofthe Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM Inappropriate sample volume and Doppler angle annotation may appear on the screen when returning from the calcs menu and entering CW Doppler To clear the annotation press RETRN then CW DOP to resume CW Doppler operation When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF UM4 06A 8 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images 7 Images stored using the STORE softkey are erased when VCR playback is activated To prevent erasure use the Page Capture function described in Capturing Single Frame Images When capturing images from the VCR the ECG trigger threshold can only be set with the CAD Cine Hand Controller arrow keys not with the trackball Use the hand controller arrow keys if you want to set the threshold when capturing VCR images Do not capture images when the system is in Dual image mode and the trigger is on If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverte
314. eld Service Manual Table 2A 1 System Dimensions Crated Uncrated Height 50 46 In 127 117 cm Width 30 24 In 76 61 cm Depth 42 36 In 107 92 cm Weight 290 220 Ib 132 100 kg Cooling and Ventilation 50 to 104 F 10 to 40 C 29 to 149 F 34 to 65 C 15 95 5 95 2560 BTU HR 750 W Electrical Power Requirements Operational Temp Storage Temp Operational Humidity Storage Humidity Heat Output Measurement 120 VAC Hot Neutral 108 132 VAC Pre Installation Requirements 2A UM 4 System Specifications Cooling and Ventilation cont d With This Amount of Room Air Circulation 1320 cfm 37 cmm 660 cfm 19 cmm 440 cfm 12 cmm 330 cfm 9 cmm 264 cfm 7 cmm 220 cfm 6 cmm 189 cfm 5 cmm 165 cfm 4 cmm Room Temp Will Rise Due To UM 4 1 8 F 1 C 3 6 F 2 C 5 4 F 3 C 7 2 F 4 C 9 0 F 5 C 10 8 F 6 C 12 6 7 14 4 F 8 C cfm cubic feet per minute cmm cubic meters per minute 230 VAC 207 253 VAC Current Draw 10 0A 5 0A Neutral Ground 3 VAC RMS Line Loss lt 3 96 Distortion 20 96 Common Mode Noise 1 5 V P P Normal Mode Noise Wiring Requirements The electrical feed to the system shall be a dedicated line no other equipment on the same line with a thir
315. em test Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Preventive Maintenance 2D 2D 12 PM Checklist External Inspection j 9L PC Axle DONS sii sce some eos j Blakes ortus ancient as hoes aram j Mounting bolts j Control panel controls j Labeling j Cabling eoru qun ye E j Internal j amp os uz 22 Ll rA ops Internal cover j j Mounting hardware j Aas Peripherals 1 External Cleaning j 2I REPRE Control panel j Cabinetry j Peripherals j Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02D 13 Section 2E Mechanical Procedures 2 1 System Disassembly for EM Replacement CAUTION Use proper anti static prevention procedures when covers are removed from system WARNING Do not wear static wrist straps when power is applied to system Figure 2E 1 showsthe location of the var ious components called out in this proce dure 1 Remove Monitor WARNING 7he monitor arm assembly is under great tension It must be in the raised position when removing the monitor or it may cause physical injury when the monitor is lifted from it a Po
316. energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth and zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation ofthe ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode on the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling atthe end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 19 6A CAD Operating Notes Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs If the VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scan
317. ent this situation connect Access scanheads that have a frequency of 5 0 MHz or greater only to the left Access receptacle 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient UM4 06 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth or zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear or sector M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line di
318. enter AA the frame rate display is not halved Caliper size too large French language translations Support of UP811 remote interface When remote sample volume is selected both trackball and remote sam ple volume position controls are active when a scanhead with Doppler remote position arm is used Corrected depth adjustment process to make adjustment smoother Known Problems Entry into dual linear while frozen causes duplication within the linear image A Doppler reference appears on the help message for 2D TM key There is a small gap between linear focal zone markers and the 2D image under 5X A blank M mode display results when selecting M line from Access 2D and entering M mode while in VCR play with hardkey On the Calculation menu some charac ter fields have blanking and some do not GREY annotation partly overwritten by VCR search error message Toggling FRZ causes FPS display to vary intermittently when using HFLA 1X magnification and the fifth focal zone Lateral measurements with 10 PV using 5 Short are inaccurate by as much as 796 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 23X NOTE 23 14 should be purged replace ment is 23 19 see replacement matrix 23 10 software was the sales demon stration version of this software CAUTION Vascular and cardiac analysis packages included in 23 10 are incorrect and should not be turned on 23 14 was the FCD version of this soft ware 23 19 software
319. entify the correct part for each assembly SOLUTION Provide a table that will describe the different levels of chassis and their major components NOTE The following items in bold print are the chassis levels that FG stores will be stocking This means that you will order the chassis that is closest to the one you want For International systems contct your regional office These are the first line of EM s They are for the S1 systems only ECO 963 DOMESTIC INTERNATIONAL 3500 0454 00 3500 0454 01 7500 0344 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0344 1064 0244 CARD CAGE 1064 0244 3500 0431 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0431 7500 0318 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 1700 0002 04 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 05 These were the first of the S2 EM s with a system receiver Notice that the mother board changed ECO 1057 7500 0373 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 1064 0244 CARD CAGE 1064 0244 3500 0431 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0431 7500 0318 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 3500 0581 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 1700 0002 04 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 05 UM4 07 22 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 SOLUTION This chassis was rolled because the Power Supply was made to fit COLA require Cont d ments also notice the quiet fans are only on the International system ECO 1103 3500 0454 11 3500 0454 12 7500 0373 01 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 01 1064 0244 CARD CAGE 1064 0244 3500 0431 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 061 4 01 7500 0318 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 3500 0581 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 1700 0002 09 POW
320. epair or replace Control Module or Repair or replace intercon nect cable Configuration Section 5 System Controller PCB A15 If 3 2 A checks ok System Controller PCB A15 is defective Repair or replace System Controller PCB A15 Configuration Section 5 Keyboard does not respond audio alarm on system boots Control Module Repair or replace Control Module Configuration Section 5 Display Controller PCB A14 Repair or replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 Control Panel rotary controls inoperable alphanumerics ok Control Module With o scope verify signal at pin 7 of Control Module connector Repair or replace Control Module Configuration Section 5 EM to Control Module interconnect cable Verify input signal at J1 pin 15B of System Controller PCB A15 Repair or replace intercon nect cable r uonejos Hned enuey 4 v SL VO VIADQ MODEL 0 4 Symptom Possible Cause System Controller PCB A15 PROBLEM CATEGORY SYSTEM CONTROLS Cont d Fault Isolation 1 Verify output signal at J1 pin 15A of System Controller PCB A15 Solution 1 Repair or replace System Controller PCB A15 Reference Configuration Section 5 Depth or Zoom set tings change with out touching controls Control Module potenti ometer Replace Control Module
321. er 5 4 6 UM 4 and UM 4CAD Special Functions 26X There are no special and control function changes from those available with 23X STEER softkey controls Array AVT sec Softkey software tor orientation 5 4 7 27X amp Up Special Functions XDRSAV softkey deleted Hardkey e lt CTRL gt U saves transducer parame lt CTRL gt M steers the Array IVT sector ters presets UM4 05 32 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual SFUNC ENTER Configuration Table 5 2 UM 4 S2 Special Functions DESCRIPTION Array IVT steering Software Level 5 8X 12X 17X NN 23X 25X 26X 27X NN NF STEER 28X amp Up NF STEER SFUNC A UPDATE Trigger update HF TGC UP NF NF TGC UP TGC UP NF TGC UP SFUNC C Move Doppler Zero Line NN ZERO NF NF ZERO ZERO NF ZERO SFUNC D 2D ALT Alternate Frame Rate NF NF NF NF SFUNC E B W Video invert HF B W NF NF B W B W NF B W SFUNC G POS Patient Position HF PT POS NF NF PT POS PT POS NF PT POS SFUNC H SCHDP Scanhead Position HF XDRPOS NF NF XDRPOS XDRPOS NF XDRPOS SFUNCI TGC SET HF TGC SET NF NF TGC SET TGC SET NF TGC SET SFUNC J ARROW HF ARROW NF NF ARROW ARROW NF ARROW SFUNC BIOPSY HF BIOP NF NF BIOP BIOP NF BIOP
322. er method of storing Cineloop images isto use the rightmost footswitch after acquiring the images The keyboard supports special functions that are not documented in the operating instructions The following keys are active on both hardkey and softkey control modules Special Function Keys Function Trigger update on off Move Doppler zero line Select deselect alternate frame rate Video invert Display and select patient position display Transducer scanhead position TGC preset Select deselect annotation arrow Select deselect biopsy guide Select velocity frequency Select wall filters Select variable persistence level Enable disable TGC display Enable disable 2 D update Select up down orientation of the image Select Doppler reject level x Z cmmxzzac romoo r UM4 06A 14 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Y Z or lt or or Or gt Special Function Keys or Control and the Following Keys Special Function Disabled COoOOUOZzQoOou Z Special Function Control and the Following Keys 7 orH orl or J or K Change the sector angle field of view Doppler invert Increase velocity range Enable calculations and tables Increase sample volume Decrease sample volume Decrease velocity range Function Enable disable Datacomm menu Move Doppler angle left Move Doppler angle right Function Enable disable fast variable persistence Swap images toggle datacomm Enable disable Dopple
323. er supply Adjustments Section 3 5 volt supply too low Adjust 5 volt supply to 5 2 volts Adjustments Section 3 Continuous keyboard tone PCB failure Boot system with minimum configuration A Isolate to defective PCB and replace it System does not boot or intermittent boot or shutdown ON OFF Switch termi nals Connect power cord directly to EM If EM powers up then check switch assem bly Add strain relief to switch assembly Tighten lug connectors After power up 7 Fans running Monitor is blank or has scrambled video For softkeys upper left soft key will dis play a letter For hardkeys all buttons illuminated System Controller PCB A15 LEDs do not sequence prop erly or do not illumi ate Dirty contacts on Push Button switches on Sys tem Controller PCB A15 Spray contact cleaner directly into the switch while pressing the switch Repeat for second switch Replace System Controller PCB A15 Access S H shuts down system with new chassis 3500 0454 07 or higher 3500 0437 03 Access cable not compatible with 7500 0373 03 or higher motherboard 3500 0437 03 and below access cable has pin 6 grey wire and pin 7 purple wire on conn to motherboard P5 Cut these wires to make cable compatible this makes cable a 3500 0347 04 r cE vO vVIAn enuey v MO
324. erboard 4 plc Chabin cable 3500 1185 02 Cable Access Select PCB to Dual Linear cable 3500 0518 ECG Module 7500 0323 PCB ECB Isolation 9901 0025 01 Tape Copper Foil Not shown ECG Connector Plate 3500 0489 04 S H Conn Panel Assy DFT Single Linear 3500 0489 09 S H Conn Panel Assy AA Single AA 3500 0489 08 S H Conn Panel Assy DFT AA 3500 1373 01 S H Conn Panel Assy Dual Linear Replaces factory part 3500 1184 02 3500 0445 07 S H Conn Panel EFT Single 3500 0797 01 S H Conn Panel EFT amp CW 3500 0437 04 S H Conn Panel Access Single S H Conn Panel Dual Access 3500 0683 10 S H Conn Panel Dual Access w EFT u w 3500 0581 xx item 20 3500 0802 02 S H Conn Panel Dual Access w EFT amp CW u w 3500 1016 xx item 20 7500 0317 A1 RF Select PCB 51 7500 0369 xx A1 Doppler Pulser PCB S2 7500 0525 xx A1 Doppler Pulser PCB S2 Dplx CW 7500 0288 xx A2 Beamformer Front End 7500 0320 xx A3 Beamformer Focus 51 7500 0361 A3 Beamformer Focus 7500 0549 xx A3 Beamformer Focus 7500 0324 A4 Beamformer Controller PCB 7500 0362 xx A4 Beamformer Controller PCB 7500 0548 xx 9 4 08 14 A4 Beamformer Controller Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 4 UM 4 Electronics Modu
325. erence measurements OB Analysis Describe and demonstrate the use of the VCR and Hardcopy Devices Exposure controls Print button Footswitch OEM Exposure control VCR controls Softkey Hardkey or VCR controls Discuss and demonstrate the primary M Mode controls Mode Select Depth Gain Power TGC Freeze M Line Position Discuss and demonstrate the primary Doppler controls Modality Select Gain Power Freeze e Sample Volume Positioning Velocity Range S FUNC and CTRL controls Depth Describe and demonstrate system maintenance procedures System cleaning e Scanhead disinfection B W Printer head cleaning UM4 02B 24 2B 4 12 Customer Acceptance 1 2B 4 13 1 Discuss the present status of the sys tem with your customer and review hardcopies Be sure to cover any envi ronmental concerns as well making suggestions as appropriate Present your customer with their CID and review each section If this was done atthe Pre Installation Inspection review it again Topics to be covered include The system s SO System warranty ATL support phone numbers Service call process set expecta tions for response times e Scanhead replacement process Supplies and consumables Continuing Education and BMET training Extended warranty programs look for and act on buying signals Ask your customer if there are any other issues or concerns that they have with t
326. erform an in service Install cable management hooks as required Make sure that the area is cleared of any materials used during the installa tion process and that your tools and test equipment are removed This is first impression time for their new system Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2B 4 11 9 Notify the facilities representative that the system is installed and ready for any safety tests that they normally conduct Customer In Service 1 Once you re sure that the system and the lab are ready bring the staff into the room Introduce the system and review the COA with them to familiar ize them with the system and its options and to assure that they have received whatthey ordered or thought they ordered Begin the in service by presenting the Operator s Manual and the Reference Guide Show the major sections of these manuals and emphasize that all the information needed to operate the system and its peripherals is in them As questions come up during the in service it is beneficial to guide the operators through these manuals Show the operators how to power up the system and any external OEMs Once the system is fully booted give the operator a quick tour of system controls and describe the philosophy behind the use of the plasma display or Hardkeys depending upon configu ration and its associated functions Be sure to include all front panel controls Monitor Brightness and Contrast
327. ermission of Advanced Technology Laboratories Bothell Washington 98041 3003 Dwn SEE HISTORY FOR ORIGINAL Document Title Check SIGNATURES PCB Up Down Rev Instructions for the CSR Spares Kit This document contains confidential information which is proprietary to Advanced Technology Advanced Technology a E ng Steve Carter 1 22 91 John Hart 1 22 21 Document Number ECO CN REV Sheet 1 of 39 Qc 6420 0009 01 D 5010 G Don Crotty 3 25 91 9010 0291 8 90 0 4 09 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 ACTIVE SHEET RECORD INITIAL SHEETS ADDED SHEETS INITIAL SHEETS ADDED SHEETS G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 3 9 Reference 5 E s ECO DESCRIPTION DATE N KI GIG V D 5010 REFORMATTED SEE HISTORY COVER SHEET FOR SIGNATURES SEE CN 0 4 09 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 0 vod der eto ddp aln dee FOR wad Kb E a ara 2 0 FORM retos aq Fede n dee Videns Vaca Mdb dae ee 7500 0348 XX MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB 7500 0348 XX PCB REWORK SHEET MOTOR CONTROLLER A8 PCB From 10 09 08 06 05 04 To Non Sync 7500 0362 XX B
328. ervice Manual Configuration 5 A7 Doppler Processor PCB HFC 4APLUs PCBs 7500 0347 7500 0390 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 8x 0347 01 02 0347 05 0390 01 03 07 0347 05 0390 01 03 07 PROMs required 7500 0347 05 and 7500 0390 01 amp 03 are not compatible with 7500 0370 02 04 08 or 10 may create a noise problem 0347 has cables attached 0390 has card edge connectors 3 7500 0394 05 and 7500 0390 07 are backward compatible as a pair they do not need to be matched 4 7500 0347 XX can only be used with 7500 0346 XX 5 Purge 6 Functional equivalents Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 49 5 Configuration PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL INDIVIDUAL PROM Part No 0347 05 8000 0134 Dash No P N 4201 0390 01 8000 0134 03 07 0 4 05 50 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Ref Des Part No Function Normal Position 7500 0347 JP1 Shorted for 8K x
329. es from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it Analysis 7 Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation UM4 06 8 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 7 While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system 7 The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling German Software only 7 When you first select UNGUELT TASTE while in Kalk the system displays an invalid response To get the desired response press UNGUELT TASTE again Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 9 6 Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 06 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 29 11 RevA November 4 1991 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to
330. es protective earth ground located next to ground stud on the rear panel 4 gt D XV Introduction The following are internal symbols for ref erence only Identifies the point where the sys tem safety ground is fastened to the chassis xvi Identifies high voltage compo nents operating above 1000 Vac or 1500 Vdc Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual ACQUISITION GROUP A1 A4 BEAMFORMER 1 RF Select PCB 51 NO ACTIVE CIRCUITRY JUST ROUTES SCANHEAD SIGNALS TO FRONT END PCB VIA CHABIN CABLES TO RF SELECT PCB TO CENTER SECTION OF 3 PIECE MB A1 Doppler Pulser 52 VARIABLE AMPLIFIER FOR EXCITATION XMT PULSES FROM PULSE PROCESSOR FOR MECHANICAL SCANHEADS IN CW AND PULSED DOPPLER MODES A2 Beamformer Front End PCB T R SWITCHS BLOCK PULSERS FROM REACHING TGC AMPLIFIERS AND BEAMFORMER FOCUS PCB HIGH VOLTAGE MUX SWITCHES HV16 S ROUTE PULSERS TO FORM CORRECT APERTURE TGC AMPLIFICATION OF INCOMING RF SIGNALS SENDS RECEIVED RF TO BEAMFORMER FOCUS A3 Beamformer Focus PCB CROSSPOINT SWITCHES DEROTATE RESTORES SEQUENCIAL ORDER OF INDIVIDUAL CHANNELS REMOVES DELAYS FROM INDIVIDUAL INCOMING RF SIGNALS SCANHEADS gt DEPTH OF FOCUS CONTROL DEMULTIPEXES COMBINES AND AMPLIFIES RF SIGNALS SENDS LINEAR RF TO PULSE PROCESSOR A4 Beamformer Controller PCB 8 DOWNLOADS OPERATING PARAMETERS DEPTH MODE S H TYPE ETC FROM SYSTEM CONT
331. etailed instructions that apply to the master kit are included Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 7 9 Reference 7500 0348 XX MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following page describes how to convert this PCB from 10 09 08 06 05 or 04 to a Non Sync type The 10 same as the 08 but has ACQ Sync changes for the CAD system The 08 is a new FAB and is equivalent to the 06 The 09 same as the 06 but has ACQ Sync changes for the CAD system The 06 is the same as 05 but has a fix for Servo Loop Oscillation The 05 supports Annular Array and 12 MHz Sync The 04 supports 12 MHz Sync but not Annular Array The 07 is the same as 03 but has a fix for Servo Loop Oscillation The 03 is not 12 MHz Sync and does not support Annular Array The following chart is a synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure and Figure IA for a PCB layout 7500 0348 XX 06 05 04 07 03 12 MHz Sync 12 MHz Sync Non Sync Annulary Array 4201 0264 02 4201 0261 02 4201 0266 01 NOT INSTALLED 74F14 2035 0331 2 9 4201 0264 01 4201 0261 01 4201 0266 NOT INSTALLED 74F14 2035 0331 2 3 4201 0264 01 4201 0261 01 4201 0266 1 K OHM 2831 0013 74F04 2035 0140 N A Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 10 08 09 06 NEW FAB 12 MHz Sync 4201 0264 02 4201 0264 02 4201 0261 02 4201 0261 02 4201 0266 01 4201 0266 01 NOT INSTALLED NOT IN
332. evaluation share your findings with the customer and address questions and concerns The CID contains system specifications if the cus tomer requires documentation UM4 02A 6 NOTE Although your customer needs to be informed of system specifications and possible site issues be cautious in discus sing site problems and corrective actions If you note customer distress while discus sing site problems end the discussion immediately and advise your regional manager of the situation Continuing such a conversation could jeopardize the sale of the system 1 Preview the installation process with the customer addressing questions your customer may have 2 Review the CID with the customer Make your customer aware of ATL Professional Medical Supplies partic ularly if they are a first time ultrasound user and assist them in ordering con sumables 3 Takethe time to learn the needs of your new customer Follow up on specific concerns with the appropriate ATL representative 4 Circle the appropriate steps on the Site Evaluation FSR Pre Installation Flow Chart and note any potential difficul ties 2A 13 Completion and Follow up 1 Review the Site Evaluation FSR to assure total compliance with the pre installation process 2 Close out the site evaluation as you would any normal service call 3 Submit the top copy of the Site Evalua tion FSR with your weekly paperwork and keep the carbon copy Ultramark 4 Fi
333. f the Human Factors Modules that will only fit on a new OEM Module 8000 01 12 01 It will not fit on the older OEM Module 3000 01 12 To assemble this to the newer OEM blocks are used to attach it instead of the aluminum bars See Figure 1 Item 34 This also uses the shorter cables from the monitor and keyboard which need the extender cables to reach the EM The Extender cable part numbers are Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 13 7 Service Bulletins MONITOR 2275 0064 KEYBOARD 2251 0004 4000 0144 02 This version is the same as the 4000 0144 01 except that this will support the Lenzar camera Holes were drilled in front so that a support bracket can be installed 4000 0144 03 This version of the Human Factors Module incorporated the longer cables for the monitor and the keyboard to reach the EM The extender cables are not needed It still mates to the OEM the same as the 4000 0144 01 4000 0144 04 In this version of the Human Factors Module improvements were made to the tilt operation Also added were rubber bumpers to the assembly to prevent it from squealing 4000 0144 05 This version changed the mounting process back to that used in the no dash assembly Stronger angle brackets were used instead of the aluminum bars These bars are gold in color and are made out of steel Part numbers are LEFT SIDE 1065 0687 01 RIGHT SIDE 1065 0686 01 NOTE These brackets can be used on the 4000 0144 no dash in place of t
334. f you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The calc measurement cursors will not attach to the trackball on a frame grabbed image unless there was an active scanhead running prior to entering VCR playback If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to recall files from it To prevent this situation always move the tab on the disk to the write protect position when you have finished storing data on it Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 23 6 Operating Notes When recalling an image previously stored with ECG dat
335. frozen image for the following qualities Penetration z Table 2C 4 or Specifications Table 2C 6 Axial Resolu within Table 2C 4 or tion Table 2C 6 specifications Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C 9 Check the spatial accuracy of the image using the system s measure ment functions NOTE Monitor Aspect verification paragraph 2C 7 must be performed before continuing a Couple the probe to the RMI phan tom and obtain an image that clearly shows the horizontal and vertical rows of pins b Ensure that the ultrasound scan ning plane is perpendicular to the pins c Adjust so all pins can be viewed d Press FREEZE while scanning the phantom Press MEAS e Press CAL to display the caliper cursor f Use the trackball or joystick to posi tion the cursor on the left or right edge of a centimeter marker g Press MARK to lock the first cur sor and call up the second cursor h Move the second cursor horizon tally and position it on the same side as in step f of a centimeter marker 6 centimeters from the first cursor Verify the measurement displayed is 6 0 centimeters 3 5 for EFT IVT and TRT sector scanheads UM4 02C 9 2C Performance Tests CAUTION Verify Scan Converter and Display i Repeat steps b through h to mea Controller frequencies with a 3 MHz Linear or sure the vertical distance between 3 MHz Access scanhead if avail
336. fy battery voltage is greater than 4 5 volts with system OFF Replace batteries Battery terminals dirty Clean battery terminals Double characters on monitor Display Controller PCB A14 Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 No annotation on any display mode Display Controller PCB A14 Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 System Controller PCB A15 Replace System Controller PCB A15 Configuration Section 5 r uonejos Hned enuey 9IAJ3S v 6 0 MODEL 0 4 Radial lines in sector vertical lines in linear with flashing horizontal lines in both Possible Cause A Scan Converter Inter face PCB A9 Fault Isolation PROBLEM CATEGORY OVERLAYS Solution 1 Replace Scan Converter Interface PCB A9 Reference Configuration Section 5 uonejos yned r c vO vIAn enuey 4 v MODEL 0 4 Symptom Error message PHO TOMODULE BUSY ON ENTRY ERROR Possible Cause Photo Module in warmup mode Fault Isolation Solution 1 Allow 1 2 minutes warmup PROBLEM CATEGORY PHOTO MODULE Reference Interconnect cable Inspect cable Repair or replace cable Photo Module Repair or replace Photo Module Display Controller PCB A14 Verify a logic trans
337. fy conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage Biological Safety The assessment of the biological effects of diagnostic ultrasound on humans is not complete Diagnostic ultrasound proce dures should be used only for valid rea sons for the shortest period of time and at the lowest power settings necessary to produce diagnostically acceptable images Procedural Safety WARNING Do not service or adjust a system unless another person capable of rendering first aid is present xiv CAUTION Scanheads must be connected and selected before turning a system on Do not disconnect scanheads while sys tems are on Disconnect with power on only if image has been frozen or if scan head has been deselected CAUTION Do not sterilize scanheads with heat liquid gas or solvents Do not auto clave or expose to temperatures exceed ing 50 C 131 F Permanent damage may result WARNING Disconnect power source and scanheads prior to cleaning WARNING nspect the transducer face hous ing and cable before using the instrument Do not use damaged transducers WARNING Equipment grounding This equip ment is classified Class Type as defined in IEC Standard 601 1 Safety of Medical Electri cal Equipment Electrical shock protection is provided by connecting the instrument chassis to safety ground using the 3 wire power cable provided This cable must be connected to a properly grounded receptacle Do
338. he Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While
339. he OEM Modules and is referred to as the Extended OEM Module The main difference in the module is that the VCR portion is changed to fit a Panasonic 6400 This is a stereo VCR and replaces the Cannon VCR This OEM will also support the Photo Module AV Module Data Comm and CAD Module This OEM measures approximately 19 inches from front to back with covers All previous OEM s measured approximately 16 inches 3000 0249 01 HUMAN FACTORS CART This is the Universal OEM It is similar to the Extended OEM except that mounting has been pro vided for various VCR s in addition to the Panasonic 6400 It measures the same as the Extended OEM but the front aluminum mounting bracket has been eliminated The part numbers for the new install kits for the VCRs are Interface panel 8000 0076 09 NV180 VCR 8000 0076 10 6400 VCR 8000 0076 11 8420 VCR 8000 0076 14 If you have any other questions about the Human Factor Modules please call TSG COMPATIBILITY CHART FOR THE HUMAN FACTORS AND OEMs UNIV MOD CART HFC CART HFCCART EXT MOD CART LBRKT BLOCK BLOCK CART BLOCK LBRKT 3000 0112 3000 0112 0 3000 0112 0 3000 0231 01 3000 0249 01 1 2 4000 0144 L 4000 0144 06 L 4000 0144 01 4000 0144 02 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 15 7 Service Bulletins 4000 0144 03 4000 0144 04 4000 0144 05 4000 0144 07 4000 0144 08 4000 0144
340. he aluminum bars See Figure 1 Item 33 4000 0144 07 On this version of the Human Factors Module the CAD changes were incorporated These changes consist of holes drilled and tapped for a hand held CAD controller holder on the right side of the keyboard support 4000 0144 08 This change added a notch to the monitor swivel platform for screwdriver access Longer screws were added for better support 4000 0144 09 This change called for two holes to be drilled on either side arm of the keyboard support For hold ing the CAD hand controller 4000 0144 10 This change applied to process hardware changes that improved the HFM manufacturing pro cess OEM MODULES UM4 07 14 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 3000 0112 SMALL CART This is the first level of OEM Modules and will fit the no dash level Human Factors Modules This module will support the Photo Module AV Module VCR Panasonic 8420 or Cannon VCR and Data Comm 3000 0112 01 SMALL CART This level OEM Module will fit the 4000 0144 01 which uses the blocks P N 1064 0506 01 instead of the aluminum bars This also supports the same modules listed in 3000 01 12 3000 0112 02 SMALL CART This OEM Module has the same feature as the 3000 01 12 01 except that the bracket that holds the cables from the monitor and the keyboard is deleted The longer cables are used to reach the EM Module 3000 0231 01 HUMAN FACTORS CART This is the newest version of t
341. he electrodes to the chosen sites using a circular rubbing motion for good adherence The pad site should not be over a muscular area nor on the extremities The recommended sites are just under each clavicle and the lower left side of the rib cage Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 PAGE 2_ ACKNOWLEDGMENT Appreciation is expressed to John Pucek of Spacelabs and Warren Barney of ATL for their assistance in the writing of this bulletin FOR YOUR INFORMATION Spacelabs does sell electrodes that we could use under the following part numbers Description Spacelabs P N General purpose foam electrode 369061 001 pregelled disposable Adult Resting electrode snap 369008 010 less with polymer pad To order call 1 800 223 6467 FEEDBACK INFORMATION REQUEST The above problem was first isolated on a UM8 with a package of pads labeled STRESS TEST V LEAD ELEC TRODES small size manufactured by Vermont Medical or VER MED Changing the pads to a different size and manufacturer cleared up the problem If you run into this problem and clear it by changing the pads please send TSG the following information The manufacturer of both the good and suspect pad The make up or material of the pad Any other information that you may feel is pertinent If possible a sample of the two pads f International send the above information to Mike Condon at International Customer Service in Bothell Ultramark
342. he error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Exiting from CW Doppler mode to 2 D and then selecting pulsed Doppler mode may result in the display of a noise band across the Doppler trace accompanied by an audible tone To resume normal operation change the PRF rate using the velocity or sample volume depth or size controls Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 5 6 Operating Notes Analysis 7 Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis repor
343. he peripherals contain paper film or cassettes as required 4 Connect footswitches headphones ECG devices as required and avail able 5 Connect the power cord to a hospital grade AC outlet specifically a single branch circuit 15 or 20 Ampere 120 Vac with an Isolated and Insulated ground wire or the equivalent Interna tional circuit UM4 02C 1 2C Performance Tests NOTE Table 2C 1 Performance Tests Matrix is included for reference only It lists only those tests specific to the PCB indicated Additional tests should be performed to verify all system functions are operational This is especially true when cables not associated with the replaced PCB must be disconnected during replacement If not reconnected another service call will be required when the operator discovers the error the next day dur ing an examination Table 2C 1 Performance Test Matrix When Replacing this PCB Part Number s Then perform these tests RF Select 7500 0317 None Doppler Pulser 7500 0369 7500 0525 2C 9 3 Beamformer Front End 7500 0288 2C 4 2C 6 2C 8 2 Beamformer Focus 7500 0320 7500 0361 7500 0549 2C 4 2C 6 2C 8 2 Beamformer Controller 7500 0324 7500 0362 7500 0548 2C 4 2C 6 2C 8 2 Pulse Processor 7500 0313 7500 0370 3500 1261 62 7500 0561 2C 8 1 Doppler Acquisition 2C 9 3 Doppler Processor 7500 0347 7500 0390 2C 9 3 Mo
344. head is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Analysis Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis modul
345. heir new system or with ATL Document them on the Installa tion FSR and make a commitment to follow up on those issues Installation Closure Complete the Installation FSR in full If the installation is 10096 complete the call may be closed with CSC If prob lems were encountered document them on the Installation FSR along with any parts used in addition to labor and travel times If the installation is not complete holdthe Installation FSR open and complete it at the conclusion of the installation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Installation 2B 2 Have your customer sign the Installa 2B 4 14 Customer Follow Up tion FSR and insert it in the CID 3 Call CSC and advise them ofthe status of the installation Be prepared to pro vide them with the following informa tion Verification of the SO e Verification of customer address contact and phone number 1 As per your commitment in your Day Planner call your customer and verify that they are satisfied with their sys tem s performance 2 Verify that Applications has been scheduled and take ownership of any concerns that the customer presents Information relevant to the quality of to you the system and its installation 3 Again time activate your commitment Any other information that the CSR to make a follow up call to your cus feels pertinent to his new customer tomer once those issues have been i t them t 4 Notify Sales on the status of
346. hen you freeze the system while in ECG trigger mode and then press SELECT on softkey systems or IMAGE SELECT on hardkey systems the ECG trace on the stored image jitters UM4 06 28 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth or zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear or sector M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation ofthe ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling atthe end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occur
347. hen you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth or zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear or sector M mode the graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 13 6 Operating Notes The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling at the end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certa
348. her authorized service personnel who do not use the domestic U S service documents use your equivalent document where applicable NOTE Two documents are used exclusively with the site evaluation program Acomprehensive Site Evaluation FSR is used to accurately record and document all pertinent customer information as well as the actual site findings It accom modates evaluating two sites The Customer Information Directory CID is a resource document that enables the customer to more easily communicate with ATL It also serves as a convenient file for keeping FSRs MAs and other pertinent documentation The Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CID should be presented to and reviewed with the primary service con tact and made accessible to both the equipment user and the CSR In addition system specifications Table 2A 1 are included at the end of this section to assist in evaluating the site 2A 2 Required Materials Tool Kit e DVM Oscilloscope ONEAC Line Viewer Three pronged Outlet Tester Measuring Tape ATL General 4720 0219 01 ATL Power Primer 4760 0215 XX Power Line Data Sticker 4765 0247 XX Site Evaluation FSR 4765 0298 XX Installation Planning Manual 4765 0001 XX Service Manual 2A 3 Initial Customer Contact In notifying you of a pending new system delivery the Customer Support Center CSC will give you as much lead time as possible Although it is our goal
349. higher select scanhead change parameters then press lt CTRL gt U and select YES Press ENTER Table 2C 2 Recommended Image Quality Default Settings For Pre 25X Systems 1 40dB 2D GRAY SCALE 1 Curve 1 normal a After making changes exit the menu by pressing DEL This stores the changes in nonvolatile memory and resets the system using these new default values NOTE Do not turn the system power off before pressing DEL or new defaults will be lost b Enter the default mode again and verify that parameters have been reset to the values you entered in step 3 Press DEL to store the settings and exit from the default table Table 2C 3 Recommended Image Quality Default Settings For 25X and above Systems Dynamic Gain Focal Scanhead Range Depth Power Reject Edge Gray Smooth Zones 3 5 MHz 7496 DFT 58 160 7996 1 2 3 F2 1 2 3 5 0 2 85 58 127 49 1 2 3 F2 1 2 3 4 7 5 MHz 8596 HRLA 47 48 7996 1 2 3 F2 1 2 3 4 5 0 2 49 HRLA 58 50 4996 1 2 3 F3 1 2 3 4 3 5 MHZ 4996 CLA 76mm 58 158 3096 1 2 3 F2 1 2 3 3 5 MHz 4996 CLA 40mm 47 149 3096 1 2 3 F2 All Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02C 5 2C Performance Tests Scanhead 5 0 MHz CLA 40mm Dynamic Range 47 Smooth 5 0 MHz IVT 11mm 47 5 0 MHz TRT 47 5 0 MHz IVT 47 5 0 MHz MFI 47 7 5 MHz MFI 47 7 5 MHz ICT
350. hillips head screws and 12 and higher module pins are secured with 4 40 x inch cap head allen screws NOTE Replace gas shocks with oil filled dampers upon failure Instructions are included in the 8000 0862 01 kit Tables 9A 2 through 9A 4 contain Optional Equipment Module part numbers that differ between dash revisions of 3000 0207 XX Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09A 1 9A Reference Table 9A 2 OEM 3000 0207 07 and Lower 1065 0511 01 Base OEM 1064 0512 0 Plate Slide OEM 1 1064 0514 0 Plate Keyboard Mounting 3 1064 0515 0 Panel Left Side 2 1064 0516 0 Panel Right Side 1 1064 0521 0 Tray S H UM4A 2 1064 0532 0 Frame 1 Tubing 24 front to back short 1 1065 0534 0 Mounting Bracket Monitor 2 1064 0363 0 Tray Right S H 2 1064 0538 0 Panel Blank Linear Holder 1 Table 9A 3 3000 0207 08 and 09 1065 0511 03 Base OEM Plate Slide OEM 1064 0514 0 Plate Keyboard Mounting 4 1065 4089 0 Panel Left Side 2 1065 4093 0 Panel Right Side 2 1064 0521 0 Tray S H UM4A 3 1065 1290 0 Scanhead Holder Urethane 1 1064 0532 0 Frame 1 Tubing 24 front to back short 1 1065 0534 0 Mounting Bracket Monitor 2 1064 1287 0 Tray Right S H 2 UM4 09A 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9A Table 9A 4 OEM 3000 0207 10 and Higher Extended for AG
351. hy spectral image audio sounds distorted Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Replace Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Configuration Section 5 r 9c vO vVIAn enuey 9IAJ8S plal v MODEL 0 4 PROBLEM CATEGORY DOPPLER Cont d Symptom Possible Cause Fault Isolation Solution Reference Harmonic tones when Application 1 Verify knobology Change PRF Configuration changing sample vol Reposition sample volume Section 5 ume depth Reduce Doppler gain or out put Loud audio feedback System microphone jack 1 Check microphone jack Add jumper from T S tip to noise on power up connector SLV sleeve terminals on microphone jack No pulser output Doppler Pulser PCB Check Test Point 2 on the Clip Test Point 22 as close to A1 front of the Doppler Pulser the PCB as possible PCB it can short to ground Loss of spectral dis Doppler Processor PCB Check jumpers JP1 and Hardwire JP1 and JP3 on play A7 7500 0347 XX JP3 on Doppler Processor the Doppler Processor PCB jumpers dislocated PCB A7 7500 0347 XX 7500 0347 XX Loss of spectral dis T M Mode PCB A12 Replace T M Mode PCB Configuration play and loss of scrol A12 Section 5 ling Doppler graphics Audio ringing with Inherent reverberation of 1 Contact Technical Support Access 10PV scan 10PV and high Doppler heads sensitivity Volume control set too Feedback squeal normal
352. ic transducer is connected press XDR then CW on the Trans ducer Select panel When the CW Select panel is called up select the fre quency corresponding to the trans ducer connected to the system UM4 02C 19 2C Performance Tests 19 The CW panel is called up and CW acquisition starts immediately a spec tral display sweeps across the screen 20 Verify that TH FIL causes the thump fil ter annotation to appear and disap pear on the screen 21 Verify that F R causes the display to switch between NORMAL INVERT annotation 22 Turn up the system volume control located on the right side of the human factors cart and the left front corner of the UM 4A and verify that white noise is heard Tapping lightly on the front end of the transducer should modulate this noise 23 Press RETRN CW acquisition ceases and the Main softkey panel is called up 2C 9 3 1 Doppler Measurements 1 Enter Doppler Mode and set it up as follows FR VEL M SEC SV_DEP 50 mm ANG any SV_SIZ 1 5mm VELINC Select 3 00 to 3 00 M SEC with 1 00 M SEC increments Access B3 select 1 50 to 1 50 M SEC 2 Center the Zero Baseline to mid screen 3 Freeze the Doppler spectral display UM4 02C 20 4 Press the MEAS softkey and the CAL softkey 5 Use the trackball and place the cursor over the indicated markers and verify the following readings MARKER READING 3 00 2 96 0 04 M SEC 3 00 3 03 0 04
353. ield 5 Using 4100 0092 labe or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as 02 if it was originally a 04 or 10 if it was originally a 08 COMMENTS This change renders the PCB as a Non Annular Array compatible and allows it to function with non Annular Array software The 02 is backwards compatible 0 4 09 18 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0370 XX S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB From 03 To 01 System UM 4 Date 8 4 87 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 3401 0027 IC OSCILLATOR 1 4100 0092 LABEL BLANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Change U49 from 74F14 to oscillator 3401 0027 2 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as 01 COMMENTS This change renders the PCB as a Non Sync with its own independent clock Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 19 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0370 XX S2 PULSE PROCESSOR A5 PCB System UM 4 Date 1 21 88 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 3401 0027 IC OSCILLATOR 1 4100 0092 LABEL BLANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Change U49 from 74F14 to oscillator 3401 0027 2 Place jumper connector so as to connect Pins 1 and 2 on JP8 3 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label remark the PCB as a
354. iguration Section 5 Motherboard Verify VCR video at U 135 pin 5 on Display Controller PCB A14 Replace Motherboard Display Controller PCB A14 If 2 4 F above checks ok PCB is defective Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 uonejos yned r vL VO VIAOQ enuey 4 v MODEL UM 4 Symptom Control panel does not light Possible Cause Power Supply PROBLEM CATEGORY SYSTEM CONTROLS Fault Isolation Verify 10 volts 9 V on some systems at power supply test point Solution 1 Replace power supply Reference Configuration Section 5 Power Supply cable or Rear Panel PCB Verify 10 volts 9 V on some systems at Connec tor B pin 1 on back of EM Repair power supply cable Repair or replace Rear Panel PCB Configuration Section 5 Interconnect Cable Verify 10 volts 9 V on some systems at pin 1 of Control Module side of EM to Control Module intercon nect cable Repair or replace EM to Control Module interconnect cable Configuration Section 5 Control Module If 3 1 checks ok then Control Module is defective Repair or replace Control Module No messages on soft key panel Softkey display panel or interconnect cable Place jumper across JR 18 on System Controller PCB A15 Type on keyboard and verify softkey panel responds R
355. igure 8 6 Human Factors Module Assembly 1 of 2 0 4 08 39 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manu 8 Replaceable Parts 54 plecs Table 8 6 ES Monitor Arm Latch Keyboard Support Latch DETAIL B Table 8 6 DETAIL C 01 508 12 02 Figure 8 6 Human Factors Module Assembly 2 of 2 UM4 08 40 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 8 Replaceable Parts m Ke 9j Table 8 7 Figure 8 7 A V Module UM4 08 41 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 8 od dp D A a CS L DING ip WM N J p AA X V Table 8 8 6 DETAIL A Table 8 8 01 ESOB A16 01 Figure 8 8 Data Comm Module Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 42 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 9 SOFTKEY ASSEMBLY Lower Table 8 9 rd Assembly Hardkey Keyboa same as HARDKEY ASSEMBLY 2 2 DETAIL A Q1 508 17 01 Figure 8 9 Control Module UM4 08 43 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 10 DETAIL A Table 8 10 Figure 8 10 Monitor 1 of 2 UM4 08 44
356. ills and EKG machines 2D 5 3 4 Ventilation 1 Verify no objects are restricting air flow through vents UM4 02D 5 2D 2 Preventive Mainenance Evaluate the heat and humidity in the lab If the room seems to be out of the nor mal operating limits tell the operator Also explain the cooling ventilation requirements of the system to the faci lities staff 2D 5 3 5 Dust Customers who use linen will frequently have a dust problem Advise them to peri odically clean the screen at the bottom of the E M 1 2 Inspect the system for excessive dust accumulation Recommend a portable vacuum cleaner to customers who have a prob lem with excessive dust 2D 5 4 Problem Identification and 1 Correction Before disassembling the system verify all problems reported by the cus tomer Perform a brief operational inspection in all modes to identify and document any additional system deficiencies Reviewthe customer s default settings for each medical specialty If there is no hardcopy record photograph or otherwise document them for future reference Troubleshoot all identified technical faults and correct them at this time if UM4 02D 6 possible If parts are needed to com plete repairs list them on the PM FSR You will order these at the completion of the PM inspection If the system has intermittent or reli ability problems verify the PCB and PROM dash levels and the
357. imeout function is not activated when in CAD mode operation in the Cine softkey panel and below When leaving the system for an extended period of time exit the Cine panel first then freeze the system press FRZ to minimize wear on the scanhead Freeze the system press FRZ before using the calculations analysis modules to prevent the timeout display prompt from overwriting the display hardkey systems System Controls 7 Pressing lt CTRL gt O while editing a report in one of the analysis modules blanks the leftmost columns of the report Do not use lt CTRL gt O while editing a report GREY Gray Scale Set also functions to optimize the match between the gray scale of the VCR playback images and Cineloop images To use the function press GREY on the Setup softkey panel then press the PLAY button on the front of the VCR Press any key on the keyboard to complete the process In some cases the process may fail to produce an acceptable match requiring the user to repeat the grayscale setup The SET WINDOW key on the CAD Cine hand controller sets the position of the capture window only temporarily and the setting is not preserved for subsequent sessions To permanently set the window position do so before beginning a capture from the Setup softkey panel using the WINDOW softkey The CI STR softkey stores a Cineloop image onto the hard disk if one is present in video memory though the descriptive title is not used An easier method of stor
358. in conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all
359. ines Open 625 lines Closed 7500 0778 Video select 525 lines Open UM4 3500 1413 XX or 3500 1425 and 625 lines Closed UM4 3500 1414 XX Or 3500 1426 7500 07981 See foot note 1 System select UM4 Open 3500 1413 14 or 3500 1425 26 UM5 Shorted 3500 1415 16 XX or 3500 1427 28 Not used open 1 Do not order 7500 0778 or 7500 0798 PCBs Jumper information is for configuration reference only order the appropriate 3500 assembly to assure receiving a PCB properly configured and adjusted for the specific application Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 57 5 Configuration A10 Scan Converter Buffer PCB HFC PCBs 7500 0315 XX REPLACEMENT FEATURE CONPATIBILITY LEVEL 8X 30X to amp 29X 31X UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only 7500 0315 XX Pv ev we R R R 1 This PCB must be used with 7500 0273 XX It must be removed if you are shipped either S C Combo or a S C Cine PCB NOTE There are no PROM or jumpers required for the Scan Converter Buffer PCB UM4 05 58 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 A11 Scan Converter OAG PCB HFC PCBs 7500 0314 REPLACEMENT FEATURE COMPATIBILITY LEVEL 8x to 31X 0314 00 No Feature determination required UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only 7500 0314 XX
360. ing Cineloop images isto use the rightmost footswitch after acquiring the images UM4 06A 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A Display Modes 7 When no scanhead or transducer is connected the system may function erratically The system should never be operated without a scanhead or transducer connected and selected The M line can be moved outside the image sector for sectors less than 90 using the remote M line positioning control on the scanhead Enabling the remote M line positioning control if no remote control is present may produce unpredictable results Do not attempt to enable the remote M line positioning control if none is present Two Dimensional Acquisition Selecting between two images in dual mode then returning to single mode and inverting the video may cause the gray bar display to be inverted Reselect B W Invert to correct M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image Doppler Acquisition When CW mode activating VCR framegrabber then returning to CW causes a change in the frequency or velocity scale Remember to reset scaling after VCR playback During Doppler acquisition at angles greater than 80 degrees the Doppler velocity can exceed the capacity of the screen display for Doppler measurements We recommend only using angles less than 80 degrees to minimize the chance of non diagnostic data acquisition
361. ing hints and work arounds Only software related items are included here All other troubleshoot ing data are included in the fault isolation tables found in Section 4 Fault Isolation Ae TOET ISO ATON ne por poco dure that if followed will help determine Specific information is arranged in the form the cause of the identified symptom of a table with the following headings Figure 5 7 4 CORRECTIVE ACTION The action 1 SOFTWARE RELEASE The software that will correct or work around the release of the system cause of the symptom Software Release Symptom Fault Isolation Corrective Action Figure 5 7 Fault Isolation Table 0 4 05 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 5 2 Change Summary 5 2 1 Software Changes 8X e 8 06 software changed the Doppler acoustic power levels for the following Access scanheads Access 10PV 5 short Access C 10 5 medium Access 10 5 medium Retrofit Kit 8X Doppler Overpower 6220 0049 01 New Features Image quality improvement S2 Pulse Processor 7500 0370 contains a PROM U70 4201 0285 01 that increases the 2D power for Access A 3L scanheads An Access A 3L sector image will have an additional one half to one centimeter of penetration This PROM can only be installed in S2 systems Processor PCB 7500 0347 03 contains a PROM 039 4201 0238 02 that provides more drive current from the Doppler Processor PCB fr
362. ion 1 Repair or replace speaker or cable PROBLEM CATEGORY DOPPLER Cont d Reference Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Verify audio output at P1 1 and P1 13C of Doppler A6 Replace Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Configuration Section 5 interconnect cable Verify audio input to A V Module at P3 Connector D Repair or replace EM AV interconnect cable P3 pins 34 and 36 AN Module Verify audio output of A V Module at P10 Connector J P10 pins 3 and 5 Troubleshoot and repair or replace A V Module Audio Amplifier Verify audio output of Audio Amplifier Repair or replace Audio Amplifier No forward flow on spectral display audio ok Doppler Processor PCB A7 Replace Doppler Processor PCB A7 Configuration Section 5 No forward flow in both spectral and audio Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Replace Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Configuration Section 5 No reverse flow on spectral display audio ok Doppler Processor PCB A7 Replace Doppler Processor PCB A7 Configuration Section 5 No reverse flow in both spectral and audio Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Replace Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Configuration Section 5 Blotchy spectral image on spectral display audio sounds ok Doppler Processor PCB A7 Replace Doppler Processor PCB A7 Configuration Section 5 Blotc
363. ion the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs If the VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs
364. ion number of the scanhead BKWD COMP Backward compatibility This column indicates which previous revi sion scanheads can be replaced by the current revision FWD COMP Forward compatibility This column indicates if a specific dash level can replace a higher revision scanhead HARDWARE NOTES Reserved for addi tional comments including detailed back ward compatibility information OB CV PV CAD UM4p us These columns indicate compatibility of the vari ous scanheads to the systems listed The coding in the columns indicate lowest soft ware revision level tested and required Ifa block is left blank the scanhead is NOT compatible to that system Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration Table 5 5 UM 4 Scanhead Labels Access A 3 0 MHz Medium Focus 3 0 MHz Long Focus 5 0 MHz Medium Focus 5 0 MHz Med L Focus 3 5 7 5 Multi Frequency 5 5 7 5 Multi Frequency A A3L A 5M 5ML 35 A5M A 7 55 55 A5M A 7 55 5 Access 3 5 7 5 Multi Frequency 5 7 5 10 Multi Freq 3M 5M 7 55 5ML 7 55 105 Access 2 25 MHz 3 0 MHz 5 0 MHz Medium Focus 5 0 MHz Med L Focus 7 5 MHz Short Focus 5 7 5 10 Multi Freq 5 7 5 10 PV Multi Freq 5M 7 55 105 55 7 55 105 Linear Arrays 3 5 MHz DFT 5 0 MHz DFT 5 0 MHz HRLA 7 5 MHz HRLA DF 3 5 DF 5 0 LA 5 0 LA 7 5 Convex Arrays 3 5 MHz 40mm Radius 5 0 MHz 40mm Radius 3 5 MHz 76mm Radius 35CV40 50CV40
365. ion within this service manual which can be used to help solve the problem or correct the situation NOTE n some sections of the following tables the instructions say to verify a signal at a specific point within the signal path Unless stated otherwise TTL activity at that point is usually sufficient to verify proper operation UM4 04 9 4 Fault Isolation MODEL UM 4 PROBLEM CATEGORY SYSTEM BOOT Possible Cause Fault Isolation W Loud Figure 4 11 Fault Isolation Table Typical Layout 4 9 2 Index of Symptoms Table 4 6 Index of Symptoms Index No Category System Boot Video System Controls 2D Sector Image 2D Linear Image 2D Sector and Linear Image Quality N M mode Doppler Peripherals Annotations Overlays Photo Module VCR Intermittents Measurement Mechanical UM4 04 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual enuey 9IAJ8S 4 v LE v0 vIAD MODEL 0 4 Symptom System does not boot Possible Cause PCB or other module shorting power supply 1 Fault Isolation Check power supply without PCBs modules PROBLEM CATEGORY SYSTEM BOOT Solution 1 Repair or replace defective PCB or module Reference Power supply wiring Inspect wiring Repair or replace Power Distri bution Sec tion 1B Power supply Check power supply Replace pow
366. is a known engineering issue advise the operator and submit a customer com plaint report if the issue is serious to them NOTE Customer complaints when used appropriately can help Engineering priori tize a fix and will ensure that if a correction is implemented your customer will receive it Before submitting a customer complaint verify that the problem is not already known as documented in operating notes hot tips and service bulletins Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 5 Question the operators about environ mental conditions including ventila tion electrical power ESD and air particulates etc 2D 5 3 Environmental Verification The operating environment can adversely change from time to time for various rea sons A review of electrical ventilation ESD RF and other operational area char acteristics is the next step in the PM pro cess The shorttime spent in this endeavor may very well save you and your cus tomer an unnecessary service call Mea surements and observations will be recorded on the PM FSR for future com parison 2D 5 3 1 Electrical Power Verification 1 Verify that the system and its external peripherals are all connected to the same circuit This ensures a single point grounding reference 2 Inspect the outlet for signs of physical damage and ensure that it maintains good contact with a plug 3 Verify proper outlet wiring and ground ing with a three wire outlet tester
367. ition at A14 U 139 pin 7 after each video field Repair or replace Display Controller PCB A14 Error message PHO TOMODULE ENTRY ERROR Photo Module not con nected to system Connect Photo Module Interconnect cable Inspect cable Repair or replace cable Photo Module Repair or replace Photo Module Error message PHO TOMODULE BUSY EXIT ERROR No film in camera Verify film in camera Load film Protective cardboard insert not ejected Eject cardboard insert Interconnect cable Inspect cable Repair or replace cable Photo Module Repair or replace Photo Module A N Module fuse F2 Inspect fuse Replace with P N 2700 0066 Error message PHO TOMODULE EXIT ERROR Interconnect cable Inspect cable Repair or replace cable Photo Module Repair or replace Photo Module Error message PHO TOMODULE TIME OUT ERROR Interconnect cable Inspect cable Repair or replace cable Photo Module Repair or replace Photo Module r uonejos Hned enuey 9IAJ8S 4 v v0 vlAn MODEL 0 4 Symptom VCR does not respond to system commands Possible Cause No power to VCR Fault Isolation Verify VCR power switched ON PROBLEM CATEGORY VCR Solution 1 Turn on VCR Reference Verify 12 volts from A V Module 1 Adjust repair or replace A V Module
368. ivalent alternate part which may be shipped instead P indicated part must be purged if encountered FEATURE COMPATIBILITY System features that may or may not be com patible with a specific PCB revision The different codes that can be found here are Y yes feature is compatible with dash level N no feature is not compatible with dash level NOTES Reserved for additional com ments including information on the fol lowing a PROMs A footnote in this column indicates that the PCB is stocked unstuffed and that PROMs must be ordered separately Refer to the PROM replacement matrix b CONVERT A footnote in this col umn indicates that the PCB is con vertible to other dash levels or must be checked for configuration for example for sync or non sync Refer to the Up Down Rev Instruc tions in Section 9 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual i A7 DOPPLER PROCESSOR PCB HFC PCBs 7500 0347 XX 7500 0390 XX Configuration 5 4 REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY PCB Dash 26X No 11 16X 27X DPLX 7500 8X 12X 17X 23X 25X 28X 29 30 CW MERC Notes 0347 4 01 02 r y Figure 5 2 PCB Replacement Matrix PROM Replacement Matrix Figure 5 3 1 REPLACEMENT PCB PART NO The base part number ofthe PCB Only part numbers stocked and shipped by ATL Customer Service are included PCB DASH
369. ix If there isn t a jumper matrix included for a PCB it does not have configurable jump ers i e no movable jumpers On PCB silhouettes switches jumpers locations are shown for configura tion requirements and firmware listed in the various matrices 5 5 3 Scanhead Compatibility Matrix Compatibility is indicated by the lowest software level required for operation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 1 Doppler Pulser HFC 4APLUs PCBs 7500 0369 XX 7500 0525 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 11X 16X 12X 17X No PROMS required for Doppler Pulser PCB UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only EN 7500 0370 XX OB Notes NI 0369 R R No Feature determination required SWI 0525 01 N A A NOTE There are PROMS for the Dop pler Pulser NOTE There are no jumpers or switches el on 7500 0525 XX PCBs 01 505 02 01 Doppler Pulser 1 7500 0369 XX Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No Function Normal Position 7500 0369 CWXMTB Test signal to CW Input CWXMTA Test signal to CW Input PULSRB Test signal to Pulsed Input PULSRA Test signal to Pulsed Input ENABLE Test Oscillators Enable CW CW Pulsed Test Oscillaor HI PWR Selects Hi Power Mode for Doppler Pulse Amplifier MEDLVL Se
370. k 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO a Y 1 Y S ervice Bulletin S Date February 11 1994 S B No UM4 141 Rev All Field Service Personnel C O No Author Noel Joseph 32XX Label for UM 4 Ultrasound Systems EFFECTIVITY Upon installation of 32XX software SOLUTION To help the user identify this software level of the UM 4 a label has been installed on the front cover of all new build UM 4 systems This label part num ber 4100 0929 01 for English 4100 0930 01 for French and 4100 0931 01 for German needs to be positioned on the top left corner of the front cover P N 1064 0223 01 when you perform a software upgrade in the field In the event this cover is replaced due to damage this label must to be installed on the replacement cover NOTE When ordering a replacement cover order the label it is not included with the cover 32XX LABEL Kx SOFTWARE LEVEL 32 ULTRAMARK 4 Plus ES i 01 5 066 01 NOTE tis important to install this label upon installation of the 32 XX upgrade Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 71 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS No WITH PARTS YES NO B a Y Y S ervice Bulletin G Date March 15 1994 S B 0 4 142 Rev To All Field Service Personnel Author Laurence J
371. k and White Bracket Coronary Artery Disease Capacitor Cardiology 625 line B W video standard Cubic feet per minute Circuit Centimeter Connector Converter Cardiac Vascular Ultramark 4CV Digital Beamformer Digital Domestic North America service area 120VAC and EIA NTSC video Doppler Electronics Module End Fire Transducer Electronic Industries Associa tion 525 Line Video format B W European Solingen Service Area Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual EXT FIG FLH FLTR FPC FR FT FXD HD HEX HFC HK HV ID IN INT INTL ISO JS KEYBD LCK LKG LT MECH MM mm MTG NTSC OAG OB OD OEM OEM PAL PCA PCB PNH REQ External Figure Flathead Filter Full Peripheral Cart Front Foot Fixed Head Hexagon Human Factors Cart Hardkey High Voltage Inside Diameter Inch Internal International Amer area 220 240 CCIR Isolation Joystick Keyboard Lock Locking Left Mechanical Millimeter Mounting National Television System 525 Line Video format Color Output Address Generator Obstetrical Ultramark 4OB Outside Diameter Optional Equipment Module Original Equipment Manufac turer Phase Alternating Line 625 Line Video format Color Printed Circuit Assembly Printed Circuit Board Panhead Required Requires Non North Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual PH PLC P O POS PNH PS PWR PV REF RH RND PPLC RPT RT SA S
372. k to cen ter the cursor on a centimeter marker Press MARK to lock the first cur sor and call up the second cursor Move the second cursor horizion tally and center it on a centimeter marker 6 centimeters from the first cursor Verify the measurement displayed is 6 0 centimeters 3 Repeat steps b through e to mea sure the vertical distance between two pins spaced 8 0 centimeters apart Verify the measurement dis played is 8 0 centimeters 3 mm UM4 02C 14 12 13 14 g Repeatsteps b through ffor all sec tor scanheads supplied with the system Use thin screwdriver and perform a tower test for each linear scanhead Verify that eight sections focal zones of the image are discernible Verify that all elements are operating there are no drop outs Remove the scanhead from the phan tom and set GRAY to 1 There must be no noise in the image Adjust GRAY to 1 and FAR FIELD GAIN until far field noise just disap pears Reset GRAY to 5 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C Table 2C 7 Linear Scanhead Image Quality Characteristics 7500 0362 04 or higher Beamformer Controller Linear Scan head Minimum Depth Penetration cm Axial Resolu tion mm Lateral Resolu tion mm at Focal Point cm Focal Point cm Near Field Artifact cm 0 5 2 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 5 1 5 1 0 1 5
373. ke sure the environment is free of electrical noise a Verify line power to system using the procedures and test equipment specified on Section 3 Power in the General Field Service Manual 4720 0219 01 b Temporarily install approved line conditioner to see if it makes a difference c Check for defective fluorescent lights or inductive motors gel UM4 04 44 warmers centrifuges etc that may be on the line or nearby Pull all PCBs not required for linear operation or sync Motor Controller Doppler and M mode PCBs Check cables and cable dress Noisy cables may not show physical defects Cable position may induce noise Moving them may correct problem Cable tie the EFT A8 cables above away from the A2 A4 cables Check for loose hardware Loose screws can cause noise in lin ear Power Supply mounting screws are particularly crucial e Screws securing the two piece shield that isolates the motherboard from the rear panel connectors Retape the seams on motherboard shield with copper tape Remove the Pulse Processor and Lin ear PCBs Shields should be firmly soldered to PCBs on both sides Solder connections should not look cold e Screws on Pulse Processor shield should not be loose When replacing the Pulse Processor and Linear PCBs Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Examine the ribbon cables Replace them if they appear damaged e
374. l Problems Corrected In 2D M Mode the 2D depth markers and image shift upward slightly when panning to the fifth focal zone accuracy is unaffected The M mode sweep is shifted down slightly relative to the 2D image TRT biopsy guide graphics will reappear after leaving dual TRT images This occurs with a single stored image with biopsy guide active after trackball move ment Excessive character field blanking when leaving OB calculations visible at edges with expanded image G2 instead of D2 for OB parameter head ing in default menu Select smoothing 3 enter AA the frame rate display is not halved Caliper size too large Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual French language translations Support of UP811 remote interface Corrected depth adjustment process to make adjustment smoother Known Problems Entry into dual linear while frozen causes duplication within the linear image A Doppler reference appears on the help message for 2D TM key There is a small gap between linear focal zone markers and the 2D image under 5X Frame rate is increased by a reduction of the scan angle Radial lines superimposed on 2D image at low TGC setting Lack of penetration with Access C 5 MHz scanhead Poor M mode penetration with most scanheads even at maximum TGC Near field 0 to 4 cm has too little gain with all array scanheads too much near field suppression Reduced 2D penetration when using
375. le Cont d ATL Part No 7500 0313 xx Description A5 Pulse Processor PCB 51 7500 0370 5 Pulse Processor PCB S2 3500 1261 xx A5 Pulse Processor PCA Doppler 3500 1262 xx 5 Pulse Processor PCA Non Doppler 7500 0346 xx A6 Doppler Acquisition PCB 7500 0394 xx A6 Doppler Acquisition PCB 7500 0347 xx A7 Doppler Processor PCB 7500 0390 xx A7 Doppler Processor PCB 7500 0304 xx A8 Motor Controller PCB 7500 0348 xx A8 Motor Controller PCB 7500 0517 xx A8 Motor Controller PCB 7500 0273 xx A9 2D Scan Converter Interface PCB 3500 1413 A9 2D Scan Converter Combo 525 line 3500 1414 A9 2D Scan Converter Combo 626 line 7500 0778 PCB plus con fig 3500 1425 xx A9 2D Scan Converter Cine PCB 525 line 3500 1426 xx A9 2D Scan Converter Cine PCB 625 line 7500 0798 PCB plus con fig 7500 0315 xx A10 2D Scan Converter Buffer 256 lines 7500 031 4 xx A11 2D Output Address Generator PCB 7500 0411 xx A12 Combined TM Mode PCB 7500 0322 xx A12 TM Mode PCB Req TM Aux PCB 7500 0374 xx A13 TM Aux PCB Req TM Mode PCB 7500 0300 xx 14 Display Controller PCB 7500 0312 xx A15 System Controller PCB 2275 0124 Cable Beamformer A2 J4 A4 J4 Bottom cable 2275 0118 Cable Beamformer 2 5 4 5
376. le using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images Images stored using the STORE softkey are erased when VCR playback is activated To prevent erasure use the Page Capture function described in Capturing Single Frame Images When capturing images from the VCR the ECG trigger threshold can only be set with the CAD Cine Hand Controller arrow keys not with the trackball Use the hand controller arrow keys if you want to set the threshold when capturing VCR images Do not capture images when the system is in Dual image mode and the trigger is on If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled In rare occasions the CAD functions may appear to lock up and a Press control P message may be presented If unsaved images on the hard disk DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which is a command to clear all images off the hard disk Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again Then pressing the CAD softkey will permit you access to the images that were on the hard disk at the time of the fault UM4 06A 12 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A Capturing a static CW Doppler spectral di
377. legal messages in a row Overflow of system buffer Illegal message sent by front end Front end received a non ASCII character Front end received illegal message Front end received two start message codes in a row Front end buffer overflow Front end received a message with no start code Front end detected a bad number Range error bad command code received by front end Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 04 7 4 Fault Isolation 4 8 Minimum Configuration Tables Table 4 3 below lists minimum PCB con figurations feature by feature for 12 X and 25 X systems with and without Doppler 12 MHz sync Table 4 3 Minimum Configuration 12 X and Higher Software X PCBinstalled 1 A5 necessary for non Doppler systems with 12 MHz sync A13 for M mode depth markers but not nec essary for M mode echo data A7 necessary for 12 MHz Doppler sync sys tems System boot Mechanical scanhead rotation 2D sector image only M mode Access scanheads only 2D linear image only M mode linear AA only Doppler only II II gt UM4 04 8 Table 4 4 and Table 4 5 provide similar information for 8 X and 6 X systems Table 4 4 Minimum Configuration Core S 2 8 X X PCBinstalled Alternatives one must be installed II System boot 2D Sector overlay 2D Sector image Linear overlay Linear image M mode imag
378. licate or intermittently dupli cated towers as the tower moves across the display If the system passes the tower test continue with paragraph 4 11 2 Lin ear Image Quality Tests If the system does not pass the tower test troubleshoot front end cabling a Inspect Chabin cables Properly aligned and seated Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Fault Isolation 4 Connectors not pulling apart Not frayed or cracked Stripe is up on outside cables Stripe is down on inside cables b Pull and reseat cables on both ends c Swap chabin cables A shift in anomaly position indi cates a bad cable Use the AA chabin cable as a substitute d Clean front panel and scanhead connectors with contact cleaner e Inspect the two ribbon cables that bridge 2 and PCBs Properly aligned and seated Connectors not pulling apart Not frayed or cracked Perform the tower tests again If the problem still exists replace the A2 A3 A4 PCBs a Ifasingle dropout occurs the prob lem is most likely to be a scanhead b If four dropouts probably Beam former Focus PCB A3 c If eight dropouts probably Front End PCB A2 UM4 04 39 4 Fault Isolation 01 504 04 01 Figure 4 13 Tower Test 4 11 2 Linear Image Quality Tests NOTE Always take a phantom on image quality service calls The phantom should be allowed to come to room temperature before any penetratio
379. lows POWER OUTPUT 100 percent REJECT EDGE 1 ENHANCEMENT GRAY SCALE 5 SMOOTHING F1 lt CTRL gt B DYNAMIC 58 dB 47 dB 16 RANGE DEPTH 1 Special Function O 200mm approximately 4 Cover the phantom surface with about 1 8 inch 3 mm of water or a coat of acoustic gel Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 5 Position the scanhead on the phantom to obtain an image showing all depth markers cysts horizontal and axial resolution pins refer to the Scanhead section in the General Field Service Manual 4720 0213 05 for definitions of the following parameters Verify that the image meets the follow ing requirements Jerk 1 2 the width of 4 cm depth marker Jello 1 2 the width of 4 cm depth marker Wobble No gross lateral move check at all ment wobble should be depths restricted to the edges of the pie shape and shared equally by the near and far field Wobble shall not exceed 4 scan lines Static Noise Must be minimal 5 instances per sector scan Scanhead 3 instances per sector Motor Noise scan Tearing No sector edge tearing allowed gt Table 2C 4 or Table 2C 6 Penetration 7 Use the DEPTH control to set the dis play depth to the minimum value Verify that there is no sector break up Set the depth to 15 cm Position the scanhead on the tissue phantom to provide the best image Press FREEZE and evaluate the
380. lts 80 Volts S1 70 Volts 52 80 Volts S1 70 Volts S2 HV Return 15MC Volts 15 MC Volts 15 MCV Return 15 Volts 15 Volts Analog Ground 6 Volts 6 Volts 24 Volts 24 Volt Return XDR Ground SYSTEM RECEIVER 15 Volts analog 15 Volts analog Ground DOPPLER PULSER A1 5 Volts Digital Ground 15 Volts analog 15 Volts analog Ground UM4 01B 4 5 Volt Rail 5 Volt Return Rail P3 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 6C P3 1A 1B 1C 2A 2B 2C 3A 3B 3C P3 25A 25B 25C P3 27A 27B 27C P2 2A 2B 4A 4B 4C 5A 6A P3 26A 26B 26C 31A 31B 31 70 Volts S2 80 Volts S1 70 Volts 52 Return 15 Volts 15 Volts Analog Ground 6 Volts 6 Volts 15 Volts 15 Volts Analog Ground 6 Volts 6 Volts J 4 5 6 J 4 3 4 7 8 10 12 14 16 18 13 25 25 25 13 27 27 27 13 26 26 26 32 13 32 13 32 BEAMFORMER FOCUS A3 J 3 25A 25B 25C J 3 27A 27B 27C J 1 8A 8B 8C 9A 9B 9C 10A 10B 10C 12A 12B 12C 13C 14A 14B 14C 16A 16B 17B 17C 23A 23B 23C 24B 25B 25C 26B 26 28 28 28 13 32 13 32 BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER A4 Return 80 Volts S1 70 Volts S2 80 Volts S1 70 Volts 52 TTL Control Reset 5 Volts Return 80 Volts S1 70 Volts S2 80 Volts S1 70 Volts 2 HV Return 15 Volts 15 Volts Analog Ground 14 3 4 J 4 5 6 J 4 1 2 J 2 3C J 3 18B J 3 4A 4B AC 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 6C
381. mark 4 Field Service Manual After the images have been adjusted to user preference take two exposures Do not develop the film Put the cassette away where it won t be used After the user reports a camera drift verify the original settings and reinsert the cassette into the cam era Advance past the first two expo sures Expose positions three and four Develop the film If the camera has drifted positions 1 and 2 will be dif ferent from 3 and 4 If the problem is in either the film or the processor all exposures will be the same Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Preventive Maintenance 2D 2D 6 3 Lenzar 2100 Multi Image 10 11 12 13 Camera Cleanand inspect external covers and the air filter Verify the integrity of the interconnect cable assembly and power cable Remove covers to gain access to all internal assemblies Perform an internal cleaning and inspection Verify the integrity of cables PCBs and socket mounted devices Verify that the copper tabs hold the film cassette securely and that it does not interfere with its insertion Verify the tightness of the allen screws securing the pulley and shutter assem blies Inspect the pulley belt for proper ten sion and wear Verify proper operation of the cassette detect switch Clean the photo optic sensor and check the integrity of its spring Using lens cleaner no alcohol and tis sues clean
382. me and institution name have been retained Verify system performance by per forming alltests in Section 2C Perfor mance Tests Measurement accuracy must be verified after instal lation repair and during every PM PM Closure and Follow up If parts are needed to complete your service activities order them before leaving the account Place a PM sticker on the system Complete the PM FSR and review all reported issues and actions with your customer UMA4 02D 11 2D Preventive Mainenance Commit to follow up on those issues raised earlier that could not be addressed on site or that require action by another individual or depart ment Present the customer copy of the PM FSR to the customer Place all applicable service documen tation into the Customer Information Directory Documentation might include copy of the PM FSR system defaults and consumables price list Enter areminder in your day plannerto make a follow up phone call one week UM4 02D 12 10 11 12 13 after completion of the PM to ensure all other commitments have been kept Discuss Extended Warranty pro grams Thank the customer Verify tracking alignment for all EFTs Verify smooth operation of the locking mechanism on beamformer transduc ers and tighten if loose Listen for signs of mechanical prob lems in rotating and oscillating trans ducers Verify performance characteristics during syst
383. mp 2 Video return from VCR missing pushed in RF Connector or open coax 3 Controls to the OEMs are shorted If you experience problems with the Receiver you might see Streaks or spikes in the Access or EFT image Noise in the Doppler signal 5 volt power line pulled down No TGC control If you experience problems with the Power Supply you might see No power to system No 70 volts for linear Noisy linear Loose bolts on the 5 volt bars causing Power Supply to over heat and shut down UM4 07 26 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YESL NO SERVICE BULLETIN WITH PARTS YESL No DATE November 28 1988 B NO M4 TO All Field Service Personnel 225 AUTHOR Steve Moen Robert Lundquist E C N NO UM 4 EFT Panel Failures PART EFT Panel Assembly 3500 0445 06 07 PROBLEM Above average failure rate on noted part No EFT Scanhead echo returns No EFT Scan head rotation CAUSE The failure usually occurs in one of three areas 1 Broken coax cable at the RF connector which plugs into the Motor Controller PCB typi cally the threaded connector See Figure A Broken coax cable at the RF connector which plugs into the Receiver module Defective EFT connector typically a workmanship problem on the white jumper block 1 and 2 Some EFT Panel Assemblies missed a step in the assembly phase The mini RF con nectors were not crimped around the
384. n n n n n n n n E was Wasi u mE E mE mE CODING NOTES R Recommended replacement order level N Not compatible with feature or software build 1 When replacing 5 PCB 3X 4X sys Alternate acceptable replacement level FE Functionally equivalent tems order 02 Pulse Processor and C PCBcompatible with software but no longer n See additional PROM or jumper tables or con upgrade system to 6X is stocked vertlbility documentation for additional details L Order like for like P Purge PCB Y Yes compatible with feature vs suu ls S 6 uoneinBijuoS enuey v LL VSO vIA Table 5A 3 UM 4 S1 PCB Replacement Matrix Cont d REPLACEMENT LEVELS FEATURE COMPATIBILITY Ref Frame Des PCB Name PCB Part No 17X Grab x 14 Display Controller 7500 0300 04 AJA 05 06 07 24 qo i HH Power Supply 1700 0002 1700 0032 ECG Module 3500 0518 25 A V Module 4000 0143 26 Data Comm 4000 0158 4000 0159 5 5212 lt lt lt lt 22 27 gt gt x gt rr mew x r ENTIRE ere anal al gt ore CODING NOTES R Recommended replacement order level N Not compatible with feature or software 1 UL approved 3 RS 232 only A Alternate acceptable replacement level build 5 i i C PCB compatible with software but no FE Functionally equivalent a S es oe 25 in ah
385. n CINE Recall the cineloop images from the hard disk by pressing RECALL then HD DSK Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual a Using the trackball move the high lighted area down to the Cine 64 Fr line b Press SELECT then CONTUE The message Loading Data Please Stand By appears Verify that the cineloop begins playing and that all images meet the criteria in the Acquire Images section steps 10a through 10d Verify that the trackball controls speed and direction of the sequence cineloop Verify that FRAME or FRAME stops the cineloop sequence and additional actuation steps the sequence to the next or previous frame respectively Verify that PLAY restarts the cineloop sequence Press CTRL P to reset the system and delete the file from the hard disk Press CAD then CINE Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 15 Performance Tests 2C Recall the cineloop images from the floppy disk by pressing RECALL then FL DSK a Using the trackball move the high lighted area down to the Cine 64 Fr line b Press SELECT then CONTUE The message Restoring Selected Image Sets from Floppy appears on screen The system automati cally transfers the floppy disk file to the hard disk After floppy disk recall has been com pleted recall the cineloop sequence from the hard disk by pressing RECALL and HD DSK Verify that the only file present is the one just re
386. n or resolution measurements are made The following tests are performed while scanning the phantom 1 Set system controls as follows POWER OUT 100 percent PUT REJECT 1 Special Function O EDGE ENHANCEMENT 1 GRAYSCALE 2 SMOOTHING F1 lt CTRL gt B DYNAMIC 58 dB 47 dB lt 16X RANGE DEPTH 180 mm for 3 5 MHz 160 mm for 5 0 MHz FOCAL ZONES Al 5 2 Adjust power controls to obtain a uniform distribution of back UM4 04 40 ground texture echoes to the greatest depth possible while maintaining echo free cysts 3 These optimum settings should be used for all image quality evaluations except where specifically instructed to make changes 4 Press FREEZE and evaluate penetra tion and lateral and axial resolution Penetration Penetration is the deepest position of the background texture echoes with consis tent tissue presentation 1 Pick a point where density of echoes is definitely diminished 2 Use the calipers to measure this depth Remember to add or subtract the correction factor marked on the phantom Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 3 The scanhead s penetration should meet the specifications listed in the appropriate scanhead table in Section 2C Performance Tests Lateral Resolution Lateral resolution is the ability of the sys tem to distinguish targets along an imagi nary line parallel to the scanhead face h
387. nce process was designed to address not only the system requirements but to serve as an official semi annual audit of our customer The procedures outlined here are meant to be guidelines and should not replace com mon sense Each system has unique pre ventive maintenance needs depending on the operator s the amount of usage and the type of environment the system is oper ated in Each CSR should assess and address any issue which the customer s feel is relevant to their relationship with ATL The CSR is the conduit for total cus tomer satisfaction NOTE Some parts of this section include policies equipment requirements and procedures that may apply only to U S field use For dealers affiliates or other authorized service personnel who do not use the domestic U S service documents use your equivalent document where applicable Abbreviations Used PM Preventive Maintenance FSR Field Service Report 2D 2 Scheduling On a semi annual basis you will be receiv ing a list of PMs to be performed The schedule is a convenient means for target ing and tracking PM compliance When making or confirming an appointment be Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual sure to set the appropriate time expecta tions and discuss any system problems with the operator Order any needed parts in time for the PM inspection 2D 3 Equipment and Materials Required The following items are recommended for a CSR PM kit Develop a method
388. nction and control function keys for software release 17X is also contained in the Ultramark 4 Softkey Version Operation Manual 4701 0001 03 5 4 4 UM 4 Special and Control Functions 23X Help H is not available with soft ware above 17X Information about the special function and control function keys for software release 23X is also contained in the Ultramark 4 Softkey Version Operation Manual 4701 0001 04 and the UM 4CAD Opera tion Manual 4701 0010 01 5 4 5 25X Special Functions Information about the special function and control function keys for software release 25X is also contained in the Operating Notes and Errata document P N 4707 0010 03 UM 4CAD and 4707 0001 02 UM 4 2D image processing defaults may be saved for each scanhead This feature replaces the TGC default special function Hardkey Control Modules While in 2D mode set image processing parameters power g gain reject etc press Special Function U and Y to SAVE XDR PARAMETERS Y N Softkey Control Modules While in 2D mode set image processing parameters power gain reject etc press XDRSAV on the lower right on the softkey touch panel UM4 05 31 5 Configuration XDRSAV replaces TGCDEL function 27X only Upon power up the System Controller recognizes the TGC controls or slidepots e lt SFUNC gt ENTER and lt SFUNC gt M and sets TGC to those values also steer the Array IVT sector 27X and high
389. ncy will appear in the Notes column For example UL Underwriters Laboratories USA TUV Technischer Uberwachungs Verein Rheinland CSA Canadian Standards Association International and Domestic Intl and Dom will only be used to define geo graphic services areas Domestic for the United States and Canada and Interna tional for the rest ofthe World When refer ring to areas serviced or supplied by Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Solingen Europe Africa Russia the des ignation is Europe EURO The Europe designation is necessary to differentiate between Mid Range systems and parts manufactured or serviced by Solingen and Bothell primarily when dealing with the UM 4 UM 4DBF and UM 5 5 5 1 Replacement Matrices All PCB and PROM replacement data and PCB silhouettes have been compiled to a single location Generally the replacement matrices for UM 4 HCF UM 4APLUS and UM 4A OB PV CV PCBs and PROMS will be located on a right facing page with the cor responding jumper matrix and PCB sil houettes on the following facing pages Several PCBs have all data presented on two facing pages several without jumpers or PROMs require only a single page Review How to Interpret Coding in Matrices on page UM4 05 8 To determine S2 Replacement PCB or Module CAUTION Do not arbitrarily order the highest dash level listed it may not be compatible with the system or if an alternate i
390. nderwriters Laboratories USA TUV Technischer Uberwa chungs Verein Rheinland CSA Canadian Standards Association International and Domestic Int l and Dom will only be used to define geo graphic services areas Domestic for the United States and Canada and Interna tional for the rest ofthe World When refer ring to areas serviced or supplied by Solingen Europe Africa Russia the des ignation is Europe EURO The Europe designation is necessary to differentiate between Mid Range systems and parts manufactured or serviced by Solingen and Bothell primarily when dealing with the UM 4 UM 4DBF and UM 5 Replacement Matrices Table 5 3 PCB Replacement Matrix and Table 5 4 PROM Replacement Matrix To determine S1 Replacement PCB or Module CAUTION Do not arbitrarily order the highest dash level listed it may not be compatible with the system or if an alternate is then shipped it may not be compatible This will result in either a call back after reordering parts or place the system in a configuration that will be incompat ible with future upgrades Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration S1 Systems 5A Compare part number and dash level of defective PCB or module to replacement matrix 1 If exact part number and dash level is listed order that PCB or module 2 lfexactreplacementis not listed order the next higher dash level PCB that matches the system configuration in the FEATUR
391. nds 2 Press NEXT T and wait Verify T1 timer stops and T2 timer begins counting seconds 3 Press NEXT T and wait Verify both timers are stopped Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 4 Press NEXT T Verify both timer values are reset to 00 00 2C 16 5 Timer Display Control 1 Press TIMER Verify that the timer dis play is removed from the screen Press TIMER Verify the display has timers T1 and T2 on screen 2C 16 6 Heart Rate Display 1 Connect the ECG simulator and turn the unit on at 60 beats per minute Verify the heart rate display converges to 60 beats per minute 1 bpm 2C 16 7 Heart Rate Display Control 1 Press H RATE Verify the heart rate display is removed Press H RATE Verify the heart rate display is restored on screen and con verges to 60 beats per minute 1 bpm 2C 16 8 Setup 1 2 Select CINE Select CAPSET From the CAPSET panel select CINE SetPlay Delay PLY D to the minimum value Set Cineloop Image Resolution RES to Normal Res Windowed Zoom 256 x 120 Set Capture Length FRAME to 64 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 10 12 13 14 19 19 Performance Tests 2C Set Interim Delay INTRM for mini mum Set Initial Delay INIT for minimum Connect the hand controller if it is not already connected Press RETRN Press RETRN again Press SETUP Press ECG
392. neunDuuo enuey 9IAJ3S ZL VS0 VIND Table 5A 5 Jumper Matrix Cont d EMEN _ O O JUMPER OR SWITCH Bb ponen Bree PCB Name PCB Part No Des Function Normal Position System Controller 7500 0312 Disables Address shorted Command Lines when Open Hardwired Shorted if U6 is P N 2058 shorted or 0001 or 2070 0007 01 Shorted for 64K and above open EEPROMs Open if U6 is P N 2058 0001 or 2070 0007 01 Shorted for 16K EEPROM 24 open Pin only Open if U6 is P N 2058 0001 or 2070 0007 01 Shorted for 64K and above EEPROMs Open if U6 is P N 2058 0001 or 2070 0007 01 Shorted for 64K and above EEPROMs Shorted for 16K EEPROM 24 open Pin only Open if U6 is P N 2058 0001 or 2070 0007 01 open Shorted for 64K and above Open if U16 19 and U33 36 shorted are P N 2057 0006 Shorted if U16 19 and U33 36 are P N 2057 0008 or 2057 0017 Deleted Deleted Hardwired Deleted Hardwired Deleted Hardwired Deleted Shorted for Test Mode Shorted for 64K x 1 RAMS Open for 32K x 8 EPROMs Shorted for 16K x 8 EPROMs open Open for 256K x 1 RAMs Spare swa sAs 6 vs Table 5A 5 Jumper Matrix Cont d JUMPER OR SWITCH Bes pos name pos panno PCB Name PCB Part No Des Function Normal Position 81 VS0 VIA enuey 9IAJ8S plal v 03 and
393. nfiguration reference only order the appropriate 3500 assembly to assure receiving a PCB properly configured and adjusted for the specific application UM4 05 68 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Ie oL SWI I6 fol al 01 ES05 A24 01 DISPLAY CONTROLLER PCB A14 7500 0300 06 07 oL SWI JP3 E I6 fol JP2 Y2 al 01 505 28 01 DISPLAY CONTROLLER A14 7500 0300 30 amp up Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 9 oL SWI tc I6 fol JP2 01 505 25 01 DISPLAY CONTROLLER A14 7500 0300 10 through 29 9 oL JP2 00 I6 fol p DISPLAY CONTROLLER PCB A14 3500 1480 81 XX amp up UM4 05 69 5 Configuration A15 System Controller PCB PCBs 7500 0312 REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 32X 0312 65 64 12 66 UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only 7500 0312 XX 0312 64 12
394. ng Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 27 6 Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 12 OPERATING NOTES Software Version 32 04 RevD February 1 1994 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls On hardkey and softkey systems a transducer must be active prior to using the remainder of the system controls On hardkey and softkey systems with dual linear when the user power up default is set to linear the scanhead select must be pressed twice to select the right array scanhead After selecting it once the scanhead select works normally Although the key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing lt CTRL gt Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented The PV setup G6 area of the user default menu includes the following line Averaging mode no Because averaging is not an option in the PV calculation mode this line is accurate although its inclusion in the user default menu may give th
395. ng condi tions 1 If the system is configured for full fea ture VCR with a VCR mounted on the cart the audio is routed through the A N module to the VCR At the VCR the audio is looped back to the A V Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration S1 Systems 5A The lasttwo characters denote the revision level module through the audio output jack of the VCR This audio signal is then amplified at the A V module for the speakers and headphone audio Problems Corrected Field reports contain occasional refer ences to system lockups when depth zoom or other keyboard changes occur 2 Ifthe system is configured for a generic VCR without a VCR in the system then the audio is routed directly to the audio amplifier circuitry on the A V module and then to the speakers and head phones With the linear scanhead focus set to zone 5 entering M line automatically moves the skinline off of the video screen and disables the depth control New Features Data Comm disk functions Image quality of the 2D update during M Mode operation is marginal radial lines and extreme far field noise remains VCR status on screen after zoom and depth have been used Optional Data Comm 5232 dual Dual mode images contain noise when floppy no modem The lt CNTL gt L codes are available with 12X System Controller firmware and higher The lt CNTL gt L feature allows the user to determine the system configura
396. nging the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth or zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear or sector M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling at the end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot
397. ngs of parts commonly replaced in the field REFERENCE included are connector pinouts difficult removal install instruc tions and other material not suited for inclu sion in other manual sections Manual Usage and Update Information The Table of Contents and List of Effective Pages have been combined for this manual There is no List of Illustrations or List of Tables This will facilitate frequent updating of the manual and allow TSRs to easily determine the effective date of refer enced information The contents of manual change packages should be inserted as indicated on the cover sheet attached to the package Changed or added pages can be identified by the change date at the bottom of the effected page No change date indicates the page is an original page Change bars xiii Introduction located in the outside margin of the page denotes the specific part of a page that was changed at that date A pointing hand indi cates the portion ofthe figure that has been changed Page numbers are divided into three parts The prefix indicates the system The middle portion indicates the section within the major tab The suffix indicates the actual page number Safety and Precautions This section provides biological proce dural environmental electrical mechanical safety information WARNING statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or death CAUTION statements identi
398. nitors are easily identified by removing the monitor cover and comparing the PCBs with Figure 3 4 and Figure 3 6 WARNING High voltages exist within the monitor at the anode and the encapsu lated high voltage circuit Use care during adjustment 3 5 1 1 Set system power to OFF Disassembly UM4 03 4 2 Remove monitor top cover and set system power to ON Allow a ten min ute warm up 3 5 2 Voltage Regulator Adjust R3 for a reading of 20 0 05 volts at pin 2 of U1 3 5 3 Oscillators 1 Connect pin 14 of U4 to chassis ground 2 Adjust R27 horizontal oscillator fre quency until horizontal sync bar is positioned vertically Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Adjustments 3 3 Connect oscilloscope to high side of msec 525 line video R132 Figure 3 4 5 Remove oscilloscope leads and the 4 Adjust R119 vertical oscillator fre ground from 04 pin 14 quency for a waveform period of 17 5 Height RI24 Vertical Linearity Top RIIS9 Vertical Oscillator R27 Horizontal 14 High Side RI23 Vertical Linearity Bottom RIS Brightness Limit Centering LI Ul Pin2 c C Wi dth m Linearity 01 503 04 01 Figure 3 4 Old Style Monitor PCB Adjustment
399. not defeat the grounding integrity of the equipment WARNING Shock hazards exist if the system is not properly grounded The system must be plugged into a hospital grade outlet WARNING Do not replace components with power connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist with power removed Disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching WARNING Fuse replacement is to be done by qualified service personnel only Avoid electric shock and fire hazard by using proper fuses CAUTION Verify the system is set to proper power source voltage and the cart Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual power plug mates with the power recep tacle WARNING Additional hazards be introduced by using substituted parts or modi fied instruments WARNING Using accessories not recom mended by ATL may cause electrical shock or other unsafe conditions CAUTION Verify circuit boards and com ponents are dry before applying power to the system Electro Static Precautions CAUTION 7his equipment contains com poents which are electro static sensitive Proper static procedures protection and equipment must be used prior to opening and during handling of of this equipment Failure to use proper ESD procedures will cause damage to these components Such damage to components is not covered by ATL warranties Refer to General Field Service Manual P N 4720 0219 01 for details Environmental Safety WARNING
400. not required however all replacement PCBs upgrade or repair installed in a 32X system must be on the authorized list refer to the appropri ate replacement matrix 32 04 software was the Beta Demo and FCD version 32X incorporated a num ber of minor user interface changes Refer to Operating Notes 4707 0001 12 summarized below New Features All features supported by 31X Softkey changes 4705 0001 36 Rev A Vascular ratios can now be calculated from measurements made in velocity mode Several softkeys have been moved for ease of use 0 4 05 24 The caliper is automatically displayed upon pressing the MEAS softkey For M mode operation in the OB calcs module the Fetal Heart Rate menu is now the default menu Turning on OB calcs by pressing CALC now displays the default menu not the last menu displayed Hardkey changes 4705 0004 12 Rev For M mode operation in the OB calcs module the Fetal Heart Rate menu is now the default menu The EFT default setting label under Transducer Type in the User Default Menu was changed to IVT to better reflect the scanheads currently in use Turning on OB calcs by pressing CALC now displays the default menu not the last menu displayed Minor errors in the manual have been corrected Features Deleted No features have been deleted Hardware Issues Feature Compatibil ity e 32X will support Duplex CW Merc if con figured with 7500
401. nt footswitch until all six positions have been exposed Insert the dark slide into the film cas sette and remove the cassette UM4 02C 25 2C Performance Tests Table 2C 9 Recommended Camera Settings for Initial Test Film Position 11 Develop the film and verify the follow ing a The graphics on the print are leg ible and accurately reproduced b The gray scale bar and the TGC curve are accurately reproduced c No light leaks speckling or dark bands are present d Sixteen shades of gray are distin guishable on the grayscale bar e Sector images are 90 0 degrees 1 degree measured with a linearity graticule f Sector images not bowed more than 1 5 mm g The four sides of the print do not display evidence of edge blanking 0 4 02 26 12 If the camera does not work properly refer to the Camera Field Service Manual 2C 13 15 8 Linescan Recorder In order to operate the LS 8 recorder from the UM 4 for this test the system defaults must be configured correctly for the periph erals installed 1 2 Turn system power OFF Remove transport remove paper cas sette from transport and install trans port Turn system power ON Green indica tor on recorder should be lit Press EJECT on recorder front panel Alarm should sound indicating an out of paper condition Release EJECT Turn system power OFF Reload paper cassette
402. ntl w o CAD 1065 0954 02 Bezel Rear OEM w CAD 4100 0353 Label OEM WARNING 4100 0352 Label VIDEO OUT 4100 0327 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Label IMAGE PRINTER UM4 08 5 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 1 ATL Part No Note 3 Description Data Comm Module UM 4 Human Factors Cart HFC Cont d 8 8 Repl matrix 3500 0609 01 Speaker Assy w Cable 2 plc Doppler 3500 0608 02 Volume Control w cable 4400 0022 Knob Rubber 4100 0351 Label VOLUME 2265 0056 01 Power Cord UM4 10 Detachable 120 V alt 3500 1009 01 3100 0714 Plug Hosp 15A 125V 3500 0360 01 Power Cord Assy Int l 240 V w o plug 3100 0553 Plug Hosp 15A 240 V u w 3500 0360 01 1065 0292 Spacer Upper Monitor 1065 0411 01 Washer Lower Thrust 1520 0004 Set Screw Thrust Washer Plate Lower Monitor 1516 0074 Screw 6 32 x 3 8 PHMA PD w Lck Wshr 1064 0369 01 Mtg Plate Front Storage Bin 2 plc 1516 0005 Screw 4 plc 1516 0017 Washer 4 plc 1066 0176 02 Storage Bin 1065 2477 01 Bezel Front EM was 1064 0233 02 Requires Labels 4100 0266 Label 4 4100 0619 01 Label UM 4CAD 4100 0706 02 Label UM 4PLUS New Logo 7500 0548 xx Bmfrmr 4100 0929 01
403. ntory of the system against the customer order and checking for loose or missing parts After any neces sary corrective action has been taken and the system has been assembled the per formance tests in Section 2C must be per formed to verify proper system operation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual A checklist is included at the end of this section The UM 4A is a cost reduced version of the UM 4 and now can be configured with the same features as the UM 4 Several differences are the lack of the Human Fac tors Module with the adjustable height monitor and keyboard and a reduced sized Optional Equipment bay Figure 2B 1 Early versions of the UM 4A were limited in the features offered being configured for specific applications for example obstetrics OB or peripheral vascular PV 2B 2 Pre Installation Preparation 1 When the system has shipped advise the customer and provide them with the projected delivery date If the deliv ery date is acceptable to the customer tentatively schedule the installation allowing time for a late delivery NOTE f you must schedule an installa tion for a specific arrival date ask the ATL traffic department to schedule a guaran teed delivery time Such a guarantee results in additional cost to ATL so request it only when necessary 2 Preview the installation process with your customer and resolve any ques tions or conflicts Be sure to discuss the following topics UM4
404. ntrast Brightness Symbols Table 8 1 Figure 8 1 Sht 3 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Label System Table 8 1 Figure 8 1 Sht 3 Table 8 3 Figure 8 3 Sht 2 0 4 08 25 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 11 ATL Part No Description UM 4CAD Integral CAD Module 4000 0225 xx Final Assy CAD Module 4Mb 4000 0227 xx Final Assy CAD Module 4Mb 4000 0228 xx Final Assy CAD Module 8Mb PCB CAD Motherboard 2100 0527 01 PCB CPU Power Supply Switching 110W 2100 0536 01 Fan 115V 53 CFM 2100 0547 02 2100 0529 02 2100 0548 01 2100 0530 02 2100 0626 02 2100 0533 01 2100 0627 02 Disk Drive Hard 3 5 40 Mb Disk Drive Floppy 3 5 2 Mb Floppy Disk DSHD PCB Cine System Controller Dom Slot 2 PCB Cine System Controller Intl Slot 2 PCB Video Memory 4Mb Slot 3 PCB Video Memory 8Mb Slot 3 CCIR Alt 2100 0547 01 Alt 2100 0529 01 CSR P N UM 4 6 Not used Slot 4 2100 0531 01 PCB CGA Overlay Dom Graphics Slot 5 2100 0628 01 PCB CGA Overlay Intl Graphics Slot 5 2275 0225 01 Cable Ribbon 40 40 10 2275 0226 01 Cable Ribbon 26 26 2275 0227 01 Cable Ribbon 40 40 40 1065 0949 01 Bezel CAD Bullnose 3500 0919 01 Cable Assy CPU Floppy Drive 3500 0920 01 3500 0915 01 Cable Assy CPU Hard Drive Cable Assy EM G CAD module 2100 0565 02
405. ntrols if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF UM4 06A 16 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To adjust the Doppler angle without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Exiting from CW Doppler mode t
406. nual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system When printing multiple reports some reports may not start at the top of a page Before printing a report press the form feed button on the printer to ensure that each report starts at the top of a new page After completing a planimetry measurement the pan zone function can be activated causing the image to move sideways without the cursor tracing The scale does not change The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling German Software only When you first select UNGUELT TASTE while in Kalk the system displays an invalid response To get the desired response press UNGUELT TASTE again UM4 06 18 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 09 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 30 08 July 16 1992 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify fo
407. nversion instructions are required The 05 provides a baseline noise fix to the 04 The 04 supports 12 MHz Sync The 03 is not 12 MHz Sync Note The backward compatibility of the 04 05 is based on the fact that it is designed to output a 12 MHz clock on a motherboard bus This bus is unused in systems without 12 MHz Sync and there fore presents no compatibility problem However since the 7500 0370 02 04 08 10 24 versions of the 52 Pulse Processor output a 12MHz clock on the same bus these PCBs cannot be used con currently UM4 09 26 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 7500 0374 XX TM MODE AUX PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following page describes how to down Rev this PCB from 02 to 01 The 02 supports 12X or higher software The 01 supports 8X software The following chart is a snyopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure IV for PCB layout 7500 0374 XX 02 01 12X 8X U13 4201 0282 01 4201 0282 SW1 POS 1 OFF ALL ON Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 27 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0374 XX TM MODE AUX A13 PCB From 02 To 01 System UM 4 Date 8 4 87 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 4201 0092 LABEL BLANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Remove IC from U13 socket See Figure IV 2 Install 4201 0282 into U13 socket 3 Make sure all switches on SW1 are
408. nverter section of the TM mode or TM Combo PCB System must be in M mode from Sector or Linear This tests the M mode Scan Converter the Display Group Moni tor and associated cables 1 Set 81 4 T1 to CLOSED 2 Verify that a horizontal gray scale pat tern is displayed Figure 4 5 3 Return S1 4 to OPEN SECTOR M MODE A LINEAR M MODE B Figure 4 5 TM mode Test 6n UM4 04 4A Test Two T2 M mode PCB Output This test injects a vertical gray scale pat tern into the output circuits of the TM mode or TM Combo PCB System must be in M mode from Sector or Linear This tests the TM mode PCB output the Display Group Monitor and associated cables 1 Set 81 3 T2 to CLOSED 2 Verify that a vertical gray scale pattern is displayed Figure 4 6 3 Return S1 3 to OPEN SECTOR M MODE A LINEAR M MODE B Figure 4 6 TM mode Test Two Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Test Three T3 ECG Circuitry Test This test injects a diagonal black and white pattern into the ECG overlay circuit on the TM mode or TM Combo PCB System must be in M mode from Sector only ECG must also be turned on from Control Panel This isolates ECG problems to the ECG box and cables or to the TM mode PCB if M mode is operating normally T1 1 Set S1 1 to OPEN S1 2 T3 must be CLOSED 2 Verify that a diagonal black and white pattern is displayed in the ECG win dow Figure 4 7 3 Return S1
409. o 2 D and then selecting pulsed Doppler mode may result in the display of a noise band across the Doppler trace accompanied by an audible tone To resume normal operation change the PRF rate using the velocity or sample volume depth or size controls Analysis 7 Openline Access does not generate a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images 7 Images stored using the STORE softkey are erased when VCR playback is activated To prevent erasure use the Page Capture function described in Capturing Single Frame Images When capturing images from the VCR the ECG trigger threshold can only be set with the CAD Cine Hand Controller arrow keys not with the trackball Use the hand controller arrow keys if you want to set the threshold when capturing VCR images Do not capture images when the system is in Dual image mode and the trigger is on If an image displayed on the
410. oard as 02 COMMENTS This change renders the PCB compatible with 4X 5X 6X software Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 31 9 Reference L L L 045 053 059 01 509 07 01 Figure V 7500 0313 0 4 09 32 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 7500 0346 XX DOPPLER ACQUISITION PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following page describes how to Up Rev this PCB from 01 to 02 The 02 supports DADA or deep abdominal Doppler applications The 01 does not support DADA The following chart is a synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure VI for PCB support 7500 0346 XX 02 01 DADA NON DADA R225 237 OHM 392 OHM 2820 0074 2820 0061 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 33 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0346 XX DOPPLER ACQUISITION A6 PCB From 03 To 02 System UM 4 Date 8 4 87 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 2820 0074 RESISTOR 237 OHM 1 4201 0092 LABEL BLANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Remove Doppler Acquisition shield See Figure VI 2 Remove R225 if R225 is not moun
411. oblems TGC alignment e Turn on problem associated with the VCR real time relay on the Stereo Inter face PCB 5X e S1 Plus Pulse Processor 7500 0313 02 upgrade makes this ver sion of the Pulse Processor PCB the only one available for the S1 system The S1 Plus improves and stabilizes the dynamic range curve of the linear image of the UM 4 S1 system this version of the Pulse Processor PCB cannot be used in the S2 system The S1 Plus ver sion works with 5X and 6X software With S1 Plus there is a noticeable change in the appearance of the linear image when stepping through the dynamic range and grayscale settings At the 58 dB dynamic range setting the image appears smoother with softer gray scale assignment Dot size also appears to be smaller which contributes to smoother appearance of the S1 Plus image Reject was moved from special function C to special function O UM4 05A 1 5A Configuration S1 Systems New Features Softkey Support Problems Corrected TGC alignment Improved serial communications TGC operation Near field will not go above far field and far field will not go below near field as with 4X and earlier software versions TGC control If the TGC controls are spun instead of rotated smoothly this will cause the TGC display to jump around or not respond at all also note that the image will correspond with the TGC dis plays Known Problems EFT streaking 25 frames second
412. of audio Check VCR power Switch 1 Turn VCR power switch ON Verify the VCR cab ling A V to VCR and the audio cable from the EM to the AN 1 Correct the VCR cabling A V to VCR and the audio cable EM to the AN Improper initialization system message NO XDR and the sector image area has a checkerboard pattern The IVT is the only scanhead connected or the IVT is the default scanhead Select the IVT scan head from the Control Module 12X and above Erratic EFT IVT and Access scanhead operation Use CTRL L to list the system firmware Defective PROMs are identified by the Motor Controller code 481212 Remove the defective PROM and replace it with a good PROM 4201 0265 07 All CAD systems System does not boot Problem may be with CAD Module Disconnect CAD Mod ule and reboot to iso late CAD Module prob lems if system still does not boot trouble shoot system All CAD systems CAD MODULE INCOMPATIBLE OR CAD MODULE REBOOTING mes sage soon after pow er up or lt gt This is normal CAD Module runs a 2 3 minute self test after hard or warm boot After power up or lt CTRL P gt wait 2 to 3 minutes for CAD Mod ule to complete self test All CAD systems 0 4 05 88 CAD Module intermit tently drops out CAD FAULT TYPE CON TROL P message CAD Module Power Supply 5 Vdc out of tolerance 5 0 4 01
413. oftware could remain in non MFI systems 30 10 software was released on September 7 1992 to provide German FERT GYN Calcs 30 10 software supports MFI and includes the changes made at 30 08 30 10 is now the 30 X replace ment software Refer to UM 4 Field Service Manual 4720 0001 05 30X Change Summary pages UM4 05 20 and 21 Table 5 1 lt CTRL gt L Codes for System Controller and Pulse Processor PCB data and foot notes Revised in work Pulse Processor PCB replacement software data for 7500 and 3500 1261 01 and 3500 1262 01 on page UM4 05 41 see next page System Controller PCB replacement software data for 7500 0312 XX on page UM4 05 71 NOTE Replacement Matrices are what the name implies they show what should be ordered based on a number of criteria The listings are determined by what is required for correct configura tion of the system at a specific system software level and number of spares that are on hand in stores If a is revised with a modified layout re layout but there is no change in function then that PCB will not be stocked for general replacement because there is a sufficient quantity of the lower rev PCBs on hand The new PCB will be listed as like for like L An example for cost effectiveness a Scan Converter Cine should not be ordered to replace a Scan Converter Inter face The S C Cine board supports Cineloop the additional memory would be wasted on an older system which doe
414. om DFT to Access scanhead System interrupt when pressing XDR SELECT on sector only hardkey config ured systems Limit annular array M mode select line angle limit to 38 degrees Caliper error on M mode or Doppler image recalled from disk drive Enable TRT sector 1 2 frame rate as the default rate On sector only systems the system will not automatically select the Access scanhead unless defaults are set to 7 Access 0 4 05 16 Press SELECT KEY while dual triggers are selected and the Data Comm Disk is disabled Mismatch between Doppler sample vol ume and sample volume cursor position Pulsed Doppler 2 25 MHz scanhead only ECG menu present and active for linear scanheads Biopsy guide paths are not displayed after the following sequence acquire sector image press BIOP press FRZ press MEAS press CAL press UNFRZ Adds up down option for linear image re verses both sector and linear for TRT Known Problems When a TP 10 Thermal Printer is print ing the keyboard responds slowly This is normal operation The data transmis sion rate of 600 bits per second of the System Controller PCB to the thermal printer causes a delay that ties up the serial bus Control inputs from the key board during this transmission will be delayed In 8X software the keyboard is disabled during printing Thin black horizontal lines on left dual sector with ECG trigger Thin black horizontal lines on left dual
415. om the pulser to scanhead This change provides a better Doppler pre sentation when the flow is sampled at deeper depths PROM U39 4201 0238 02 will NOT work in a non DQI Doppler Processor PCB 7500 0347 The only scanhead that benefits from this change is the Access A 3L CAUTION DO NOT install the Access A 3L power PROM 4201 0285 01 or the Doppler Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 power PROM 4201 0238 02 into any system which is used for fetal Doppler applications PV Doppler multiple frequency switching Problems Corrected e Sample volume cursor graphics disap pears in 2D update Doppler when the 2D image is left right reversed e Reduce Doppler output for B10 5M crystal C10 BM crystal C2 25 and 10 PV 5S crystal scanheads e Sample volume misregistration 2D update Linear smear at zone transition with DFT scanheads e French screen annotations for caliper measurements Unless the pulser is turned off at a mode change from 2D to M mode the Access reed switches are damaged Error in velocity measurement on the m sec scale when Doppler sample vol ume angle is other than zero degrees Known Problems Field reports contain occasional refer ences to system lockups when depth zoom or other keyboard changes occur e With the linear scanhead focus set to zone 5 entering M line automatically moves the skinline off of the video screen and disables the depth control
416. omponents against system configuration 2 Unpack monitor and inspect for dam age 3 Inspect all covers bezels dress pan els and other external surfaces for damage Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 4 Verify that all casters roll smoothly and that when the rear casters are locked they neither turn or roll Check control module for damage to keys and softkey control panel Inspect Human Factors Assembly for damage Verify that monitor arm and keyboard support both move up and down smoothly and lock in the down position To release one or both mech anisms pull forward on release bar located under front edge of keyboard support while pushing down on the mechanism On Lenzar systems verify that rail crossbrace is securely attached 2B 4 4 HFC Mechanical Inspection Figure 2B 4 Remove two screws securing front EM bezel and remove bezel Remove five or six screws securing front shield to card cage and remove shield Remove two screws securing front OEM bezel and remove bezel Remove four screws securing rear OEM bezel and remove bezel Remove screws securing EM rear panel cover and remove cover Remove two screws securing rear EM bezel and remove bezel Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Installation 2B Check for loose or missing fasteners and tighten or replace as necessary Verify that six screws securing rails to EM are tight These screws are acces sible f
417. on a BNC female to BNC female adapter P N 3100 1732 01 is available to connect two BNC cables together NOTE Cable lengths no greater than 50 feet using RG 714 thin coax are recommended UM CAD ECG SYSTEM INSTRUMENT 0 4 07 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO a WITH PARTS YES NO a a Y Y Service Bulletin Date August 16 1993 S B Info 94 Rev A To All Field Service Personnel E C N Author Paul Peterson Purpose of Replacement Matrices This service bulletin supercedes service bulletin Info 94 EFFECTIVITY All systems PROBLEM CSRs and Support personnel trying to use replacement matrices to resolve compatibility issues CAUSE Confusion over intended use of matrices Replacement matrices especially the 4 are designed to provide replacement parts ordering information based on factory Customer Service spare parts inventory SOLUTION 1 CSRs must follow usage instructions for replacement matrices which are detailed in the Configuration section of each service manual To resolve a compatibility issue have a Field Support Specialist or the Product Support Center check the issue in their copy of the appropriate Master Compatibility Matrix 2 Shop and support personnel should use both replacement matrices master compatibility matrices e g 9015 0145 for UM 4 and other documentation as necessary to evaluate compatibility issue
418. on video or stripchart image Jumper J4 on Grid Amp PCB incorrectly installed Check jumper J4 on Grid Amp PCB Set J4 on Grid Amp PCB of LS 8 to the top EXT C posi tion Fig 3 16 on pg LS8 03 15 in 4720 0220 01 Density fluctuations in Multi Image Camera prints Faulty Data Comm Isolation Transformer Check Camera input power from Data Comm for 110 130 volts AC Replace the Data Comm Isolation Transformer 2600 0054 Incorrect video levels Check video signal levels to camera sync tip of 28V video level of 9V Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 Peripheral does not power up Power Cord No power to EM Reseat power cable Replace power cord bracket 1065 0425 Blown fuse Power to EM Replace fuse in power dis tribution box r 0 v0 viINn enuey 9IAJ8S 4 v MODEL UM 4 Symptom Date and time inaccu rate Possible Cause Date time not reset at beginning of year Fault Isolation 1 PROBLEM CATEGORY ANNOTATIONS Solution Reset date time Reference System Controller PCB A15 replaced w out resetting date time 1 Reset date time Date and time inac curate after system powered down Battery charge circuit Verify voltage across R2 on Motherboard is greater than 4 8 volts Repair or replace Mother board Batteries Veri
419. on the next page Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 1 6A CAD Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4CAD Ultrasound System 4705 0010 03 OPERATING NOTES AND ERRATA Software Build 23 19 March 23 1989 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty Setup 7 When lt CTRL gt E is pressed and the default menu is displayed and then DEL is pressed to exit the default table all patient data including data on the hard disk is erased lt CTRL gt E as part of its operation assumes a New Patient command lt CTRL gt P Store any files you wish to save on the floppy disk before using lt CTRL gt E Pressing lt CTRL gt E while in CineloopR image capture displays mixed alphanumeric characters on the display Do not use lt CTRL gt E while in CAD mode Using lt CTRL gt Z to set date and time overwrites any annotation and graphics in the region used to display the date time prompt Set the system date and time before adding annotation to the Screen The System Activity T
420. onnected and selected verify that the problem is not restricted to a single scanhead Continue by checking scanhead cables and input connectors and associated wiring If these are not the cause of the problem replace the Motor Controller PCB UM4 04 1 4 Fault Isolation Table 4 1 nitions DS1 DS2 DS3 DSR GRN GRN YEL RED PIE Motor Controller LED Defi TRT Linear CVLA Motor Controller PCB A8 System Controller 15 Figure 4 1 4 4 2 System Controller LEDs NOTE The following information on System Controller A15 LEDs is valid through at least version 25 X software Indicators DS1 through DS8 on the System Controller PCB are associated with the ini tialization process The yellow LEDs DS1 6 will turn on and off sequentially starting at DS1 during the initialization cycle S1 systems or 6 X software and below the bottom LED DS1 and the UM4 04 2 TRT Sector ICT ACCESS 72B 01 ESO4 AO01 01 PCB LED Indicators green LED DS7 remain on after system initialization 8 X through 23 X software The bottom LED 051 will be off after system initializa tion If D81 LED remains on a problem exists 24 X and higher software The LEDs may remain on after system power up initializa tion If this occurs press CONTROL P Ve
421. ores a Cineloop image onto the hard disk if one is present in video memory though the descriptive title is not used An easier method of storing Cineloop images isto use the rightmost footswitch after acquiring the images When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen The keyboard supports special functions that are not documented in the operating instructions The following keys are active on both hardkey and softkey control modules Special Function Keys Function Trigger update on off Move Doppler zero line Select deselect alternate frame rate Video invert Display and select patient position display Transducer scanhead position TGC preset Select deselect annotation arrow Select deselect biopsy guide Select velocity frequency Select wall filters Select variable persistence level Enable disable TGC display Enable disable 2 D update Select up down orientation of the image Select Doppler reject level Change the sector angle field of view lt x lt xBS lt CVZEAC7 TAMVOFS UM4 06A 10 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2 Or lt or or Or gt Special Function Keys or Control and the Following Keys Special Function Disabled coouozaoou 2 Special Function Control and the Following Keys 2
422. orizontally in the scan plane 1 Set the single focal zone to the top of the image using the PAN ZONE con trol 2 From the vertical column of pins determine which displayed line reflec tor is the narrowest within the focal zone a Measure the width with the cali pers b The measured width is the lateral resolution c The scanhead s lateral resolution should meet the specifications listed in the appropriate scanhead table in Section 2C Performance Tests 3 Select each focal zone and repeat step 2 Axial Resolution Axial resolution is the ability of the system to distinguish targets on an imaginary line perpendicular to the scanhead face verti cally in the scan plane Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 1 1 Fault Isolation 4 Measure axial resolution with the pin groups at 3 7 and 12 cm depths onthe phantom see enlargement Figure 4 14 e Optimize the display of each pin group by adjusting image controls and scanhead transmit focal zones The bottom pins in each set are verti cally separated by 0 5 mm If they can be distinguished from each other the axial resolution is 0 5 mm Determine the closest two pins that can be clearly distinguished sepa rated vertically from other pins in the same group Determine axial resolution for each depth 3 7 and 12 cm The scanhead s axial resolutions should meet the specifications listed in the appropriate scanhead table in
423. ormal Position 7500 0312 Shorted JR1 JR27 do not require field con figuration These jumpers should be Hardwired in the Normal Position configuration Shorted Open Open Open Shorted Deleted Deleted Hardwired Hardwired Hardwired Deleted Deleted Deleted Factory configured Note Some older may movable jumbers on J13 Open J13 1 2 and 3 4 Open pen 5 6 and 7 8 Shorted Open Open Open Open if U14 and U25 are FactoryConfigured P N 2054 0001 Shorted if 2070 0226 01 Open Open Shorted Shorted Open Shorted Factory Configured Shorted Factory Configured Note Some older PCB may have movable jumbers on J24 Open J24 1 2 7 8 and 11 12 Open Shorted 3 4 5 6 and 9 10 Shorted Shorted UM4 05 74 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 HFC and UM 4APLUS Components HFC Components REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 16X Disk Part No 17X Dop Drv System 3500 0581 Receiver 7500 0511 Rear Panel 7500 0318 ECG 3500 0518 Module u Power 1700 0002 11 Supply 12 1700 0032 01 Hardkey 4000 0154 21 26 Control TB S L 31 36 Module 41 TB S LM 22 27 32 37 42 TB S LC 23 28 33 38 43 UM4APLUS TB S L 34 39 44 UM4APLUS TB
424. ormation to assist the factory if it is necessary for them to substitute and ship a functionally equivalent or alternate part System type UM 4 S1 or S2 UM 4A Plus etc 0 4 05 9 5 Configuration Product Configuration Code Software build 4X 25 etc Replacement PCB P N from matrix Specify if a like for like part is required Replacement PROM kit or indi vidual PROM P Ns Feature compatibility require ments Annular Array Doppler sync Duplex CW Array IVT etc b Also report the failure category This information is used for the dead on arrival DOA and the ear ly life failure ELF program Iden tify the category of failure as P1 P2 or P3 where AP1 failure applies to any part or assembly that fails within 30 days of being shipped by ATL Manufacturing AP2 failure applies to any part or assembly that fails after 30 days and that failure results in a doc tor down condition A P3 failure applies to any part or assembly that fails after 30 days butthatfailure does notresult ina doctor down condition 8 After receiving the replacement parts verify that they are the same as those ordered If an alternate part was received verify it against the matrices for compatibility with your system Call Technical Support if compatibility is unclear 0 4 05 10 NOTE f you ordered and received PROMs and the PCB was received with PROMs installed verify that the installed
425. orne and any other stocking locations should be verified by the attached procedure 2 If a PCB is found to be incorrect purge it and return it to Bothell immediately after placing a P 3 replacement order 3 A list of affected customers for both Domestic and International accounts is attached Verification of these boards should follow the procedure below If an incorrect PCB is identified it should be purged and returned to Bothell immediately after a proper PCB is installed Order as a Doctor down UM4 07 48 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 PROCEDURE The CSR or representative will need to check the system for the following CIRCUIT BOARD VERIFICATION DOMESTIC NTSC 60 Hz applications P N 7500 0273 XX even numbered dash levels e g 06 10 Check component location Y1 Correct Crystal Frequency is 30 723 MHZ Check jumper location JR1 There should NOT be a jumper configured in this location INTERNATIONAL PAL 50 Hz applications P N 7500 0273 XX odd numbered dash levels e g 07 09 Check component location Y1 Correct Crystal Frequency is 36 883 MHZ Check jumper location JR1 There SHOULD be a jumper configured in this location NOTE The Crystal frequency will either be silk screened onto the body of the Crystal or stamped directly into the metal can It may be necessary to remove the metal bail securing the Crystal to the PCB as the marking could be on the bottom obscured sid
426. ound dur ing installation 1 Note any obvious or potential RF gen erators Typical RF generating devices include but are not exclusive to gel warmers coffee pots air condi tioners fans photocopiers comput ers lab equipment surgical equipment and refrigerators 2 Circle the appropriate step on the Site Evaluation FSR Pre Installation Flow Chart and note any potential difficul ties 4 02 5 2A Pre Installation Requirements 2A 10 Dust Customers who use linen frequently have a dust problem Because of the air circula tion requirements of the system and the location of its air filter dust can accumulate rapidly and cause the system to overheat 1 Advise the customer about the need to periodically clean the air filter A dirty filter can be cleaned with a small porta ble vacuum cleaner 2 Circle the appropriate step on the Site Evaluation FSR Pre Installation Flow Chart and note any potential difficul ties 2A 11 Lighting Ambient light can interfere with the viewing of video monitors A darkened room is pre ferred Ambient light can be controlled through window shades and night lights 1 Note the presence of shades or blinds lights and dimmer controls 2 Circle the appropriate step on the Site Evaluation FSR Pre Installation Flow Chart and note potential difficulties and suggestions for improving lighting control 2A 12 Establishing Customer Expectations Upon completing the site
427. p 0 4 05 17 5 Configuration 17 15 06 System Controller PROM Kit 8000 0125 25 provides for the following changes Doppler over power correction limits the Doppler acoustic power levels for the fol lowing Access scanheads Access 10 PV 5 short Access C 10 5 medium Access B 10 5 medium NOTE This is a mandatory FDA retrofit issue All UM 4 Doppler systems require modification Refer to the Doppler Over power Retrofit Program Overview 6220 0048 01 for more details on this pro gram All systems shipped after August 12 1988 will have 17 15 06 System Controller PROMs and the 7500 0300 12 Display Controller PCB New Features German Cardiology Calculations French language translations e Shrinking calipers e Sony UP811 PRINT support Incremental depth EXPAND control Problems Corrected e In 2D M mode the 2D depth markers and image shift upward slightly when panning to the fifth focal zone accuracy is unaffected The M mode sweep is shifted down slightly relative to the 2D image TRT biopsy guide graphics will reappear after leaving dual TRT images This occurs with a single stored image with biopsy guide active after trackball move ment Doppler audio volume attenuation with dumb AV module UM4 05 18 Excessive character field blanking when leaving OB calculations visible at edges with expanded image G2 instead of D2 for OB parameter head ing in default menu Select smoothing 3 and
428. place cable Reference TM Mode PCB A12 S1 systems Replace TM Mode PCB A12 Configuration Section 5 TM Auxiliary PCB A13 S2 systems Replace TM Auxiliary PCB A13 Configuration Section 5 M mode will not scroll on monitor stripchart ok 2D ok TM Mode PCB A12 Replace TM Mode PCB A12 Configuration Section 5 No M mode or 2D stripchart ok Display Controller PCB A14 Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Configuration Section 5 No M mode graphics TM Mode PCB A12 Replace TM Mode PCB A12 Configuration Section 5 TM Auxiliary PCB A13 Replace TM Auxiliary PCB A13 Configuration Section 5 No ECG display in M mode 2D ok TM Mode PCB A12 Replace TM Auxiliary PCB A13 Configuration Section 5 No ECG display in any mode ECG Isolation PCB Replace ECG Isolation PCB Configuration Section 5 TM Mode PCB A12 Replace TM Mode PCB A12 Configuration Section 5 r vo VO VIAn enuey plal v MODEL 0 4 Symptom No PW Doppler no Doppler audio CW ok Possible Cause Doppler Pulser PCB A1 Fault Isolation PROBLEM CATEGORY DOPPLER Solution Replace Doppler Pulser PCB A1 Reference Configuration Section 5 No PW Doppler no Doppler audio CW Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Replace Dopple
429. ppears on the screen The stored images have now been recalled and are playing back 2C 16 14 Printer Functions 1 Press ANALYZ Half of the screen will have the recalled images on it and the Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C other half will have graphic represen tations of the views in the images The first graphics and images that appear are the Parasternal Long Axis views 2 Press ALL 1 3 Using SCORE or SCORE and the trackball assign a different number to all the 1 s in the Exercise drawing 4 Press 5 Repeat steps 2 3 and 4 until the Parasternal Long Axis views return to the screen 6 Press RESULT This brings up the Qualitative Regional Wall Motion Results screen 7 Press PRNTER 8 The messages Please prepare printer and Press any key to con tinue appear on the screen 9 After assuring that the printer is con nected correctly press any alphanu meric key 10 The following message appears Just a moment please Printing Wall Motion Report 11 Verify that the printer has printed a report similar to Figure 2C 8 NOTE The printer will require a few minutes to print out the entire report UM4 02C 37 2C Performance Tests Pnt Nam Smith James Advanced Technology Laboratories Inc Date PLADEG ISOS Bethel ik Washington USA Qualitative Regional Wall Motion Scores Rest Ap Lot Inf Api Ant pnt Nam Smith James Mid
430. pplied with the printer 21 Verify the switch settings on the video printer Refer to Table 2B 8 22 Connect scanheads to appropriate connectors on EM front panel Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Installation 2B 23 Remove and discard packing material Clean up the area where the system was uncrated Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02B 19 2B Installation Table 2B 7 Okidata Microline 184 DIP Switch Settings NOTE These settings are for serial printers NLQ setting will make printing extremely slow qe e qu qe qe o cp Control Circuit Board CHARACTER SET ASCII with O ASCII with O British German French Fr Canadian Spanish PAPER LENGTH 5 5 8 5 11 0 14 0 LINE FEED DATA BITS 8 FIRMWARE SWITCH High Speed Serial Interface Board one switch on PCB BUSY SIGNAL POLARITY OFF BAUD RATE 9600 NOT USED PARITY ON OFF DTR BUSY LINE NOT USED Super Speed Serial Interface Board two switches on PCB PARITY EVEN ODD PARITY ON DATA BITS 8 PROTOCOLS SERIAL CABLE TESTS BUSY SIGNAL LINE POLARITY UM4 02B 20 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual BAUD RATE Installation 2B DSR INACTIVE PRINT BUFFER BUSY SIGNAL BUSY TIME NOT USED 1 Do not adjust Table 2B 8 UP 860 870 Video Printer Control Settings Cont
431. r Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 05 67 5 Configuration Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No 7500 0300 Dash No Function Test Normal Position Open See Section 4 Fault Isolation Video Select 525 lines Open 625 lines Closed EIA NTSC CCIR PAL Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Test Open See Section 4 Fault Isolation Video Select 525 lines Open 625 lines Closed EIA NTSC CCIR PAL Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Shorted Shorted Internal clock External clock 2 3 Two pins closest to card edge 3500 1409 3500 1410 Not used Open Test Open See Section 4 Fault Isolation Video Select 525 lines Open 625 lines Closed EIA NTSC CCIR PAL Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Not used Open Shorted Shorted Internal clock External clock 2 3 Two pins closest to card edge 3500 1480 3500 1481 7500 0827 XX Test Open CAUTION Do not change Closed EXTCHn Open DOM Open 525 lines Closed 625 lines 1 Do not order 7500 0300 30 or higher PCBs or 7500 0827 XX PCBs Jumper information is for co
432. r 7500 0273 XX appropriate dash level 2D Scan converter interface PCB Same as system Serial number of board FC 26 SC 04 R amp R if problem found 18 If no problem found Write Verification of 2D scan converter complete Corrective action None required B Removed and replaced Caliper measurements within specification OK NOTE No charge for labor or travel UM4 07 50 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 The attachmentments for Service Bulletin No 127 are not available electronically Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 51 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y Service Bulletin G Date March 12 1993 S B No UM4 128 Rev A To Field Service Personnel E C N No Author David D Vega EFFECTIVITY 1992 Problem Symptom Dropouts in linear image that cannot be traced to a PCB scanhead cables or the DFT connector UM4 07 52 Motherboard Assembly Error This service bulletin supercedes UM4 128 Possible Cause DFT signals are being shorted to ground at the junc tion of the Motherboard and the E M chassis Refer to fig ure below The Motherboard Vendor built the PCB incor rectly as follows Kapton insulating tape was placed on top of rather than under the copper tape The copper tape enhances the ground GND connection between the Motherboard and the E M chassis The Kap
433. r Rear OEM 1064 0517 01 w o Video In Out 1064 0517 02 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Panel Sheer Rear OEM w Video In Out 0 4 08 9 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 3 Ultramark 4AFF 4A and Cont d ATL Part No 1064 0521 03 Description Tray S H UM4A 1065 1290 01 Scanhead Holder Urethane 1064 0532 XX Frame 1 Tubing 24 front to back 1064 0532 XX Frame 1 Tubing Extended 26 5 front to back AG5700 1065 0580 01 Plug End cap for item 17 1065 0534 XX Mounting Bracket Monitor 1065 2106 XX Mounting Bracket Monitor Extended u w AG 5700 VCR Mounting Strip Rear Mounting Strip Front 1065 1287 XX Tray S H Universal Long Flange 1064 0538 01 Panel Blank Linear Holder PV 3500 1468 01 Power Distribution Assy 100V 120V Repl 3500 1094 XX 2700 0231 01 Fuse 3 0A 250 Time Del 2700 0225 01 Fuse 10A 250 Slo Blo 2plc 2265 0056 01 Power Cord 910 Detachable w Conn Alt 2245 0018 cord w 3100 0714 plug 2245 0006 Power Cord 67 w Conn 3500 1469 01 Power Distribution Assy 220 V240V TUV 3500 1095 2700 0224 01 Fuse 1 25A 250 Slo Blo 2700 0061 Fuse 5A 250V T Rated 2 plc 3500 1463 01 Power Distrib n Assy 240V In 120V amp 240V Out 240V TUV Repl
434. r Acquisition PCB A6 Configuration Section 5 Doppler Pulser PCB A1 Replace Doppler Pulser PCB A1 Configuration Section 5 No Doppler spectral display audio ok Doppler Processor PCB A7 Replace Doppler Processor PCB A7 Configuration Section 5 Noise bands in Dop pler spectral display audio ok Cable dressing Ensure all A5 A8 coax cables are between A4 and A8 and routed between A5 and A6 ejectors Re dress cables Doppler Processor PCB A7 Replace Doppler Processor PCB A7 Configuration Section 5 Noise bands in Dop pler spectral and audio Cable dressing See 9 4 above Re dress cables Configuration Section 5 Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Replace Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Configuration Section 5 Mirroring in Doppler spectral display audio ok Doppler Processor PCB A7 Replace Doppler Processor PCB A7 Configuration Section 5 Mirroring in Doppler spectral and audio Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Replace Doppler Acquisition PCB A6 Configuration Section 5 r uonejos Hned enuey 9IAJ8S plal v Sc VO vIAn MODEL 0 4 Symptom One channel of audio missing spectral dis play ok Possible Cause Speaker or interconnect cable Fault Isolation Switch cables from Audio Amp to speakers verify audio channel failure moves to other channel Solut
435. r air bubbles and purge if required Verify that the customer has the appropriate fill kits and knows how to purge air bubbles 2D 8 Reassembly 1 Before reassembling the system clean all dust build up for proper ven tilation Surfaces include but are not exclusive to air screens grids and PCBs Examine the E M screen to verify that the operator is cleaning it Connect the scanheads and foot switches Power up the system and perform a quick functional verification prior to its reassembly Reassemble the entire system includ ing PCB shields and covers Verify that all hardware is present Repair or replace loose or missing scanhead holder inserts Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Preventive Maintenance 2D 2D 9 Exterior Clean up 1 Correct visible flaws with touch up paint or parts replacement If the dam age is considerable replace the item rather than using excessive amounts of touch up paint Replace all missing hardware Clean all external surfaces with a non abrasive cleaner such as glass cleaner Pay particular attention to fre quently used keys and controls CAUTION Avoid using alcohol on monitor bezels transducer caps and the touch panel 4 Onsales demo systems only if a cover panel needs to be replaced order it P1 and install it the next day 2D 10 Functional Verification 1 2D 11 1 Verify that medical specialty defaults are intact and that the date ti
436. r grid Enable disable blank background around text Enable disable left column annotations New patent Help Storage image on disk Save system parameters Synchronize de synchronize scanhead to monitor frame rate Set the clock calendar Function Move Doppler angle to the left Move Doppler angle to the right Decrease the sample volume size Increase the sample volume size Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual CAD Operating Notes 6A UM4 06A 15 6A CAD Operating Notes 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a FROZEN image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE while the system is in 2 D mode and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient When using an IVT 5 0 MHz mechanical scanhead pressing lt CTRL gt A displays the annotation for double line density while the s
437. r location causes are ruled out deter mine if the system has an out of balance or otherwise defective fan on either the power supply or the Fan Module If the jittery or wavy image is continuous throughout a given length of recording the cause is probably a defective fan If the jittery or wavy image is intermittent on a given length of recording the cause is probably due to system location Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO a Y 1 Y S ervice Bulletin G Date December 10 1993 S B UM4 137 Rev B To Field Service Personnel 3635 3739B 3697 Author Paul Peterson 32X Software for UM 4 This bulletin replaces UM4 137 Rev A French and German PROM kit part numbers were switched A discussion of PCB software compatibility has been added 1 0 OVERVIEW 32X software is being released to incorporate a number of minor software changes Most changes are transparent to the user but several result in minor user interface changes Refer to 4705 0001 36 Rev A and 4705 0004 12 Rev A which are summarized below NRR was in late August 1993 FCD was in mid November 1993 Softkey changes 4705 0001 36 Vascular ratios can now be calculated from measurements made in velocity mode Several softkeys have been moved for ease of use The caliper is automatically displayed upon pressing the MEAS softkey For
438. r of EM Lock connector in place using captive screws in connector 6 Hang storage bin on front bezel of EM NOTE Before installing a peripheral not shipped with or configured specifically for the UM 4 system call ATL Technical Sup port for information on compatibility and installation This includes peripherals origi nally purchased for use with other ATL products 7 Reinstall EM rear panel cover using mounting screws 8 Connect scanheads to appropriate connectors on EM front panel UM4 02B 21 2B Installation 9 Remove and discard packing material and shipping containers Clean up the area where the system was uncrated 10 Move the system to its operational location 11 Continue with paragraph 2B 4 9 Line Voltage Verification 2B 4 9 Line Voltage Verification WARNING f the outlet for the system has not been checked during a Pre site Inspection using the Power Primer 4760 0215 XX or Section 3 Power in the General Field Serivce Manual 4720 0219 01 do so before proced ing Complete appropriate paperwork 1 Utilizing your three pronged outlet test plug and Multimeter verify proper out let wiring and voltage levels WARNING Do not connect the system if a wir ing fault is discovered Advise customer immediately Proceed only after the fault has been corrected 2 Continue with Section 2C Perfor mance Tests then return to paragraph 2B 4 10 below 2B 4 10 Preparation
439. r users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls On hardkey and softkey systems with dual linear when the user power up default is set to linear the scanhead select must be pressed twice to select the right array scanhead After selecting it once the scanhead select works normally On hardkey and softkey systems a transducer must be active prior to using the remainder ofthe system controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing CTRL Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented The PV setup G6 area of the user default menu includes the following line Averaging mode no Because averaging is not an option in the PV calculation mode this line is accurate although its inclusion in the user default menu may give the er
440. rame Grabber 1039 01 1039 01 NOTE If the system is Linear only no selections need to be made from GRP 2 or GRP 3 EXAMPLE A The customer has a UM 4PLUS HFC system at 28 XX software It has Dual Access EFT Dual Linear Doppler and Frame Grabber Looking at the chart the CSR needs to order the following 1 8500 1060 01 Core EM Dual Linear 8500 1059 01 Sector w Dual Linear 8500 1029 13 Dual Acc with EFT and Doppler 8500 1013 03 w o ECG and M mode 8500 1039 01 w Frame Grabber Reference the system type and software level in the comments section of the order oar Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 33 7 Service Bulletins SECTION 2 S2 SYSTEMS To order an EM the core part number as well as the feature part numbers must be listed on the order For UM 4 and NR UM 4 there should be a total of four part numbers for systems without Frame Grabber or five part numbers for sys tems with Frame Grabber For UM 4A and UM 4CV there should be a total of four part numbers For there should be a total of two part numbers see Example B These part numbers determine the EM hardware configuration ONLY The soft ware level must be referenced in the comment section of the order Also note in the comment section that the system is S2 and whether it is a UM 4A CV PV or NR UM 4 Northgate Research UM 4 see page 1 for a description of a North gate Research UM 4 NOTE The part numbers below have
441. rane 12 Pos Ref only Display 80 Character Vacuum Ref only Cable Softkey Display 4100 0235 0 1 Overlay Trackball Blue Adhesive back 1065 1915 0 1 0 4 08 24 w Skirt Slidepot keycap Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual ATL Part No Description Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 10 Monitor Module Assembly 3500 0764 xx Monitor Module Hi Contrast EIA Detail B 3500 0696 xx Monitor Module Assy Medasonics PV PV 3500 0908 xx Monitor Module Medasonics PV Hi Contrast PV 3500 0426 xx Monitor Module Assembly UMAA OB PV CV 3500 1087 xx Monitor Module UM 4 5 Chassis Assy w CRT amp PCB Not Used Plate Lower Mounting 1065 1388 01 Lens Polarized Plastic UM4 5 Monitor use with 1065 1389 01 amp 1065 1390 01 Alt 1065 1210 01 use with 1065 1209 01 Brkt 2 plc amp 1065 1211 01 Screws 2 plc 1065 1389 01 Brkt Plastic Lens Mounting UM4 5 Monitor 2 plc 1065 1390 01 Screw Plastic Lens Mounting UM4 5 Monitor 2 plc Not Used Bezel Pot Assy 1065 1168 01 Cover 3000 0129 02 Tilt and Swivel Assy Incl video cable 13 Plate Upper Swivel Mount Insulator Monitor Mount Cable EM Monitor P O Item 10 1516 0174 01 Screw Cover Mounting 2 Label Warning Table 8 1 Figure 8 1 Sht 3 Label Co
442. ration Verification NOTE Due to differences in CAD operation between domestic and international CAD soft ware this procedure is only to be used as a ref erence for checking international CAD sys tems The following outlines the procedure to fol low to verify correct operation of a NTSC UM 4CAD system with intergrated CAD module and 23 XX or higher software upon installation 2C 16 1 Quantitized Frame Rate 1 Select a single frequency mechanical scanhead from the XDR panel 2 Returning to the main softkey panel select CAD 3 Select various depth settings ranging from minimum to maximum and verify UM4 02C 30 that scan acquisition rates are quanti tized as follows NTSC video format systems at 15 20 and 30 frames per second 2 fps 4 Press lt CTRL gt V to de synchronize the scan acquisition Verify that frame rates are continuously variable 5 Press lt CTRL gt V again to return to quantitized frame rates 6 Select a scanhead depth for a frame rate of 20 FPS 2C 16 2 Reduced Image Area Verify that the ECG display doesn t encroach into the 2D area under any cir cumstances permitting the user to see the full depth at all times 2C 16 3 Automatic Display of Real Time Clock 1 Press CINE then CAPTUR then CINE 2 The display should show two tim ers T1 and T2 with both values set to 00 00 2C 16 4 Timer Function 1 Press NEXT T and wait Verify T1 timer begins counting seco
443. ration 5 clude the Human Factors Mod ule with adjustable monitor and control module arms and doesn t support all the features of the HFC Replaced in manu facturing by UM 4AFF UM 4Ap tus UM 4PV A small cart peripheral vascular system manufactured for Meda sonics out of production Simi lar to the UM 4A with speakers and brown trim Replaced in manufacturing by UM 4AFF UM 4CV A small cart cardiovascular Doppler system similar to the UM 4A with speakers and blue trim Replaced in manufacturing by UM 4AFF UM 4AFF A full feature small cart system consolidating OB PV and CV into one system as of early 1990 Available in both softkey and hardkey versions System features are configured to meet the application requirements A full feature UM 4AFF is UM 4 small without Human Factors Module UM 4AFF style system was the only low cost version manufac tured in Solingen UM 4PLus A UM 4 S2 HFC configured with new analog Beamformers and baselined at 27X software see paragraph 27X The UM 4Prus replaced the UM 4 S2 on the manufacturing production line as of April 1990 Hardkey or Softkey HFC or full feature small cart Beamformer Control ler 7500 0548 XX supports IVT array scanheads but not AA or 0 4 05 25 5 Configuration Feature Definition and Physical Attributes DOP Doppler systems have a CW Doppler scanhead connector on the electronics module front panel and sp
444. ration and are available from the hidden default menu These are not accessible to the customer and are not described in the operation manual These hidden items are used in the same manner as other default items Hidden defaults can vary depending on the system software that is installed and the optional features purchased by the customer To display the default table and enter the default setup mode press lt CTRL E gt Although the format of the default table varies somewhat according to the version of system software installed in the system operation is essentially the same for all formats Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual i Figure 5 1 Use the following procedure to change default settings 1 Select the default by entering the two character code preceding the default and press ENTER The current setting and list of available settings are dis played below the default table Enter the number corresponding to the desired value and press ENTER Pressing ENTER without entering a number leaves the default setting unchanged 3 When you have finished press DEL to enter the new settings into system memory and to exit the table 5 1 7 Special and Control Functions Also included here are a synopsis of Spe cial And Control functions first as a sum mary of changes by software level and second in tables of functions These tables are meant for quick reference The Opera tion Manual should be consulted for det
445. rcury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient When using an IVT 5 0 MHz mechanical scanhead pressing lt CTRL gt A displays the annotation for double line density while the system is operating in normal line density Pressing CTRL gt A again will not erase the annotation To erase the annotation reselect the scanhead If you press XDRSAV or lt CTRL gt U while the erroneous annotation is displayed you will not be able to erase it M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image UM4 06 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 If depth and zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling at the end of a 2 D update cycle Normal oper
446. rd disk DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which is a command to clear all images off the hard disk Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again Then pressing the CAD softkey will permit you access to the images that were on the hard disk at the time of the fault Capturing a static CW Doppler spectral display as the first image captured since power up may result in an abnormal image or display mode If this occurs capture a 2 D image first then return to static CW Doppler to capture the Doppler spectral display During image capture when the hard disk is full a message Press any key is displayed but pressing the keyboard has no effect Press any softkey to resume operation When recalling exercise images the recall menu may read exercise 8 page 256x120 The menu should read exercise 08F quad 256x120 The recall menu displays Press page button to display the next page of the menu if more images are available but no PAGE button is shown Press the MORE softkey to display the next page of the menu When storing to or recalling from floppy disk once the process is initiated it cannot be interrupted or aborted Do not press any keys simply wait for the process to end before beginning another process During playback of captured images some vertical shifting may be apparent on successive images The message Establishing CAD Module Communication may appear on the monitor when selecting the
447. reliability 5 7500 0304 may be stocked by International dealers order like for like from them only for International service If not available order appropriate 7500 0348 XX PROMs 11X 25X INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT REPLACEMENT LEVEL PROM COMPATIBILITY DPLX Part Dash P N CW No No 4201 CVA 0348 10 8000 0133 02 0265 11 12 61 62 64 65 03 12 8000 0235 01 PROMS 26X and up INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT PROM COMPATIBILITY DPLX Part Dash P N CW No No 4201 CVA 0348 10 8000 0133 11 12 61 62 64 65 0517 03 8000 0480 1 Board re layout renumbered IC U27 to U33 on 7500 0348 08 and 10 and higher dash level PCBs 2 DPLX CW No CVA Yes UM4 05 52 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Jumpers PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No Function Normal Position 7500 0304 N A Closed S1 is not for field use Closed There are several types of dips N A Closed witches used for S1 Generally set as follows N A Closed RED All DOWN CLOSED 7500 0348 N A Closed BLACK All UP ON N A Closed Always refer to jumper tables for cor rect switch settings and verify label N A Closed ling on switch before changing switch N A Closed positions Non Sync Open Conversion between sync and non
448. replacement the part number UM4 08 18 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 6 Human Factors Module Assembly ATL Part No Description 4000 0144 10 Human Factors Module Includes 1064 0338 01 Tray Storage Left Side 1064 0591 02 Tray Multiple Transducer Not Used 1064 0363 01 Tray Scanhead Right Front DFT S H holder 1064 1106 02 Tray Scanhead Generic Right Rear Replc 1064 0364 1064 0368 00 End Cap Active Scanhead Holder 1516 0115 Screw 6 32 x 5 8 PNH SEMS PD ST ZN u w 1064 0368 00 1065 0443 Cleat Cable 3 Position 1064 0442 Cleat Cable 2 Position 1514 0060 Bolt Cleat Securing 4 40x3 8 PNH SEM PD ST ZN 4 plc OEM Bezels Fr EM Shield 1560 0031 Washer FL 6 use with 1514 0060 4 plc 1065 1289 01 Clip Cable 2 plc Handle 1064 0282 End Cap Handle 2 plc Cover UM4 Handle Monitor Platform 3500 0609 01 Speaker Assy 7500 0355 Speaker Amplifier PCB 3500 0608 02 Volume Control Assy 4400 0022 Knob Volume Control Rubber 2275 0125 Cable AV Mod Speaker Amps 3500 0606 Cable Amp Connecting 2275 0102 02 Cable EM Monitor For 4000 0144 03 thru 09 2251 0003 01 Cord Coiled EM Keyboard Not Used Cover Top Link Arm Cover Lower Link Arm 1563 0083 Screw Cover A
449. resistor 2831 0013 at R20 location 4 Change 052 to a 74F04 2035 0140 Preserve any lifted pins and jumpers 5 Move jumper connector at Pins 2 and 3 of JPH to Pins 1 and 2 of JPH 6 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as Non Sync near the dash level indicator COMMENTS This change renders the board as a Non Sync type with its own independent clock Steps 1 and 2 of the instructions above correct a build error 0 4 09 14 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 Ye SEE DETAIL p 097 3 8 JUMPER BLOCK 144 01 509 03 01 Figure 7500 0362 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 09 15 9 Reference 7500 0370 XX PULSE PROCESSOR PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following five pages describe how to down REV this PCB from 25 to 24 09 to 11 09 to 08 11 to 10 08 to 10 05 to 03 04 to 02 03 to 01 05 to 04 03 to 02 and 02 to 01 The 25 is the same as 09 but has memory expansion for PHX Phase The 09 is the same as 05 but has a radial line noise fix
450. rify that the green LED 057 is the only LED on and is flashing If not a problem exists Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual The red LED DS8 or any other single LED or combination of LEDs indicate a fault condition if they remain on after the initial ization period and point to a possible Sys tem Controller failure Obtain collaborating information by performing performance tests and initializing the system in its mini mum configuration before replacing the System Controller PCB NOTE When only the A15 PCB is installed its LED s should sequence repeatedly when only the A14 and A15 PCBs are installed the system will take longer to boot but will come up with graphics on the monitor 4 5 Test Switches Figure 4 2 Several PCBs in the card cage contain switches that are intended for use either in testing or system configuration or both Figure 4 2 Switches on the TM mode PCB the TM Combo PCB and the Display Controller PCB inject specific test patterns into the data path at known points If all pro cessing circuitry is operating correctly the test patterns will be displayed on the sys tem monitor as in Figure 4 5 through Figure 4 7 and Figure 4 10 Open and Closed Switch Positions are Marked on the Switch 01 504 02 01 Figure 4 2 Test Switches Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Fault Isolation 4 NOTE The switch package names are printed on the component side of the PCBs adjacent to the swi
451. rol Setting Front Panel ON OFF Power ON CONTR Centered BRIGHT Centered THRU EE THRU POSI NEGA POSI tive Rear Pan el GAMMA DIP SW 1 Paper type OFF always DIP SW 2 Paper type ON Type Il High Density DIP SW 3 Postfeed ON off to conserve paper DIP SW 4 Aspect ON DIP SW 5 Memory ON DIP SW 6 Direction ON Bottom first DIP SW 7 Scan ON DIP SW 8 Scan ON DIP SW 9 Video input type ON or B W OFF col DIP SW 10 75 ohm termination ON D ADJ Centered 1 Set DIP SW 9 to OFF to print from color vid eo print will be black and white 24 Move the system to its operational location Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 25 Continue with paragraph 2B 4 9 Line Voltage Verification 2B 4 8 UM 4A Assembly 1 Position front OEM bezel on locating pins and secure with two screws 2 Position both A2 ground straps over bushings on EM so that when front shield is installed ground straps are secured between shield and bushings by mounting screws Install front shield over card cage and secure with five screws 3 Position front EM bezel on locating pins and secure with two screws 4 Position back cover on OEM and se cure with two screws 5 Connect footswitch assembly cable to connector located on lower left front corne
452. rom underside of rails and re quire a 1 4 inch hex wrench Inspectthe system for mechanical dis crepancies or damage Document any discrepancies on the Installation FSR 2B 4 5 UM 4A Mechanical Inspection Figure 2 5 Remove two screws securing front EM bezel and remove bezel Remove five or six screws securing front shield to card cage and remove shield Remove screws securing EM rear panel cover and remove cover Remove two screws securing rear EM bezel and remove bezel Remove two screws securing rear OEM bay cover and remove cover Check for loose or missing fasteners and tighten or replace as necessary Verify that six screws securing rails to EM are tight These screws are acces sible from underside of rails and re quire a 1 4 inch hex wrench Inspectthe system for mechanical dis crepancies or damage Document any discrepancies on the Installation FSR UM4 02B 7 Installation 2B 2 UM 4 on Shipping Pallet Figure 2B Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02B 8 2B Installation NOTE The monitor can either be mounted or in a carton depending on which UM 4 configuration is shipped 3 Shipping Pallet Ramp Figure 2B UM4 02B 9 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2B Installation 6 SS SS 1 7 2
453. roneous impression that averaging is an option If you change the frequency of the MFI scanhead after the system has timed out due to inactivity the system is unable to recognize the new frequency Before changing scanhead frequency take the system out of the time out mode by pressing any key as instructed by the message displayed on the screen If both MFI and 10PV scanheads are connected to your system using the MFI after the will cause erratic operation To avoid this condition do not use these scanheads on the system atthe same time 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 19 6 Operating Notes When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient M mode Acquisition Cha
454. roper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The calc measurement cursors will not attach to the trackball on a frame grabbed image unless there was an active scanhead running prior to entering VCR playback If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled Recalling a dual image from a disk created on a system with an earlier software version may cause a line to be displayed over the right image The line does not obscure the image or prevent normal operation Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 11 Operating Notes Planimetery measurements and annotations are not stored onto disks along with images Attempting to store one patient s images on another patient s disk that is not write protected results in the disk becoming unreadable making it impossible to r
455. rroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing lt CTRL gt Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented The CI STR softkey stores a Cineloop image onto the hard disk if one is present in video memory though the descriptive title is not used An easier method of storing Cineloop images is to use the rightmost footswitch after acquiring the images 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a FROZEN image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE while the system is in 2 D mode and position the cursor atthe desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the
456. s BACKGROUND Replacement matrices are not intended to be used as compatibility matrices Replacement matrices originated as Configuration Supplements which summarized the Master Compatibility Matrices for field use when ordering parts For cost savings when the PCB Shop and Service Operations merged replacement levels were selected to provide the least number of parts to sup port all existing systems PCBs and modules are now reworked to the highest level while maintain ing functional equivalency Compatibility issues will be minimal if replacements are made per the procedures detailed in the Configuration section of each service manual Do not arbitrarily order the highest dash level listed because it may not be compatible with the system Or if you order the highest dash level and an alternate is shipped by the factory it may not be compatible Either condition will result in a call back after reordering correct parts Even if a wrong works in a system it could place the system in a configuration that will be incompatible with future upgrades Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 11 7 Service Bulletins NOTE A number of new PCBs are also being depopulated as a cost reduction measure cir cuitry for features no longer offered for sale is being removed Therefore pay particular attention to the FEATURES columns in replacement matrices when selecting PCBs to ensure correct operation after PCB replacement 0 4
457. s If the VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To use the special function arrow keys without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If you are using the analysis module and have not documented all data DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which will clear all patient data and calculations from system memory While using a Duplex CW scanhead in CW Doppler mode Doppler acquisition is halted temporarily if Freeze is activated during 2 D update Doppler acquisition resumes when the next 2 D update occurs Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The calc measurement cursors will not attach to the trackball on a frame grabbed image unless there was an active scanhead running prior to entering V
458. s NOTE S C Combo and S C Cine PCBs must be used without a S C Buffer PCB If you are shipped either of these to replace a S C Converter Interface PCB 0273 XX be sure to remove the 0315 PCB Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 55 5 Configuration NOTE Do notorder 7500 0778 or 7500 0798 PCBs Jumper information is for configura tion reference only Order the appropriate 3500 assembly to assure receiving a PCB prop erly configured and adjusted for the specific application k lol k lol 28 NOTE Either of two types of dip switches may be installed Io fol Io fol RED dipswitch Down is closed BLACK dipswitch Up is closed ON fol fol Refer to matrix to confirm core rect settings JPIB 01 505 18 01 01 505 27 01 Scan Converter Interface A9 S C Combo and Cine PCBs A9 7500 0273 XX 7500 0778 XX 7500 0798 XX SWI Jumpers UM4 05 56 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual PCB JUMPER OR SWITCH Configuration 5 Part No 7500 0273 Function Not used Open Normal Position Not used Open Used Closed Used Open Not used Open Not used Open SMPL CLK for CAD 23X and up Closed Open 17X and down Not used Open Video select 525 l
459. s Obstetrical Calculations Module In OB calcs the CRL is computed by formula and not by table Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 5 6A CAD Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4 CAD Ultrasound System 4707 0010 01 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 24 15 June 20 1989 Rev B The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls The CI STR softkey stores a Cineloop image onto the hard disk if one is present in video memory though the descriptive title is not used An easier method of storing Cineloop images isto use the rightmost footswitch after acquiring the images M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image Doppler Acquisition When CW mode activating VCR framegrabber then returning to CW causes a change in the frequency or velocity scale Remember to reset scaling after VCR playback Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra
460. s a mobile unit Ensure that both PCB extractors are present on all PCBs If you observe signs of physical stress reseat all PCBs and ICs using anti static procedures 11 Inspect all cable assemblies for signs of wear and verify the integrity of their connections 12 Inspect the external OEM cables for wear 13 Reconnect all external OEM devices 14 Power up the system and verify that all fans are turning Look between the PCBs with a flash light verify that all fans are turning or examine the lower grid for a lack of dust in one location Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Preventive Maintenance 2D e Verify that the power supply fan is free of dust and operational Turn the system off Replace the PCB retainer cover and ensure that all screws are snug 2D 5 6 Common Problems and Retrofit Issues Review Service Bulletins and Hot Tips for information relevant to known system problems and solutions Service Bulletin Info 61 and the New Documents Memo are routinely published as a listing of active Service Bulletins 2D 5 7 Alignments 1 Verify system power supply and Motor Controller PCB voltage levels with a digital multimeter and oscilloscope Specifications are found in Section 3 Adjustments NOTE fthe system is experiencing noise or reliability problems be sure to verify AC ripple specifications 2 Adjust the system monitor brightness and contrast pots and confirm greys cale images
461. s been performed 2B 4 2 Unpacking and Preliminary Inspection Figure 2B 2 Before unpacking the system inspect the shipping carton using the following proce dure 1 Examine the shipping container for damage caused by rough handling Look for evidence that might indicate that the carton has been opened 2 Verify that the Shockwatchr and Tilt watchr indicators on the shipping container have not been activated showing R50 3 Report any damage or loss to the carrier 4 Determine the container type and use the following steps to remove the UM 4 from its shipping container and pallet Corrugated Container 1 Cut and remove banding around con tainer Carefully cut tape on top of con tainer don t cut deeply or monitor can be damaged UM4 02B 5 2B Installation 2 Lift carton off pallet Remove plastic from system WARNING Do not remove bands securing the monitor arm at this time If monitor is not mounted the arm can spring upwards and cause injury 3 Remove part boxes from around sys tem 4 Unbolt and remove two rail braces secured with wingnuts on inside 5 Unlock casters Roll system back wards to edge of pallet and lower sys tem to floor A ramp may be provided for HFC systems 6 Continue with paragraph 2B 4 3 Pre liminary Inspection Wood Container 1 Remove top and front panels secured by wingnuts 2 Remove plastic from system WARNING Do not remove bands securing
462. s deep abdominal Doppler DADA This was done in the Cont d System Receiver ECO 1197 3500 0454 19 3500 0454 20 7500 0373 02 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 02 1064 0244 01 CARD CAGE 1064 0244 01 3500 0431 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 061 4 01 7500 0318 01 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 01 3500 0581 03 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 03 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 The fan board was moved around and changed to improve the speed sensor cir cuit The chassis was also strengthened ECO 1146 3500 0454 21 3500 0454 22 7500 0373 02 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 02 1064 0552 01 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 01 3500 0431 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 061 4 01 7500 0318 01 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 01 3500 0581 03 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 03 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 This rev put the HFLA fix to the Motherboard ECO 1260 3500 0454 23 3500 0454 24 7500 0373 03 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 03 1064 0552 01 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 01 3500 0431 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0614 01 7500 0318 01 REAR PANEL 7500 0318 01 3500 0581 03 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 03 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1700 0002 12 This chassis has the quiet fan fix for both domestic and International systems Coax wires were added in the Receiver for noise purposes ECO 1265 3500 0454 25 3500 0454 26 7500 0373 03 MOTHERBOARD 7500 0373 03 1064 0552 01 CARD CAGE 1064 0552 01 3500 0738 01 FAN ASSEMBLY 3500 0738 01 7500 0318 01 EM REAR PANEL 7500 0318 01 3500 0581 04 SYSTEM RECEIVER 3500 0581 04 1700 0032 01 POWER SUPPLY 1
463. s may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM Inappropriate sample volume and Doppler angle annotation may appear on the screen when returning from the calcs menu and entering CW Doppler To clear the annotation press RETRN then CW DOP to resume CW Doppler operation When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect proper operation of the system To adjust the Doppler angle without invoking the error message exit from Doppler mode before making the adjustment To remove the error message press lt CTRL gt P If unsaved images are on the hard disk DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which is a command to clear all images off the hard disk Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again Whi
464. s then shipped it may not be compatible This will result in either a call back after reordering parts or place the system in a configuration that will be incompat ible with future upgrades 1 Use UM 4 PCB Replacement Matrix for all UM 4 UM 4AFF UM 4 small cart UM 4PLus UM 4APLus UM 4CAD and all Solingen manufactured sys tems 2 Use UM 4A PCB Replacement Matrix only for UM 4A OB PV and CV sys tems UM4 05 35 5 Configuration 3 Use the S1 matrices for S1 systems 4 Compare part number and dash level of defective PCB or module to replace ment matrix a If exact part number and dash level is listed order that PCB or module b If exact replacement is not listed order the next higher dash level PCB that matches the system con figuration in the FEATURES col umns DOP AIVT SYNC etc NOTE facolumn is blank that feature is not a determining factor for that PCB and does not need to be considered NOTE While a PCB might support a fea ture there may be software levels for that PCB which do not support the feature Compare feature compatibilities of the PCB matrix to those of the PROM matrix 0 4 05 36 NOTE and PROM matrices are compiled to provide support for all existing systems with the least number of dash lev els PCBs not included in these matrices Will be reworked at the factory to the high est possible level as they cycle through the supply system 5 5 2 Jumper Matr
465. se cases For example there are three electro mechanical versions of the Motor Con troller PCB standard UM 4PV and Mercury which do not share the same software 3 lt CTRL L gt CODES BY SYSTEM SOFTWARE LEVEL Under each major system software level are listed all of the PCB software codes that can be encountered at that system level The PCB software must also be checked in the left hand column for compatibility with system features For example Pulse Processor software displaying 11100 and should only be found in S1 systems at 17X or below 5 1 5 Configuration Instructions Configuration instructions consist of the hidden default lists that require program ming upon installation after upgrades or 0 4 05 2 after major repairs These defaults activate certain features to allow proper operation 5 1 6 Software Configuration Hidden Defaults At power up the UM 4 and UM 5 series systems automatically set system controls to pre defined default values starting points These default values can be viewed and changed from a table of sys tem default settings that can be displayed on the system monitor There are two sets of defaults and menus The first set of defaults are user change able and are covered in the operation manual The user defaults consist of oper ating parameters such as initial power mode and scanhead selection The second set of defaults are used for set ting system configu
466. shed an exam press lt CTRL gt P while in M mode UM4 06 24 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 11 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 31 07 Rev C March 21 1994 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls On hardkey and softkey systems a transducer must be active prior to using the remainder of the system controls On hardkey and softkey systems with dual linear when the user power up default is set to linear the scanhead select must be pressed twice to select the right array scanhead After selecting it once the scanhead select works normally When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing lt CTRL gt Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the sys
467. similar to that in either Figure 2C 1 or Figure 2C 2 UM4 02C 3 2C Performance Tests Main Bang Image Area cal MICHAEL HUNT qain 4 ID 487 38 1520 50 RAMSEY GENERAL 01 ESO2 DO 02 Figure 2C 1 Main Bang 990 0 m 0 FEB Sector Display 4 22 RI AVN DYNRNG 47 db DF 3 5 DEPTH 64 M To FPS Image Area 19 REJECT 4 SU NAME MICHAEL HUNT gain 10 487 38 1520 90 RAMSEY GENERAL 01 502 002 01 Figure 2C 2 Linear Display 4 Select a sector scanhead and use a linearity graticule to verify that the sec tor image is 90 3 1 degree 5 Check the operation of the monitor CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS con trols a Rotate the CONTRAST control on the monitor all the way counter clockwise and verify that the screen becomes nearly black UM4 02C 4 Rotate the CONTRAST control all the way clockwise and verify that the white areas of the image dis play bloom Readjust the CON TRAST control for correct contrast of the 16 gray bars b Rotate the BRIGHTNESS control counterclockwise and verify that the screen becomes nearly black Rotate the BRIGHTNESS control allthe way clockwise and verify that the screen washes out c Readjust the BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST controls for the best display of the gray b
468. size Vert size ratio is 1 1 Use caliper method Ref W3 5 4 Focus Display Adjust for opti mum focus Ref W3 5 4 Brightness Limit Display None 1 Adjust bright ness and contrast fully CCW 2 Adjust R19 3 Readjust brightness and contrast Ref W3 5 4 ALM or ACM Monitor Contrast and Bright ness Display R48 103 Ref W3 6 2 Horiz Centering Display Centered image R32 R73 and CRT deflection rings Ref W3 6 3 Horiz Width Display Verify image width is correct Fig 3 5 L1 Ref W3 6 4 Aspect Ratio Display Verify lengths of caliper sets are within 0 05 inches R7 R11 see proce dure for ALM R7 Vert size pot R11 Top linearity pot Ref W3 6 5 Focus Display Adjust for opti mum focus R51 R104 Ref W3 6 6 VCR Roll Display No picture roll during VCR search Para 3 6 7 A N Module 1 Ref refer to W UM4 03 14 TP4 and chassis ground paragraph 12 5V 0 01V Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Section 4 Fault Isolation 4 1 Introduction This section includes an outline of general troubleshooting steps as well as the fol lowing specific information UM 4 initialization routine LED status indicator data e Self test switch data Error message data Minimum configuration tables Fault isolation tables 4 2 Required Materials Oscilloscope
469. sn t show the Small Cart SC configuration with the Panasonic AG 7400 VCR EFFECTIVITY Domestic 120V NTSC UM 4 SC Systems shipped after October 21 1994 CAUSE The UM 4 SC has not previously shipped with the 7400 VCR This change was made due to inventory availability SOLUTION A future service manual change will include the following information Part Number Description Remarks 2100 0502 01 AG 7400 VCR Existing used on HFC 2275 0193 01 EM to VCR Cable Existing 2275 0194 01 EM to VCR Cable Existing 2275 0267 01 VCR to Speaker Amp Box New 2 way compatible 2100 0420 01 VCR Power Adapter Existing compatible with 6400 amp 7400 1065 2619 01 VCR Mounting Bracket New compatible only with 7400 NOTE The 7400 VCR is now the preferred VCR to ship with Domestic SC systems After depletion of the 7400 VCR inventory systems will again ship with the AG 5700 VCR The cabling for the 7400 VCR is identical to that for the 6400 VCR Production personnel will configure the VCR to operate in the conventional VHS mode Recording and playback in the Super VHS S VHS mode are still possible by using a S VHS cassette and setting the VCR front panel switch 5 5 to The Video Cassette included with the system will be a conventional VHS type not S VHS The extended monitor mounting hardware is required for adequate clear ance for the VCR There is no upgrade kit for this VCR and it is not an ordera
470. sn t have Cineloop Therefore the S C Cine is listed as like for like Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 57 7 Service Bulletins Pulse Processor PCB A5 PCBs 7500 0370 XX 3500 1261 62 7500 0561 XX plus configuration additions REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 26 40mm 16 amp DOP CVA 17 up SYNC AIVT 0370 08 09 24 25 26 27 1261 01 FZ lt lt 2Z lt 1262 01 UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only 7500 0370 XX x n e Ns Fur x PROMS required Convertible refer to Up Down Rev Instructions 7500 0548 XX 0549 XX and 0370 24 25 are UM 4 PCBs The 0548 and 0549 PCbs must be used together 0370 24 25s are back ward compatible to 12X when configured with 8000 0570 XX software 3500 1261 62s are relayout of 7500 0370 24 25 they are backward compatible to 12X when configured with 8000 0570 XX or higher software a OON d 7500 0370 08 09 PCBs support MFI with 30 08 8000 0177 12 13 or higher software PROMs NOTE Substitute PCBs must have the appropriate software for that PCB at the same system software level Software PROMs for the different versions of Pulse Processor PCBs at the same system software level are not interchangeable each PCB requires different board operating codes to achieve the same result INDIVIDUAL FEATURE PROM KIT REPLACEMENT
471. splay and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling at the end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume controls if this occurs Ifthe VPM feature is enabled and the Duplex CW scanhead is selected the CW DOP softkey will be disabled To re enable the CW DOP softkey turn off VPM When ECG Display ON OFF in the user default lt CTRL gt E menu is set ON the ECG trace cannot be removed in static CW Doppler mode To remove the ECG trace in this mode set ECG Display ON OFF to OFF If the Doppler angle is adjusted during Doppler scrolling by pressing and holding the special function arrow keys for a long period of time about 5 sec or more and the scaling is set to m sec the error message system malfunction notify customer service is erroneously displayed on the screen This condition does not affect p
472. splay as the first image captured since power up may result in an abnormal image or display mode If this occurs capture a 2 D image first then return to static CW Doppler to capture the Doppler spectral display 7 During image capture when the hard disk is full a message Press any key is displayed but pressing the keyboard has no effect Press any softkey to resume operation Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images continued When recalling exercise images the recall menu may read exercise 8 page 256x120 menu should read exercise O8F quad 256x120 The recall menu displays Press page button to display the next page of the menu if more images are available but no PAGE button is shown Press the MORE softkey to display the next page of the menu When storing to or recalling from floppy disk once the process is initiated it cannot be interrupted or aborted Do not press any keys simply wait for the process to end before beginning another process During playback of captured images some vertical shifting may be apparent on successive images The message Establishing CAD Module Communication may appear on the monitor when selecting the CAD softkey too soon after initial power up To prevent this from occurring wait for about 15 seconds after switching power on before pressing the CAD softkey Distorted or blank images may be captured and stored if a Page capture is attempted with a frozen image Use Pag
473. supply adjustment and during every preventive maintenance inspec tion WARNING Wrist straps should not be worn when working on a system when it is powered on The 5 VDC supply is a very high current supply Use caution when troublshooting NOTE Before performing these tests it is rec ommended that the site power be inspected in accordance with the pre site inspection proce dures detailed in the Site Inspection section of the General Field Service Manual 2C 2 Test Equipment and Materials CSR Tool Kit Scanheads 193 90003 01 as required Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual RMI Model 413A Tissue Phantom 0 7dB 199 12204 00 Linearity Graticule 198 19079 00 ECG Cable Kit 101 20357 1 1 Aquasonic Gel 2301 0378 01 Dynatech Model 232A Safety Analyzer Peripheral supplies if available as required 2C 3 WARNING 7he following series of tests requires applying power to the system while the protective covers are removed Danger ous voltages are present Use extreme cau tion Initial Set Up Procedure WARNING 7he five volt power supply pro duces high current Do not wear wrist straps while power is applied to system The following set up procedure is used to prepare the UM 4 for System Core Perfor mance Tests 1 Disassemble the UM 4 for electrical inspection as described in Section 2B 2 Connect available scanheads to the appropriate connectors on the UM 4 3 Ensure that t
474. t 1 minute ENTRY ERROR Error message MI Film cassette not fully Check cassette Insert cassette correctly CAMERA ENTRY inserted ERROR Dark slide in place Check dark slide Remove dark slide View Port door open Check view port door Close door End of film Check film exposures Load new film Error message MI End of film Check film exposures Load new film CAMERA TIMEOUT ERROR Error message PAGE No cassette paper Check paper Install paper PRINTER ENTRY ERROR Error message PAGE No power to page printer 1 Check power Apply power PRINTER BUSY EXIT P int t t Reset int ERROR Page printer not rese eset page printer Copy tray not out Pull out copy tray Error message PAGE Paper jammed Check paper path Clear paper path PRINTER TIMEOUT ERROR r uonejos ned enuey plal v 6e6 vO vIAn MODEL 0 4 Symptom Noise bars on hard Possible Cause Display Controller PCB A14 PROBLEM CATEGORY PERIPHERALS Cont d Fault Isolation Verify Display Controller PCB is 7500 0300 00 01 Rev J or higher Solution 1 Replace Display Controller PCB A14 Reference Configuration Section 5 Peripheral not secured to EM Two locking screws loose or missing Mobile system Secure peripheral to EM with two 4 40 x 3 8 inch screws LS 8 CONTRAST con trol has no effect
475. t 26 1992 S B No UM4 123 Rev To All Field Service Personnel E C N Author David D Vega UM 4 HFC OEM Rear Cover PROBLEM Wire mesh missing from cooling slots on lower right of cover reference Figure 1 below The presence of the mesh is required to meet UL specifications CAUSE Vendor error during manufacturing of cover EFFECTIVITY HFC UM 4 systems shipped on or after March 1 1992 but before June 29 1992 Systems shipped during this time may or may not have the wire mesh SOLUTION On a next call or next PM basis whichever comes first verify wire mesh is present If it is no action is required If it is not order the following part numbers and replace upon receipt of parts ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 1 1065 1169 01 Bezel OEM Module Rear UM 4 1 2 4100 0327 Label Image Printer UM 4 1 3 4100 0352 Label Video Out 1 4 4100 0353 Label OEM warning 1 5 4100 0274 Label Sys Acc Equip Warning 1 6 1064 0304 Data Comm Blanking Panel 1 7 9901 0015 Double sided Foam Tape 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 45 7 Service Bulletins AS REQUIRED ITEM 6 01 SVCB 014 01 Figure 1 UM4 07 46 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UT PLAC P N 1543 0 CREPLACES
476. t ECG machine If the heart rate at the time of image capture reads O i e ifthere is no ECG input the heart rate reading will not appear on the captured image when it is recalled from disk even if the heart rate display was enabled during capture When the ECG signal is removed the last heart rate reading will remain displayed The heart rate reading is updated only when heartbeats are detected when the ECG signal is restored and QRS peaks are detected the system will resume updating the heart rate display Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06A 3 6A CAD Operating Notes Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images continued If the real time image is frozen while the system is armed for capture the heart rate displayed is the real time rate not the rate at the time the image was frozen The heart rate should not be used to assist in diagnosis of the frozen image However this does not apply to captured images subsequently played back frame by frame In certain instances the gray scale on the captured image may not match the gray scale during real time scanning Use the GREY softkey on the Setup panel to calibrate the gray scale to the real time image before performing an image capture On an image captured from the VCR the image brightness and contrast may differ from the VCR image Re calibrate the gray scale while in VCR playback Tapes vary greatly in playback quality and may require re calibration even on the same recording
477. t R48 R103 until retrace lines disappear 6 Set BRIGHTNESS to minimum Verify screen is blanked 7 Repeat steps 2 6 as needed until the monitor meets criteria in steps 4 and 6 8 Rotate CONTRAST and BRIGHT NESS fully Verify displayed image responds smoothly 9 Repeat steps 1 8 as needed 10 Replace polaroid filter and adjust CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS for best possible image NOTE Horizontal Centering Horizontal Width and Aspect Ratio adjustments are inter active Repeat until all are within specifica tions 3 6 3 Horizontal Centering 1 Verify image is correctly positioned on the display 2 Adjust using Horizontal Centering pot R32 R73 or Horizontal Phase pot R73 and the CRT deflection rings 3 6 4 Horizontal Width 1 Verify image width is correct The first numeral in the date upper left corner of display and the 96 or T in PRE SET lower right corner of display must be visible when viewed straight on and within 0 05 inches of edge when viewed straight on 2 Adjust L1 until the criteria in step 1 are met 3 Repeat Centering and Width adjust ments until satisfactory Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Adjustments 3 LI 24 VOLT IN
478. t may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation 7 While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system 7 The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling UM4 06 6 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 05 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 28 03 and 28 04 Rev C June 3 1991 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls 7 When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This oc
479. t roll when the VCR is in forward or reverse search If the monitor rolls adjust R2 R52 Vertical Frequency until the image is stable in both search modes Turn off system power and replace monitor cover 3 7 A V Module Figure 3 8 1 Remove A V Module from cart Sec tion 2E Remove cover on the A V Module enclosure Connect DVM to test point TP4 and chassis ground Connect A V Module to line power Set system power to ON Adjust R5 Figure 3 8 for 12 5 0 01 volts Power supply load is not required UM4 03 11 3 Adjustments m d TP4 12 5 0 01 Volts cte Vas c12 M e cu e 8 3 18 17 Q C7 8 fre i it i 0 4 03 12 A N MODULE POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT SIDE 01 503 06 01 Figure 3 8 Module Power Supply Adjustment Locations Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Adjustment Monitor Arm Tension Table 3 2 UM 4 Adjustment Summary Measurement Location Tension nuts 2 Requirement Tighten to dampen move ment Component Adjustments 3 Power Supply 45V 5V jack on power supply 5 25V 0 052 5 2V minimum 5V pot Ref W3 3 Tbl 3 1 6 6 jacks on 6 00V 0 06V 6V pots
480. tches The numbers on the switch package itself denote the switches 4 5 1 TM Mode TM Combo Test Switches Figure 4 3 and Figure 4 4 Test Switches S1 4 T1 S1 3 T2 and 51 3 T3 of SW1 on the TM mode and TM Combo PCBs inject test patterns into the inputs from the Pulse Processor and ECG box and the output of the M mode Scan Converter respectively Their physical and electrical locations are shown in Figure 4 3 and Figure 4 4 TM MODE PCB 01 ESO4 A03 01 Figure 4 3 TM mode Test Switch Location Component side UM4 04 3 4 Fault Isolation MODE SCAN CONVER DISPLAY DATA ACQUISI TON GAMMA m MEMORY DEC IMAT ION DISPLAY CORRECT I ON AND gt ELI DISPLAY AND FILTER S MEMORY B MUX NUN CONTROLLER Sw A PROCESSOR SCROLL ECG CONTROL PROCESS ING RATE DATA FROM SYSTEM CONTROLLER SCROLLING ECG PATTERN WHEN OPEN ECG ON OFF VERTICAL GRAY SCALE PATTERN HORIZONTAL GRAY SCALE PATTERN 01 ESO4 BO 01 Figure 4 4 TM mode Test Switch Diagram UM4 04 4 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 4 Fault Isolation Test One T1 Acquisition Data Input to TM mode TM Combo PCB This test injects a horizontal gray scale pat tern into the input of the Scan Co
481. te a line feed after each carriage return as stated in the manual An analysis report may be inadvertently printed to the report printer even though the report menu is not displayed When the analysis module is active pressing the letter o on the keyboard will send an Openline Access report to the printer This is normal operation 7 While in any analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system 7 The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling German Software only 7 When you first select UNGUELT TASTE while in Kalk the system displays an invalid response To get the desired response press UNGUELT TASTE again Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 15 6 Operating Notes Ultramarkr 4PLUS Ultrasound System 4707 0001 08 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 30 05 January 24 1992 The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are incl
482. ted on solderable posts cut the leads of R225 as close to the body of the resistor as possible and use the leads to mount the resistor in Step 3 3 Replace R225 with a 237 OHM resistor 2820 0074 4 Replace Doppler Acquisition shield 5 Using 4 100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as 01 COMMENTS This change renders the PCB DADA compatible 0 4 09 34 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 SHIELD BODY 01 509 08 01 Figure VI 7500 0346 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 35 9 Reference 7500 0273 XX 2 D SC INTERFACE PCB CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS The following page describes how to down convert this PCB for 14 22 15 23 for Int l or 10 60 11 61 for Int l to a non CAD or 23X software type The 22 23 60 61 are equivalent to the 14 15 10 11 except for a pixel dropout fix The 14 15 is a new Fab and is equivalent to the 10 11 The 10 11 is the same as the 08 09 except that the sample clock is synchronized to the dis play This is a CAD change and is compatible only with 23X software The 08 09 is equivalent to the 06 07 The following chart is a synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure VII for PCB layout 7500 0273 XX 2
483. tem Many cus tomers find the lack of the utility tray unacceptable SOLUTION This Service Bulletin provides templates for drilling holes in the EM Rear Bezel so that the utility tray can be mounted at the rear of the EM NOTE Order the following parts ONLY if your customer specifically complains about the lack of a storage tray Do not initiate this order on your own The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a solution for dissatisfied customers not to generate parts orders These items will be expensed ALL ORDERS MUST BE APPROVED BY YOUR AREA MANAGER Order the following parts In a Lenzar upgrade situation the Storage Tray will already be on site Use this tray instead of ordering a new one PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 1064 0369 01 Mtg Brackets for Front Storage Bin 1516 0005 Phillips Screws 6 1560 0017 Washer 6 1066 0176 01 Storage Utility Tray SPECIAL EQUIPMENT Drill with 9 64 bit INSTRUCTIONS 1 Remove the Rear Bezel of the UM 4 EM retain hardware 2 Carefully cut the drill templates from the attached sheet 3 Apply the drill templates as shown in the figure on the following page They fit between the support ribs on the inside of the EM Rear Bezel Note from the templates that they should be LEFT and TOP JUSTIFIED Using a punch or nail punch locating holes in the inside of the Rear Bezel as indicated on the templates Drill a total of four 9 64 holes in the Rear Bezel Secure the Utility Tray
484. tem because no help function is implemented The PV setup G6 area of the user default menu includes the following line Averaging mode no Because averaging is not an option in the PV calculation mode this line is accurate although its inclusion in the user default menu may give the erroneous impression that averaging is an option If you change the frequency of the MFI scanhead after the system has timed out due to inactivity the system is unable to recognize the new frequency Before changing scanhead frequency take the system out of the time out mode by pressing any key as instructed by the message displayed on the screen If both MFI and 10PV scanheads are connected to your system using the MFI after the 10PV will cause erratic operation To avoid this condition do not use these scanheads on the system at the same time 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected insi
485. tems It is compatible only with the 7500 0373 05 motherboard The 05 is essentially the released version of this PCB The following chart is a synopsis of the differences between the different dash levels Refer to Figure VIII for PCB layout 7500 0411 XX 07 08 01 05 12 MHz Sync Non Sync Non Sync JP10 2 3 1 2 N A JP11 NOT CONNECTED CONNECTED N A Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 39 9 Reference PCB REWORK SHEET HARDWARE X SOFTWARE PCB PART NUMBER PCB NOMENCLATURE 7500 0411 XX TM MODE AUX COMBO A12 PCB From 07 08 To NON SYNC System UM 4 Date 2 9 89 PARTS REQUIRED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY 3100 0660 HEADER JUMPER 1 4100 0092 LABEL BLANK 1 REWORK INSTRUCTIONS 1 Install a header jumper at JP11 see Figure VIII 2 Move the jumper connector at Pins 2 and 3 of JP10 to Pins 1 and 2 of JP10 3 Using 4100 0092 label or any available small blank stick on label mark the board as Sync near the dash level indicator COMMENTS This change renders the PCB as a Non Sync type with its own independent clock UM4 09 40 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Reference 9 01 509 10 01 Figure VIII 7500 0411 XX Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 09 41 Table 9A 1 OEMs
486. than one sheet 0 Fig ure 8 x Sheet 2 of 3 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Index Number Index No The index number or locater number cross references a particular item part or subassembly found in an illustration with its part number and description in the table ATL Part Number ATL Part No This column lists the ATL part number for an item The number should be used whenever an order is being made lf instead of a dash number e g 03 the part number ends with the correct dash number must be located using the Configuration section Instructions are included there to aid in the proper selection of circuit boards and software If an item does not include a part number this indicates that the item is included for reference butis nota field replaceable part Description The name of the item or part is listed here The description column also provides a breakdown of the equipment into its assemblies subassemblies individual component parts and attached parts through the use of bulleted indentures The indentures show the relationship of parts to their next higher assemblies Top assemblies or items with no replaceable parts stand alone no bul lets UM4 08 1 8 Replaceable Parts Parts components or subassemblies of top assemblies are indented by one bul let these parts are included in the next higher assembly but can be ordered separately Parts or componen
487. the monitor arm at this time If monitor is not mounted arm can spring upwards and cause injury 3 Remove part boxes from around sys tem 4 Unbolt and remove two rail braces secured with wingnuts on inside 5 Unlock casters Roll system back wards to edge of pallet and lower sys tem to floor A ramp may be provided for HFC systems 6 Continue with paragraph 2B 4 3 Pre liminary Inspection Old Style Container UM4 02B 6 1 Cut steel bands around container and remove staples securing carton to pal let or remove the wingnuts WARNING Do not remove bands securing the monitor arm at this time If the monitor is not mounted the arm can spring upwards and cause injury 2 Lift carton or wood panels off UM 4 pallet 3 If the monitor is packed in a separate carton cuttape band securing monitor carton to cart and remove carton Take care not to drop monitor 4 Thefootswitch assembly is wrapped in cardboard and stapled to the pallet be neath the cart Pull staples remove package and take footswitch assem bly out of its packing 5 Release the plywood ramp and lay ramp edge against pallet edge Figure 2B 3 6 Using a socket or impact wrench with 9 16 inch socket remove bolts from blocks securing cart and remove blocks 7 Gently roll UM 4 off the pallet and down the ramp 8 Continue with paragraph 2B 4 3 Pre liminary Inspection 2B 4 3 Preliminary Inspection 1 Inventory system c
488. the lenses and the CRT face Verify thatthe camera video is properly terminated and that the rear panel switches are properly set Verify the voltage levels are within specification on the 5 20 15 and 15 volt power supplies Verify the integrity of the lithium bat tery Photograph all system modalities and verify proper video alignment Listen for signs of mechanical problems UM4 02D 9 2D 14 15 16 Preventive Mainenance Inspect the customer s film cassettes for physical soundness Review MIC images with operator for their approval If the operator has expressed a con cern over camera drift use the follow ing procedure to isolate the problem at the camera the film or the processor a After the images have been adjusted to user preference take two exposures Do not develop the film b Put the cassette away where it won t be used C Later if the user reports camera drift verify the original settings and reinsert the cassette into the cam era d Advance past the first two expo sures e Expose positions three and four f Developthe film If the camera has drifted positions 1 and 2 will be dif ferent from 3 and 4 If the problem is in either the film or the processor all exposures will be the same 2D 6 4 Lenzar Photo Module 1 2 Clean and inspect external covers and the air filter Verify the integrity of the interconnect cable assembly and power cable U
489. the screen White noise may be heard from the speakers Press DOPSET Press DEL UP and verify thatthe periodic update ofthe 2D image halts Pressing DEL UP again should delete the 2D image and pressing it a third time should restore the image and updating Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C Press RETRN Verify that pressing W FIL causes the display annotation for the wall filter to sequence through the following settings 50 100 200 400 800 and 1600 Hz Verify that VEL INC and VEL DEC change the scale annotated on the right side of the display in the corre sponding direction Press BASE and verify that the base line shifts from its default position through a series of eight positions one per keystroke Leave the baseline in a position other than its original position Press DOPSET On the Doppler Set ting panel press ZERO and verify that the baseline returns to its original default position Press SWEEP and verify that the scrolling display changes to one of three speeds with each key depres sion Turn up the system volume control located on the right side of the human factors cart and the left front corner of the UM 4PV and UM 4CV and verify that white noise is heard Tapping lightly on the front end of the scanhead should modulate this noise Press the 2D TM footswitch The Main panel is called up and Doppler acquisi tion ceases Ifa CW stat
490. the wires to the left count up to pin 11 solid white wire Extract the wire from the connector and continue to pin 18 white and yel low striped wire Extract the wire from the connector move the white and yel low wire to pin 11 and the white wire to pin 18 Swap the wires on one side ofthe cable only Mark the cable 3500 0674 02 I 18 WHITE YELLOW 11 WHITE NOTE REVERSE WIRES FOR 02 ASSEMBLY Ol 5 055 01 Figure 1 Cable Assembly Dual Access to Motherboard P N 3500 0674 01 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 43 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES BM WITH PARTS YES BM PAGE 1 OF 1 Date July 27 1992 S B No UM4 122 Rev To All Field Service Personnel E C N Author David D Vega UM 4 Fan Module Wiring PROBLEM Fan 5 inside Fan Module is miswired causing it to not operate CAUSE Assembly error during manufacturing EFFECTIVITY UM 4 systems both HFC and Small Cart shipped on or between June 1 and June 15 1992 SOLUTION On a next call or next PM basis whichever comes first verify fan 5 is operating If it is not correct fan 5 as follows 01 5 009 01 1 UM4 07 44 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 WITH ATTACHMENTS YES BM WITH PARTS YES BM PAGE 1 OF 1 Date Augus
491. then unfreeze to recover ECG stops scrolling in 2D mode The sector image splits at the center one half live the other memorex or random data Reduced 2D sector over lay on the top left corner of the scrolling mode is turned off From 2D ECG mode press RETURN twice Annular array split image IVT wavy image IVT lateral jerk Identify symptoms Install Motor Controller adaptive software kit 8000 0313 01 12X with TP 10 Thermal Printer installed Delay in keyboard response This delay is normal None 12X and higher Random lock ups in vari ous modes with random error messages displayed on the screen Identify symptoms Order and replace the smart A V module 7500 0143 10 Loss of audio Check VCR power Switch Turn VCR power switch ON Verify the VCR cab ling A V to VCR and the audio cable from the E M to the A V Correct the VCR cabling A V to VCR and the audio cable from the E M to the A V UM4 05A 20 Improper initialization sys tem message NO XDR and the sector image area has a checkerboard pat tern The IVT is the only scan head connected or the IVT is the default scan head Select the IVT scan head from the Control Module Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Section 6 Operating Notes Operating Notes Start on the next page Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 06 1 6 Operating Notes Ultramarkr
492. ting Notes Ultramarkr 4 CAD Ultrasound System 4707 0010 02 OPERATING NOTES Software Build 24 17 July 6 1989 Rev A The purpose of these Operating Notes is to identify for users any known anomalies or ambiguities relating to system functionality and behavior and to provide wherever appropriate explanation and suggestions The following information is arranged according to the sections in the Operations Manual that are affected by the described phenomenon These notes are informational they are included here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls The CI STR softkey stores a Cineloop image onto the hard disk if one is present in video memory though the descriptive title is not used An easier method of storing Cineloop images isto use the rightmost footswitch after acquiring the images M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image Doppler Acquisition When CW mode activating VCR framegrabber then returning to CW causes a change in the frequency or velocity scale Remember to reset scaling after VCR playback Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a fram
493. ting Trays Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Replaceable Parts 8 Table 8 7 Audio Video Module Assembly ATL Part No Description 8 7 4000 0143 xx Audio Video Module NOTE 7he 4000 0144 10 with switch and the 12 without switch are not interchangeable Refer to the Replace ment Matrix for correct replacement part numbers 1 Chassis A V Module Binding Post Metal 6 32 Line Filter 6A 120 250 VAC Rocker Switch DPST 16A 250 VAC Fuseholder 5x20 mm Panel Mount 2700 0066 Fuse 800 mA Extra Slo Blo 250V 2700 0064 Fuse 400 mA Extra Slo Blo 250V Fuse Block 10 5x2 2700 0066 Fuse 800 mA Extra Slo Blo 250V 2700 0061 Fuse 5A Slo Blo 250 V Transformer PCB Motherboard PCB Power Supply Bezel Cover Enclosure Insulator Cover Plate Mounting PCB Stereo Interface PCB Digital Interface PCB VCR Interface Repl Dig Interface PCB Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 08 21 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 8 Data Communications Module Assembly ATL Part No Description 4000 0158 xx Data Comm Module 4000 0159 xx Data Comm Module Chassis Assy Data Comm Switch Rocker Post Binding Receptacle Male w EMI Filter Power Supply Assy Transformer Power Power Supply 2700 0058 ee Fuse 1 6 A Slo Blo o0 GOO N
494. tional Equipment Module OEM UM4 02E 1 2E Mechanical Procedures If the system does not have a CAD Module installed skip to step 4e a b Pull Remove CAD front bezel Remove the screws on the lower front of the CAD Mod and slide it forward slightly Disconnect the power cord and the data cables Remove the CAD Mod and set it aside Remove internal video printer or Photo Module Disconnect any external devices connected to the system noting where each is connected On the back of the EM remove the cable cover and disconnect all the cables at the EM Rear Panel PCB noting where each is connected out the slidelocks located between the OEM and the EM Figure 2E 2 Ensure that the keyboard support and the monitor arm are in the fully raised positions Use correct lifting techniques to avoid personal injury and remove the OEM by lifting it straight up Set the OEM assembly aside being careful to not crush or pinch any cables 5 Remove Rail Assemblies UM4 02E 2 CAUTION Do not remove the cable tray while the EM Rail assembly rests on the casters Doing so will cause the chassis to bend necessitating replacement of the chassis NOTE lowing a Refer to Figure 2E 3 for the fol Turn the EM Rail assembly upside down to rest on its top Remove the cable tray or Lenzar rail strap Remove the screws securing the cable tray or rail strap to the rail assemblies Remove th
495. tions outlined in the System Specifications sheet 2 To verify the presence of a dedicated line have the facility representative open the circuit breaker and with a DVM or the three wire test plug check other outlets and hard wired devices in the immediate area for loss of power NOTE Another method of verifying a dedicated line is to have the facility repre sentative measure the current draw of the line at the distribution panel with the sys tem off There should be no current flow at this time 3 Verify the proper wiring of the outlet using a three wire test plug This plug also tests for the presence of a ground but it cannot detect neutral ground reversals 4 Inform the facility representative of the current draw of the system and its acceptable voltage range It is the responsibility of the facility representa tive to determine the proper size of the wire based upon the length ofthe feed 5 Using your DVM atthe outlet measure the hot neutral hot ground and neu 4 02 4 tral ground voltages with a compara ble load for example another ultrasound system on the line If a facility representative is not avail able skip to step 7 To determine line loss if a facility representative is avail able perform the following steps a Have the facility representative mea sure the voltage at the primary of the line s circuit breaker in the distribution sub panel b Measure the voltage at the
496. to be changed prior to scanning SOLUTION Change the default settings for these scanheads to the settings shown in the table below using the following procedure CAUTION fthe System Controller PCB or U6 have been replaced remember to check the settings and to change the settings as necessary NOTE The settings are stored on the System Controller EEPROM U6 After release of the revised test procedure Manufacturing personnel will make the changes prior to the shipment of new systems CLA 76mm CLA 11 40mm Array IVT Setting Dynamic Range Change To Setting Dynamic Range Change To Power Power Reject Reject Edge Edge Grey 3 Grey 3 Smooth 2 not F2 Smooth 2 not F2 Focal Zones 3 amp 4 center of sector Focal Zones 3 4 amp 5 bottom of sector Depth Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 180mm Depth 110mm UM4 07 79 7 Service Bulletins PROCEDURE 1 With the system turned on select either the CLA 76mm or the Array IVT scanhead 2 Change the Dynamic Range Power Reject Edge Grey and Smooth set tings NOTE The CLA 76 and the Array IVT each have a total of 5 focal zones Start ing at the apex the zones are numbered 1 2 3 4 and 5 3 Press the focal zone button to select zone 1 and zone 2 4 Use the trackball to move the focal zone selection to zones 3 and 4 The process is similar for selecting zones 3 4
497. to perform an on site inspection thirty days or more prior to system installation it is not always possible For those accounts in which travel is excessive or costly or in the event that you are given less than three weeks notice before system delivery exercise good judgement in determining if you will do a site evaluation prior to installation In either case conduct some of the site eval UM4 02A 1 2A Pre Installation Requirements uation over the telephone completing it at installation In all cases the Site Evalua tion FSR must be completed NOTE You required to perform a pre site evaluation prior to installation if given three weeks notice and the customer is within reasonable travelling distance To assist you through the proper flow of the pre installation process including how the pre instal lation action items will be com pleted a flow chart has been incorporated into the Site Evaluation FSR As you step through the process circle the action items contained in this flow chart When you make your initial call to the cus tomer include the following steps 1 Introduce yourself 2 Thank the customer for purchasing an ATL ultrasound system 3 Confirm the system delivery date Ask your customer if this date is acceptable and if they have any special needs or requirements 4 Explain the intent of the site evalua tion 5 Schedule an appointment for the site evaluation 6 Requestthat
498. to select a transducer frequency 3 Press DUPLEX The M line is super imposed on the 2D display The sam ple volume flow volume are positioned on top of the M line 4 Rotate the trackball from side to side and verify that the M line moves in response 5 Rotate the trackball from front to back and verify that the sample volume flow volume cursor moves up and down the M line in response Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual If the scanhead connected has Dop pler arm press LCLRMT and verify that the controls on the scanhead operate the M line and the sample vol ume flow volume cursor Press LCLRMT again to return control to the system Verify that ANG LT and ANG rotate the flow cursor in the corresponding direction and that the angle annotation on the screen changes in 2 degree increments Also verify that in special function mode the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard rotate the flow cursor continuously when pressed and held Operate SV INC and SV DEC controls on the Duplex panel and verify that the sample volume cursor can be sequenced up and down through eight sizes and that the display contains the appropriate annotation for each size The sizes are 1 5 2 0 3 0 5 0 10 15 20 and 25 mm Press DOP or PDOP on the Duplex panel Doppler acquisition should begin a spectral display is scrolled across the screen while a reduced 2D image is displayed in the upper left cor ner of
499. to suppress the bounce If you install a replacement footswitch part number 3500 0486 00 the System CPU needs to be at one of the following rev levels 12 64 65 or 66 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 55 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES BM WITH PARTS YES NO a a Y P 1 Y Service Bulletin G Date March 26 1993 S B No UM4 132 Rev To All Field Service Personnel Hot Tip 93 22 A Author Paul Peterson Dave Vega M C R 93 03 07 UM 4 30 X Software and Scanhead Compatibility Issues This Service Bulletin supercedes New Product Bulletins NPB 70 and NPB 70Rev A EFFECTIVITY UM 4 Systems Configured with Scanheads PROBLEM Possible misconfiguration of UM 4 systems with scanheads CAUSE Several revisions to software for MFI scanhead support SOLUTION Verify software levels of UM 4 systems with MFI scanheads Use the lt CTRL gt L function to verify software that levels are at least PCB Software Minimum Part Number Dash Number s lt CTRL gt L Code Pulse Processor 7500 0370 08 09 P22405 or higher 24 25 26 27 P22707 or higher 3500 1261 01 P22707 or higher 3500 1262 01 P22707 or higher System Controller 7500 0312 30 08 or higher Motor Controller 7500 0348 482406 or higher 22 If replacing a 7500 0370 08 09 DO NOT order a 24 25 26 27 or a 7500 1261 62 You will discover that the software
500. to the camera with the loaded side toward the cam era and remove the dark slide The camera display should now read EXP 1 Press and hold PROGRAM P and press DECREMENT to display USER 8 then release PROGRAM Turn the UM 4 OFF for one minute then turn it ON again Once EXP 1 is again displayed press and hold PROGRAM to verify that the camera is still set to USER 8 While still holding PROGRAM press DECREMENT to change to USER 1 UM4 02C 28 Using PROGRAM ADVANCE DECREMENT and INCREMENT as before set parameters to the recom mended values in Table 2C 11 Press EXPOSE to make a test expo sure Change brightness to B70 and make another exposure by pressing PRINT on the UM 4 Control Module Make exposures at B60 50 and 40 using the PRINT footswitch on the UM 4 Process the film and inspect for proper exposure image sharpness and cor rect image positioning on the film If the camera does not work properly refer to the Lenzar 2100 section of the Cameras Field Service Manual Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Performance Tests 2C Alphanumeric Di r Power Swi tch Expose 9 mM Program Decrement Viewpoint Advance 01 502 11 01 Figure 2C 6 Lenzar Multi lmage Camera
501. ton tape is intended to insulate DFT signal runs lands on the Motherboard from the copper tape GND UM 4 HFC and Small Cart Systems shipped between September 10 1991 and April 6 Solution Repair the Motherboard on the next PM next call or upon failure Domestic U S Customer Support Represen tatives CSRs who have affected UM 4 HFC systems in their area will receive the necessary parts to complete the rework ATL P N 8000 8055 0837 01 International personnel need to order ATL part number 8000 0837 01 Estimated time for repair will be less than replacing the chassis or Motherboard Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 AS KAPTON TAPE PTON TAP ERBOARD DFT SIGNAL RUNS ERBOARD DFT SIGNAL RUNS 01 SVCB 026 02 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 53 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES NO WITH PARTS YES NO L a Y Y S ervice Bulletin G Date March 12 1993 S B UM4 130 Rev A To Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Robert Elder David D Vega Limited Monitor Platform Swivel on UM 4 HFC This service bulletin supercedes UM4 130 EFFECTIVITY Problem Symptom The monitor platform is not able to swivel as far to the right as it does to the left UM4 07 54 Possible C
502. tor Controller 7500 0304 7500 0348 7500 0517 2C 8 1 2C 9 1 2C 10 2C 11 for CAD systems only 2D Scan Converter 7500 0273 7500 0314 7500 0315 3500 1413 14 7500 0778 3500 1425 26 7500 0798 2C 4 2C 7 2C 8 1 2C 9 4 TM Mode 7500 0322 2C 4 2C 9 2C 9 1 2C 9 2 2C 9 3 2C 13 TM Auxiliary 7500 0374 2C 9 2C 9 1 2C 9 2 2C 9 3 2C 9 3 1 TM Combo 7500 041 1 2C 4 2C 9 2C 9 1 2C 9 2 2C 9 3 2 13 Display Controller 3500 1409 10 7500 0300 2C 3 2C 4 2 6 2C 7 2C 8 2 2C9 1 2C 9 2 2C 9 3 2C 9 4 2C 10 System Controller UM4 02C 2 7500 0312 2C 3 2C 8 2 2C 6 2C 9 4 2C 9 2 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 2C 4 Power Up and Initialization Test The initial setup procedure consists of turning on power observing the initializa tion routine verifying system configuration using the hidden defaults lt CTRL gt L and the customer order acknowledgement testing the user interface with the control panel test and adjusting the moni tor for optimal viewing The following test requires careful observation of the system during its pow er up and boot up routines a successful boot is indicated by a sector or linear dis play appearing on the monitor with all graphic annotations present refer to Figure 2C 1 or Figure 2C 2 If the sys tem successfully completes its power up routine it can be assumed that the follow ing p
503. trol Panel Test j SUNG aet acit tee cete j Keyboard j j Interactive Display j ECG Test eco ops j Dedicated pushbuttons j Trigger eu j Footswitches j Doppler j Trackball j ers acras 1 Miscellaneous Controls Access Doppler Arm j AD Tesla used tad oi ee j Angle Control j Gain Output and Depth j Sample Volume j Pan Zoom j Update j ji 74 E D j Doppler Measurements j System Defaults j Cineloop j Monitor j ias j Graphics j Framegrabber j Contrast j Microphone Dub j Brightness j Audio Speakers j Linearity Aspect Ratio j Internal Hardcopy j Mechanical Scanheads j External Hardcopy j Scanhead Control j Report Printer j Image Quality j Data Comm j Spatial Accuracy j Storage Retrieval j Linear Scanheads j GAD ste j Scanhead Control j VCR Cineloop Capture j Image Quality j Report Printer j Spatial Accuracy j Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 02C 39 Section 2D Preventive Maintenance 2D 1 Introduction The Preventive Maintena
504. ts Cont d Preventive Maintenance Adhesives Paints and Lubricants Preventive Maintenance 2D Lenzar lithium battery 6009 0056 0 1 Tri Flow lubricant 2301 0565 0 1 White grease 198 18411 0 0 Lenzar fan shield Sony 811 thermal head 6014 0018 0 1 6005 0137 0 1 General purpose lubricant Peripheral Parts and Supplies Part Description 198 12226 0 0 Part Sony 850 thermal head 6029 0009 0 1 Sony 811 door 6005 0111 01 Sony 850 door 6029 0049 0 1 Sony cleaning sheets 2100 0506 0 1 UM 4 Replacement Parts and Sup plies Mitsubishi cleaning sheets 2100 0519 0 1 Parts Description Part AA battery 2100 0121 Lens paper 2100 0283 keyboard shocks 2950 0188 Lens cleaning fluid 2301 0344 Lens static brush 2100 0277 UM4 ECG leads 2275 0231 0 1 Matrix servo pot 198 16200 0 0 ZIF connector cover 118 27182 0 1 Matrix dark slide switch 198 16239 0 0 CRT wiper sheets 6005 0597 0 1 Matrix cassette switch Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 198 16238 0 0 UM 4A Power Dist Assy 3500 1094 0 4 UM 4A Rear Panel cover 1065 1689 0 2 Foam tape 18 in 2210 0135 Keyboard label 4100 0719 0 2 Ferrite pot core 2604 0041 0 1 UM4 02D 3 2D Preventive Mainenance 2D 5 Procedure For every PM
505. ts VPWR to Medium Value for Mid Range Pulse Output Level Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 37 5 Configuration A2 Beamformer Front End PCB HFC 4APLUS PCBs 7500 0288 REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 8X 40mm CVA AIVT 0288 61 62 60 UM 4A PCBs CV PV only 7500 0288 XX 3 R R Y Y 0288 60 R NOTE There are no PROMs or Jumpers for Beamformer Front End UM4 05 38 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual A3 Beamformer Focus PCB Configuration 5 HFC 4APLUs PCBs 7500 0361 7500 0549 XX REPLACEMENT LEVEL FEATURE COMPATIBILITY 0361 07 10 0549 03 UM 4A PCBs OB CV PV only 7500 0361 XX 0361 07 10 1 7500 0548 XX 0549 XX and 0370 24 25 UM 4PLus PCBs The 0548 0549 PCBs must be used together NOTE There are no PROMs for Beam former Focus PCB NOTE There are no jumpers 7500 0549 XX Jumpers PCB C N G oL T 01 ESO5 A03 BEAMFORMER FOCUS A3 7500 0320 XX 7500 0361 XX JUMPER OR SWITCH Part No 7500 0361 S2 system Normal Function Position Shorted Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 0 4 05 39 5 Configuration
506. ts of subassemblies are indented with two bullets these parts are included in the next higher assembly but can be ordered separately Where appropriate the description column also includes size tolerance type or model and material data for the part Notes Manufacturer s part numbers special applications and other information per taining to a specific part are listed in the Notes column For top assemblies contain ing replaceable parts the applicable figure or table for further breakdown of parts is also listed here 8 3 Parts Ordering Information Technical Service Representatives For parts ordering procedures ATL Cus tomer Support Representatives should refer to their Standard Operating Proce dures manual Customers Customers may order parts through a Cus tomer Support Representative or directly from the ATL Customer Service Order Pro cessing Department Contact your local ATL Customer Support Representative for the phone number Customers need to provide UM4 08 2 1 Shipping address Purchase Order number of equipment Part description s Quantity 2 3 ATL part number s 4 5 8 4 Abbreviations Abbrev A AA ACQ ADPTR ASSY AMP AWG B W BRKT CAD CAP CARD CCIR CFM CKT CM CONN CONV CV DBF DIG DOM DOP EM EFT EIA EUR Definition Ampere Annular Array Acquisition Adapter Assembly Ampere Audio Video Module American Wire Gauge Blac
507. ttachment 2950 0123 Spring Ext 1 8Dx2L K 1 67 IN SS 1064 0281 Handle Latch Release 2950 0143 Spring Comp plc u w 1517 0035 screw 2plc 1065 0305 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Latch Keyboard Support UM4 08 19 8 Replaceable Parts Table 8 6 Human Factors Module Assembly Cont d ATL Part No 2950 0016 Description Spring Tension 1065 0364 Latch Monitor Arm 2950 0130 Spring Ext 1514 0063 Screw 4 40x5 32 Req 6 flat washer 2950 0144 Spring Ext 1065 0658 01 Plate Mounting Right Side 1065 0687 01 Plate Mounting Left Side 1517 0009 Screw 6 32 x 7 16 PNH PD ST ZN 1064 0506 01 Mounting Block 1517 0093 01 Screw 8 32 x 7 16 SKH 1517 0094 01 Screw 8 32 x 1 SKH 8000 0862 01 Kit Field Installation Dampers 2950 0549 01 Damper Filled 2 Plc Rplc gas springs 1065 2336 01 Label Pin Retention 2 1065 2193 01 Clevis Pin 2 1065 0292 Spacer Monitor Upper 1065 0411 01 Lower Thrust Washer 1520 0004 Set Screw Plate Lower Platform Monitor Screw 6 32x3 8 PHN w Lock Washer 1543 0002 Keps Nut 10 32 2 plc Keps rplcs 1563 0061 Belleville cone washers 1543 0001 Nut Standard 10 32 2 plc 2301 0194 0 4 08 20 For Moun
508. turing VCR images When the system is armed for capture of VCR images pressing the softkeys on the VCR softkey panel or VCR front panel controls may intermittently cause the display monitor to blank If this occurs press STOP and then PLAY to resume operation Do not capture images when the system is in Dual image mode and the trigger is on If an image displayed on the monitor in an inverted black on white format is stored using the STORE softkey that image will always be white on black when recalled In rare occasions the CAD functions may appear to lock up and a Press control P message may be presented If unsaved images on the hard disk DO NOT press lt CTRL gt P which is command to clear all images off the hard disk Instead turn off the power wait about 30 seconds then turn power on again Then pressing the CAD softkey will permit you access to the images that were on the hard disk at the time of the fault Capturing a static CW Doppler spectral display as the first image captured since power up may result in an abnormal image or display mode If this occurs capture a 2 D image first then return to static CW Doppler to capture the Doppler spectral display During image capture when the hard disk is full a message Press any key is displayed but pressing the keyboard has no effect Press any softkey to resume operation When recalling exercise images the recall menu may read exercise 08F page 256x1
509. u connect only one microphone to either CH1 or CH2 MIC input jacks of the VCR you will record on both channels For audio dubbing use CH2 MIC input UM4 07 20 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Service Bulletins 7 9 5 2 SIDE U gt Z lt gt e na Gol 855000 AUDIO IN SELECT CAMERA NORM CAMERA MIC MIC zu LINE OFF TOGGLE FROM Ta LINE TO MIC e SET TO LINE AUDIO SELECTOR SWITCH FRONT PANEL 2 2 Tee D Hill lli E 01 5 052 01 1 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 07 21 7 Service Bulletins WITH ATTACHMENTS YES L1 NO WITH PARTS YES L1 NO E Service Bulletin PAGE 1 OF5 Date March 6 1990 S B UM4 91 Rev A To All Field Service Personnel E C N No Author Dennis Kracht UM 4 Chassis Subassemblies and Their Compatibility PROBLEM Confusion in identifying different levels of chassis assemblies CAUSE There are so many different levels of chassis assemblies it is hard to id
510. ual mode then returning to single mode and inverting the video may cause the gray bar display to be inverted Reselect B W Invert to correct Doppler Acquisition During Doppler acquisition at angles greater than 80 degrees the Doppler velocity can exceed the capacity of the screen display for Doppler measure ments Storing and Recalling Ultrasound Images The message CAD module fault may appear on the monitor display when first pressing the CAD softkey or when other softkeys are pressed rapidly When the ECG signal is removed the last heart rate reading will remain dis played The heart rate reading is updated only when heartbeats are detected when the ECG signal is restored and QRS peaks are detected the system will resume updating the heart rate display Exiting the CAD mode pressing RETRN from the CAD softkey panel without first storing captured images onto the hard disk causes those unstored images to be permanently erased Vascular Analysis Module Pressing 3 while in the Vascular Analysis menu called Spectral Trace displays the Spectral Area menu The spectral window result is labeled as being in units of or meters The result should have no label of units Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Known Problems Known problems are identified in the Oper ating Notes and Errata document part number 4707 0010 02 24 17 software UM 4CAD 25X 25X replaces 24X
511. uded here to clarify certain system responses that might be erroneous or otherwise cause operator misunderstanding or difficulty System Controls On hardkey and softkey systems with dual linear when the user power up default is set to linear the scanhead select must be pressed twice to select the right array scanhead After selecting it once the scanhead select works normally On hardkey and softkey systems a transducer must be active prior to using the remainder ofthe system controls When printing an image the measurement cursors are not always printed This occurs because the cursors blink and the print control was pressed while the cursors were off Press the print control only when the cursors are shown on the screen Although the Q key on the system keyboard is labeled HELP pressing CTRL Q or Special Function Q has no effect on the system because no help function is implemented The PV setup G6 area of the user default menu includes the following line Averaging mode no Because averaging is not an option in the PV calculation mode this line is accurate although its inclusion in the user default menu may give the erroneous impression that averaging is an option 2 D Acquisition Image positioning may seem erratic when changing the image size using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan
512. uey 9IAJ8S p j 1 VS0 vIAn Bmfrmer Controller Motor Controller A15 System Controller NOTES on 10 rev level 7500 0324 7500 0362 7500 0304 7500 0348 7500 0312 INDIVIDUAL 8000 0178 INDIVIDUAL 8000 0178 INDIVIDUAL INDIVIDUAL 8000 0132 8000 0132 8000 0133 6220 0012 8000 0125 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Board relay out relocated IC U27 on 7500 0348 08 to U33 2 If this kit is being ordered to replace 4X software PROM P N 4201 0236 4201 0236 4201 0236 4201 0236 4201 0271 4201 0272 4201 0273 4201 0172 G for Motor Controller must also be ordered suu ls S 6 uoneinBijuoS vs vL VS0O VINn enuey 9IAJ3S 4 v ewen Ref Ref Des PCB Name PCB Part No Des Function Normal Position Beamformer Focus Beamformer Controller Pulse Processor 7500 0320 or 7500 0361 7500 0324 7500 0362 7500 0313 Table 5A 5 Jumper Matrix A B C D E F G A B C D E F G H NNN zzz I I N N NN N N N N N GY N aaa niu JUMPER OR SWITCH shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted shorted open opne open open open open open open Deleted Deleted Deleted A D located beneath shield and are hardwired suu ls S 6 uoneunDuuo enuey 9IAJ3S 4 v ewen SL VS0 VIA Table 5A 5 Jumper Matrix Cont d JUMPER OR
513. uires more than JP H change refer to Up Sync Shorted Down Rev Instructions All Open others 7500 0548 JPI Write to PROM Open Read PROM Shorted JPH Internal clock Open Non Sync External clock Shorted Sync N A Open 1 7500 0548 07 and above No field configurable jumpers Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 41 5 Configuration 7 s 9 U38 a 2d U96 U36 050 OJ U32 031 ar O UG 00 oy 01 505 04 01 BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER A4 7500 0324 XX S1 ONLY Een JPH O 2 JPJ 150 Di L ic e lo JPF 9 JPE B UPD el 01 05 5 01 BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER A4 7500 0362 05 amp higher UM4 05 42 TOP TWO PINS y2 jg J UMPERED 2 3 TT U50 e B o B JPG en JPF JPE B UPD fol BEAMFORMER CONTROLLER A4 7500 0362 04 amp Lower k j JPH O O oJ JPJ 07 p e JP NOTE NO J UMPERS o gt ON 07 amp HIGHER 01
514. ule time out error message The photo is made and the message clears by itself In changing from M line to M mode the arrow pointer graphics location changes This anomaly also occurs in 8X NOTE The problems listed below are corrected with the Motor Controller adap tive software which is actually a hardware and firmware change It consists of the fol lowing 027 change to 4201 0265 07 the addition of a capacitor between U49 6 and 7 on the Motor Con troller PCB The kit number for this modifi cation is 8000 0313 01 IVT wavy image IVT lateral jerk 17X System Controller PCB A15 software should be 17 15 01 or higher 17 15 should be purged and 8000 0125 25 software kit should be ordered as a replacement 17 15 01 Released in April of 1988 and addressed the following items While in Frame Grab mode special func tion Y now correctly enables field selec tion of odd even or both fields for viewing If notin Frame Grab special function Y changes sector width on display UM4 05A 4 e Random graphics occur with successive search operations White bar above gray scale Serial bus errors that resulted in system lockups 17 15 06 System Controller PROM Kit 8000 0125 25 provides for the following changes New Features German Cardiology calculations French language translations e Shrinking calipers Sony UP811 PRINT support Incremental depth EXPAND contro
515. uman Factors Cart HFC Cont d 1064 0591 02 Transducer Tray 1064 0363 01 S H Holder 1065 1106 02 S H Holder Generic 1064 0270 00 Handle Note 3 Monitor Assy 8 10 Repl matrix 4100 0615 01 Label Monitor UM 4 4100 0615 Label Monitor UM 4CAD 4100 0707 02 Label Monitor UM 4PLUS New Logo 7500 0548 xx Bmfrmr 4100 0313 Label Monitor SAFE TRANSPORT 4100 0278 Label BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST Note 3 Control Module 8 9 Repl matrix 1065 2478 01 Bezel Rear EM was 1064 0234 02 4100 0508 01 Label RISK CURRENT Dom 4100 0345 Label RISK CURRENT Intl 4100 4027 Label POWER FUSE Dom 4100 4049 01 Label POWER FUSE Intl 4100 0271 Label System WARNING 1064 0268 Cover Rear EM Panel 1514 0049 Screw u w 1064 0268 1065 1172 01 Bezel Front OEM 1064 0228 01 Bezel Blank w o Photo Mod 1065 1265 01 Bezel Dress w Video Printer 9901 0015 Tape Double Sided Foam u w 24a and 24b u m in 1065 0949 01 Front Cover CAD bullnose 4100 0528 01 Label UM 4CAD u w 24e 1517 0079 Screw 8 32 x 1 2 WHT u w 24e 4100 0582 01 Label UM 4CAD 1065 1169 01 Bezel Rear OEM Dom w o CAD 1065 4123 03 Bezel Rear OEM I
516. vel PCB Module or System type Codes for First Two Characters XX BF Beamformer Controller 7500 0362 XX PB Beamformer Controller 7500 0548 XX 48 Motor Controller 7500 0348 XX 04 Motor Controller 7500 0304 XX 17 Motor Conroller 7500 0517 XX p2 Pulse Processor S2 system 1 Pulse Processor S1 system dp Doppler Processor TA TM Aux or TM Aux Combo VCR Smart A V Module System Controller only 41 UM 4A English 42 UM 4A German 81 UM 4 English 82 UM 4 German 83 UM 4 French Codes for Third and Fourth Charac ters YY These are always numbers and represent the software level e g 12X 28X They are used in the replacement matrices Replacement Levels columns Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Configuration 5 Codes for Last Two Characters ZZ Codes for last two characters ZZ These indicate the revision level of the software Minor changes or improvements will roll these numbers The replacement part numbers in the PROM matrix will always be for the PROM or PROM kit of the highest revision level of that software Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual UM4 05 27 8c S0 vlA enuey 4 v Table 5 1 UM 4 Firmware Compatibility Matrix lt CTRL gt L Codes by System Software Level Module BEAMFORMER BF1100 1206 BF1611 BF1713 BF1717 1717 BF1717 0362 04 1207 1614 below 7500 0362 05 amp up PB2503 2503
517. w System integrated CAD analysis pack age Qualitative regional wall motion analysis Report generation capabilities NOTE Keyboard Inactivity Time out must be set to zero 0 to prevent lockups 27X 27 08 software was the FCD version supporting the UM 4PLus UM 4 e 27 10 software was the FCD version supporting the Mercury scanheads Duplex CW NOTE 27 10 replaced 27 08 with the release of Mercury scanheads 0 4 05 22 New Features Software biopsy guide overlays for all supported scanheads M mode and 2D with the CVA 3 5 MHz scanhead CVA 3 5 76mm M mode and 2D with the CVA 3 5 40R and CVA 5 0 40R scanheads M mode and 2D with the IVT 5 0 11R Field of View Control STEER Includes an on screen graphic of sector position for three 90 degree sectors of the IVT 5 0 11R and biopsy guide integration for this IVT array scanhead Up to 13 receive zones for array scan heads up from nine User settable preset defaults of some 2D imaging parameters for each scan head user changeable Openline Access Data Comm RS232 communication to PC NPB 47 Features Deleted AA Scanheads UM 4 Known Problems Known problems for 27 08 are identified in the Operating Notes document part number 4707 0001 03 28X 28 03 software was the FCD version first supporting Dual Linear for the UM 4PLus NOTE 28 03 supports International CAD and all features introduced by 27X software It replaces 26 X an
518. wall outlet c Calculate the percentage of voltage loss across the line using the formula A B A x 100 where A is the voltage at the circuit breaker with the system on and B is the voltage at the wall outlet with the system on If a facility representative is not avail able use the following steps to deter mine line loss a Measure the voltage at the outlet with the load on and then with the load off b Calculate the percentage of voltage loss across the line using the formula x 100 where A is the voltage at the wall out let with the system off and B is the volt age at the wall outlet with the system on Using the ONEAC line viewer and oscilloscope measure the power line noise following the procedures speci fied in the Power Primer document Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual 9 Record your observations and mea surements relative to power quality on the Site Evaluation FSR 10 Affix a Power Line Data sticker to the most qualified outlet in each of the pri mary operating areas 11 With the assistance of the facility rep resentative review the supplemental electrical survey questions on the Site Evaluation FSR 12 Circle the appropriate steps on the Pre Installation Flow Chart and note any potential difficulties 2A 8 Electrostatic Discharge The presence of electrostatic discharge ESD can cause system lock ups and reli ability problems Because it is beyond th
519. wer down the system b Lock the brake casters c Remove all scanheads and foot switches d Retain all hardware for use at reas sembly e Release the monitor arm and extend it to the fullest position f Remove the three screws securing the monitor platform cover plate and remove the cover plate to reveal the monitor cable and mounting collar g Disconnect the monitor power and video cable pull only on the con nector Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual h Remove the mounting collar secured by three Allen screws Note orientation of the collar i Remove the monitor from the mon itor platform by pulling up and away being careful to guide the cable connector through the hole Leave the monitor arm in the fully extended position 2 Remove Control Module a If the Control Module is held onto the keyboard support with screws remove the screws being careful to hold the two halves ofthe Control Module together If not pull the Control Module up from the rear then the front b Disconnect the cable from the rear ofthe Control Module Remove the Control Module and set it aside Leave the keyboard support in the raised position d Ifthe system does not have a Len zar Camera proceed to step 4 3 Remove Lenzar Camera a Disconnect the power and video control cable b Remove all screws securing the camera Figure 8 1 Sheet 4 c Remove the camera and set it aside 4 Remove Op
520. xams occurring March 1 through December 31 of a leap year add one day to the calculated EDD Vascular Analysis 7 Because of differences in vascular ratio calculations between version 32 X software and earlier versions confusion may exist at multiple system sites using more than one version of system software In systems with software prior to 32 X the ratio calculation does not take into account an angle correction factor If the angle correction factor was different between the two measured vessels the ratio must be calculated by hand See manual change 4705 0001 35 for more information on vascular ratios in systems with software priorto 32 X In systems with 32 X software the ratio calculation does take into account an angle correction factor To prevent confusion at multiple system sites where more than one version of system software may exist be sure to identify the software version of the system on which you are working by observing the system software label This label is located in the upper left corner of the lower front panel on the system Labels that read Software Level 32 indicate version 32 X software Systems without such a software label contain a previous software version The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scaling UM4 06 30 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Section 6A CAD Operating Notes Operating Notes Start
521. y analysis module pressing 2 Print Report three or more times in succession during printing or while the printer is not connected or not ready may cause the analysis module to lock up To recover press lt CTRL gt P to reset the system When printing multiple reports some reports may not start at the top of a page Before printing a report press the form feed button on the printer to ensure that each report starts at the top of a new page After completing a planimetry measurement the pan zone function can be activated causing the image to move sideways without the cursor tracing The scale does not change OB GYNr Fertility Analysis The system calculates HC AC normal range from AUA not from LMP as described in the referenced source article The displayed range will not vary significantly from the range listed in the article and diagnostic capability is not compromised by this deviation The fetal heart rate is not removed from system memory when lt CTRL gt P is pressed while in 2 D mode The previous patient s heart rate is not added to the OB Gyn report for the new patient but it is displayed on the screen until itis overwritten by new data To remove the fetal heart rate and all other data when you have finished an exam press lt CTRL gt P while in M mode Vascular Analysis 7 The pulsatility index may give erroneous results if calculated after changing frequency scaling To ensure correct results do not change frequency scali
522. yboard Activity Timeout not set to 0 00 off 1 Set keyboard Activ ity Timeout to 00 23 X and 24 X UM 4CAD only Image quality problems N A No solution at present existing CAD Modules will be replaced with modified CAD units 24 14 for CAD Video drops out com pletely may or may not recover by pressing STOP or other soft keys Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Rapidly pressing PAUSE and PLAY when reviewing tape causes lock up S W release 24 15 pro vides recovery by pressing STOP or any other softkey 0 4 05 89 5 Configuration Table 5 9 Software Related Anomalies Cont d Software Release 25 X with Duplex CW Symptom No US info through Duplex CW S H AA S H works OK Fault Isolation System Receiver jumper JR8 on pins 2 and 3 Corrective Action 1 Verify JR8 is on pins 1 and 2 2 Verify cables from Sys Revr to AA1 and AA2 connec tors Penetration approxi mately 1 cm less than 17 X systems Pulse width has been changed to improve resolution No solution at present All levels Line noise on dedi cated line Line enclosed in grounded conduit standard electrical procedure Request a Single Branch Circuit 20 Amp 120 Vac with an Isolated Insulated Ground Wire New system or System Controller PCB System won t boot Switches on front of PCB stuck Note switch settings Free them by spraying cont
523. ystem is operating in normal line density Pressing CTRL gt A again will not erase the annotation To erase the annotation reselect the scanhead If you press XDRSAV or lt CTRL gt U while the erroneous annotation is displayed you will not be able to erase it M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth and zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation of the ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling at the end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update cycle Alternately you can freeze and unfreeze the image to restore normal operation Doppler Acquisition Under certain conditions with the Duplex CW scanhead selected the Doppler spectra may disappear when switching between CW and Pulsed Doppler If this occurs press RETRN and then reselect the desired mode to clear Upon returning from a framegrab operation the Doppler M line and sample volume remote controls may appear non functional Reselect the LCLRMT softkey to enable movement of the Doppler M line and sample volume co
524. ze using the DEPTH control panning in a frozen image or selecting different focal zones This happens because the Pan Zone cursor is moved when you use the trackball even if the Pan Zone cursor is not displayed To prevent this situation enable the Pan Zone cursor by pressing PAN ZONE and position the cursor at the desired target area When the Mercury scanhead is selected but is not coupled to a patient artifacts may be visible in the image particularly at high output power settings This is caused by acoustic energy being reflected inside the scanhead when there is no tissue present to absorb the energy and does not indicate a defective scanhead These artifacts are not present when the scanhead is coupled to a patient UM4 06 22 Ultramark 4 Field Service Manual Operating Notes 6 M mode Acquisition Changing the depth in M mode with 2D Update enabled may cause discontinuities in the 2D updated image If depth or zoom are adjusted while scrolling is active in linear or sector M mode the TGC graphics are removed Freezing the image restores the TGC graphics The reduced 2 D image on the M Mode display may stop updating following operation ofthe ZOOM control To restore normal operation in this situation exit M Mode to the M Line display and then return to M Mode When using the CW Duplex scanhead the M mode or Doppler display may stop scrolling atthe end of a 2 D update cycle Normal operation resumes at the end of the next 2 D update

Ultramark 4 Ultrasound System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents